You are on page 1of 746

CS 3050ci CS 3550ci CS 4550ci CS 5550ci

SERVICE MANUAL
Published in March 2011 2LCSM941 Rev. 1

CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.

ATTENTION IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES. Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.

Notation of products in the manual For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4 and black and white modes. TASKalfa 3050ci: 30 ppm model TASKalfa 3550ci: 35 ppm model TASKalfa 4550ci: 45 ppm model TASKalfa 5550ci: 55 ppm model

Revision history
Revision 1 Date March 14, 2011 Replaced pages Safety precautions, 1-2-12 Remarks

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is

shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING • Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current. ..................................................................................................... • Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................. • Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This may cause fire. ................................................................................................................................... • Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ................................................. • Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .............................................................. • Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. ..................................................................................................................................................... • Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................

2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................ • Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures. .......................................................................................................................................... • Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................ • Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ...................................................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............... • Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ................................................................. • Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ............................................................................................................................... • Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................

CAUTION • Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................. • Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................

• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................... • Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................ • Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................... • After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ....................................................................................................... • Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ...................................... · Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely. · Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents. · Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on. · Always wash hands afterwards. • Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. ........................................................................................................................... • Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately. ...................................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous
WARNING • Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................ • Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur. ........................................................................................................................................

This page is intentionally left blank.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-6 (1) Machine ............................................................................................................................ 1-1-6 (2) Option ............................................................................................................................... 1-1-8 (3) Operation panel ................................................................................................................ 1-1-9 1-1-3 Machine cross section ......................................................................................................... 1-1-10

1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment......................................................................................................... 1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation..................................................................................................... 1-2-2 (1) Installation procedure ....................................................................................................... 1-2-2 (2) Setting initial copy modes............................................................................................... 1-2-18

1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item ......................................................................................... 1-3-1 (2) Maintenance modes item list ............................................................................................ 1-3-2 (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items ...................................................................... 1-3-10

1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection ........................................................................................................ 1-4-1 (1) Paper misfeed indication .................................................................................................. 1-4-1 (2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................... 1-4-2 1-4-2 Self-diagnostic function ....................................................................................................... 1-4-26 (1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................. 1-4-26 (2) Self diagnostic codes...................................................................................................... 1-4-27 1-4-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................... 1-4-87 (1) No image appears (entirely white).................................................................................. 1-4-88 (2) No image appears (entirely black).................................................................................. 1-4-89 (3) Image is too light. ........................................................................................................... 1-4-90 (4) The background is colored. ............................................................................................ 1-4-90 (5) White streaks are printed vertically................................................................................. 1-4-91 (6) Black streaks are printed vertically. ................................................................................ 1-4-91 (7) Streaks are printed horizontally. ..................................................................................... 1-4-91 (8) One side of the print image is darker than the other. ..................................................... 1-4-92 (9) Spots are printed. ........................................................................................................... 1-4-92 (10) Image is blurred.............................................................................................................. 1-4-92 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. .................. 1-4-93 (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. .................. 1-4-93 (13) Paper is wrinkled. ........................................................................................................... 1-4-93 (14) Offset occurs. ................................................................................................................. 1-4-94 (15) Part of image is missing. ................................................................................................ 1-4-94 (16) Fusing is loose................................................................................................................ 1-4-94 (17) Image is out of focus. ..................................................................................................... 1-4-95 (18) Image center does not align with the original center. ..................................................... 1-4-95 1-4-4 Electric problems ................................................................................................................. 1-4-96 1-4-5 Mechanical problems......................................................................................................... 1-4-104 1-4-6 Send error code ................................................................................................................. 1-4-106 (1) Scan to SMB error codes ............................................................................................. 1-4-106 (2) Scan to FTP error codes .............................................................................................. 1-4-107

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Scan to E-mail error codes ........................................................................................... 1-4-108 1-4-7 Error codes ........................................................................................................................ 1-4-109 (1) Error code..................................................................................................................... 1-4-109 (2) Table of general classification ...................................................................................... 1-4-110 (2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B ................................................... 1-4-112 (2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit ............................................... 1-4-112 (2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error............................................. 1-4-112 (2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error .................................................. 1-4-112 (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission......................................................... 1-4-113 (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception .............................................................. 1-4-114 (2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ...................................................... 1-4-115 (2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception............................................................ 1-4-115

1-5 Assembly and disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1 (1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1 (2) Drum................................................................................................................................. 1-5-1 (3) Toner ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1 (4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container ......................................................... 1-5-2 1-5-2 Paper feed section................................................................................................................. 1-5-3 (1) Detaching and refitting the primary feed unit.................................................................... 1-5-3 (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation pulley. [30 ppm model / 35 ppm model] ...................................................................................... 1-5-7 (3) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley and separation pulley. [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model] ..................................................................................... 1-5-10 (4) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit ....................................................... 1-5-11 (5) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley ...................................................................................................... 1-5-14 1-5-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-19 (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ..................................................................... 1-5-19 (2) Detaching and refitting the ISU....................................................................................... 1-5-22 (3) Detaching and refitting the LSU...................................................................................... 1-5-25 (4) Color registration adjustment.......................................................................................... 1-5-31 1-5-4 Image formation section ...................................................................................................... 1-5-34 (1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit.............................................................................. 1-5-34 (2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit ............................................... 1-5-36 (3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit................................................................. 1-5-38 1-5-5 Transfer section ................................................................................................................... 1-5-39 (1) Detaching and refitting the conveying unit...................................................................... 1-5-39 (2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit................................................................... 1-5-41 (3) Detaching and reffiting the transfer roller ....................................................................... 1-5-43 1-5-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 1-5-45 (1) Detaching and reffiting the fuser unit.............................................................................. 1-5-45 (2) Detaching and reffiting Fuser IH unit .............................................................................. 1-5-47 1-5-7 PWBs................................................................................................................................... 1-5-49 (1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB............................................................................ 1-5-49 (2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB......................................................................... 1-5-54 (3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB.............................................................. 1-5-56 (4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 ............................................................. 1-5-59 (5) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 ............................................................. 1-5-60 (6) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB .................................................................... 1-5-61 (7) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB....................................................................... 1-5-65

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-8 Drive section ........................................................................................................................ 1-5-70 (1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY................... 1-5-70 (2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit ..................................................................... 1-5-73 (3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit, transfer drive unit and feed drive unit......... 1-5-74 (4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2.................................................................. 1-5-80 1-5-9 Others .................................................................................................................................. 1-5-81 (1) Detaching the eject filter ................................................................................................. 1-5-81 (2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter............................................................................. 1-5-82 (3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter................................................................................ 1-5-83 (4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filter.................................................................. 1-5-84 (5) Detaching and refitting the DU filter................................................................................ 1-5-85 (6) Detaching and refitting the left filter ................................................................................ 1-5-86 (7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit ....................................................................... 1-5-87 (8) Direction of installing the principal fan motors ................................................................ 1-5-89

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement
1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware ......................................................................................................... 1-6-1 1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement..................................................................................... 1-6-2 1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement ................................................................................. 1-6-4

2-1 Mechanical Construction
2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section ............................................................................................... 2-1-1 (1) Cassette paper feed section............................................................................................. 2-1-1 (2) MP tray paper feed section............................................................................................... 2-1-3 (3) Paper conveying section .................................................................................................. 2-1-5 2-1-2 Drum section ......................................................................................................................... 2-1-8 2-1-3 Developer section ................................................................................................................ 2-1-10 2-1-4 Optical section ..................................................................................................................... 2-1-12 (1) Image scanner section ................................................................................................... 2-1-12 (2) Laser scanner section .................................................................................................... 2-1-14 2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section ................................................................................................ 2-1-16 (1) Intermediate transfer unit section ................................................................................... 2-1-16 (2) Secondary transfer roller section.................................................................................... 2-1-18 2-1-6 Fuser section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-20 2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section ........................................................................................................ 2-1-22 2-1-8 Duplex conveying section .................................................................................................... 2-1-24

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1 (1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1 (2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-4 (3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-6 (4) Fan motors ....................................................................................................................... 2-2-8 (5) Others............................................................................................................................. 2-2-10

2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Main PWB.............................................................................................................................. 2-3-1 2-3-2 Engine PWB ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-12 2-3-3 Power source PWB ............................................................................................................. 2-3-38 2-3-4 ISC PWB ............................................................................................................................. 2-3-46 2-3-5 Operation PWB 1................................................................................................................. 2-3-51 2-3-6 Front PWB ........................................................................................................................... 2-3-56 2-3-7 Feed PWB 1 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-65

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-8 Feed PWB 2 ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-75 2-3-9 Relay PWB .......................................................................................................................... 2-3-81 2-3-10 Motor control PWB .............................................................................................................. 2-3-87 2-3-11 LSU relay PWB.................................................................................................................... 2-3-91

2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1 (1) Maintenance kits............................................................................................................... 2-4-1 (2) Repetitive defects gauge .................................................................................................. 2-4-3 (3) Firmware environment commands ................................................................................... 2-4-4 (4) Chart of image adjustment procedures .......................................................................... 2-4-11 (5) Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................... 2-4-13

INSTALLATION GUIDE
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR PAPER FEEDER LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER 1000-SHEETS FINISHER ATTACHMENT KIT HOLE PUNCH UNIT FAX System

B5. B5R. Envelope C4. Envelope #9 (Commercial #9). Oficio II. Recycled. 16K. Custom 1 to 8 A3. LetterR. B6R. Recycled. Envelope C5. 8K. Labels. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4). Envelope DL. Letterhead. A4. Oficio II. ExecutiveR. Legal. Legal. Ledger. 8K. Preprinted. A5R. Folio. A4. Book. Letter. 1% increments Auto mode : Preset Zoom A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 : 30 ppm : 30 ppm : 21 ppm : 21 ppm : 15 ppm : 15 ppm : 18 ppm : 18 ppm : 30 ppm : 30 ppm : 30 ppm : 21 ppm : 21 ppm : 15 ppm : 15 ppm : 18 ppm : 18 ppm : 30 ppm A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 : 35 ppm : 35 ppm : 24 ppm : 24 ppm : 17 ppm : 17 ppm : 21 ppm : 21 ppm : 35 ppm : 35 ppm : 35 ppm : 24 ppm : 24 ppm : 17 ppm : 17 ppm : 21 ppm : 21 ppm : 35 ppm A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 : 45 ppm : 45 ppm : 24 ppm : 24 ppm : 22 ppm : 22 ppm : 27 ppm : 21 ppm : 45 ppm : 45 ppm : 45 ppm : 24 ppm : 24 ppm : 22 ppm : 22 ppm : 27 ppm : 21 ppm : 45 ppm A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 A4 Letter A4R LetterR A3 Ledger B4 Legal B5 : 55 ppm : 55 ppm : 24 ppm : 24 ppm : 27 ppm : 27 ppm : 33 ppm : 21 ppm : 55 ppm : 50 ppm : 50 ppm : 24 ppm : 24 ppm : 25 ppm : 25 ppm : 30 ppm : 21 ppm : 50 ppm Cassette Paper size MP tray Zoom level B/W Copying speed Color 1-1-1 . Return postcard. Statement. Color (Colour). Coated. Youkei 4. Prepunched. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). High Quality. Envelope. Vellum. Thick. 16KR. B5. Prepunched. 12 × 18". Folio. Letter. Color (Colour). B5R. High Quality. 16KR A3. 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger) Fixed 60 to 220 g/m2 60 to 300 g/m2 60 to 256 g/m2 60 to 300 g/m2 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm Plain. Rough. ISO B5. B4. Preprinted. Vellum. 12 × 18". LetterR. A6R. B4. Bond. Custom Manual mode : 25 to 400%. Thick. Cardstock. Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as simplex) Plain. Rough. A4R. A4R. 16K.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-1-1 Specifications 1-1 Specifications Machine Item Type Printing method Originals Original feed system Paper weight Cassette MP tray Cassette Paper type MP tray Specifications 30 ppm Desktop Electrophotography by semiconductor laser. Ledger. Envelope Monarch. Letterhead. A5R. Bond. Statement. Transparency (OHP film). Youkei 2. tandem drum system Sheet. Postcards.

Separation electrode Drum: Counter blade. feed from cassette) Warm-up time (22 °C/71.6 °F.7 s or less 7.5 s or less 5. Cleaning roller Transfer belt: Fur brush Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED) Belt fusing Heat source: IH Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat PowerPC 750CL/600 MHz PowerPC 750GL/800 MHz 2048 MB 2048 MB 160 GB or more 320 GB (160 GB x 2) or more Transfer system Separation system Cleaning system Charge erasing system Fusing system CPU Main memory Standard Maximum Hard Disk 1-1-2 .4 s or less 30 s or less 20 s or less 30 s or less Item First copy time (A4.3 s or less 25 s or less 15 s or less 20 s or less 45 ppm 4. more than Letter/A4) 250 sheets (80 g/m2) with inner 30 sheets (80 g/m2) job separator with right 100 sheets (80 g/m2) job separator Continuous copying Light source Scanning system Photoconductor Image write system Charging system Developing system 1 to 999 sheets LED Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor a-Si (drum diameter 30 mm) Semiconductor laser Charger roller Touch down developing system Developer: 2-component Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container Primary: Transfer belt Secondary: Transfer roller Small diameter separation. 60% RH) Paper capacity 550 sheets (64 g/m2) 500 sheets (80 g/m2) 100 sheets (80 g/m2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Specifications 30 ppm B/W Color Power on Low Power Sleep Cassette MP tray Top tray Output tray capacity 6.0 s or less 25 s or less 15 s or less 20 s or less 35 ppm 5.8 s or less 30 s or less 20 s or less 30 s or less 55 ppm 4.1 s or less 5.1 s or less 8. A4/Letter or less) 50 sheets (80 g/m2.

Side paper feeder*. 1000-sheet finisher. Mailbox. Paper feeder.202 ft or less 1. Right job separator. Punch unit. Expansion memory.500 m/8.240 V AC. Center-folding unit. more than 7. Side large capacity feeder*. 60 Hz. SMT paper feeder*. Large capacity feeder.5 °C/50 to 90. more than 12 A 220 . Fax kit.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Specifications 30 ppm Standard Interface Option Resolution Humidity Altitude Brightness Dimensions (W × D × H) machine only with paper feeder 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm Item USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed) USB Port: 2 (Full-Speed USB) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) Fax slot: 2 Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) 600 × 600 dpi 15 to 80% RH 2.5 °F Operating environment Space required (W × D) Weight Power source Options 1-1-3 .6 lb (with toner container) 120 V AC. Printed document guard kit and document table *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Temperature 10 to 32. Original cover. Side feeder. Internet fax kit (A). Key card. 4000-sheet finisher. Key counter. Inner job separator. 50/60 Hz.2 A Document processor.500 lux or less 668 × 767 × 747 mm 26 5/16 × 30 3/16 × 29 3/8” 668 × 767 × 1053 mm 26 5/16 × 30 3/16 × 41 7/16” 977 × 767 mm (using MP tray) 38 7/16 × 30 3/16” (using MP tray) 140 kg / 308. Data security kit.

4 s or less 6. Windows 7.2 s or less Same as copying speed.5 s or less 600 x 600 dpi Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later).8 s or less 45 ppm 5. feed from cassette) Resolution Operating system B/W Color Specifications 30 ppm 7. Apple Macintosh OS 10. Windows XP.x USB interface connector: 1 (USB Hi-speed) Network interface: 1 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) PRESCRIBE 35 ppm 6.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Printer Item Printing speed First print time (A4. Windows Server 2008. Windows Server 2003.2 s or less 7.3 s or less 9. Windows Vista.9 s or less 6.6 s or less 55 ppm 4. Interface Page description language 1-1-4 .

Windows Server 2008 *2 Available operating system: Windows Vista. Windows Server 2003. Windows Vista. XPS. FTP over SSL E-mail transmission SNTP Scan to E-mail TWAIN scan*1 WIA scan*2 Transmission system *1 Available operating system: Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later). 200 × 400 dpi TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression). Windows XP. 1-1-5 . 200 ×100 dpi. JPEG. Windows Server 2008 NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice. 400 dpi. Windows 7. Windows 7. PDF (high compression) B/W : 70 images/min Color: 70 images/min B/W : 100 images/min Color: 80 images/min B/W : 80 images/min Color: 80 images/min B/W : 140 images/min Color: 110 images/min Simplex Duplex Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) TCP/IP PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP. 300 dpi. 200 dpi.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Scanner Item System requirements Resolution File format Scanning speed (A4 landscape. PDF (MMR/JPEG compression). Image quality: Text/Photo original) Interface Network protocol Specifications 30 ppm 35 ppm 45 ppm 55 ppm CPU: 600 Mhz or higher RAM: 128 MB or more 600 dpi. 300 dpi.

Toner container Y 7. Platen (Contact glass) 8. Network interface connector 18.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-1-2 Parts names (1) Machine 1 7 8 17 18 19 20 3 4 5 6 2 9 10 16 11 Figure 1-1-1 12 13 14 15 1. Front cover 16. Indicators 11. Toner container release lever 17. Clip holder 9. Option interface 1-1-6 . Toner container C 6. USB port 19. Original size indicator plate 2. Waste toner tray 15. Waste toner box 14. Toner container K 4. Handles 12. Operation panel 10. Release button 13. Slit glass 3. USB interface connector 20. Toner container M 5.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 23 28 26 27 28 21 22 24 30 40 31 32 33 34 29 35 36 37 38 25 Figure 1-1-2 39 21. Guide lock lever 28. Handle 40. Main power switch 1-1-7 . Document processor (option) 23. Paper conveying cover 39. Paper conveying unit lever 32. Cassettes 26. USB port 25. Paper conveying cover lever 38. Paper conveying unit 31. Paper length guide 27. Paper width adjusting tab 30. Original cover 24. Duplex cover 34. MP (Multi-Purpose) tray 37. Paper width guide 29. Duplex cover lever 33. Inner tray 22. MP support Tray 36. MP paper width guide 35.

Side large capacity feeder 10. Machine 2. SMT paper feeder 8. Large capacity feeder 6. 4000-sheet finisher 12. Paper feeder 5.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Option 3 13 10 2 6 11 1 7 8 4 12 5. 9 Figure 1-1-3 1. Mailbox 1-1-8 . Side paper feeder 9. Center folding unit 13. Document processor (reversed DP) 4. Document processor (dual scan DP) 3. 1000-sheet finisher 11. Side feeder 7.

Reset key 10. Copy key 4. Authentication/Logout key 29.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Operation panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Figure 1-1-4 1. Program key 2. Enter key 24. Stop key 27. Status/Job cancel key 3. Counter key 13. Numeric keys 23. Full color key 19. Interrupt key 28. Memory indicator 22. Processing indicator 20. System menu key 11. Black and White key 21. Help key 6. Main power indicator 14. Auto color key 7. Document box key 16. Send key 17. Clear key 9. Power key 12. FAX key* 18. search key 8. Application key 15. Energy saver key *: Option 1-1-9 . Attention indicator 25. Accessibility display key 5. Start key 26. Quick no.

Eject/Feed shift sections 19. Developer unit C 13. Optical section 5. Developer unit Y 14. Secondary transfer/Separation sections 17. Fuser section 18.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-1-3 Machine cross section 4 18 14 17 13 9 12 8 11 7 10 6 19 16 3 15 5 2 1 Paper Path Figure 1-1-5 1. Drum unit Y 10. Developer unit M 12. Paper conveying section 4. Drum unit M 8. Cassette paper feed section 2. Drum unit K 7. MP tray paper feed section 3. Laser scanner unit 6. Drum unit C 9. Developer unit K 11. Primary transfer section 16. Toner container section 1-1-10 15. Duplex section .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-2-1 Installation environment 1-2 Installation 1. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine. and cool or hot. 7. Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine. SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.5°C/50 to 90. Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor. Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Power supply: 120 V AC. an abrupt change in the environmental temperature. direct air.2 A 4. NOx. Temperature: 10 to 32. such as mercury. 6. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams. Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.0 A 220 . Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%/60 Hz ± 2% 5.240 V AC. inorganic gasses. Select a well-ventilated location. acidic of alkaline vapors.5°F 2. 12. Humidity: 15 to 80% RH 3. Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°). Machine front : 100 cm/39 3/8" Machine rear : 10 cm/ 3 15/16" Machine right : 35 cm/13 3/4" Machine left : 30 cm/11 13/16" Machine top : 40 cm/15 3/4" 10cm/3 15/16" Top 40cm/15 3/4" 30cm/11 13/16" 35cm/13 3/4" 100cm/39 3/8" Figure 1-2-1 1-2-1 .

Unlocking the developer waste 1-2-2 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation (1) Installation procedure Start Unpacking Installing the waste toner box Replacing operation panel sheet (230 V specifications only) Removing the eject spacer Removing the tapes Install the original platen or DP (option) Installing the paper feeder (option) Install other optional devices Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame Install the cassette heater (option) Release of lift plate stopper Connect the power cord Loading paper Adjusting the image Installing the toner containers Completion of the machine installation.

Carrying handle Carrying handle Handhold Carrying handle Figure 1-2-2 1-2-3 . and move with carrying handles and the handhold.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Moving the machine When moving the machine. pull out three carrying handles.

Eject spacer 20. 1-2-4 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Unpacking 2 12 18 17 22 22 22 19. Hinge joints 3 Place the machine on a level surface. Inner case 4. Machine cover 13. Bottom front left pad 9. Machine 2. Document tray 14. Bottom rear left pad 11. Paper size plate 18. Paper media plate 19. Outer case 3. Top pad 5. Skid 6. Waste toner box 21. Bottom front right pad 10. Barcode label 22.20 15 16 14 21 1 22 22 22 13 10 8 7 11 4 6 9 5 Figure 1-2-3 1. Operation guide 17. Bottom rear right pad 12. Bottom pad 8. Plastic bag 16. Bottom sheet 7. Power cord 15.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Removing the eject spacer 1. Remove two tapes and then remove the A4 paper. Silica gel Eject spacer Figure 1-2-4 Removing the tapes 1. Remove the eject spacer and silica gel from the eject section. Tape Tape A3 papers Tape Tape A4 paper Tape Figure 1-2-5 1-2-5 . Remove three tapes and then remove the A3 paper. 2.

2. 1-2-6 . Remove six tapes. Verify levelness at the four corners of the contact glass using a level gauge. and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness. Tape Tape Tape Tape Tapes Figure 1-2-6 Installing the paper feeder (option) 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 3. Install the optional paper feeder or large capacity feeder as necessary.

Mount the scanner lock cover in the reverse manner to restore in the original location.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame 1. 2. Scanner lock cover [Locked] [Released] Figure 1-2-7 1-2-7 . Remove the scanner lock cover.

Remove the lift plate stopper from each cassette and attach it to the storage location. 2. When moving the machine. attach the lift plate in original position. Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length guide and move the guide to fit the length of the paper.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Release of lift plate stopper 1. Lift plate stopper Cassette Figure 1-2-8 Loading paper 1. Paper length guide Figure 1-2-9 1-2-8 . Pull cassette 1 and 2 out.

Press the guide lock lever to release the lock. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and move the paper width guides to fit the paper. be sure that it is not curled or folded. Guide lock lever Paper width adjusting tab paper width guides Figure 1-2-10 4. *: Before loading the paper. 3. Align the paper flush against the right side of the cassette.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2. *: Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicated. Paper Figure 1-2-11 1-2-9 .

Fold the paper size plate and the paper media plate in two and insert. Gently push the cassette back in.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. 7. Paper media plate Paper size plate Figure 1-2-13 1-2-10 . Guide lock lever Figure 1-2-12 6. Press the guide lock lever to lock.

K M C Y Toner container Toner container Release lever Figure 1-2-15 1-2-11 . Hold the toner container horizontally and shake from side to side about 3 times. Hold the toner container vertically and hit the upper part about 3 times.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Installing the toner containers 1. 2. and hit in the same way. Turn down the toner container release levers to lock the four color toner containers. 3. Open the front cover. Toner container Toner container Figure 1-2-14 4. 5. Invert the toner container so that the other end is up. Install four color toner containers.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC-1

Unlocking the developer waste 1. Press the fixing pin in four positions and rotate. *: Fully insert the fixing pin keeping the line vertical and rotate by 90 degrees clockwise. Make sure that the central line is horizontal.

[State of lock] 1 2

[State of release]

Fixing pin

Fixing pin

Figure 1-2-16 2. Remove a screw and slide the lever right wards. 3. Fix the lever using the screw previously removed at the right screw hole and unlock the developer waste exit. *: If the machine is moved after installation, lock the developer waste. *: Failure to perform locking could result in leakage of developing power.

[Locked] 2

[Released] 3 1 Screw

Lever

Screw
Figure 1-2-17

Lever

1-2-12

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

Installing the waste toner box 1. Push the release button and pull out the waste toner tray. 2. Open the lid and install the waste toner box. 3. Push the waste toner tray back in. *: The waste toner tray cannot be inserted in unless the developer waste lock is released. 4. Close the front cover.

Waste toner tray

2 1 Release button

Lid

Waste toner box

Figure 1-2-18

1-2-13

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

Replacing operation panel sheet (230 V specifications only) 1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver and slide the operation panel covers A and B to remove them.

Operation panel cover B

Operation panel cover A
Figure 1-2-19

2. Remove the clear panel.

Clear panel

Figure 1-2-20

1-2-14

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

3. Remove the operation panel sheet. 4. Replace the operation panel sheet of the corresponding language. 5. Refit the clear panel. 6. Refit the operation panel covers A and B.

Operation panel sheet

Figure 1-2-21

Install the original platen or DP (option) 1. Install optional original platen or DP.

Install other optional devices 1. Install the optional devices (job separator, document finisher and/or fax kit etc.) as necessary.

Install the cassette heater (option) 1. Install the optional cassette heater as necessary.

Connect the power cord 1. Connect the power cord to the power cord connector on rear lower of the machine. 2. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.

1-2-15

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

Adjusting the image 1. Turn the main power switch on. 2. Check the messages on the operation panel After completion of warming up, in case to display "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." on the operation panel, follow the step 3. (Performing Drum Refresh) In case to display “Warning for low temperature. Adjust the room temperature.” on the operation panel, install the machine in the other location this message won’t be shown. Installing the machine in a low temperature environment could cause image quality problems. In case to have no display, follow the step 4. (Performing Color adjustment) 3. Performing drum refresh (see the operation guide) Press the System menu key. Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Drum Refresh]. Press [Execute] to perform drum refresh. When completed, press [OK]. 4. Performing Color adjustment (see the operation guide) Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Calibration]. Press [Execute] to perform Color Calibration. When completed, press [OK]. 5. Performing color registration (see the operation guide) Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of [Color Registration]. Perform adjustments automatically or manually. Auto correction Press [Next] in [Auto]. Press [Start]. A chart is printed. Set the output chart for adjustment as the original. Press [Start] to perform Color registration. When completed, press [OK]. Manual correction Press [Next] in [Manual]. Press [Print] of [Chart]. A chart is printed. Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. Press [Next] of [Registration] and [Change]. Enter the registration values for each chart. Press [Start] to perform Color registration. When completed, press [OK]. 6. Adjusting the halftone automatically (see page 1-3-151) Load the cassette with multiple sheets of A4 or Letter paper. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. Enter 410 using the numeric keys and press the start key. Press [Normal Mode] and then press the start key. A test patterns 1, 2 and 3 are outputted. Place the output test pattern 1 as the original. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 1 and set them. Press the start key. Adjustment is made. Place the output test pattern 2 as the original. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them. Press the start key. Adjustment is made. Place the output test pattern 3 as the original. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them. Press the start key. Adjustment is made. [Finish] is displayed in [Phase] when normally completed. Press the stop key twice to exit.

1-2-16

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 7. Make test copies. If image quality is unsatisfactory after test copying, execute Color Calibration, then retry U410-Adjusting the halftone automatically. 8. Setting the delivery date (see page 1-3-137) Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key. Select [Today]. Press the start key. The delivery date is set. Press the stop key to exit. 9. Output status report Use the numeric keys to enter 000 and press the start key. Select [Maintenance]. Press the start key. A status report is output. Press the stop key to exit. 10. Turn the main power switch off and on. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

Completion of the machine installation

1-2-17

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

(2) Setting initial copy modes
Factory settings are as follows: Maintenance item No. U253 U260 U276 U284 U285 U323 U325 U326 U327 U343

Contents Switching between double and single counts Selecting the timing for copy counting Setting the copy count mode Setting 2 color copy mode Setting service status page Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning Setting the paper interval Setting the black line cleaning indication Setting the cassette heater control Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode

Factory setting DBL(A3/Ledger) Eject Mode0 Off On On On/1 On/8 Off Off

1-2-18

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

1-3-1 Maintenance mode
1-3 Maintenance Mode

The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) Executing a maintenance item

Start

Enter “10871087” using the numeric keys.

Maintenance mode is entered.

Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys.

The maintenance item is selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Yes

Repeat the same maintenance item?

No Yes

Run another maintenance item? No Enter 001 using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys and press the start key. Maintenance mode is exited.

End

1-3-1

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC

(2) Maintenance modes item list
Section General Item No. Content of maintenance item Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0 330/210 0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0 Off/On/On/On On 45ppm 55ppm

U000 Outputting an own-status report U001 Exiting the maintenance mode U002 Setting the factory default data U003 Setting the service telephone number U004 Setting the machine number U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID U019 Displaying the ROM version

Initialization Drive, paper feed and paper conveying system

U021 Memory initializing U024 HDD formatting U030 Checking the operation of the motors U031 Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying U032 Checking the operation of the clutches U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids U034 Adjusting the print start timing LSU Out Top LSU Out Left LSU Out Top B/W LSU Out Top 3/4 U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors U039 Adjusting the magnification U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper Paper Loop Amount Paper Loop Amount B/W Paper Loop Amount 3/4 U052 Setting the fuser motor control Set Loop Sensor Loop Sensor Control Set Loop Sensor Valid

1-3-2

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm

Section Drive, paper feed and paper conveying system

Content of maintenance item

U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Moter1 Moter2 Moter3 Moter4 Moter5 Moter6 Moter1 Half Moter2 Half Moter3 Half Moter1 3/4 Moter2 3/4 Moter3 3/4 U059 Setting fan mode Fan Mode Cooling Mode Mode2 0 0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0 0 125/125/125 112/112/112/75/0 0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0 0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

Optical

U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp U063 Adjusting the shading position U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration U067 Adjusting the scanner center line U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP U070 Adjusting the DP magnification U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U072 Adjusting the DP center line U073 Checking the scanner operation U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern U091 Setting the white line correction

1-3-3

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm

Section Optical

Content of maintenance item

U093 Adjusting the exposure density gradient Text Mixed Other Fax Text Fax Photo U099 Adjusting original size detection 0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0 0/0 0/0 50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/ 49/49/49/150 On 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 1 1429 116 158 3/3/5 0/0/0/-15 On 153 153 153 153 153 140 140 140 140 140 153 153 153 153 153 166 166 166 166 166 123 109 132 115 1333

High voltage

U100 Adjusting main high voltage Adj AC Bias Set AC Auto Adj Set DC Bias Adj DC Bias Set Low Temp Set Charger Freq Chk Current U101 Setting the voltage for the primary transfer Normal Full Normal Half Normal 3/4 Add Color Add Color 2nd Surround Correct U106 Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer Light/Normal1 Normal2/3 Heavy1 Heavy2-5 OHP Bias U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage Belt(A) Belt(B) 86 86 74 74 86 86 97 97

42/42/42/42/42/42/42

1-3-4

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm

Section High voltage

Content of maintenance item

U108 Setting separation shift bias Output Output 3/4 Output B/W Timing U109 Checking the drum type U110 Checking the drum count U111 Checking the drum drive time U117 Checking the drum number U118 Displaying the drum history U119 Setting the drum U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history U124 Checking/clearing the transfer drive time U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing 21/21/21/21/0/21 43/43/43/43 43/43/43/43 -54/-54/10 116/116/116/116 Auto 3/3 -

Developer

U130 Toner installation U131 Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage U132 Replenishing toner forcibly Manual Auto Mode U135 Checking toner motor operation U136 Setting toner near end detection U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine U140 Displaying developer bias Sleeve DC Sleeve AC Mag DC Mag AC Sleeve Freq Sleeve Duty Mag Duty 62/62/62/62/70 159/159/159/ 159/155 130/130/130/ 130/155 101/101/101/ 101/178 37/68 63/43

70/70/70/70/70 155/155/155/ 155/155 155/155/155/ 155/155 178/178/178/ 178/178 68/68 43/43

5276/5344/5276/5276

1-3-5

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 0/0/0/0 Mode1 2 165/1/90/175/165/150/160/50 45ppm 55ppm

Section Developer

Content of maintenance item

U140 Calibration Magnification Type U148 Setting drum refresh mode U150 Checking sensors for toner U156 Setting the toner replenishment level U157 Checking the developer drive time U158 Checking the developer count

Fuser

U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Warm Up Print U163 Resetting the fuser problem data U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count U168 Checking/clearing the fuser drive time U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature

Operation panel and support equipment

U200 Turning all LEDs on U201 Initializing the touch panel U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system U203 Checking DP operation U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Device Message U206 Setting the presence or absence of a coin vender On/Off Config No Coin Action Price U207 Checking the operation panel keys U208 Setting the paper size for the side feeder U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job separator U221 Setting the USB host lock function U222 Setting the IC card type

Off Coin Vender

Off Off 10/10/10/10/100/50/30/50/ 100/50/30/50/100/50/30/50 Letter (Inch)/A4 (Metric) Off Off Other

1-3-6

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm

Section Operation panel and support equipment

Content of maintenance item

U223 Operation panel lock U224 Panel sheet extension U234 Setting punch destination U237 Setting finisher stack quantity U240 Checking the operation of the finisher U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors U244 Checking the DP switches U245 Checking messages U246 Setting the finisher Finisher Booklet U247 Setting the paper feed device

Unlock Inch (Inch)/Europe Metric (Metric) 0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 DBL(A3/Ledger) Eject Mode1 Off On On On/1 On/8 Off 0 1.0 1.0 0/0

Mode setting

U250 Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance counter U252 Setting the destination U253 Switching between double and single counts U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting U265 Setting OEM purchaser code U271 Setting the page count U276 Setting the copy count mode U278 Setting the delivery date U284 Setting 2 color copy mode U285 Setting service status page U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning U325 Setting the paper interval U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication U327 Setting the cassette heater control U332 Setting the size conversion factor Mode Coverage(L) Coverage(M) U340 Setting the applied mode

1-3-7

0/2.0/2.0/2.0/2. Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm Off 0 4.0 2.0/2.0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.0/3.0 0 Table1 0/0/0/0 On 480 Normal On On 60 600 1800 500/500/500/10/300/300/300/300 50 On On 10 45ppm 55ppm Section Mode setting Content of maintenance item U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically U412 Adjusting the uneven density U415 Adjusting the print position automatically U425 Setting the target U429 Setting the offset for the color balance U464 Setting the ID correction operation Permission Time Interval Mode On/Sleep Out AP/NE Leaving Time Driving Time Timing Target Value Print Rate(B/W) Calib U465 Data reference for ID correction U467 Setting the color registration adjustment Color Regist Belt Speed Timing U468 Checking the color registration data U469 Adjusting the color registration 1-3-8 .0/3.0/2.0/2.0/2.0/2.9 2.0/2.

Initial setting 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 55ppm Section Content of maintenance item Image U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation processing U485 Setting the image processing mode U486 Setting color/black and white operation mode Others U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locations U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts U905 Checking counts by optional devices U906 Resetting partial operation control U908 Checking the total counter value U910 Clearing the print coverage data U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes U917 Setting backup data reading/writing U920 Checking the copy counts U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) U928 Checking machine life counts U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP U952 Maintenance mode workflow U964 Checking of log U969 Checking of toner area code U977 Data capture mode U984 Checking the developer unit number U985 Displaying the developer unit history U989 HDD Scandisk U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light U991 Checking the scanner operation count 1000 1/0 Mode2 0/0 - 1-3-9 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

The output status is displayed. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys. Outputs the event log or service status page. 2. Method 1. Display Maintenance User Status Service Status Event Network Status All Output list List of the current settings of the maintenance modes Outputs the user status page Outputs the service status page Outputs the event log Outputs the network status page Outputs the all reports Description 3. Also sends output data to the USB memory. and paper jam and service call occurrences.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items Item No. output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement. specify the paper feed location. Press the start key. A list is output. When A4/Letter paper is available. U000 Outputting an own-status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output. Press the start key. Press the start key. Display Ready Active Complete Error Description List of the current settings of the maintenance modes Outputs the user status page Outputs the service status page Outputs the event log 1-3-10 . 4. Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM. or paper jam or service call occurrences. Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items. a report of this size is output. If not.

Turn the main power switch on. 4. 2. 7. Enter the maintenance item. is displayed. Press the power key on the operation panel. 5. Output will be sent to the USB memory. Press the start key. Select [Text] or [HTML]. Completion Press the stop key. U000 Description Method: Send to the USB memory 1. 6. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 3. Press the start key. 1-3-11 . Display Print USB (Text) USB (HTML) Outputs the report Sends output data to the USB memory (text type) Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type) Output list 8. Select the item to be send. and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off. switch off the main power switch. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.

01.00 (7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX] Figure 1-3-1 Detail of event log No.08.08.01.01 4002.01.000 2010.000.01.27 (8) Paper Jam Log # 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Count.01 4002.01.08.01.01 4002.01 (e) (9) Service Call Log # 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Count.08.01.01.01. 9999999 8888888 7777777 6666666 5555555 4444444 3333333 2222222 1111111 999999 888888 777777 666666 555555 (a) 444444 1 Event Descriprions 0501.01 4002.01.01.01 0501.01.08.01 0501.01.00 01. (11) Unknown toner Log # 5 4 3 2 1 Count.10.08.00 01.01 0501.6000 01.01.01.01 0501. 1111111 999999 888888 777777 666666 555555 444444 1 Service Code 01.01.08.2100 (10) Maintenance Log # Count.08.08.01 0501. 1111111 999999 888888 777777 666666 Item 01.01..01 4002.08.01. U000 Event log Description Event Log MFP (1) Firmware version 2LC_2000.01.01.01.01.01.08.01 4002. (1) (2) (3) (4) Items System version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version Description 1-3-12 .2100 01.01 0501.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.01 4002.6000 01.01 (2) 27/Oct/2010 08:40 (3) (4) (5) (6) [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] (12) Counter Log (f) J0000: 0 J0001: 1 J0002: 11 J0003: 222 J0004: 1 J0005: 1 J0006: 1 J0007: 1 J0008: 1 J0009: 1 J0010: 1 J0012: 999 J0013: 1 J0014: 1 J0015: 1 J0016: 1 J0017: 1 J0018: 1 J0019: 1 J0020: 1 J0021: 1 J0022: 1 J0023: 1 J0024: 1 J0025: 1 J0026: 1 J0027: 1 J0028: 1 J0029: 1 J0030: 1 J0031: 1 J0032: 1 J0033: 1 J0034: 1 J0035: 1 J0036: 1 J0037: 1 J0038: 1 J0039: 1 J0040: 1 J0041: J0042: J0043: J0044: J0045: J0046: J0047: J0048: J0049: J0050: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (g) C0000: 0 (h) T00: 10 C0001: C0002: C0003: C0004: C0005: C0006: C0007: C0008: C0009: C0010: C0011: C0012: C0013: C0014: C0015: C0016: C0017: C0018: C0019: C0020: C0021: C0022: C0023: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 T01: 20 T02: 30 T03: 40 T04: 50 T05: 999 0501.01 (b) (c) (d) 4002.08.01.01.01 0501.4000 01.08.01.01.08.08..4000 01.01.01.2100 01.00 01.08.01.01.01.6000 01.08.01. Item Log Data Nothing.00 01.01.

If the occur. Event Log code (hexadecimal. (a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal) For details on the case of paper jam.1-4-1) (b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal) 00: MP tray 01: Cassette 1 02: Cassette 2 03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder) 04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder) 05: Cassette 5 (side feeder/SMT paper feeder) 06: Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder) 07: Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder) 08 to 09: Reserved (c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal) 00: (Not specified) 01: Monarch 02: Business 03: International DL 04: International C5 05: Executive 06: Letter-R 86: Letter-E 07: Legal 08: A4R 88: A4E 09: B5R 89: B5E 0A: A3 0B: B4 0C: Ledger 0D: A5R 0E: A6 0F: B6 10: Commercial #9 11: Commercial #6 12: ISO B5 13: Custom size 1E: C4 1F: Postcard 20: Reply-paid postcard 21: Oficio II 22: Special 1 23: Special 2 24: A3 wide 25: Ledger wide 26: Full bleed paper (12 x 8) 27: 8K 28: 16K-R A8: 16K-E 32: Statement-R B2: Statement-E 33: Folio 34: Western type 2 35: Western type 4 Description Description 1-3-13 . all of the paper jams are logged. rence of the previous paper jam is less than 16. 5 categories) (a) Cause of a paper jam (b) Paper source (c) Paper size (d) Paper type (e) Paper eject The total page count Remembers 1 to 16 of occurrence. (5) (6) (7) (8) Items Controller BROM version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Paper Jam Log # Count.at the time of the paper jam. the oldest occurrence is removed. (P.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U000 Detail of event log No. refer to Paper Misfeed Detection. When the occurrence excesseds 16.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Items 01: Plain 02: Transparency 03: Preprinted 04: Labels 05: Bond 06: Recycled 07: Vellum 08: Rough 09: Letterhead Description (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal) 0A: Color 0B: Prepunched 0C: Envelope 0D: Cardstock 0E: Coated 0F: 2nd side 10: Media 16 11: High quality 15: Custom 1 16: Custom 2 17: Custom 3 18: Custom 4 19: Custom 5 1A: Custom 6 1B: Custom 7 1C: Custom 8 (8) Paper Jam cont. U000 No. Log Description (e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal) 01: Face down (FD) 02: Face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher face up (FU)/ 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU) 03: 1000-sheet finisher face down (FD) 4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD) 05: Job separator tray 06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU) 07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD) 09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD) 0A: Center-folding unit tray 0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD) 0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU) 15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD) 16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU) 1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD) 20: Mailbox tray 3 (FU) 29: Mailbox tray 4 (FD) 2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU) 33: Mailbox tray 5 (FD) 34: Mailbox tray 5 (FU) 3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD) 3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU) 47: Mailbox tray 7 (FD) 48: Mailbox tray 7 (FU) 04/0D/0E: Reserved 1-3-14 .

6000 01: Self diagnostic error 6000: Self diagnostic error code number Count. all of the occurrences of replacement are logged. If the occurrence of the previous diagnostics error is less than 8. First byte (Replacing item) 01: Toner container Second byte (Type of replacing item) 00: Black 01: Cyan 02: Magenta 03: Yellow First byte (Replacing item) 02: Maintenance kit Second byte (Type of replacing item) 01: MK-8305A/8505A 02: MK-8305B/8505B 03: MK-8305C/8505C (11) Unknown Toner Log # Remembers 1 to 5 of occurrence of unknown toner detection. Item Unknown toner log code (1 byte. If the occurrence of the previous replacement of toner container is less than 8. Item Description (10) Maintenance Log Code of maintenance The total page count at the time of replacing item the replacement of (1 byte. 2 categories) the toner container. 2 categories) First byte 01: Toner container (Fixed) Second byte 00: Black 01: Cyan 02: Magenta 03: Yellow 1-3-15 . U000 No. (9) Items Service Call Log # Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of self diagnostics error. Count. # Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replacement. all of the unknown toner detection are logged. The total page count at the time of the toner empty error with using an unknown toner container. The total page count at the time of the self diagnostics error. Count. all of the diagnostics errors are logged.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Description Service Code Self diagnostic error code (See page 1-4-27) Example: 01. If the occurrence of the previous unknown toner detection is less than 5.

Description All instances including those are not Self diagnostics error 6000 has hapoccurred are displayed. Refer to Paper Jam Log. (f) Paper jam Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location. T: Toner container 00: Black 01: Cyan 02: Magenta 03: Yellow M: Maintenance kit 01: MK-8305A/8505A 02: MK-8305B/8505B 03: MK-8305C/8505C Example: T00: 1 The toner container has been replaced once. 1-3-16 . and replacement of the toner container. self diagnostics errors. Example: C6000: 4 (h) Maintenance item replacing Indicates the log counter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance. U000 No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. pened four times. Description (g) Self diagnostic error Indicates the log counter of self diagnostics errors depending on cause. (12) Items Counter Log Comprised of three log counters including paper jams.

20 / 3333333.183.11 K: 1. Installed (17) Internet FAX Kit (A) .30 .10 / 2222222.10. Installed (11) Document Processor .33 M: 3.40 (22) Copy e-MPS error control Y6 0 / 1111111.40 (24) FAX / 1111111.33 M: 3.44 (8) Local Time Zone (9) Date and Time (10) Time Server (27) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2 (28) Rings (Normal) 3 (29) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3 (30) Rings (TAD) 3 (31) Option DIMM Size 16 MB 1 (6) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX] Figure 1-3-2 1-3-17 .33 / 4.22 / 3. U000 Service status page (1) Description Service Status Page MFP (3) (1) Firmware version 2LC_2000. / 1111111.11 K: 1.33 M: 3.30 / 4444444.20 / 3333333.44 Y: 4. Data Security Kit (E) Software Type I . Print Coverage . / 2222222.44 Y: 4.000 2010. / 4444444. Installed (18) Security Kit (E) . .10 . (20) Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) . Installed (15) Document Guaed (A) . Installed (19) UG-34 .000.27 (2) 27/10/2010 12:00 (4) (5) [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Controller Information Memory status (7) Total Size Time 2. 10. .00 / 2.22 C: 2.11 K: 1. / 3333333.40 (23) Printer / 1111111. Cassette (12) Paper feeder . (21) Total .30 / 4444444. 1000-Finisher (13) Finisher .22 C: 2.10 (25) Period (27/10/2010 . 27/10/2010 12:00 .20 .44 Y: 4. (16) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed . Installed Options .53.0 GB (32) FRPO Status Default Pattern Switch B8 0 Default Font Number C5*1000+C2*100+C3 00000 +01:00 Amsterdam .11 K: 1.10 / 2222222.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Installed (14) Job Separator .13 .22 C: 2.03/11/2010 08:40) (26) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.

27 27/10/2010 12:00 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] Engine Information (33) NVRAM Version (34) Scanner Version (35) FAX Slot1 FAX BOOT Version FAX APL Version FAX IPL Version MAC Address _1F31225_1F31225 2LC_1200.000 2010.001 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D Send Information (37) Date and Time (38) Address 10/10/27 (36) 1/2 (39) (40) (41) 100/100 (42) 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0 (43) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/ (44) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/ F00/U00/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0 (45) (46) (47) (48) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/ 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/ (59) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/ 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/ 00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000/ (60) (61) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ (64) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ (65) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ (66) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ (67) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ (68) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/ (69) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07 (70) XXXXXXXX (71) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (72) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/ 0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/ 0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000010105/ 010A000000/0000000000/003C4C0100/0000000087/A28000363C/8000676B83/0000000000/0000000000/ 0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000005/ 0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/000000024E/ (73) ABCDEFGHIJ/ABCDEFGHIJ/ABCDEFGHIJ/ABCDEFGHIJ/ (62) 2 [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX] Figure 1-3-3 1-3-18 .001.000.001.001.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.089 2LC_5000.001. U000 Service status page (2) Description Service Status Page MFP Firmware version 2LC_2000.10.001 2LC_5100.001 2LC_5200.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) Description Firmware version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Total memory size Local time zone Report output date NTP server name Presence or absence of the document processor Presence or absence of the paper feeder Presence or absence of the finisher Presence or absence of the job separator Presence or absence of the printed document guard kit Presence or absence of the IC card authentication kit Presence or absence of the internet fax kit Presence or absence of the data security kit Presence or absence of the UG-34 Page of relation to the A4/Letter Average coverage for total Average coverage for copy Average coverage for printer Average coverage for fax Cleared date and output date Coverage on the final output page Day/Month/Year hour:minute Installed/Not Installed Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed 1000-sheet finisher/4000-sheet finisher/ Not Installed Installed/Not Installed Installed/Not Installed Installed/Not Installed/Trial Installed/Not Installed Installed/Not Installed Installed/Not Installed Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Supplement Description 1-3-19 . U000 Detail of service status page No.

and (b) and (e) are identical with (c) and (f).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Top margin/Left margin Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/ Left margin integer part/Left margin decimal part/ Page length integer part/Page length decimal part/ Page width integer part/Page width decimal part 1-3-20 . 0 to 15 0 to 15 Description Number of rings before connect. (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) (39) (40) (41) (42) Scanner firmware version Fax firmware version Mac address The last sent date and time Transmission address Destination information Area information Margin settings Margin/Page length/Page width settings This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed.0 to 15 ing to answering machine Optional DIMM size FRPO setting NV RAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (a) Consistency of the present software version and the database _ (underscore): OK * (Asterisk): NG (b) Database version (c) The oldest time stamp of database version (d) Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version _ (underscore): OK * (Asterisk): NG (e) ME firmware version (f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database version Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored. U000 No. (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) Description Fax kit information Number of rings Number of rings before automatic switching Supplement This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed.

U000 No. Single count. Less than 420 mm (length) 2: Legal. Less than 420 mm (length) 2: Legal.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 20) 1-3-21 . (43) (44) Description Life counter (The first line) Life counter (The second line) Supplement Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/ Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Duplex Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/ Transfer belt unit/Developer unit K/ Developer unit C/Developer unit M/ Developer unit Y/Maintenance kit A/ Maintenance kit B 0: OFF/1: Partial lock/2: Full lock U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed 0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit 0: All single counts 1: A3. Single count. 356 mm or less (length) 3: Folio. Less than 330 mm (length) 0: All single counts 1: A3. Single count. Single count. Less than 330 mm (length) Weight settings 0: Light 1: Normal 1 2: Normal 2 3: Normal 3 4: Heavy 1 5: Heavy 2 6: Heavy 3 7: Extra Heavy Fuser settings 0: High 1: Middle 2: Low 3: Vellum Duplex settings 0: Disable 1: Enable Description (45) (46) (47) (48) Panel lock information USB information Paper handling information Color printing double count mode (49) Black and white printing double count mode (50) (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) Billing counting timing Temperature (machine inside) Temperature (machine outside) Relative temperature (machine outside) Absolute temperature (machine outside) Fixed assets number Job end judgment time-out time Job end detection mode Media type attributes 1 to 28 (Not used: 18. 19. Single count. 356 mm or less (length) 3: Folio. Single count.

Method 1. (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69) (70) (71) (72) (73) Description Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information Calibration information RFID information RFID reader/writer version information Color table version Color table 2 version Maintenance information Code conversion A 0 B 1 C 2 D 3 E 4 F 5 G 6 H 7 I 8 J 9 Supplement Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow Description Completion Press the stop key. The normal copy mode is entered. 1-3-22 . Press the start key. Purpose To exit the maintenance mode. U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U000 No.

Setting 1. The setting is set. * : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. and execute initialization using maintenance item U002. Press the start key. Select [Mode1(All)]. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 2. Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine. 4. turn main power switch off then on. 2. When errors occurred. 3. Press the start key. 3. Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport. The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the home position. 1-3-23 . Error codes Codes 0001 0002 0020 0040 U003 Entity error Controller error Engine error Scanner error Description Description Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected. U002 Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel. Press the start key. Method 1. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U004 Setting the machine number Description Sets or displays the machine number. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Description Displays the machine serial number Description If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB Display Machine No. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 3. 2. If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB Display Machine No. Press the start key. Purpose To check or set the machine number. starts. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-24 . Writing of serial No.(Main) Machine No.(Eng) Description Displays the machine serial number of main Displays the machine serial number of engine Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match. Method 1. Select [Execute]. Turn the main power switch off and on. 1. Completion Press the stop key.

Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 – 9. Select [New ID(Reconfirm)]. 4. *. Method: [Initialize] 1. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select [New ID]. Purpose Modify maintenance mode ID for more security. #). ID is initialized. Display New ID New ID(Reconfirm) Initialize Enter a new 8-digit ID Enter a new 8-digit ID (to confirm) Initialize the ID Description Description Setting 1. is displayed. *. The setting is set. * and # are mandatory to contain. Select [Initialize]. U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Description Sets the maintenance mode ID. Press the start key. 5. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. Completion Press the stop key. #). Press the start key. 1-3-25 . 2. Press the start key. 2. Enter a new 8-digit ID on ten keys (0 – 9.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The ROM version are displayed. U019 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. 2.7 resource ROM Framework ROM FMU ROM Weekly Timer ROM Color table 1 (copy) ROM Color table 2 (copy) ROM Color table 1 (printer) ROM Color table 2 (printer) ROM Document processor ROM Document processor booting Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder ROM Paper feeder / Large capacity feeder booting SMT paper feeder /Side feeder ROM SMT paper feeder /Side feeder booting Description Description 1-3-26 .7 Resource Solution Framework FMU Weekly Timer Color Table1(Copy) Color Table2(Copy) Color Table1(Prn) Color Table2(Prn) DP DP Boot PF1 PF1 Boot Side PF Side PF Boot Main ROM Operation ROM Browser ROM Engine ROM Engine booting Scanner ROM Scanner booting RFID ROM IH CPU ROM IH CPU booting Motor CPU ROM Motor CPU booting Optional language ROM PDF1. if the newest version of ROM is installed. Press the start key. Method 1. Purpose To check the part number or to decide. Display Main MMI Browser Engine Engine Boot Scanner Scanner Boot RFID IH CPU IH CPU Boot Motor CPU Motor CPU Boot Dictionary Option Language PDF1. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.

is displayed. 1-3-27 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U019 Display PF2 PF2 Boot DF DF Boot PH PH Boot MT MT Boot BF BF Boot Fax APL1 Fax Boot1 Fax IPL1 Fax APL2 Fax Boot2 Fax IPL2 Description Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder ROM Side paper feeder / Side large capacity feeder booting 1000-sheet finisher / 4000-sheet finisher ROM 1000-sheet finisher / 4000-sheet finisher booting Punch unit ROM Punch unit booting Mailbox ROM Mailbox booting Center-folding unit ROM Center-folding unit booting Fax APL 1 Fax booting 1 Fax IPL 1 Fax APL 2 (dual Fax) Fax booting 2 (dual Fax) Fax IPL 2 (dual Fax) Description Completion Press the stop key.

Method 1. 4. except those pertinent to the type of machine. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 2. Error codes Codes 0001 0002 0020 0040 Entity error Controller error Engine error Scanner error Description Description 1-3-28 . When errors occurred. Press the start key. 3. U021 Memory initializing Description Initializes all settings.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. turn main power switch off then on. service call history and mode setting. Select [Execute]. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting. Press the start key. * : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination. namely each counter. Turn the main power switch off and on. and execute initialization using maintenance item U021. Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default.

the following pre-installed software are removed. 4.7 resource. Select the item. FMU. Turn the main power switch off and on.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. job accounting. Press the start key. Press [Execute]. 2. shortcuts and panel programs When fully formatted. Purpose To initialize the hard disk when replacing the hard disk after shipping. Caution In addition. 1-3-29 . U024 HDD formatting Description Initializes the hard disk. PDF1.). Option language. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk. Display Full Data Full format Data format (the application software are retained) Description Description 3. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. one-touch keys and document box etc. weekly timer Method 1. the following settings are also initialized by initializing the hard disk. 5. address book. System menu (user login administration.

Purpose To check the operation of each motor.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the motor to be operated. Method 1. Display Feed DLP(K) DLP(CMY) Fuser SB(CW) SB(CCW) CMY Release Job Separator Regist Bridge1 Bridge2 Belt Meand Press Release Fuser Release DU1 DU2 Mid Roller Description Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned on Developer motor K (DEVM-K) is turned on Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) is turned on Fuser motor (FUM) is turned on Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterclockwise Color release motor (CRM) is turned on Job eject motor (JEM) is turned on Registration motor (RM) is turned on (45 ppm/55 ppm model only) Bridge conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) is turned on Bridge conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) is turned on Transfer motor (TRM) is turned on Transfer release motor (TRRM) is turned on Fuser release motor (FURM) is turned on Duplex motor 1 (DUM1) is turned on Duplex motor 2 (DUM2) is turned on Middle motor (RM) is turned on (45 ppm/55 ppm model only) Description 4. To stop operation. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The operation starts. 1-3-30 . is displayed. 3. press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. U030 Checking the operation of the motors Description Drives each motor. Press the start key. Press the start key. 2.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. Display MPT Jam Cassette1 Feed Cassette2 Feed Feed2(Feed B) Regist Belt Jam DU1 DU2 Bridge1 Feed Bridge2 Feed Bridge Exit Exit Paper Fuser Feed Feed1(Mid) Exit Job Separator Regist Loop Sensor MP feed sensor (MPFS) Feed sensor 1 (FS1) Feed sensor 2 (FS2) Paper conveying sensor (PCS) Registration sensor (RS) Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS) Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) Bridge eject sensor (BRES) Eject full sensor (EFS) Fuser eject sensor (FUES) Middle sensor (MS) Switchback sensor (SBS) Loop sensor (LPS) Description Completion Press the stop key. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected. 1-3-31 . Purpose To check if the switches and sensors for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1. U031 Description Checking switches and sensors for paper conveying Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch or sensor on the paper path. that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. 2.

Press the start key. U032 Checking the operation of the clutches Description Turns each clutch on. 3. Completion Press the stop key. 4. Select the clutch to be operated. To stop operation. Display Feed1 Feed2 Mid Roller MPT Feed Regist Feed DU1 DU2 Assist1 Assist2 Motor Description Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) is turned on Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) is turned on Middle clutch (MCL)*1 is turned on MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) is turned on Registration clutch (RCL)*1 is turned on Paper conveying clutch (PCCL) is turned on Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1)*1 is turned on Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)*1 is turned on Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1)*2 is turned on Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2*2 is turned on Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned on Description *1: 30 ppm/35 ppm model only. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. is displayed. *2: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only. 1-3-32 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The operation starts. Purpose To check the operation of each clutch. Press the start key. Method 1. press the stop key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid. Select the item to be adjusted. Select the solenoid to be operated. Press the start key. U033 Description Checking the operation of the solenoids Description Turns each solenoid on. Completion Press the stop key. Method 1. U034 Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line. Display LSU Out Top LSU Out Left LSU Out Top B/W LSU Out Top 3/4 Center line adjustment Leading edge registration adjustment in black/white mode Leading edge registration adjustment at 3/4 times of line speed Description Leading edge registration adjustment 1-3-33 . 4. Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Display Pick Up1 Pick Up2 Job Separator ID Clean Bridge Solenoid Motor Description Pickup solenoid 1 (PUSOL1)* is turned on Pickup solenoid 2 (PUSOL2)* is turned on Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) is turned on Bridge solenoid (BRSOL) is turned on Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned on *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only. is displayed. Press the start key. Method 1.z 3. The operation starts.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. press the stop key. To stop operation. Press the start key. 2.

0 (when large size thick paper is used) Duplex mode (second) (when large size paper is used) -3. 4.0 to 3.0 to 3.1 mm 0. 1-3-34 .0 to 3.1 mm 0.1 mm 0. Press the system menu key.0 Paper feed from MP tray -3.1 mm 0. [LSU Out Top] Display MPT(L) Description Paper feed from MP tray (when large size paper is used) Setting range -3.0 (when large size thick paper is used) Cassette(L) Cassette Half(L) Duplex(L) Duplex Half(L) MPT(S) MPT Half(S) Paper feed from cassette (when large size paper is used) -3. 3.0 Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette (when small size paper is used) Cassette Half(S) Duplex(S) Duplex Half(S) Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.0 Duplex mode (second) -3.1 mm 0.0 (when large size thick paper is used) Paper feed from MP tray (when small size paper is used) -3.1 mm 0.0 Paper feed from cassette -3.0 to 3.1 mm 0.0 to 3.1 mm 0.1 mm MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray -3.0 Duplex mode (second) -3. U034 Description Adjustment: Leading edge registration adjustment 1.0 to 3.0 to 3.0 to 3.1 mm 0.0 to 3.0 (when small size thick paper is used) Duplex mode (second) (when small size paper is used) -3.0 to 3.0 (when small size thick paper is used) Large size: 218 mm or more in width of paper.0 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. Select the item to be adjusted. Press the start key to output a test pattern.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.0 (when small size thick paper is used) -3.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.0 to 3. Press the system menu key. 2.

The value is set.0 to 3.0 mm) Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Figure 1-3-4 6. equal to amount of the value which is changed adds also the value of [Small] each item and is pulled.or numeric keys.0 to 3.0 -3.1 mm Description Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette (when small size paper is used) Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) (when small size paper is used) Large size: 218 mm or more in width of paper.0 to 3.0 to 3. 5. U034 [LSU Out Top B/W] [LSU Out Top 3/4] Display MPT(L) Cassette(L) Duplex(L) MPT(S) Description Paper feed from MP tray (when large size paper is used) Paper feed from cassette (when large size paper is used) Duplex mode (second) (when large size paper is used) Paper feed from MP tray (when small size paper is used) Setting range -3. If the image is still incorrect. Leading edge registration (20 ± 1. Remark When changing the setting value of [Large] each item is modified. For output example 2.0 -3.0 to 3.0 -3.0 -3. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.0 to 3. U034 U066 (P. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. decrease the value.1 mm 0.1-3-53) U071 (P. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. For output example 1. Change the setting value using the cursor +/.1 mm 0.0 -3.1 mm 0.0 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1-3-58) 1-3-35 .1 mm 0.1 mm 0. increase the value.

decrease the value.1 mm 0. is displayed.1 mm 0. 3. Change the setting value using the +/.0 -3. For output example 2. increase the value.1 mm 0. Display MPT Cassette1 Cassette2 Cassette3 Cassette4 Cassette5 Cassette6 Cassette7 Duplex Description Paper feed from MP tray Paper feed from cassette 1 Paper feed from cassette 2 Paper feed from optional cassette 3 Paper feed from optional cassette 4 Paper feed from optional cassette 5 Paper feed from optional cassette 6 Duplex mode (second) * Setting range -3.0 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 -3. The value is set. U034 Description Adjustment: Center line adjustment 1.1-3-60) Completion Press the stop key.0 to 3.0 -3.0 -3. Press the start key to output a test pattern.keys or numeric keys.1 mm Paper feed from optional cassette 7* *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only.1-3-54) U072 (P.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.0 -3. 2.1 mm 0. Center line of printing (within ± 2.0 mm) Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Figure 1-3-5 6.0 to 3. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.1 mm 0.0 to 3. U034 U067 (P.0 to 3.0 to 3.1 mm 0.0 to 3.0 -3. For output example 1. Press the system menu key.0 to 3. 5. Select the item to be adjusted. Press the start key. Press the system menu key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 4.0 to 3. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment.0 -3.1 mm 0. If the image is still incorrect.0 -3.1 mm 0. 1-3-36 .0 to 3.

is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. 2. 1-3-37 . Select the item to be set. The value is set. Press the start key. Press the start key. U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper. 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Change the setting value using the +/. Setting 1.keys. Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper. Display Length Width Length Width Description Setting range 330 to 356 mm 200 to 220 mm Initial setting 330 210 Description 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

2) is turned on Eject fan motor 1and 2 (EFM1. Completion Press the stop key. 3. U037 Description Checking the operation of the fan motors Description Drives each fan motor. Display Fuser Cooling DLP Rear LSU Cooling Belt Cooling Exit Paper Exit Cooling Toner Low Volt Exit Rear Cooling IH PWB IH Coil DLP(K) DLP Front Conv Edge Fuser Edge GroupA GroupB LSU fan motor (LSUFM) is turned on Belt fan motor 1and 2 (BLFM1. Select the fan motor to be operated. Method 1. Press the start key. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. To stop operation. Purpose To check the operation of each fan motor. is displayed. 2) is turned on Eject front fan motor (EFFM) is turned on Toner fan motor 1and 2 (TFM1. 1-3-38 . 2) is turned on Fuser front/rear fan motor (FUFFM/FURFM) is turned on Fan motors of group A are turned on Fan motors of group B are turned on B A B B A A A A A A A A Description Coil fan motor 2 (CFM2) is turned on Group B 4. The operation starts. press the stop key. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2) is turned on Power source fan motor (PSFM) is turned on Eject rear fan motor (EFRM) is turned on IH fan motor (IHFM) is turned on Coil fan motor 1 (CFM1) is turned on Developer fan motor 1 (DEVFM1) is turned on Developer fan motor 2 (DEVFM2) is turned on Fuser fan motor 1and 2 (FUFM1.

Press the start key to output a test pattern. 4. 3. Press the start key. U039 Adjusting the magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the printing. 1-3-39 . Press the system menu key. and decreasing it makes the image shorter. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.1 % Adjustment: [Horizon] 1. Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/. The value is set.0 mm Figure 1-3-6 2. Display Horizon Vertical Description Magnification in the main scanning direction Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction Setting range -1 to 1 -1 to 1 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0. Increasing the setting makes the image longer.1-3-51) U070 (P.1 % 0. 250 ± 1. Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.keys or numeric keys. U039 U065 (P. Select the item to be adjusted. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect.1-3-56) Description Method 1. 5. Press the system menu key.

2. Method 1. Display Paper Loop Amount Paper Loop Amount 3/4 Deflection adjustment Deflection adjustment at 3/4 times of line speed Description Paper Loop Amount B/W Deflection adjustment in black and white mode 1-3-40 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 350 ± 1. and decreasing it makes the image shorter.keys or numeric keys. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. Change the setting value using the +/. or if the copy paper is Z-folded. Increasing the setting makes the image longer. The value is set. U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper Description Adjusts the deflection in the paper at the registration roller.4 mm Figure 1-3-7 2. U039 Description Adjustment: [Vertical] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. appears. Press the start key. Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly.

0 mm 1. 2. Press the system menu key. 4. U051 Description Adjustment 1. 3.0 mm 1. Press the system menu key.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1. Select the item to be adjusted.0 mm 1.0 mm MPT Half(L) Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 (when large size thick paper is used) Cassette(L) Cassette Half(L) Duplex(L) Duplex Half(L) MPT(S) MPT Half(S) Paper feed from cassette (when large size paper is used) -30 to 20 Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 (when large size thick paper is used) Duplex mode (second) (when large size paper is used) -30 to 20 Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 (when large size thick paper is used) Paper feed from MP tray (when small size paper is used) -30 to 20 Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 (when small size thick paper is used) -30 to 20 Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette (when small size paper is used) Cassette Half(S) Duplex(S) Duplex Half(S) Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 (when small size thick paper is used) Duplex mode (second) (when small size paper is used) -30 to 20 Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 (when small size thick paper is used) Large size: 218 mm or more in width of paper.[LSU Out Top] [Paper Loop Amount] Display MPT(L) Description Paper feed from MP tray (when large size paper is used) Setting range -30 to 20 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. 1-3-41 .0 mm 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.0 mm 1.

U051 [LSU Out Top B/W] [LSU Out Top 3/4] Display MPT(L) Cassette(L) Duplex(L) MPT(S) Description Paper feed from MP tray (when large size paper is used) Paper feed from cassette (when large size paper is used) Duplex mode (second) (when large size paper is used) Paper feed from MP tray (when small size paper is used) Setting range -30 to 20 -30 to 20 -30 to 20 -30 to 20 -30 to 20 -30 to 20 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-8 6. For output example 2. For output example 1. 1-3-42 . appears. Press the start key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. decrease the value.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The value is set.0 mm 1. the smaller the deflection. the larger the deflection.0 mm 1.0 mm 1. The greater the value.0 mm Description Cassette(S) Paper feed from cassette (when small size paper is used) Duplex(S) Duplex mode (second) (when small size paper is used) Large size: 218 mm or more in width of paper. Completion Press the stop key. increase the value. Change the setting value using the +/.keys or numeric keys.0 mm 1. the smaller the value. 5.0 mm 1.

Press the start key. appears. Press the start key. Enter the sensor data value of supplied sheet DATA1 using the +/. Select On or Off. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To perform when replacing the loop sensor or paper conveying unit. Display No.) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Description Method: [Set Loop Sensor] 1. Press the start key. Enter the sensor data value of supplied sheet DATA2 using the +/. Initial setting: On 2. The setting is set.4 Description Sensor detection On/Off setting at 125 to 250 mm from the top of paper Sensor detection On/Off setting at 250 to 290 mm from the top of paper Sensor detection On/Off setting at 300 to 330 mm from the top of paper Sensor detection On/Off setting at 350 to 370 mm from the top of paper Initial setting Off On On On 3. 2. Select the item. 4. Completion Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The value is set. 3. Method 1. The setting is set. 1-3-43 . Select On or Off. U052 Setting the fuser motor control Description Enters the sensor data values described on the supplied sheet provided when the loop sensor is replaced and performs correction processing for the fuser motor.g.keys. Select [Scanning Board1]. Setting: [Set Loop Sensor Valid] 1.keys. 3 6 4 Setting: [Loop Sensor Control] 1. 5. Select [Scanning Board2]. Display Set Loop Sensor Loop Sensor Control Set Loop Sensor Valid Description Enter the data value for loop sensor Set the loop sensor detection control Sets the presence or absence of the loop sensor How to read the sensor data value (e. 2.1 No.2 No. Select the item.3 No. 2. Press the start key.

Method 1. M. C. registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds at 3/4 times of line speed Adjustment of eject motor. fuser motor. transfer motor. fuser motor. developer motor MCY. transfer motor.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. paper feed motor. bridge conveying motor 1/2. Y speeds at 3/4 times of line speed Adjustment of developer motor K. registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds in black/white mode Adjustment of eject motor. fuser motor. registration motor and transfer cleaning motor speeds Adjustment of eject motor. job eject motor and middle motor speeds at 3/4 times of line speed Moter4 Moter5 Moter6 Moter1 Half Moter2 Half Moter3 Half Moter1 3/4 Moter2 3/4 Moter3 3/4 1-3-44 . job eject motor. C. Y speeds in half speed Adjustment of developer motor K. paper feed motor. the setting need not be changed. Y speeds Adjustment of developer motor K. Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty images occur. 2. middle motor and duplex motor speeds in half speed Adjustment of drum motor K. U053 Description Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors. bridge conveying motor 1/2. middle motor and duplex motor speeds in black/white mode Adjustment of drum motor K. developer motor MCY. Press the start key. Select the item to be adjusted Display Moter1 Moter2 Moter3 Description Adjustment of drum motor K. paper feed motor. M. job eject motor. M. C. bridge conveying motor 1/2. paper feed motor. Purpose Basically. middle motor and duplex motor speeds Drum motor K speed adjustment in black/white mode Adjustment of developer motor K. transfer motor. developer motor MCY and transfer motor speeds in half speed Adjustment of eject motor. bridge conveying motor 1/2.

Select the item to be adjusted. Display SB Fixing Bridge1 Bridge2 Feed Job Separator Mid Roller* DU* Description Eject motor (EM) Fuser motor (FUM) Bridge conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) Bridge conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) Paper feed motor (PFM) Job eject motor (JEM) Middle motor (MM) Duplex motor (DUM) Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial setting *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Setting: [Motor4] 1. Y) Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 Initial setting Description Setting: [Motor2] 1. Display Drum B/W(K) Drum Mono(K) Description Drum motor K (DRM-K) in black/white mode Drum motor K (DRM-K) in monochrome mode Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 Initial setting 1-3-45 . Display Dev(K) Dev(CMY) Trans Belt Regist* Belt Clean Description Developer motor K (DEVM-K) Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) Transfer motor (TRM) Registration motor (RM) Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 0 Initial setting *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Setting: [Motor3] 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. M. Select the item to be adjusted. Y (DRM-C. Select the item to be adjusted. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Drum(K) Drum(CMY) Description Drum motor K (DRM-K) Drum motor C. M. U053 Setting: [Motor1] 1.

Display SB B/W Fixing B/W Bridge1 B/W Bridge2 B/W Feed B/W Description Eject motor (EM) in black/white mode Fuser motor (FUM) in black/white mode Bridge conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) in black/white mode Bridge conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) in black/white mode Paper feed motor (PFM) in black/white mode Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial setting Job Separator B/W Job eject motor (JEM) in black/white mode Mid Roller B/W* DU B/W* Duplex motor (DUM) in black/white mode Middle motor (MM) in black/white mode -500 to 500 -500 to 500 *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Setting: [Motor1 Half] 1. Display Dev B/W(K) Trans Belt B/W Regist B/W* Belt Clean B/W Description Developer motor K (DEVM-K) in black/white mode Transfer motor (TRM) in black/white mode Registration motor (RM) in black/white mode Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) in black/white mode Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 Initial setting Description *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Setting: [Motor6] 1. Y (DRM-C. Display Drum(K) Drum(CMY) Description Drum motor K (DRM-K) in half speed Drum motor C.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the item to be adjusted. M. Y) in half speed Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 Initial setting 1-3-46 . Select the item to be adjusted. U053 Setting: [Motor5] 1. Select the item to be adjusted. M.

U053 Setting: [Motor2 Half] 1. M. Display Dev(K) Dev(CMY) Trans Belt Description Developer motor K (DEVM-K) in half speed Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) in half speed Transfer motor (TRM) in half speed Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 Initial setting Description Setting: [Motor3 Half] 1. Y) Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 Initial setting Setting: [Motor2 3/4] 1. Display Dev(K) Dev(CMY) Trans Belt Regist* Belt Clean Description Developer motor K (DEVM-K) Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) Transfer motor (TRM) Registration motor (RM) Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 0 Initial setting *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only 1-3-47 . Select the item to be adjusted. M. Display SB Bridge1 Bridge2 Feed Mid Roller* DU* Description Eject motor (EM) in half speed Bridge conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) in half speed Bridge conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) in half speed Paper feed motor (PFM) in half speed Middle motor (MM) in half speed Duplex motor (DUM) in half speed Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial setting *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Setting: [Motor1 3/4] 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Y (DRM-C. Select the item to be adjusted. Select the item to be adjusted. Select the item to be adjusted. Display Drum(K) Drum(CMY) Description Drum motor K (DRM-K) Drum motor C.

Select the item to be adjusted. appears. U053 Setting: [Motor3 3/4] 1. Display SB Fixing Bridge1 Bridge2 Feed Job Separator Mid Roller* Description Eject motor (EM) Fuser motor (FUM) Bridge conveying motor 1 (BRCM1) Bridge conveying motor 2 (BRCM2) Paper feed motor (PFM) Job eject motor (JEM) Middle motor (MM) Setting range -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 -500 to 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial setting Description *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only Completion Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-48 .

Completion Press the stop key. Purpose Change mode if paper crease occurs. Change the setting value using the +/. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. Sets temperature at which the paper conveying fan motors are switched for controlling. appears. 1-3-49 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the mode. 2. Method 1. Press the start key. The setting is set. Press the start key. Setting: [Cooling Mode] 1. and a smaller value slows it. Display Fan Mode Cooling Mode Description Sets temperature at which paper conveying fan motors operate. The value is set.keys. Description Setting: [Fan Mode] 1. Display Mode1 Mode2 Mode3 Auto Description Temperature at which paper conveying fan motors operate: High Temperature at which paper conveying fan motors operate: Normal Temperature at which paper conveying fan motors operate: Low It begins with Mode2 at power up or recovery from sleep mode. 2. Initial setting: Mode2 2. U059 Setting fan mode Description Specifies mode for paper conveying fan motors during conveying paper. and switches to Mode3 when the thermistor detects higher than 38 °C. Press the start key. Display Cooling Mode Description Amount of shift from the initial standard temperature Setting range -3 to 3 (°C) 0 Initial setting A larger value advances the operating timing. Select the mode.

The value is set.keys or numeric keys. U061 Description Checking the operation of the exposure lamp Description Lights the exposure lamp. U063 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position of the scanner.091 mm Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine left. is displayed. Select the item. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right. Method 1. Display CCD CIS The exposure lamp lights The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed) Description 3. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/. press the stop key. 2. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key). The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-50 . 3. This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains. Display Position Description Shading position Setting range 0 to 18 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0. Press the start key. Setting 1. Purpose To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on. Completion Press the stop key. 4. To turn the lamp off. To prevent this problem. Press the start key. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose Used when the white line continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. The lamp lights.

Select the item to be adjusted. For copy example 2. decrease the value.02 % 0. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-9 2. Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.1-3-56) Method 1. U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning. Press the system menu key. Press the start key. 3. The value is set. Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.1-3-44) U065 main scanning direction Description U065 auxiliary scanning direction U067 (P. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect. Press the start key. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the system menu key.02 % -125 to 125 0 Adjustment: [Y Scan Zoom] 1. Change the setting value using the +/. increase the value. For copy example 1.1-3-54) U070 (P. Display Y Scan Zoom X Scan Zoom Description Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction Setting range -75 to 75 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0.keys or numeric keys. 1-3-51 . 5. 4. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. U053 (P.

Change the setting value using the +/. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. increase the value. decrease the value. 1-3-52 . Completion Press the stop key. is displayed. U065 Description Adjustment: [X Scan Zoom] 1. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-10 2. The value is set.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. For copy example 1. For copy example 2.

For copy example 2. is displayed. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.1-3-58) U404 (P. Scanner leading edge registration (within ± 2. Display Front Rotate Description Scanner leading edge registration Scanner leading edge registration (rotate copying) Setting range -30 to 30 -30 to 30 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0. U066 Description Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning. If the image is still incorrect. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. Press the system menu key. 3. Press the system menu key.1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key. Change the setting value using the +/.5 mm) Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-11 7. Press the start key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. For copy example 1. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment.1-3-147) U071 (P. 1-3-53 . decrease the value.158 mm 0.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. increase the value. Press the start key. 5. Adjustment 1. Select the item to be adjusted.158 mm 6.keys or numeric keys. The value is set. U066 U403 (P. 4.

1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key. If the image is still incorrect. Change the setting value using the +/. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. For copy example 1. U067 U403 (P. 2. Press the system menu key. Select the item to be adjusted.085 mm 0. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. For copy example 2. 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-54 .keys or numeric keys. Press the system menu key.l Display Front Rotate Description Scanner center line Scanner center line (rotate copying) Setting range -60 to 60 -40 to 40 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0.1-3-60) U404 (P.0 mm) Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-12 7.1-3-147) U072 (P. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Adjustment 1. decrease the value. Press the start key. Press the start key.085 mm Description 6. U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning. increase the value. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. The value is set. 5. 4. Scanner center line (within ± 2.

keys or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting using the +/. 9. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop key. 5. the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased. Performs the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting. Press the start key. U068 Description Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Select [Black Line]. Select [DP Read]. 3. Press the start key. 10. The value is set. is displayed. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned. 1-3-55 . 6.keys or numeric keys.158 mm - 2. Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used. 4. Press the start key. Setting 1. 7. Press the start key. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key. Test copy is executed. When the setting value is increased.l Display DP Read Black Line Description Starting position adjustment for scanning originals Scanning position for the test copy originals Setting range -38 to 38 0 to 3 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0. 8. Change the setting using the +/. The value is set.

l Display X Scan Zoom(F) X Scan Zoom(B) Y Scan Zoom(CIS) X Scan Zoom(CIS) Description Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CCD (first side) Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CCD (second side) Setting range Initial Change in setting value per step 0. 3. 5.keys or numeric keys. decrease the value. 2. 4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. For copy example 2. Change the setting value using the +/. Adjustment 1.02 % Description -125 to 125 0 -125 to 125 0 0.02 % 0. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used. For copy example 1. The value is set. Press the start key. 1-3-56 . Press the system menu key. Select the item to be adjusted. Press the system menu key. increase the value.02 % Magnification in the main scan.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key.02 % Adjustment: [X Scan Zoom] 1. U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-13 2.-100 to 100 0 ning direction of CIS Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction of CIS -125 to 125 0 0.

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-14 2. The value is set. If the image is still incorrect. For copy example 1. is displayed.1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key. 1-3-57 . For copy example 2.keys or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting value using the +/.1-3-58) U404 (P. U070 U071 (P. increase the value. Press the start key. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. U070 Description Adjustment: [Y Scan Zoom] 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. decrease the value. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.

085 mm 0.085 mm 0.085 mm 0. Press the system menu key. 3. Method 1. Select the item to be adjusted. Press the system menu key.085 mm Trailing edge registration of CIS -27 to 27 1-3-58 .085 mm 0. 2.085 mm 0.085 mm 0. 5.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.085 mm 0. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. 4.l Reversed DP Display Front Head Front Tail Back Head Back Tail Description Leading edge registration of CCD (first side) Trailing edge registration of CCD (first side) Leading edge registration of CCD (second side) Trailing edge registration of CCD (second side) Setting range -32 to 32 -32 to 32 -32 to 32 -32 to 32 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0.085 mm 0. Press the start key.085 mm Description Dual scan DP Display Front Head Front Tail Back Head Back Tail CIS Head CIS Tail Description Leading edge registration of CCD (first side) Trailing edge registration of CCD (first side) Leading edge registration of CCD (second side) Trailing edge registration of CCD (second side) Leading edge registration of CIS Setting range -27 to 27 -27 to 27 -27 to 27 -27 to 27 -27 to 27 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Caution If the first side is adjusted. The value is set. carry out the adjustment. Press the start key. Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1-3-16 2. The value is set. Change the setting value using the +/. For copy example 2. If the image is still incorrect. check the second side and if adjustment is required. increase the value. For copy example 1. Check the copy image after the adjustment. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-15 2.1-3-148) Adjustment: Trailing edge registration 1. Check the copy image after the adjustment. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. For copy example 1. check the second side and if adjustment is required. If the image is still incorrect. carry out the adjustment. decrease the value. is displayed. Press the start key.keys or numeric keys. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. 1-3-59 . Caution If the first side is adjusted.1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key. U071 U404 (P. increase the value. decrease the value. U071 U404 (P. U071 Description Adjustment: Leading edge registration 1.keys or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting value using the +/. For copy example 2.

Caution If the first side is adjusted. The value is set. Change the setting value using the +/.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. decrease the value. Press the start key. For copy example 2. carry out the adjustment.085 mm 0. For copy example 1. is displayed. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used. increase the value. If the image is still incorrect. Press the system menu key. Press the start key. 1-3-60 . Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-17 7.085 mm 0. Check the copy image after the adjustment. U072 U404 (P. check the second side and if adjustment is required. U072 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.keys or numeric keys. Adjustment 1. Select the item to be adjusted. 5. 2. Press the system menu key. 4.085 mm Description *: Dual scan DP only 6.l Display Front Back CIS* Description DP center line (first side) DP center line (second side) CIS center line Setting range -60 to 60 -60 to 60 -39 to 39 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0 0. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.

U073 Checking the scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions. 5. To stop operation. 1-3-61 . 0 (off) or 1 (on) Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting 5000 4300 5100 10000 8600 7100 6100 A4 B5 11" x 8 1/2" A3 B4 A4R B5R Paper size 5000 7800 10200 9000 8400 6600 5100 Setting A5R Folio 11" x 17" 11" x 15" 8 1/2" x 14" 8 1/2" x 11" 5 1/2" x 8 1/2" Paper size 4. Display Scanner Motor Home Position Dust Check DP Reading Scanner operation Home position operation Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on DP scanning position operation Description Description Setting: [Scanner Motor] 1. Press the start key. Purpose To check the scanner operation. Scanning starts under the selected conditions. Select the item to be operated. 2. 3. Display Zoom Size Lamp Operating conditions Magnification Original size On and off of the exposure lamp Setting range 25 to 400 % See below.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting using the +/. press the stop key. Method 1. Select the item. 2. Press the start key. Select [Scanner Motor].keys.

Purpose Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original is scanned from the DP. Setting 1. The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-62 . copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key). press the stop key. Method: [DP Reading] 1. U073 Description Method: [Home Position] 1. Select [DP Reading]. The value is set. 3. is displayed. 2. To turn the exposure lamp off. Press the start key. Press the start key. Method: [Dust Check] 1. 2. is displayed. Press the start key. Display Coefficient Description DP input light luminosity correction Setting range 0 to 3 0 Initial setting Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction 3. Completion Press the stop key. Select [Home Position]. The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position. Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops. U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Sets the luminosity correction for scanning originals from the DP. Change the setting using the +/. 2. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select [Dust Check]. Press the start key. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. The exposure lamp lights. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.or numeric keys.

2. is displayed. Select [Clear]. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting: [CCD] 1. Change the value using the +/. Press the start key. Method 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method: [Black Line] 1. Completion Press the stop key. 2. 2. Select the item to be set. Display CCD Black Line Description Setting of standard data when dust is detected. 1-3-63 . Purpose When using DP. If dust is identified. to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position. the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals. The setting is cleared. Display R G B Description Lowest density of the R regard as the dust Lowest density of the G regard as the dust Lowest density of the B regard as the dust Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 125 125 125 3. U087 Description Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.or numeric keys. Select the item to be set. Initialization of original reading position. Press the start key.

2. Yellow PG and Black PG Purpose To check the gradation reproducibility To check the developer state and the engine section ID To check the drum quality To check the drum quality To check the drum quality To check the drum quality To check the drum quality To check for vertical lines on the laser scanner unit Pattern output for LLU assurance application Description 3. 4. Display 256Gradation Color Belt Gray(C) Gray(M) Gray(Y) Gray(K) White Gradation Gray Warranty Description 256-gradation PG Four color belts PG Cyan PG Magenta PG Yellow PG Black PG Blank paper PG 5-graduation gray PG Four color belts PG. Press the start key. Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing. Press the system menu key. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output and press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Magenta PG. U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine. 1-3-64 . Cyan PG. Method 1. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop key. is displayed. using MIP-PG pattern output (with-out scanning).

Two test pattern sheets will be printed. U091 Setting the white line correction Description Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of abnormal pixels. 5. If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets. Press the start key. the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. (1st sheet: blank sheet. Press the system menu key. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed. 2nd sheet: Approx. Load paper in the cassette. 4. white line correction has been completed normally. Press [Execute]. 60 mm black band) 7. clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat white line correction. Select the item. 2. If no vertical lines appear on either sheet. 1-3-65 . Display Calculation(R) Calculation(G) Calculation(B) Threshold(R) Threshold(G) Threshold(B) Threshold (Abnormal) Mode Execute Description Abnormal pixel count result for color R Abnormal pixel count result for color G Abnormal pixel count result for color B Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B Abnormal pixel threshold value setting Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF Holding of white reference data Description Method: white line correction 1. Press the start key. Method 1. If vertical black lines appear on the blank sheet and vertical white lines appear in the black band in the same position. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 6. Holding of white reference data is started. the setting has been completed normally. DP main PWB or CIS roller. Press the start key. The paper should be the same size as the original. Purpose To perform when replacing the CIS. and thus the engine must be checked. 3. However.

the image may be affected. 2. The value is set. 1-3-66 . If white lines appear even though the CIS roller and glass are not dirty. Set within the range 50 to 200.) 3. is displayed. U091 How to view test copies blank sheet No lines Black lines Black lines No lines black band No lines White lines No lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS glass Engine side Engine side Causes Corrective measures Complete Clean CIS roller or CIS glass and then perform U091 again U091 ends. If fine lines in some originals disappear. Select the item to be set. Completion Press the stop key.or numeric keys. Change the value using the +/. lower the set value. (If set outside this range. the initial setting. check engine U091 ends. Display Threshold(R) Threshold(G) Threshold(B) Threshold (Abnormal) Mode Description Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B Abnormal pixel threshold value setting Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF Setting range 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 0 to 8191 0: OFF/ 1: ON/ 2: Test mode Initial setting 112 112 112 75 0 * : Normally the Threshold (Com) value should not be changed from 112.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. raise the set value. check engine Description Setting: Threshold value setting 1. Press the start key.

2. Press the start key. The value is set. Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respective image quality modes. depending on respective image quality modes. 3. 1-3-67 . Display Text Mixed Other Fax Text Fax Photo Density in the text mode Density in the text and photo mode Density in modes other than the text mode or the text and photo mode Density in the text in fax mode Density in the photo in fax mode Description Setting: [Text/Mixed/Other] 1. Also used to make copy images darker or lighter. Change the setting value using the +/. Select the image quality mode. Display F/C Darker F/C Lighter B/W Darker B/W Lighter Description Change in density when manual density is set dark (full color mode) Change in density when manual density is set light (full color mode) Change in density when manual density is set dark (black/white mode) Change in density when manual density is set light (black/white mode) Setting range 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 0 Initial setting Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. Select the item to be set. 2.or numeric keys. Press the start key. and decreasing it makes the change smaller. Method 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U093 Description Adjusting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode.

Select the item. Display Darker Lighter Description Gradient for darker setting Gradient for lighter setting Setting range 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 0 Initial setting Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. Method 1. is displayed. U099 Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size sensor and sets the sensing threshold value. Display Original Area R Original Area G Original Area B Original Area Size SW L Description Detected original width size (R) Detected original width size (G) Detected original width size (B) Detected original width size Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF 1-3-68 . and decreasing it makes the change smaller. Place the original and close the original cover or DP. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed. Select the item to be set.or numeric keys. U093 Description Setting: [Fax Text/Fax Photo] 1. Press the start key. The value is set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size sensor malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like. Change the setting value using the +/. 2. 3. Press the start key. Display Data1 B/W Level1 Data2 Description Displaying original size sensor transmission data B/W LEVEL setting original size sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Displaying original size sensor transmission data (when DP is installed) Method: [Data1/Data2] 1. 2. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.

keys or numeric keys.l Display Original R1 . The screen for maintenance item No. The value is set. Completion Press the stop key. 1-3-69 . 3. Select an item to be set. and a smaller value decreases it.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting value using the +/. is displayed. Press the start key. U099 Description Setting: [B/W Level1] 1. 2.3 Original G1 .3 Original B1 .3 Light Source R Light Source G Light Source B Wait Time Description Original threshold value for color R Original threshold value for color G Original threshold value for color B Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 50/50/50 50/50/50 50/50/50 49 49 49 150 Light source threshold value for color R 0 to 255 Light source threshold value for color G 0 to 255 Light source threshold value for color B 0 to 255 Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment 0 to 255 A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity.

or numeric keys. Display AC Bias(C) AC Bias(M) AC Bias(Y) AC Bias(K) AC Bias B/W(K) Description Main charger AC bias for cyan Main charger AC bias for magenta Main charger AC bias for yellow Main charger AC bias for black Main charger AC bias for black in black/white mode Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 2. 1-3-70 . Change the value using the +/. Press the start key. U100 Adjusting main high voltage Description Controls the charger roller voltage to optimize the surface potential. Display On Off Description Turns auto adjustment ON Turns auto adjustment OFF Initial setting: On 2. The values set vary depending on environments. Purpose To change the setting value to adjust the image if an image failure (background blur. Display Adj AC Bias Set AC Auto Adj Set DC Bias Adj DC Bias Set Low Temp Set Charger Freq Chk Current Description Main charger AC bias for each color Setting the AC bias auto adjustment Main charger DC bias for each color Additional surface potential Pre-charge time at power supply ON Setting the main charger frequency Rush current display Description Setting: [Adj AC Bias] 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Increasing the setting makes the image lighter. Method 1. Select an item and press the start key. decreasing it makes the image darker.) occurs. etc. Select On or Off. Setting: [Set AC Auto Adj] 1. The value is set. The setting is set. Press the start key. Press the start key. 2.

or numeric keys. Display DC1 Bias(C) DC1 Bias Half(C) DC1 Bias(M) DC1 Bias Half(M) DC1 Bias(Y) DC1 Bias Half(Y) DC1 Bias(K) DC1 Bias Half(K) DC1 Bias B/W(K) Description Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed) Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed) Main charger DC bias for magenta (full speed) Main charger DC bias for magenta (half speed) Main charger DC bias for yellow (full speed) Main charger DC bias for yellow (half speed) Main charger DC bias for black (full speed) Main charger DC bias for black (half speed) Main charger DC bias for black in black/white mode Description Setting: [Adj DC Bias] 1. Press the start key. Press the start key. 2.or numeric keys. Change the value using the +/.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The current setting is displayed. Increasing the setting makes the image lighter. decreasing it makes the image darker. U100 Displaying: [Set DC Bias] 1. The value is set.l Display Set Low Temp Description Pre-charge time at power supply ON Setting range 0 to 6 1 Initial setting 2. 1-3-71 . Setting: [Set Low Temp] 1. Select the item to be set. The value is set. Change the value using the +/.l Display DC2 Bias(C) DC2 Bias Half(C) DC2 Bias(M) DC2 Bias Half(M) DC2 Bias(Y) DC2 Bias Half(Y) DC2 Bias(K) DC2 Bias Half(K) DC2 Bias B/W(K) Description Main charger DC bias for cyan (full speed) Main charger DC bias for cyan (half speed) Main charger DC bias for magenta (full speed) Main charger DC bias for magenta (half speed) Main charger DC bias for yellow (full speed) Main charger DC bias for black (full speed) Main charger DC bias for black (half speed) Main charger DC bias for black in black/white mode Setting range Initial setting 128 to 127 0 128 to 127 0 128 to 127 0 128 to 127 0 128 to 127 0 128 to 127 0 128 to 127 0 Main charger DC bias for yellow (half speed) 128 to 127 0 3.

Completion Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. U100 Description Setting: [Set Charger Freq] 1. Change the value using the +/.l Display Generally B/W Description Main charger frequency Main charger frequency in black/white mode Setting range Initial setting 0 to 65535 1429*1/1333*2 0 to 65535 28544 *1: 30 ppm/35 ppm/45 ppm model *2: 55 ppm model 3. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key). Display C M Y K Cyan rush current Magenta rush current Yellow rush current Black rush current Description Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. 2. Select the item to be set. The current setting is displayed. The value is set. Press the start key. Displaying: [Chk Current] 1. 1-3-72 . The screen for maintenance item No.or numeric keys.

Press the start key. The value is set. 2. Change the value using the +/. 2. Setting: [Add Color] 1.l Display C M Y Description Addition value (cyan) Addition value (magenta) Addition value (black) Setting range -127 to 127 -127 to 127 -127 to 127 3 3 5 Initial setting 3. 1-3-73 . Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. Purpose To change the setting when any density problems. The value is set.or numeric keys. Change the value using the +/. U101 Description Setting the voltage for the primary transfer Description Sets the control voltage for the primary transfer. Setting 1.or numeric keys.l Display Full Half 3/4 Description Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow (full speed) Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow (half speed) Primary transfer positive voltage for yellow at 3/4 times of line speed Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 116*1/123*2/132*2 109*1/115*2 158 *1: 30 ppm/35 ppm *2: 45 ppm model *3: 55 ppm model 3. Display Normal Add Color Add Color 2nd Surround Correct Description Setting the primary transfer positive voltage Setting the addition value Setting the addition value for the second side Environmental correction ON/OFF setting Setting: [Normal] 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. occur. Select the item to be set. Select the item to be set. Press the start key. such as too dark or light.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the item to be set. Completion Press the stop key. 2.l Display C M Y K Description Addition value for the second side (cyan) Addition value for the second side (magenta) Addition value for the second side (yellow) Addition value for the second side (black) Setting range -127 to 127 -127 to 127 -127 to 127 -127 to 127 0 0 0 0 Initial setting 3. Select On or Off. 1-3-74 . Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Display On Off Description Environmental correction ON Environmental correction OFF Initial setting: On 2.or numeric keys. U101 Description Setting: [Add Color 2nd] 1. Press the start key. Change the value using the +/. is displayed. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key). The value is set. Setting: [Surround Correct] 1. Press the start key. The setting is set.

1-3-75 .or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. such as too dark or light. occur. Display Light/Normal1 Normal2/3 Heavy1 Heavy2-5 OHP Bias Setting: [Light/Normal1] 1. 2. Select the item to be set.l Display Width=105 Width=210 Width=297 Description 105 mm wide 210 mm wide 297 mm wide Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm 153 153 153 35 ppm 140 140 140 45 ppm 153 153 153 55 ppm 166 166 166 4. Press the start key. Display 1st 2nd 1st 3/4(Gloss) 2nd 3/4(Gloss) 1st B/W 2nd B/W Description Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of line speed Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times of line speed Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black/white mode Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black/white mode Description Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 60 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 and 60 g/m2 to 75 g/m2 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 75 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 Control voltage for the transfer bias on paper with thickness 136 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 Control voltage for the transfer bias for transparencies Transfer bias value 2. Select the item to be set. Select the paper width to be set. 3. Change the value using the +/. Method 1. The value is set. Press the start key. U106 Description Setting the voltage for the secondary transfer Description Sets the control voltage for the secondary transfer depending on each paper type. Purpose To change the setting when any density problems.

or numeric keys. Select the item to be set. The value is set. Select the item to be set. 3. Press the start key. U106 Setting: [Normal2/3] 1. Change the value using the +/.l Display Width=105 Width=210 Width=297 Description 105 mm wide 210 mm wide 297 mm wide Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm 153 153 153 35 ppm 140 140 140 45 ppm 153 153 153 55 ppm 166 166 166 4. Press the start key.or numeric keys. Setting: [Heavy1] 1. The value is set. Display 1st 2nd 1st 3/4(Gloss) 2nd 3/4(Gloss) 1st B/W 2nd B/W Description Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (full speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (full speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of line speed Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times of line speed Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side in black/white mode Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side in black/white mode Description 2. Display 1st 3/4 2nd 3/4 Description Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side at 3/4 times of line speed Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side at 3/4 times of line speed 2. 3.l Display Width=105 Width=210 Width=297 Description 105 mm wide 210 mm wide 297 mm wide Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm 153 153 153 35 ppm 140 140 140 45 ppm 153 153 153 55 ppm 166 166 166 4. Change the value using the +/. Select the paper width to be set. 1-3-76 . Select the paper width to be set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

Setting: [OHP] 1. Change the value using the +/. Select the item to be set.l Display Width=105 Width=210 Width=297 Description 105 mm wide 210 mm wide 297 mm wide Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm 153 153 153 35 ppm 140 140 140 45 ppm 153 153 153 55 ppm 166 166 166 3. The value is set. 1-3-77 . Change the value using the +/. Setting: [Bias] 1.or numeric keys. Display Reverse Reverse Half Reverse 3/4 Reverse B/W Cleaning Cleaning Half Cleaning 3/4 Description Transfer reverse bias (full speed) Transfer reverse bias (hald speed) Transfer reverse bias at 3/4 times of line speed Transfer reverse bias in black/white mode Cleaning control value (full speed) Cleaning control value (half speed) Cleaning control value at 3/4 times of line speed Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 3. 2. Press the start key.or numeric keys.l Display Width=105 Width=210 Width=297 Description 105 mm wide 210 mm wide 297 mm wide Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm 153 153 153 35 ppm 140 140 140 45 ppm 153 153 153 55 ppm 166 166 166 4. The value is set. Press the start key. 2. Press the start key. Select the item to be set. Display 1st Half 2nd Half Description Control voltage for the transfer bias for the first side (half speed) Control voltage for the transfer bias for the second side (half speed) Description 2. The value is set.or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the paper width to be set. U106 Setting: [Heavy2-5] 1. Select the item to be set. 3. Change the value using the +/.

1-3-78 . copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key). Completion Press the stop key. Select the item to be set. is displayed. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Completion Press the stop key. is displayed. 4. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the value using the +/. U106 Description Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Display Belt(A) Belt(B) Description Transfer belt cleaning voltage (printing) Transfer belt cleaning voltage (paper interval) 3.l Display Full Half 3/4 B/W Black/white mode Description Full speed Half speed Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm 86 86 86 86 35 ppm 74 74 74 74 45 ppm 86 86 86 86 55 ppm 97 97 97 97 5. Method 1. U107 Setting the transfer cleaning voltage Description Sets the cleaning control voltage for transfer belt unit. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).or numeric keys. 2. Press the start key. Purpose Change settings if an offset has occurred due to the failure of cleaning the transfer belt. Select the item to be set.

Select the item to be set. The value is set. 1-3-79 . 2. Display Output Output 3/4 Output B/W Timing Description Adjusting the separation shift bias output Adjusting the separation shift bias output Adjusting the separation shift bias output in black/white mode Adjusting the ON/OFF timing with paper position Description Setting: [Output] 1. Display Light 1st Light 2nd Normal 1st Normal 2nd Add Normal Lead Heavy/OHP Description Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g/m2 Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g/m2 Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 60 to 75 g/m2 Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 60 to 75 g/m2 Addition value for leading edge on paper with thickness 76 to 105 g/m2 Separation shift bias for transparencies or paper with thickness 106 to 300 g/m2 Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 -127 to 127 0 to 255 Initial setting 21 21 21 21 0 21 3. 2. Press the start key. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.or numeric key. Select the item to be set. Method 1. Purpose To set when the separated malfunction of the paper occurs. U108 Setting separation shift bias Description Adjusts output of separation shift bias and ON/OFF timing.

The value is set. Select the item to be set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting value using the +/. Display On Timing Lead On Timing Center Off Timing Description Separation shift bias ON timing at leading edge of paper Separation shift bias ON timing at center of paper Separation shift bias OFF timing Setting range -200 to 200 -200 to 200 -200 to 200 0 0 0 Initial setting 3. Press the start key. 2. 1-3-80 . The value is set. is displayed. U108 Description Setting: [Output 3/4 / Output B/W] 1. 2. Press the start key.or numeric key. Change the setting value using the +/. Select the item to be set. Completion Press the stop key. Setting: [Timing] 1. Display Light 1st Light 2nd Normal 1st Normal 2nd Description Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g/m2 Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 52 to 59 g/m2 Separation shift bias for the first side on paper with thickness 60 to 75 g/m2 Separation shift bias for the second side on paper with thickness 60 to 75 g/m2 Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 43 43 43 43 3.or numeric key.

U110 Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking. Select the item. The current drum counts is displayed. Press the start key. 1-3-81 . is displayed. U109 Checking the drum type Description Displays the drum sensitivity data. Display DATA1 .DATA11 Drum sensitivity data Description Completion Press the stop key. Method 1. is displayed. Purpose To check the drum status. Method 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Purpose To check the drum sensitivity data. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Display C M Y K Description Drum count value for cyan Drum count value for magenta Drum count value for yellow Drum count value for black Completion Press the stop key. Display Dark(C) Light(C) Dark(M) Light(M) Dark(Y) Light(Y) Dark(K) Light(K) Description Drum sensitivity data for cyan (dark potential) Drum sensitivity data for cyan (light potential) Drum sensitivity data for magenta (dark potential) Drum sensitivity data for magenta (light potential) Drum sensitivity data for yellow (dark potential) Drum sensitivity data for yellow (light potential) Drum sensitivity data for black (dark potential) Drum sensitivity data for black (light potential) Description The drum sensitivity data is displayed.

Press the start key. Press the start key. Purpose To check the drum number. Purpose To check the drum status. The drum number is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display C M Y K Cyan drum number Magenta drum number Yellow drum number Black drum number Description Completion Press the stop key. Method 1. The drum drive time is displayed. U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-82 . which is used as a reference when correcting the high voltage based on time. Method 1. is displayed. Display C M Y K Drum drive time for cyan Drum drive time for magenta Drum drive time for yellow Drum drive time for black Description Description Completion Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. U111 Checking the drum drive time Description Displays the drum drive time for checking a figure.

2. Press the start key.3 Cnt History1 .3 Description Historical records of the machine number Historical records of drum counter Completion Press the stop key. 3. Method 1. is displayed. U119 Setting the drum Description Sets drum sensitivity. Press the start key. Drum setup is commenced. Display C M Y K Cyan drum past record Magenta drum past record Yellow drum past record Black drum past record Description Description The history of a machine number and a drum counter for each color is displayed by three cases. Press the start key. Purpose To set the drum after replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit. Method 1. Display Machine History1 . Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter. 1-3-83 . Select [Execute]. Turn the main power switch off and on.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 4. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Select the color to check. U118 Displaying the drum history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter.

Method 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the transfer counter. The current number of the transfer belt is displayed. The history of a machine number and a transfer belt unit counter for each color is displayed by three cases. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.3 Cnt History1 . Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To check the number of the transfer belt. U122 Checking the transfer belt unit number Description Displays the number of the transfer belt unit for checking. is displayed. Press the start key.3 Description Historical records of the machine number Historical records of transfer belt unit counter Description Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. Method 1. Display Machine History1 . U123 Displaying the transfer belt unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the transfer belt unit counter.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. 1-3-84 .

1-3-85 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check the drive time after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller. Completion Press the stop key. Method 1. is displayed. Clears only the transfer roller count value. The transfer belt unit count value is not cleared. Clears only the transfer roller drive time. Display Mid Trans 2nd Trans Description Transfer belt unit count value Transfer roller count value Clearing 1. The current counts of the transfer drive time is displayed. Select [Clear]. Press the start key. Method 1. Select [Clear]. The counter value is cleared. 2. Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To check the count after replacement of the transfer belt unit or transfer roller. Also to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller. The transfer belt unit drive time is not cleared. U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count Description Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter. The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed. U124 Description Checking/clearing the transfer drive time Description Displays and clears the counts of the transfer drive time. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Also to clear the counts after replacing transfer roller. The drive time is cleared. Press the start key. Display Mid Trans 2nd Trans Transfer roller drive time Description Transfer belt unit drive time Clearing 1. Press the start key. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2. is displayed.

1-3-86 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. If any problem such as faulty images or dirt on the back surface occurs. Press the start key. Display On Timing 1st On Timing 2nd Off Timing Description Transfer ON timing adjustment value (first side) Transfer ON timing adjustment value (second side) Transfer OFF timing adjustment value Setting range -200 to 200 -200 to 200 -200 to 200 Initial setting -54 -54 10 Description 4. Change the value using the +/. 2. Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developer unit. 3. 3. Press the start key. Method 1.keys or numeric keys. is displayed. The value is set. is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select [Execute]. Purpose Basically. Toner installation is started and the control value of the toner sensor is displayed. Method 1. U128 Setting transfer high-voltage timing Description Adjusts the ON/OFF timing of transfer high-voltage output. U130 Toner installation Description Replenishes toner to the developer unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed. Press the start key. Select the item to set. the setting need not be changed. change the setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. 2. Display C M Y K Description Toner sensor C control voltage Toner sensor M control voltage Toner sensor Y control voltage Toner sensor K control voltage Completion Press the stop key.

use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display Control(C) Control(M) Control(Y) Control(K) Description Toner sensor C control voltage Toner sensor M control voltage Toner sensor Y control voltage Toner sensor K control voltage Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 116 116 116 116 3. Display Manual Auto Mode Description Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment Switching the manual adjustment and auto adjustment Setting: [Manual] 1.or numeric keys.. Press the start key. Displaying: [Auto] 1. Select the item to be set or displayed. Purpose If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit failure. 2. U131 Description Adjusting the toner sensor control voltage Description Adjusts the toner sensor control voltage. Press the start key. etc. Display Default(C) Default(M) Default(Y) Default(K) Control(C) Control(M) Control(Y) Control(K) Description Reference value for toner sensor C control voltage Reference value for toner sensor M control voltage Reference value for toner sensor Y control voltage Reference value for toner sensor K control voltage Toner sensor C control voltage after correction Toner sensor M control voltage after correction Toner sensor Y control voltage after correction Toner sensor K control voltage after correction 1-3-87 . 2. Method 1. Select the item to be set. The current setting is displayed. The value is set. Change the value using the +/.

Select the item to be set. Completion Press the stop key. 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-88 . U132 Replenishing toner forcibly Description Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. press the stop key. To stop operation. The value is set. 2. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Method 1. Select [Execute]. U131 Setting: [Mode] 1. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. is displayed. Display Manual Auto Description Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment Toner sensor control voltage auto adjustment Description Initial setting: Auto 2. Press the start key. Purpose Used when the toner empty is detected frequently. Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level. is displayed. Display Supply(C) Supply(M) Supply(Y) Supply(K) Sensor(C) Sensor(M) Sensor(Y) Sensor(K) Description Toner feed start level (cyan) Toner feed start level (magenta) Toner feed start level (yellow) Toner feed start level (black) Toner sensor output value (cyan) Toner sensor output value (magenta) Toner sensor output value (yellow) Toner sensor output value (black) 4.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U135 Checking toner motor operation Description Drives toner motors. Press the start key. Press the start key. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Decreasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty shorter. Press the start key. 2. Display CMY K Description Setting range 3 3 0 to 9 Initial setting Setting the level of cyan/magenta/yellow toner 0 to 9 Setting the level of black toner Increasing the setting makes the interval from toner near end to toner empty longer. The value is set. Purpose To change the setting to advance detection of near end if the interval from toner near end to toner empty seems too short. Method 1. Display Toner Description Toner motor (TM) is turned on Description 4. 3. Change the value using the +/. Select [Toner]. is displayed.or numeric keys. Purpose To check the operation of toner motors. U136 Setting toner near end detection Description Sets the level that indicates the number of sheets that can be printed from occurrence of toner near end to toner empty. 1-3-89 . If 0 is set. The operation starts. is displayed. developer section becomes the toner full and is locked. To stop the operation. Press the start key. press the stop key. Completion Press the stop key. toner near end will not be detected. Setting 1. Remarks When driving the toner motors long time or several times. Completion Press the stop key after operation stops. Select the item to be set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 4. 2.

Press the start key. Select the item. is displayed. U139 Description Displaying the temperature and humidity outside the machine Description Displays the detected temperature and humidity outside the machine. Display Ext/Int LSU Developing Description Internal/External temperature (°C). The current temperature is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. Display External Temp External Humidity Internal Temp External humidity (%) Internal temperature (°C) Description External temperature (°C) Method: [LSU] 1. External humidity (%) Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit (°C) Internal temperature around the developer section (°C) Method: [Ext/Int] 1. 1-3-90 . Display C M Y K Description Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit C (°C) Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit M (°C) Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit Y (°C) Internal temperature around the laser scanner unit K (°C) Method: [Developing] 1. Purpose To check the temperature and humidity outside the machine. The current temperature is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display C M Y K Description Internal temperature around the developer unit C (°C) Internal temperature around the developer unit M (°C) Internal temperature around the developer unit Y (°C) Internal temperature around the developer unit K (°C) Completion Press the stop key. The current temperature and humidity are displayed. 2.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display Sleeve DC Sleeve AC Mag DC Mag AC Sleeve Freq Sleeve Duty Mag Duty AC Calib Description Developer sleeve roller DC bias Developer sleeve roller AC bias Developer magnet roller DC bias Developer magnet roller AC bias Developer sleeve roller frequency Developer sleeve roller duty Developer magnet roller duty Executing or setting the AC calibration (45 ppm model/55 ppm model only) Description Setting: [Sleeve DC] 1. Select the item to be set. Change the setting value using the +/. The value is set. U140 Displaying developer bias Description Displays and changes various developer bias value. Select the item to be set. 1-3-91 . Press the start key. 2. Purpose To check or changes the developer bias value. 2. Setting range Initial setting 30 ppm/ 35 ppm 62 62 62 62 70 45 ppm/ 55 ppm 70 70 70 70 70 Display Description C M Y K B/W Developer sleeve roller DC bias for cyan 0 to 255 Developer sleeve roller DC bias for magenta Developer sleeve roller DC bias for yellow Developer sleeve roller DC bias for black 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Developer sleeve roller DC bias in black/ 0 to 255 white mode 3.keys or numeric keys. Method 1. Press the start key.

The value is set. Change the setting value using the +/.keys or numeric keys. Select the item to be set. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-92 . U140 Description Setting: [Sleeve AC] 1. Setting: [Mag DC] 1. The value is set.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key. 2. Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm/ 35 ppm 130 130 130 130 155 45 ppm/ 55 ppm 155 155 155 155 155 Display Description C M Y K B/W Developer magnet roller DC bias for cyan Developer magnet roller DC bias for magenta Developer magnet roller DC bias for yellow Developer magnet roller DC bias for black Developer magnet roller DC bias in black/white mode 3. Setting range Initial setting 30 ppm/ 35 ppm 159 159 159 159 155 45 ppm/ 55 ppm 155 155 155 155 155 Display Description C M Y K B/W Developer sleeve roller AC bias for cyan 0 to 255 Developer sleeve roller AC bias for magenta Developer sleeve roller AC bias for yellow 0 to 255 0 to 255 Developer sleeve roller AC bias for black 0 to 255 Developer sleeve roller AC bias in black/ 0 to 255 white mode 3. Select the item to be set. Change the setting value using the +/. 2.

keys or numeric keys. Select the item to be set. Press the start key. The value is set. 2. Change the setting value using the +/. 2. Setting: [Sleeve Freq] 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key. 1-3-93 . Press the start key. U140 Description Setting: [Mag AC] 1. Display Normal B/W Half 3/4 Description Developer sleeve roller frequency Developer sleeve roller frequency in black/white mode Developer sleeve roller frequency at 3/4 times of line speed Setting range 0 to 6200 0 to 6200 Initial setting 5276 5344 5276 5276 Developer sleeve roller frequency (half speed) 0 to 6200 0 to 6200 3. Select the item to be set. Select the item to be set. Setting range 0 to 99 0 to 99 Initial setting 30 ppm/ 35 ppm 37 68 45 ppm/ 55 ppm 68 68 Display Description Normal B/W Developer sleeve roller duty Developer sleeve roller duty in black/ white mode 3. Change the setting value using the +/. The value is set. The value is set. Change the setting value using the +/. Setting: [Sleeve Duty] 1. 2.keys or numeric keys. Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 30 ppm/ 35 ppm 101 101 101 101 178 45 ppm/ 55 ppm 178 178 178 178 178 Display Description C M Y K B/W Developer magnet roller AC bias for cyan Developer magnet roller AC bias for magenta Developer magnet roller AC bias for yellow Developer magnet roller AC bias for black Developer magnet roller AC bias in black/white mode 3.

Setting range 0 to 99 0 to 99 Initial setting 30 ppm/ 35 ppm 63 43 45 ppm/ 55 ppm 43 43 Display Description Normal B/W Developer magnet roller duty Developer magnet roller duty in black/ white mode 3. 2. U140 Description Setting: [Mag Duty] 1.keys or numeric keys. Display C M Y K High Altitude Description Developer unit C or drum unit C Developer unit M or drum unit M Developer unit Y or drum unit Y Developer unit K or drum unit K Overall setting for installation at high altitude 2. If the machine is installed at high altitude. Select [Execute]. Turn the main power switch off and on. Select the item. Method: [AC Calib] 1. Press the start key. Select the item to be set. Turns the items to implement to on. select [High Altitude]. * : When an error occurs. Display Calibration Magnification Type Description Executing the AC calibration AC calibration target bias value setting Mode setting for AC calibration bias control Method: [Calibration] 1. an error code is displayed. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-94 . 4. The value is set. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/. AC calibration is executed.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. 1-3-95 . is displayed. Display Mode1 Mode2 Description Execute AC calibration by normal bias control If print density is low in an installation at high altitude. 2. U140 Description Setting: [Magnification] 1. Select the item to be set. The value is set.keys or numeric keys. Display C M Y K Description Target bias value (cyan) Target bias value (magenta) Target bias value (yellow) Target bias value (black) Setting range -10 to 5 -10 to 5 -10 to 5 -10 to 5 0 0 0 0 Initial setting 3. The value is set. Select the mode. Display Mode Description Setting drum refresh mode Setting range 0 to 3 2 Initial setting * : 0: Off / 1: Short / 2: Standard / 3: Long 3. Press the start key. execute calibration by fixing the bias potential. Press the start key. Setting 1. The setting is set. Initial setting: Mode1 2. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/. Completion Press the stop key. U148 Setting drum refresh mode Description Selects the mode used in drum refreshing Purpose Change settings when drum refreshing is too frequently executed. Method: [Type] 1. Completion Press the stop key. Select Mode1 or Mode2.

is displayed. Check the status of sensor. Method 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select the item to be display. Display Full Near Full Description Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1) Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2) Method: [Toner] 1. Display Sensor(C) Sensor(M) Sensor(Y) Sensor(K) Supply(C) Supply(M) Supply(Y) Supply(K) Description Toner sensor C output value Toner sensor M output value Toner sensor Y output value Toner sensor K output value Toner replenishment level for cyan Toner replenishment level for magenta Toner replenishment level for yellow Toner replenishment level for black Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To check the output value for each color when any image problems occur. The current value is displayed. 1-3-96 . Display Waste Toner Toner Description Control voltage value of the waste toner sensor Control voltage value and replenishment level of toner sensor each color Description Method: [Waste Toner] 1. The current value is displayed. 2. Press the start key. U150 Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the toner sensor output value. Check the status of sensor.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

decreasing it makes the image darker. Press the start key. The value is set. Method: [Empty] 1. Press the start key. Press the start key. U156 Setting the toner replenishment level Description Sets the toner replenishment level for each color. Increasing the setting makes the image lighter. is displayed. Display Supply Empty Description Setting the toner replenishment level Setting the toner empty level Description Method: [Supply] 1. 2. Increasing the setting makes the image lighter. Select the item to be set. 2.or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Method 1. Change the setting value using the +/. 1-3-97 . 2. Change the setting value using the +/. Select the item to be set.or numeric keys. decreasing it makes the image darker. Purpose To change settings according to the original image. Select the item to be set. Display C M Y K Description Toner empty level for cyan Toner empty level for magenta Toner empty level for yellow Toner empty level for black Setting range 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 Initial setting 100 100 100 100 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The value is set. Display C M Y K Description Toner replenishment level for cyan Toner replenishment level for magenta Toner replenishment level for yellow Toner replenishment level for black Setting range 0 to 900 0 to 900 0 to 900 0 to 900 Initial setting 775 775 775 775 3. Completion Press the stop key.

The current developer counts is displayed. U158 Checking the developer count Description Displays the developer count for checking. is displayed. Method 1. Method 1. which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control. Display C M Y K Description Developer drive time for cyan Developer drive time for magenta Developer drive time for yellow Developer drive time for black Description Completion Press the stop key. The developer drive time is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display C M Y K Description Developer count value for cyan Developer count value for magenta Developer count value for yellow Developer count value for black Completion Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check the developer unit status. 1-3-98 . Purpose To check the developer drive time after replacing the developer unit. U157 Checking the developer drive time Description Displays the developer drive time for checking a figure. is displayed. Press the start key.

can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper. 2.keys. Change the setting value using the +/. Press the start key. Display Warm Up Print Description Control temperature except at printing Control temperature during printing Description Setting: [Warm Up] 1. U161 Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature. or solve a fuser problem on thick paper. Press the start key. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. 2. The value is set. Display Ready(Center) Ready(Edge) Ready(Press) Drive(Center) Wait(Center) Low Power (Press) High Speed (Center) Pressure (Press) Description Control temperature at displaying Ready (Center) Control temperature at displaying Ready (Edge) Control temperature at displaying Ready (Press) Stable temperature during driving (Center) Stable temperature during halt (Center) Control temperature at low power consumption (Press) Full speed shift temperature (Center) Pressurizing beginning temperature (Press) Setting range Initial setting 130 to 200(°C) 165 100 to 200(°C) 1 0 to 200(°C) 90 130 to 200(°C) 175 130 to 200(°C) 165 0 to 200(°C) 0 to 200(°C) 150 160 130 to 200(°C) 50 3. However. Select the item to be set. 1-3-99 . Select the item to be set. Method 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature. Method 1. Display Cnt Fuser unit count value Description Clearing 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.keys. 2. Press the start key. The fuser count is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/. 2. The value is set. Also to clear the counts after replacing unit. U163 Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. U161 Description Setting: [Print] 1. is displayed. 2. Press the start key. Display Full Speed (Center) Duplex Shift (Center) Description Temperature at maximum print speed (Center) Temperature at duplex printing (Center) Setting range Initial setting 130 to 200(°C) 165 100 to 200(°C) 1 3. Purpose To check or clear the fuser count after replacement of the fuser unit. is displayed. Press [Execute]. 3. U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count Description Displays and clears the fuser count for checking. Turn the main power switch off and on. 4. 1-3-100 . Completion Press the stop key. Press [Clear]. Select the item to be set. The fuser problem data is initialized. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Press the start key.

1-3-101 . The fuser drive time is displayed. is displayed. Press [Clear]. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To check or set the specification of fuser power supply after replacement of the fuser unit. Select the mode. Press the start key. is displayed. Purpose To check the fuser drive time after replacing the fuser unit. The setting is set. Press the start key. U169 Checking/setting the fuser power source Description Displays and settings the specification of fuser power supply for checking. Display Press Release Description Fuser unit drive time (press) Fuser unit drive time (release) Description Clearing 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U168 Checking/clearing the fuser drive time Description Displays or clears the fuser drive time. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Method 1. Display Mode Description Specification of fuser power supply Setting range 1 to 3 1: 100 V specifications 2: 200 V specifications 3: 120 V specifications 3. 2. Method 1. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. The drive time is cleared.

Press the start key. Completion Press the stop key. The fuser temperature is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. 4. 2. is displayed. Purpose To check the fuser temperature. is displayed. 3. Press the start key. Select [Execute]. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No. U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature Description Displays the detected fuser temperature. 1-3-102 .All the LEDs on the operation panel light. Display Heat Roller Edge1 Heat Roller Edge2 Heat Roller Center Press Roller Center Description Heat roller edge temperature (°C) Heat roller edge temperature (°C) Heat roller center temperature (°C) Press roller center temperature (°C) Description Completion Press the stop key. U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on. Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light. The LEDs turns off. Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Method 1.

Purpose To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced. press [Initialize] to execute the adjustment automatically. 3. When adjusting the display. 2. and then check the display. Completion Press the stop key. Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2. The touch panel is adjusted automatically. Press the start key. Press the start key. and then check the display. Method 1. U201 Initializing the touch panel Description Automatically correct the positions of the X. Press the start key. Method: [Check] 1. 1-3-103 .and Y-axes of the touch panel. Display Initialize Check Description Adjusts the display on the panel automatically Checks the display on the touch panel Description Method: [Initialize] 1. is displayed. Press the center of the + keys. Press the indicated three + keys. 4. Select the [Initialize] or [Check]. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Be sure to press three + keys displayed in order. 3. Press the stop key. Press the indicated three + keys. 2.

Input the telephone number using the numeric keys. 2 Sales companies Call center Description 2. so no setting is necessary.) Result table Display OK Description Communication properly terminated. 7. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Display Init/Set TEL No. Select the item. Purpose Performed at installation. 4. Press the start key. 2. 3. The setting is set. 2. U202 Description Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system. 3. Call Service End Description Initialization/Phone Nbr. Communication error (Nbr. 1 TEL No. Press the start key. The result of communication will be displayed. 5. 6. Press the start key. of calls exceeded) Communication error (Communication timeout) NG Communication error (Communication trial timeout) Communication error (Other) KMAS unreachable Completion Press the stop key. Select the item to be input. Press the start key. periodic maintenance. Communication with the host initiated. 1-3-104 .] 1. Communication with the host initiated. and/or repair. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines.) Method: [Call Service End] 1. Display TEL No. Select [Execute]. Select [Initialize]. The result of communication will be displayed. se Outgoing at the end of service activities Method: [Init/Set TEL No. Method 1. (Refer to the result. Select [Execute].2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. (Refer to the result.

is displayed. double-sided original of CCD Without paper. To stop continuous operation. Method 1. double-sided original of CIS (continuous operation) With paper. 6. press the stop key. 1-3-105 . Completion Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the speed to be operated. single-sided original of CCD (continuous operation) With paper. Press the start key. Display Normal Speed High Speed High-speed reading Description Normal reading (600 dpi) Description 4. U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. double-sided original of CIS 5. Purpose To check the DP operation. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. Display CCD ADP (Non-P) CCD ADP CCD RADP (Non-P) CCD RADP CIS (Non-P) CIS Description Without paper. The operation starts. Press the start key. single-sided original of CCD Without paper. 3. 2. double-sided original of CCD (continuous operation) With paper. Select the item to be operated.

Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. U204 Description Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter. key counters. 2. Therefore. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed. Select the optional counter to be installed. Display Device Message Description Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed Setting: [Device] 1. Turn the main power switch off and on. if any of these options are chosen. coin vender settings U206 will be automatically cancelled (Off). The setting is set. 1-3-106 . Supplement Two or more Key cards. and coin venders cannot be installed simultaneously. Display Key-Card Key-Counter Off The key card is installed The key counter is installed Not installed Description Initial setting: Off 2. 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Method 1. Press the start key. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 2. Select the [Key Device] or [Coin Vender]. Setting: [MESSAGE] 1. Select the item to be set. The setting is set. Press the start key.

Press the start key. The setting is set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 2. 3. 3. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Select the item to be set. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines. Turn the main power switch off and on. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed. The setting is set. Display On Off Description The coin vender is installed The coin vender is not installed Description Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender Behavior when change runs out during copying Charge per copy by size and color Initial setting: Off 2. Press the start key. U206 Description Setting the presence or absence of a coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Select the item. Display All Clear Auto Clear Off All clear is performed Auto clear is performed Clear is not performed Description Initial setting: Off 2. Turn the main power switch off and on. 1-3-107 . Setting: [No Coin Action] 1. Press the start key. Display On/Off Config No Coin Action Price Setting: [On/Off Config] 1. Select On or Off. Method 1.

U207 Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys. [Count0] is displayed and the left most LED on the operation panel lights. When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select the paper size to be set.keys. 2. M. Display B/W CMY RGB Full Color Black & White Single color C. Press the start key. 1-3-108 . Press the start key. 3. G. Change the setting value using the +/. Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel. The screen for executing is displayed. U206 Setting: [Price] 1. The value is set. 3.) 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. the top LED in that line will light. Y Single color R. all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed. the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. (At a periodic maintenance. 4. 5. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Method 1. B Full color Description Description Initial setting: Off 2. etc. Setting range 0 to 300 0 to 300 0 to 300 0 to 300 10 10 10 10 Initial setting B/W CMY/RGB Full Color 100 50 30 50 Display Description A3-Ledger B4 Card Other A3/Ledger size B4 size Post card Other In 10-yen inrements Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom. Completion Press the stop key. Turn the main power switch off and on. is displayed. Select the item to be set.

Press the start key. 1-3-109 . The setting is set. Purpose To run this maintenance item if the inner job separator is installed. Select the paper size (A4. Purpose To change the setting when installing the side feeder or the size of paper used in the side feeder is changed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display On Off Description The inner job separator is installed The inner job separator is not installed Initial setting: Off 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. 2. Select On or Off. 4. Turn the main power switch off and on. B5 or Letter). Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 5. 3. Method 1. The setting is set. Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications) A4 (Metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Setting 1. Press the start key. U208 Description Setting the paper size for the side feeder Description Sets the size of paper used in side feeder. Select [Inner Job Separator]. U211 Setting the presence or absence of the job separator Description Sets the presence or absence of the inner job separator. Press the start key.

Press the start key. is displayed. The setting is set. Display On Off Description USB host lock function ON USB host lock function OFF Description Initial setting: Off 4. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display Other SSFC Description The type of IC card is SSFC. Press the start key. Purpose Set according to the preference of the user. U221 Setting the USB host lock function Description Specifies ON/OFF the USB host lock function. The setting is set. U222 Setting the IC card type Description Sets the type of IC card.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop key. 2. Select [Host Lock]. Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To change the type of IC card. The type of IC card is not SSFC. 3. Setting this to ON causes the machine to be unable to recognize the device connected to the USB host. Setting 1. 1-3-110 . Select the item. 2. Initial setting: Other 3. Method 1. Press the start key. Select On or Off.

The setting is set. 2. is displayed. Press the start key. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display Unlock Partial Lock Lock Description Release the lock of the operation from the system menu Partially lock the operation from the system menu Entirely lock the operation from the system menu Description Initial setting: Unlock 3. Select the item. Purpose To restrict operation in the system menu on the operation panel. U223 Operation panel lock Description Sets the operation panel lock function to ON or OFF. Completion Press the stop key. 1-3-111 . Setting 1.

2. Press the start key. 6. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select the [Install] or [UnInstall]. Press the start key. Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory. 5. 4. Setting 1. Enter the maintenance item. 3. 1-3-112 . Turn the main power switch on. [OK] is displayed. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot of the machine. When normally completed. Display Opening Img Call Img Call Msg Top Call Msg Detail Startup screen image Service call screen image Service call screen message Service call screen detail message Description Description Installs the image data or the message data Restores the original image data or message data Description 8.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. Select the item. Purpose Set according to the preference of the user. 9. Installation or uninstallation is started. Display Install UnInstall 7. Completion Press the stop key. U224 Panel sheet extension Description Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.

Metric (Japan) specifications Inch (North America) specifications Metric (Europe) specifications Sweden specifications Description Initial setting: Inch (Inch specifications)/Europe Metric (Metric specifications) 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Display Auto Japan Metric Inch Europe Metric Sweden Description Conforms to destination settings. Press the start key. Select the destination. 1-3-113 . U234 Setting punch destination Description Sets the destination of punch unit of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher. Press the start key. The setting is set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Setting 1. Purpose To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 4. 2.

3. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting using the +/. Press the start key. Select the item to be set. Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Turn the main power switch off and on. 3. The setting is set. Press the start key. Change the setting using the +/. Display Main Tray Middle Tray Description Number of sheets of stack on the main tray Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode Description Setting: [Main Tray] 1. U237 Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the middle tray in 4000-sheet finisher. 1-3-114 . Display 0 1 Description Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 4000 sheets Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 1500 sheets Initial setting: 0 2. Setting: [Middle Tray] 1. Press the start key. Display 0 1 Description Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode: 50 sheets Number of sheets of stack on the middle tray for staple mode: 30 sheets Initial setting: 0 Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non-staple copying: 10 sheets 2. The setting is set. Method 1.keys or numeric keys. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.keys or numeric keys. Turn the main power switch off and on.

The operation starts. Select the item to be checked. Press the start key. 2) is turned on DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 30-sheet stack DF eject release motor (DFERM) drive position 50-sheet stack DF eject release motor (DFERM) fixed drive position 1-3-115 . Display Motor Solenoid Mail Box Booklet Description Checking the motor of the document finisher Checking the solenoid of the document finisher Checking the motor of the mailbox Checking the motor of the center-folding unit Description Method: [Motor] 1. 2) is turned on DF side registration motor 1. 2 (DFSFM1. Display Feed In(H) Feed In(L) Middle(H) Middle(L) Eject(H) Eject(L) Save(H) Save(L) Tray Staple Move Staple Width Test(A3) Width Test(LD) Beat Eject Unlock(HP) Sort Test Eject Unlock(30) Eject Unlock(50) Eject Unlock(Fix) Description DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at high speed DF paper entry motor (DFPEM) is turned on at low speed DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at high speed DF middle motor (DFMM) is turned on at low speed DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at high speed DF eject motor (DFEM) is turned on at low speed DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at high speed DF drum motor (DFDRM) is turned on at low speed DF tray motor (DFTM) is turned on DF slide motor (DFSLM) is turned on DF staple motor (DFSTM) is turned on DF side registration motor 1. U240 Checking the operation of the finisher Description Turns each motor and solenoid of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher ON. Press the start key. 2) is turned on DF paddle motor (DFPDM) is turned on DF eject release motor (DFERM) is turned on to home position DF shift motor 1. 2 (DFSRM1. Purpose To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher. 2. Select the item to be operated. 2 (DFSRM1. Method 1. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

2. Press the start key. Press the start key. Display Sub Tray Save Drum Booklet Punch Three Fold Description DF feedshift solenoid (DFFSSOL) is turned on DF drum solenoid (DFDRSOL) is turned on DF center fold solenoid (DFCFSOL) is turned on Punch solenoid (PUSOL) is turned on CF feedshift solenoid (CFFSSOL) is turned on Method: [Mail Box] 1. Display Conv Branch Description Mailbox drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at paper conveying Mailbox drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at feedshift operation Method: [Booklet] 1. 1-3-116 . 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2 (CFSRM1. The operation starts. 2) is turned on CF side registration motor 1. Select the item to be operated. U240 Display Eject Unlock(Full) Punch Punch Move Description DF eject release motor (DFERM) full-open drive position Punch motor (PUM) is turned on Punch slide motor (PUSLM) is turned on Description Method: [Solenoid] 1. The operation starts. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select the item to be operated. Press the start key. Select the item to be operated. 2. 2 (CFSRM1. is displayed. 2) is turned on CF paper entry motor (CFPEM) is turned on Completion Press the stop key. Display Folding Blade Bundle Up Bundle Down Staple Width Test(A3) Width Test(LD) Feed In Description CF main motor (CFMM) is turned on CF blade motor (CFBM) is turned on CF adjustment motor 2 (CFADM2) is turned on CF adjustment motor 1 (CFADM1) is turned on CF staple motor (CFSTM) is turned on CF side registration motor 1. The operation starts.

2. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected. Press the start key. Select the item to be checked. Purpose To check the operation of each switches and sensors of the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher. Display Front Cover MPT Top Cover Tray U-Limit Tray HP2 Tray Middle Tray L-Limit Tray L-Limit(BL) Tray Top HP Sub Tray Eject Middle Tray Eject Drum Staple HP Middle Tray Width Front HP Width Tail HP Bundle Eject HP DF tray middle sensor (DFTMS) DF tray upper limit sensor (DFTLLS) DF tray center hold sensor (DFTCFS) DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) DF drum sensor (DFDRS) DF slide sensor (DFSLS) DF middle tray sensor (DFMTS) DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) DF top cover switch (DFTCSW) DF tray upper limit sensor (DFTULS) Description DF front cover switch (DFFCSW) 1-3-117 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse. Method 1. Display Finisher Mail Box Booklet Punch Description Checking the switch and sensor of the document finisher Checking the switch and sensor of the mailbox Checking the switch and sensor of the center-folding unit Checking the switch and sensor of the punch unit Method: [Finisher] 1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. U241 Description Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Description Displays the status of each switches and sensors of 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher.

that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse. Display Eject Cover Over Flow1 Over Flow2 Over Flow3 Over Flow4 Over Flow5 Over Flow6 Over Flow7 Motor HP MB eject sensor (MBES) MB cover open/close switch (MBCOCSW) MB overflow sensor 1 (MBOFS1) MB overflow sensor 2 (MBOFS2) MB overflow sensor 3 (MBOFS3) MB overflow sensor 4 (MBOFS4) MB overflow sensor 5 (MBOFS5) MB overflow sensor 6 (MBOFS6) MB overflow sensor 7 (MBOFS7) MB paper entry sensor (MBPES) Description 1-3-118 . Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U241 Display Match Paddle Lead Paddle Shift Front HP Shift Tail HP Shift Unlock HP Sub Tray Full Shift Set Description DF adjustment sensor (DFADS) DF paddle sensor (DFPDS) DF shift sensor 1 (DFSFS1) DF shift sensor 2 (DFSFS2) DF shift release sensor (DFSFRS) DF sub tray full sensor (DFSTFS) DF shift set sensor (DFSFSS) Description Method: [Mail Box] 1. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected.

1-3-119 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse. U241 Description Method: [Booklet] 1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected. Display HP Eject Paper Tray Full Bundle Up HP Bundle Down HP Width Up HP Width Down HP Blade HP Tray Set Left Guide Vertical Feed CF eject sensor (CFES) CF paper sensor (CFPS) CF tray full sensor (CFTFS) CF adjustment sensor 1 (CFADS1) CF adjustment sensor 2 (CFADS2) CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1) CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2) CF blade sensor (CFBLS) CF tray switch (CFTSW) CF set switch (CFSSW) CF left guide switch (CFLGSW) CF paper conveying sensor (CFPCS) Description CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) Method: [Punch] 1. that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. is displayed. Display Punch HP Edge Face1 Edge Face2 Edge Face3 Edge Face4 Tank Tank Full Description Punch home position sensor (PUHPS) Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES) Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES) Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES) Punch paper edge sensor (PUPES) Punch tank set switch (PUTSSW) Punch tank full sensor (PUTFS) Completion Press the stop key. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected.

U243 Description Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors or solenoids in the DP on. Select the item to be operated. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2. 3. is displayed. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop key when operation stops. Method 1. 1-3-120 . Display Feed Motor Conv Motor Rev Motor Lift Motor Rev Press Sol Rev Branch Sol Description DP original feed motor (DPOFM) is turned on DP original conveying motor (DPOCM) is turned on DP switchback motor (DPSBM) is turned on DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on DP pressure solenoid (DPPSOL) is turned on DP feedshift solenoid (DPFSSOL) is turned on 4. press the stop key. To turn each motor off. Press the start key. The operation starts.

Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status. 2. U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP. When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected. Method 1. that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. Purpose To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly. Display Feed Regist Timing CIS Head Tray Set Longitudinal Lift U-Limit Lift L-Limit Cover Open Open Eject Slant DP feed sensor (DPFS) DP registration sensor (DPRS) DP timing sensor (DPTS) DP CIS sensor (DPCS) DP switchback sensor (DPSBS) DP original sensor (DPOS) DP original length switch (DPOLSW) DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) DP lift sensor 2 (DPLS2) DP interlock switch (DPILSW) DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) DP eject sensor (DPES) DP slant sensor (DPSS) Description Description Completion Press the stop key. 1-3-121 . Press the start key.

Change the language using the +/. Purpose To check the messages to be displayed. Method 1. Press the start key.keys. 2. the message corresponding the specified number is displayed. U245 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. Description 1-3-122 . When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed. Completion Press the stop key. Change the message using the cursor up/down keys.

Adjustment of center position timing in the punch mode Adjusts the center position of a punch hole in punch mode if the position is not proper. Adjustment of front/rear shift home position Performed when alighment is lost with the ejected paper Adjusting of front/back stapling home position Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U246 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the 1000-sheet finisher or 4000-sheet finisher. Select the item to set. Purpose Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode. Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration guides to paper. Adjustment of center folding position Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper. Method 1. Adjustment of tri. Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the side registration guides to paper. Display Punch Regist Punch Feed Punch Width Width Front HP Width Tail HP Shift Front HP Shift Tail HP Staple HP Description Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode Adjustment of the center position timing in punch mode Adjustment of front side registration home position Adjustment of rear side registration home position Adjustment of front shift home position Adjustment of rear shift home position Adjustment of front and back stapling home position Description Adjustment of 1000-sheet finisher and 4000-sheet finisher Adjustment of center-folding unit Description 1-3-123 . Select the item to set. Press the start key. Adjustment of booklet stapling position Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.folding position Adjusts the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper. Display Finisher Booklet Method: [Finisher] 1. if furnished. Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.

52 mm If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A. Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-18 3. The value is set. Press the start key. increase the setting value. If the copy paper is Z-folded (sample 2).5 mm (inch) Figure 1-3-19 3.keys or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select [Punch Regist]. Change the setting value using the +/. Description Adjustment of the paper stop timing Setting range -10 to 10 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. Description Adjustment of registration stop timing Setting range -20 to 20 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. 2. Select [Punch Feed]. 2. The value is set. decrease the setting value. decrease the setting value. 1-3-124 .25 mm If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1).keys or numeric keys. U246 Description Setting: [Punch Regist] 1. If the distance is larger than the value A. Setting: [Punch Feed] 1. Change the setting value using the +/. A Preset value A: 13 mm (metric) 9. increase the setting value. Press the start key.

5 mm) Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-20 3. 6. The value is set. Change the setting value using the +/. Change the setting value using the +/. Change the setting value using the +/.keys or numeric keys. 4.keys or numeric keys. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 6.keys or numeric keys.52 mm Adjustment of the punch center position timing -4 to 4 If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine. Setting: [Width Front HP/Width Tail HP] 1. insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides.19 mm 0. Select [Width Front HP] or [Width Tail HP]. Setting: [Shift Front HP/Shift Tail HP] 1. is displayed. The width guides of the middle tray will move to A3-size position. decrease the setting value. Press the stop key. If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine. then [Width Test(A3)]. Press the start key. Pull the middle tray. Press the stop key.19 mm 0. The value is set. U246 Description Setting: [Punch Width] 1. 1-3-125 . is displayed. 2. Description Adjustment of front shift home position Adjustment of rear shift home position Setting range -15 to 15 -15 to 15 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 4. then [Sort Test]. Select [Shift Front HP] or [Shift Tail HP]. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor]. Description Adjustment of front side registration home position Adjustment of rear side registration home position Setting range -15 to 15 -15 to 15 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0. Press the start key. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position. 2. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Motor]. 7. Center line (within ± 0. increase the setting value.19 mm 3. 5.19 mm 3. Repeat the above adjustment until eject paper is properly in position. 5. Select [Punch Width]. Description Setting range Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. Press the start key.

Select the item to set. Method: [Booklet] 1. U246 Description Setting: [Staple HP] 1. Description Setting range Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine (sample 2). The value is set.keys or numeric keys. Change the setting value using the +/. decrease the setting value. Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-21 3.19 mm Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -15 to 15 When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2. increase the setting value. Press the start key. Select [Staple HP]. Display Width Up HP Width Down HP Staple Pos1 Staple Pos2 Staple Pos3 Booklet Pos1 Booklet Pos2 Booklet Pos3 Three Fold Description Adjustment of upper side registration home position Adjustment of lower side registration home position Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger size Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger size Adjustment of tri-folding position 1-3-126 .

32 mm 0. decrease the preset value.keys or numeric keys. Description Adjustment of upper side registration home position Adjustment of lower side registration home position Setting range -15 to 15 -15 to 15 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0. Change the setting value using the +/. then [Width Test(A3)]. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [Booklet]. 1-3-127 . Press the stop key. 2. insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position. Change the setting value using the +/. The value is set. increase the preset value.34 mm 0. U246 Description Setting: [Width Up HP/Width Down HP] 1. The width guides of the center-folding unit will move to A3-size position. Select [Staple Pos1]. 7.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. When staples are placed too far left (sample 2). Setting: [Staple Pos] 1. Press the start key.34 mm 3. Description Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger size Setting range -15 to 15 -15 to 15 -15 to 15 Initial setting 0 0 0 Change in value per step 0. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 5. Pull the center-folding unit. The value is set. Press the start key. 2.keys or numeric keys.32 mm 0.32 mm When staples are placed too far right (sample 1). Reference value: within ± 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-22 3. Select [Width Up HP] or [Width Down HP]. 4. 6. [Staple Pos2] or [Staple Pos3]. is displayed.

keys or numeric keys. B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3 mm A Center line Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-23 3. 2. Description Adjustment of tri-folding position Setting range -15 to 15 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. Select [Three Fold]. Change the setting value using the +/. is displayed. When the centerfold position too far left (sample 2). increase the preset value. Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm A3. [Booklet Pos2] or [Booklet Pos3]. When the tri-fold position too far left (sample 2). Setting: [Three Fold] 1. Completion Press the stop key. Select [Booklet Pos1]. 2. decrease the setting value.32 mm -15 to 15 0 -15 to 15 0 -15 to 15 0 When the centerfold position too far right (sample 1). The value is set.32 mm 0. Reference value A: A4. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-128 . Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/.32 mm When the tri-fold position too far right (sample 1). The value is set. Ledger. increase the preset value.0 ± 2 mm A Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1-3-24 3. Reference value A: 7.keys or numeric keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U246 Description Setting: [Booklet Pos] 1.32 mm 0. decrease the setting value. Description Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger size Setting range Initial Change in setting value per step 0.

Select the paper feed device.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. [Clutch] or [Solenoid] and select the item. U247 Setting the paper feed device Description Turns on motor and clutches of paper feeder device. Select [Execute]. press the stop key. Display Motor Clutch Off On C1 C2 V Feed(H) V Feed(L) Solenoid Cassette1 Cassette2 Description PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on PF pickup solenoid 1 (PFPUSOL1) is turned on PF pickup solenoid 2 (PFPUSOL2) is turned on 2. Press the start key. 4. Press [Motor]. 1-3-129 . Press the start key. 2. The operation starts. Purpose To check the operation of motor and clutches of paper feed device. Method 1. 3. Display 2PF LCF Side Deck SMT Side 2PF Side LCF Paper feeder Large capacity feeder Side feeder SMT paper feeder Side paper feeder Side large capacity feeder Description Description Method: [2PF/Side 2PF] 1. To stop operation.

1-3-130 . Select [Execute]. Method: [SMT] 1. Select [Execute]. The operation starts. To stop operation. Press the start key. 4. To stop operation. Press [Motor].2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. press the stop key. [Clutch] or [Solenoid] and select the item. Select [Execute]. Display Motor Clutch Solenoid Off On C1 Cassette1 Description SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned off SF paper feed motor (SFPFM) is turned on SF paper conveying clutch (SFPCCL) is turned on SF pickup solenoid (PFPUSOL) is turned on 2. Display Motor Clutch Off On C1 C2 V Feed H Feed1 H Feed2 Solenoid Cassette1 Cassette2 Description PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned off PF paper feed motor (PFPFM) is turned on PF paper conveying clutch 1 (PFPCCL1) is turned on PF paper conveying clutch 2 (PFPCCL2) is turned on PF paper conveying clutch 3 (PFPCCL3) is turned on PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) is turned on PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) is turned on PF pickup solenoid 1 (PFPUSOL1) is turned on PF pickup solenoid 2 (PFPUSOL2) is turned on 2. Press the start key. 3. To stop operation. press the stop key. Display Motor Clutch Off On C1 C2 H Feed Solenoid Cassette1 Retard Description SMT paper feed motor (SMTPFM) is turned off SMT paper feed motor (SMTPFM) is turned on SMT paper conveying clutch 1 (SMTPCCL1) is turned on SMT paper conveying clutch 2 (SMTPCCL2) is turned on SMT paper feed clutch (SMTPFCL) is turned on SMT pickup solenoid (SMTPUSOL) is turned on SMT feedshift solenoid (SMTFSSOL) is turned on 2. Press [Motor]. The operation starts. 3. 4. press the stop key. U247 Description Method: [LCF/Side LCF] 1. Method: [Side Deck] 1. [Clutch] or [Solenoid] and select the item. Press the start key. [Clutch] or [Solenoid] and select the item. 3. The operation starts. 4. Press [Motor].

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.Cnt A M. U247 Description Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key.Cnt C M. 2. The setting value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-131 . 3. Checking/clearing the maintenance cycle Description Changes preset values for maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.Cnt HT Description Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit A) Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit B) Preset values for maintenance cycle (kit C) Preset values for automatic grayscale adjustment Setting range 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 U250 4. Purpose Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment is periodically displayed. is displayed. Select the item to be set. Select [Clear]. 2. Clearing 1. is displayed.Cnt B M. Display M. Change the setting using the +.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. The value is set.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key. Setting 1. Completion Press the stop key.

Select [Clear]. Clearing 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Setting 1.Cnt B M. Select the item to be changed. Completion Press the stop key. 2. Purpose To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count.keys or numeric keys.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-132 . Also to clear the count during maintenance service.Cnt A M.Cnt C M. is displayed. Press the start key. 3. Display M. U251 Description Checking/clearing the maintenance counter Description Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment count. Change the setting using the +/. The setting value is cleared. The value is set. Press the start key.Cnt HT Description Count value for maintenance cycle (kit A) Count value for maintenance cycle (kit B) Count value for maintenance cycle (kit C) Automatic grayscale adjustment count Setting range 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 0 to 9999999 4. 2.

4. Press the start key. in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization. * : An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error. Display Japan Metric Inch Europe Metric Asia Pacific Australia China Korea Description Metric (Japan) specifications Inch (North America) specifications Metric (Europe) specifications Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications Australia specifications China specifications Korea specifications Description 3. Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM. 2. Select the destination. Method 1. Turn the main power switch off and on.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination. When errors occurred. Press the start key. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. turn main power switch off then on. and execute initialization using maintenance item U252. Error codes Codes 0001 0002 0020 0040 Entity error Controller error Engine error Scanner error Description 1-3-133 .

according to the preference of the user (copy service provider). 1-3-134 . Setting 1. Completion Press the stop key. Display Full Color Mono Color* B/W Description Count system of full color mode Count system of single color mode Count system of black/white mode Displayed only if the setting of U276 (Setting the copy count mode) is Mode1. Select the count system. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Purpose Used to select.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display SGL(All) DBL(A3/Ledger) DBL(B4) DBL(Folio) Description Single count for all size paper Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger Double count for B4 size or larger Double count for Folio size or larger Initial setting: DBL(A3/Ledger) 4. The setting is set. 3. Select the item to set. 2. U253 Description Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters for every color mode. if A3/Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count). is displayed. Press the start key.

Setting 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the copy count timing. Purpose To be set according to user request. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop key. U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters. 1-3-135 . Turn the main power switch off and on. Press the start key. Display Feed Eject Description When secondary paper feed starts When the paper is ejected Description Initial setting: Eject 3. 4. Press the start key. The setting is set. U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. 3. is displayed. Change the setting value using the numeric keys. The setting is set. Press the start key. Setting 1. 2. Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like.

51” to 36”) Counting for Banner B (915. Display Banner A Banner B Description Counting for Banner A (470.220mm/ 36. 2. Select the mode. 1-3-136 . is displayed. Press the start key. U271 Setting the page count Description Banner counting Purpose To change when modifying counting Banner Setting 1. Select the item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.01” to 48”) Setting range Description 4. is displayed. Press the start key. Display Mode0 Mode1 Description This lets the full color counter count up in single color This lets the single color counter count up in single color Initial setting: Mode 0 3. Press the start key. Purpose To change the charging counter which counts up in single color printing. Change the setting value using the +/. 2. Press the start key.1mm to 1. Completion Press the stop key. The value is set. U276 Setting the copy count mode Description Sets the count mode of single color mode.1mm to 915mm/ 18. The setting is set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Setting 1. 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop key.keys or numeric keys.

Method 1. Purpose To operate when installing the machine.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Perform this to confirm the delivery date. Press the start key. The delivery date is cleared. 2. The delivery date is set. U284 Setting 2 color copy mode Description Sets whether to use 2 color copy mode. Clearing 1. Press the start key. Press the start key. Select [Today]. Completion Press the stop key. day. 1-3-137 . 2. Press the start key. changes the setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose According to user request. 3. 2. is displayed. The setting is set. 3. Setting 1. Press the start key. Select On or Off. U278 Setting the delivery date Description Enter delivery date in month. Display On Off Description 2 color copy mode is enabled 2 color copy mode is disabled Description Initial setting: Off If On is selected. 2-color copy will be displayed on the color function screen. is displayed. Select [Clear]. and year.

U285 Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the print coverage report on reporting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. changes the setting. 2. Purpose According to user request. 2. Display On Off Description Displays the print coverage Not to display the print coverage Description Initial setting: On 3. 1-3-138 . Completion Press the stop key. Select On or Off.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. is displayed. Setting 1. Display On Off Description Displays the abnormal temperature and humidity warning Not to display the abnormal temperature and humidity warning Initial setting: On 3. is displayed. Purpose According to user request. Press the start key. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The setting is set. Select On or Off. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop key. changes the setting. Setting 1. The setting is set. U323 Setting abnormal temperature and humidity warning Description Specify whether or not a notice is displayed on the operation panel when abnormal temperature and humidity is detected.

Completion Press the stop key. 1-3-139 . is displayed. Select the item to set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U325 Setting the paper interval Description Determines the interval between pages and the toner replenishment amount when printing pages with high print coverage. Change the setting value using the +/. However. 2. Display On Off Description Paper interval control is performed Paper interval control is not performed Description Paper interval control ON/OFF setting Setting mode of the paper interval control Description Initial setting: On 2. if you prefer to give priority to printing speed.keys or numeric keys. The value is set. Press the start key. Press the start key. Press the start key. Setting: [Mode] 1. Display Interval Mode Setting: [Interval] 1. change the setting to 5. Select On or Off. The setting is set. Method 1. Purpose Modify the settings only if a spotted background or uneven density appears when printing pages with high print coverage. Display Mode Description Paper interval control mode when printing high density original continuously Setting range 1 to 10 1 Initial setting If a spotted background appears when printing pages with high print coverage. change the setting to 4.

Select the item to set. Display Cnt Description Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication ( x 1000 sheets) Setting range 0 to 255 8 Initial setting When setting is 0. Display On Off Description Displays the cleaning guidance Not to display the cleaning guidance Description Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication Initial setting: On 2.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key. Press the start key. is displayed. U326 Description Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display Black Line Mode Black Line Cnt Setting: [Black Line Mode] 1. Select On or Off. The setting is set. 2. the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected. Method 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Setting: [Black Line Cnt] 1. 1-3-140 . Completion Press the stop key. The value is set. Change the setting value using the +/. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP. 2. Press the start key.

Display On Off Cassette heater ON Cassette heater OFF Description Description Initial setting: Off 3. Purpose To change the setting according to the machine installation environment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Select On or Off. The setting is set. Setting 1. U327 Setting the cassette heater control Description Sets the cassette heater control. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop key. 2. 1-3-141 .

Display Mode Coverage(L) Coverage(M) Setting: [Mode] 1.0 1. Select the item to set. Press the start key. The setting is set. Select the mode. Display Coverage(L) Coverage(M) Description Size coefficient (Low coverage) Size coefficient (Middle coverage) Setting range 0.0 3. Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user simulation. Select the item. The value is set. Display 0 1 Full-color count display Color coverage count display Description Description Toggling full-color count and color coverage count display Size coefficient (Low coverage) Size coefficient (Middle coverage) Description Initial setting: 0 2. U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. 2.1 to 100 Initial setting 1. Method 1. Completion Press the stop key. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed.1 to 100 0. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Setting: [Coverage(L)/(M)] 1. 1-3-142 . Change the setting using the +/-keys or numeric keys. Press the start key.

(recommended value) Image : +190 Image(Detaile) : +1 3. Setting range 0 to 400 (MB) 0 0 to 400 (MB) 0 Initial setting Description Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Purpose Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct printing occurs. Change the setting using the +/. Press the start key. The value is set. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key. 1-3-143 . Setting 1. Area temporarily used to hold downloaded font and other data. Display Image Image(Detail) Description Area temporarily used to create output image. Supplement The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large. U340 Setting the applied mode Description Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a working area. 4.

Press the start key. Select the paper feed location for the printer. 1-3-144 . Completion Press the stop key. The setting is set. A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output. Press the start key. Display Cassette1 Cassette2 Cassette3 Cassette4 Cassette5 Cassette6 Cassette7 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder) Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder) Cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder/side feeder) Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder) Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder) Description When an optional paper feed device is not installed. Two or more cassette can be selected. Method 1. is displayed. U341 Description Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output (only if a printer kit is installed).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. the corresponding count is not displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. 2. Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output.

by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends. U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached. is displayed. Setting 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. U343 Description Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy. Completion Press the stop key. The setting is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value. Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.keys or numeric keys. Display Cnt Description Time for maintenance due indication (Remaining number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends) Setting range 0 to 9999 0 Initial setting 3. Display On Off Duplex copy Simplex copy Description Initial setting: Off 3. 2. Press the start key. is displayed. 1-3-145 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. Select On or Off. Press the start key. Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication. Press the start key. The value is set. Setting 1. the message is displayed. Change the setting using the +/.

0 +1.1-3-147) U404 (P.1 mm 0. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the system menu key. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.5 mm) Figure 1-3-25 7.0 Initial Change in setting value per step 4. Increasing the value makes the margin wider. Press the start key to output a test pattern. The value is set.1 mm 0.0 0. Press the system menu key.5 ± 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 0. Printer leading edge margin (4.1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key.0/-0.0 to 10.5 mm) Printer trailing edge margin (2. 2.0 3.0/-0.0 +1.0 to 10. U402 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment.5 mm) Printer left margin (2. 1-3-146 .0 3. is displayed. 4. Change the setting value using the +/. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.9 0. 3.0 3. If the image is still incorrect. Press the start key. and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.0/-0. Select the item to be adjusted.5 mm) Printer right margin (2.keys or numeric keys. U402 U403 (P. Adjustment 1.0 to 10. Display Lead A Margin C Margin Trail Description Printer leading edge margin Printer left margin Printer right margin Printer trailing edge margin Setting range 0.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 5. Press the start key.1 mm Description 6.1 mm 0.0 +1.

0 mm) Scanner trailing edge margin (3.0 to 10.0 mm) Figure 1-3-26 7.0 ± 2. The value is set.0 to 10.0 0. and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.5 mm 6.5 +1.5/-2.5 mm) Scanner left margin (2.0 2. Press the start key.0 2. Increasing the value makes the margin wider. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. Display A Margin B Margin C Margin D Margin Description Scanner left margin Scanner leading edge margin Scanner right margin Scanner trailing edge margin Setting range 0. U403 U404 (P.0 2.0 to 10.keys or numeric keys.0 Initial Change in setting value per step 2. Adjustment 1.0 0. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. 4.5/-2.0 to 10. Press the system menu key.0 mm) Scanner right margin (2. appears.0 0. Scanner leading edge margin (3.0 0. 5. 3. If the image is still incorrect. Press the start key.5 mm 0.5 mm 0.0 ± 2.5 +1.1-3-148) Completion Press the stop key. Change the setting value using the +/.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.5 mm 0. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Press the system menu key. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. U403 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass. 1-3-147 . perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. Select the item to be adjusted.

Display A Margin B Margin C Margin D Margin A Margin (Back) B Margin (Back) C Margin (Back) D Margin (Back) Description DP left margin DP leading edge margin DP right margin DP trailing edge margin DP left margin (second side) DP leading edge margin (second side) DP right margin (second side) DP trailing edge margin (second side) Setting range 0.0 0. 2.5 mm 0.0 0.1-3-147) U404 Adjustment 1.0 2.5 mm 0.0 to 10.0 to 10. Press the system menu key.0 0.0 2.0 0.5 mm 0. Caution Before making this adjustment.0 to 10.0 0.5 mm 0.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 3.0 to 10.5 mm 0. U404 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP. Select the item to be adjusted.0 2.0 2. 4.0 to 10.5 mm * : Dual scan DP only 1-3-148 .0 2.0 2.0 2.0 to 10. Press the start key.5 mm 0.0 0.0 to 10. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.0 Initial Change in setting value per step 2.5 mm 0.0 0. 5.0 to 10.1-3-146) U403 (P. Press the system menu key. ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U402 (P.0 0.

U404 Description 6.0 ± 1. is displayed.5 mm) DP left margin (2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.0 mm) DP right margin (2.0 ± 1.0 ± 1. Press the start key. 1-3-149 . Completion Press the stop key. The value is set.0 mm) DP trailing edge margin (2.0 mm) Figure 1-3-27 7. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. DP leading edge margin (3. Increasing the value makes the margin wider. and decreasing it makes the margin narrower. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys.0 ± 1.

1-3-150 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. decrease the value.1-3-58) U407 Adjustment 1. Press the system menu key. U407 Description Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying. ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 (P.1-3-33) U404 (P. Purpose Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Caution Before making this adjustment. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. 2.1-3-147) U071 (P. Press the start key. For copy example 1. is displayed.1-3-148) U402 (P. Press the start key.keys or numeric keys. 4. For copy example 2. 3.1 mm 5. Completion Press the stop key. increase the value. Press the system menu key.1-3-146) U066 (P. Change the setting value using the +/. Display Adj Data Description Leading edge registration for memory image printing Setting range -47 to 47 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0. The value is set. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-28 6.1-3-53) U403 (P.

5. 2. 2. Select the item. 8. 2 and 3 are outputted. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Also when an offset occurs. Purpose Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped. 1-3-151 . Place the output test pattern 2 as the original. Place the output test pattern 3 as the original. Press the start key. Also the color table is changed when an offset occurs. Display Normal Mode Single Mode Setting Table Description Executing the automatic adjustment of the halftone (continuous adjustment) Executing the automatic adjustment of the halftone (individual adjustment) Switching the color table Description Method: [Normal Mode] 1. Place the output test pattern 1 as the original. the setting of color table is changed to table2. Adjustment is made (first time). 3. 9. Select [Normal Mode]. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Adjustment is made (third time). [Finish] is displayed. 6. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 3 and set them. Method 1. Press the start key. Press the start key. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 1 and set them. When normally completed. Adjustment is made (second time). 7. 4. Press the start key. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern 2 and set them. A test patterns 1. U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Description Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform either automatic adjustment of the halftone or the ID correction operation. error code is displayed.

Press the start key. error code is displayed. Method: [Setting Table] 1. Place the output test pattern as the original. Press the start key. When normally completed. [Finish] is displayed. Completion Press the stop key. 3. Select the item. Display Table1 Table2 Table3 Normal color table Color tables for improving reproduction of characters at black and white printing More fidelity than Table2 Description Initial setting: Table1 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U410 Error codes Codes S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 SFFF Description Patch not detected Original deviation in the main scanning direction Original deviation in the auxiliary scanning direction Original inclination error Original type error Scanner other error Codes E001 E002 EFFF C001 C100 C200 CFFF Description Engine status error Engine sensor error Engine other error Controller error Adjustment value error Adjustment value error Controller other error Description Method: [Single Mode] 1. Display AM FM B/W Description Individual screen adjustment Adjustment depending on error diffusions Adjustment depending on Black and white 2. 5. Adjustment is made.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-152 . A test pattern is outputted. is displayed. The setting is set. 4. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern and set them. Select the item. Press the start key.

Method 1. 1-3-153 . 6. 2. 3. 5. Select the item. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the platen. U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Select the item. Select [Table (Chart1)]. Select [Target]. Press the start key. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425. Perform adjustments using a new test charrt (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB and/or LED PWB. 4. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display Table (Chart1) DP FaceUp (Chart1) DP FaceDown (Chart1) Table (Chart2) DP FaceUp (Chart2) DP FaceDown (Chart2) Target DP Auto Adj Description Automatic adjustment in the scanner section (chart 1) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (first side) (chart 1) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) (chart 1) Automatic adjustment in the scanner section (chart 2) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (first side) (chart 2) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) (chart 2) Set-up for obtaining the target value Automatic adjustment of automatic document processor using the chart printed from the machine Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) 7505000005 7505000005 7505000005 302FZ56990 302AC68243 302AC68243/ 303JX57010/ 303JX57020 Description Method: [Table (Chart1)] To manually enter the target value 1. Enter maintenance item U411. Select [U425] and press the start key.

leading edge timing and center line 1-3-154 . Select [Input]. Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart1)] To manually enter the target value 1. 5. Press the start key. 2. error code is displayed and operation stops. Select [Target]. Select the item. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425. Enter maintenance item U411. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Select [Auto] and press the start key. 4. 6. Auto adjustment starts. 6. Select [Input]. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed. Select [Target]. 4. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the platen. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]. Select [Target]. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning. 5. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face up. leading edge timing and center line Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter Executing the adjustment for MTF filter Executing the adjustment for input gamma Executing the adjustment for matrix 7. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]. 3. U411 Description To manually enter the target value 1. 4. 3. Display All LED/AGC White Input C.A. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face up. Enter maintenance item U411. 2. Select [Auto] and press the start key. Should this happen. 6. Display Input Description Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first side) for magnification. Select [U425] and press the start key. To manually enter the target value 1. 2. [OK] is displayed. MTF Gamma Matrix Description Executing the all scanner adjustment Executing the adjustment for LED light quantity/AGC Executing the white reference compensation coefficient Executing the adjustment for magnification. Enter maintenance item U411. 3. 5.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select [Table (Chart1)].

Should this happen. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. 1-3-155 . Display All Description Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for magnification. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face down. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]. 2. [OK] is displayed. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning. U411 Description 7.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 3. Select [U425] and press the start key. error code is displayed and operation stops. 2. Select [All]. 6. Auto adjustment starts. 5. Select [All]. Should this happen. Press the start key. Select [Auto] and press the start key. input gamma and matrix 7. 4. MTF filter. Auto adjustment starts. 6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]. Enter maintenance item U411. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425. 3. [OK] is displayed. Press the start key. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Select [Target]. 4. Select [Target]. leading edge timing. error code is displayed and operation stops. 5. center line. Enter maintenance item U411. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning. Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart1)] To manually enter the target value 1. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face down. To manually enter the target value 1. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed.

error code is displayed and operation stops. Press the start key. Should this happen. 5. Display All Input C. Enter maintenance item U411. [OK] is displayed. 5. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning. 2. 7. 5 mm 149 ± 1 mm 74 ± 1 mm Figure 1-3-29 3. Enter maintenance item U411. 3. Select [U425] and press the start key. Cut the trailing edge of the original. leading edge timing and center line 1-3-156 . Select [Target].2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. leading edge timing and center line Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter Executing the adjustment for MTF filter Executing the adjustment for input gamma Executing the adjustment for matrix 8. 4. 7. Select the item. 6. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425. Select [INPUT]. 2. Select [U425] and press the start key. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)] 1. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed. and auxiliary scanning of the specified original (P/ N: 302AC68243) and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425. 6. Display Input Description Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first side) for magnification. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) on the DP. Select [Target]. Set a specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) on the platen. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart2)]. Measure the leading edge. main scanning. MTF Gamma Matrix Description Executing the all scanner adjustment Executing the adjustment for magnification.A. 4. U411 Description Method: [Table (Chart2)] 1. Auto adjustment starts. Select [Table (Chart2)].

Select [Matrix]. 3. When [ALL] is selected. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC6824) on the DP face down. 2. [OK] is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. input gamma and matrix Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for magnification. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning. leading edge timing and center line Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for MTF filter and input gamma Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for matrix Original to be used for adjustment (P/N) 302AC68243/ 303JX57010/ 303JX57020 302AC68243 Input MTF/Gamma 303JX57010 Matrix 303JX57020 [Input] 1. Press the start key. Select [Input]. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) on the DP face down. Select [MTF/Gamma]. Press the start key. MTF filter. 2. Auto adjustment starts. Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart2)] 1. Press the start key. When normally completed. U411 Description 8. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed. Auto adjustment starts. 2. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. and press the start key. 2. and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order on the top of the original. [MTF/Gamma] and [Matrix] can be executed at once. [MTF/Gamma] 1. and then press the start key. Should this happen. leading edge timing. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) on the DP face down. When adjusting. place the three specified originals on the DP face down. [OK] is displayed. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the platen. 3. 3. error code is displayed and operation stops. Display All Description Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for magnification. 3. Auto adjustment starts. [Matrix] 1. center line. 1-3-157 . and press the start key. the adjustment of [Input]. Auto adjustment starts. Select the item. Press the start key. Set the original 303JX57020. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57020) on the platen.

Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up. error code is displayed and operation stops. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.5 error Main scanning direction skew 1. [OK] is displayed. Press the start key. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. [OK] is displayed. * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed. Should this happen. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method: [DP Auto Adj] 1. 5. error code is displayed and operation stops. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Error Codes Codes S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 S006 S007 S008 SFFF C001 CFFF Description Black band is not detected (main scanning direction far end) Black band is not detected (main scanning direction near end) Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction leading edge) Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge) Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1.5 error Original error (detection of reverse original paper) Original error (page mismatch) Scanner other error Controller error Controller other error Completion Press the stop key. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key. 2. is displayed. 1-3-158 . 6. Auto adjustment of first side starts.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 3. U411 Description * : When automatic adjustment has normally completed. determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment. Auto adjustment of second side starts. Should this happen. 4. Press the start key. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face down.

Press the start key. Press the start key. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the original. Press the start key. Repeat steps 4 and 9. and press the start key. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the original. Method 1. Retry (1st time) 10. The correction result is checked. 7. If the correction is not completed normally. Select [Default Value]. (1st sheet) 2. After the correction is completed. the correction starts. error code is displayed. Press the start key. Purpose To perform when replacing the drum unit or laser scanner unit. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. the correction starts. When normally completed. A test pattern is outputted. Repeat steps 4 and 9. [Retry] is displayed. U412 Adjusting the uneven density Description Adjusts the uneven developer/transfer density in the drum axis direction by scanning directly the density distribution of test pattern with the scanner and adjusting LSU light quantity. Retry (2nd time) 12. (3rd sheet) 8. Display Normal Mode On/Off Config Description Executing the uneven density correction Uneven density correction ON/OFF setting Description Method: [Normal Mode] 1. 11. 6. 3. [Retry] is displayed. After the correction is completed. (2nd sheet) A test pattern is outputted with light quantity setting lower than the 1st test pattern by 20%. and press the start key. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the output test pattern and place as the original. 1-3-159 . If the correction is not completed normally. 4. [OK] is displayed. A test pattern is outputted. 9. A test pattern is outputted with the initial light quantity setting. 13. 5. Select the item. If a problem occurs during auto correction.

2. The setting is set. Select On or Off. Display On Off Description Uneven density correction is enabled Uneven density correction is disabled ON is automatically set after the correction is complete. Completion Press the stop key. is displayed. 1-3-160 . Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U412 Error codes Codes S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 SFFF Description Patch not detected Original deviation in the main scanning direction Original deviation in the auxiliary scanning direction Original inclination error Original type error Scanner other error Codes E001 E002 E003 E004 EFFF C001 CFFF Description Engine status error Spotted background error Density error Uneven density error Engine other error Controller error Controller other error Description Setting: [On/Off Config] 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

When normally completed. [OK] is displayed. magnification and margin. 6. Adjustment for leading edge timing. Set the output test pattern as the original. Press the start key. Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine. Auto adjustment starts. Method 1. A test pattern is outputted 4. 2. Error Codes Codes S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 S006 S007 S008 SFFF C101 C102 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C108 CFFF Description Black band is not detected (main scanning direction far end) Black band is not detected (main scanning direction near end) Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction leading edge) Black band is not detected (auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge) Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Select [Execute]. error code is displayed. Press the start key. is displayed.5 error Original error (detection of reverse original paper) Original error (page mismatch) Scanner other error Adjustment value error (main scanning direction magnification) Adjustment value error (auxiliary scanning direction magnification) Adjustment value error (leading edge timing) Adjustment value error (center line) Adjustment value error (B margin) Adjustment value error (A margin) Adjustment value error (C margin) Adjustment value error (D margin) Controller other error Completion Press the stop key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.5 error Main scanning direction skew 1. 1-3-161 . Press the start key. 3. 5. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. center line. U415 Description Adjusting the print position automatically Description Automatically adjusts timings at the print engine.

Press the start key. Display White Black Gray1 Gray2 Gray3 C M Y R G B Adjust Original 3.0 Description Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions Description Chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) Chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990) Description 4. Select the item to be set. Display Chart1 Chart2 Method: [Chart1] 1. Select the chart to be used. Press the start key. Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.0 to 100. Select the item to be set. Method 1.0 -200. Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the +/. 5. Display L a b Description Setting the L value Setting the a value Setting the b value Setting range 0. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.keys or numeric keys.0 -200.0 to 200.0 to 200. Press the start key. The value is set. U425 Setting the target Description Enters the lab values that is indicated on the back of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment. 1-3-162 .

302K357010 Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005) Black belt 3 Figure 1-3-30 1-3-163 . Press the start key. 7. Press the start key. B and C.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.5mm Black belt 1 B 267mm C Leading edge 15mm F Black belt 2 D E Left edge [Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3 [Dist2] = F [Dist3] = D/2+E/2 COLOR SCANNER CHART A4 No. B (148. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A (30 mm from the left edge). 6. 5. 3. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F. 1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge). The value is set. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2) 8. 9. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist1]. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3) 2. respectively. Enter the values using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist2]. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the original at D and E. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Dist3]. 4. The value is set. U425 Description Setting: [Adjust Original] 1. Press the start key. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A. respectively. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F (15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1). 30mm A 148. The value is set.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left edge).

1-3-164 .0 -200. Display L a b Description Setting the L value Setting the a value Setting the b value Setting range 0. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The value is set. Display CCD DP CIS Method: [CCD] 1.0 to 200. Select the item to be set. Select the item to be set.0 Description Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N300 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions Description Entering the target values of the chart (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment Entering the measurement value of the chart (P/N: 302AC68243) used for adjustment Execution is not required Description 3.0 to 200. 4.keys or numeric keys.0 -200. 2. Display N850 N500 N300 C M Y R G B Adjust Original 2. Select the item. U425 Method: [Chart2] 1. Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the +/. Press the start key.0 to 100.

Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Horezon]. B and C.5 mm B 267 mm C 35 mm D Black belt (b) Black belt (c) 110 mm E G [Vertical] = ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2 [Horizon] = ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2 185 mm [Lead] = G F Original for adjustment (P/N: 302FZ56990) Figure 1-3-31 1-3-165 . 8.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 7. 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2 5. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Vertical]. 4. Press the start key. Press the start key. 3.5 mm from the leading edge) and C (267 mm from the leading edge). Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D (35 mm from the left edge). 6. E and F. Leading edge Left edge 30 mm A Black belt (a) 148. The value is set. B (148. The value is set. Measurement procedure 1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A (30 mm from the leading edge). 2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2 2. 9. Measure the length (G) from the edge of the black belt (b) to edge of the black belt (c) of the original. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A. U425 Description Setting: [Adjust Original] 1. respectively. The value is set. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Lead]. Press the start key. respectively. E (110 mm from the left edge) and F (185 mm from the left edge).

6. Enter the measured value using the +/.keys in [Lead]. 4. Enter the measured value using the +/. Enter the measured value using the +/. 7. 1-3-166 . 3. Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge (inside) to the black belt of trailing edge (inside) of the original at C. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at A. U425 Description Setting: [DP] 1. B A C Original for adjustment (P/N: 302AC68243) Figure 1-3-32 Completion Press the stop key.keys in [Horizon]. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at B. The value is set. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. 5.keys in [Vertical]. Press the start key.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display Text+Photo Photo Photo/Printout Text Graphics/Map Copy/Printout Description Density of each color in the text & photo mode Density of each color in the photo mode Density of each color in the printed photo mode Density of each color in the text mode Density of each color in the map mode Density of each color in the printed document mode Description Setting 1. Press the start key. The value is set. 2. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key). Method 1.keys or numeric keys. Display C M Y K Description Value of the cyan setting Value of the magenta setting Value of the yellow setting Value of the black setting Setting range -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) -5 to 5 (0 to 10*) 0 0 0 0 Initial setting *: When selecting [Copy/Printout] Increasing the value darkens the density and decreasing it lightens the density. 1-3-167 . Select the image quality mode. Select the item to be set. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting value using the +/. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Purpose To change the balance for each color. 3. Completion Press the stop key. U429 Setting the offset for the color balance Description Displays and changes the density for each color during copying in the various image quality modes. 2. Press the start key.

this allows individual settings for calibration depending on the user preferences. Method 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the item to be set. Executing the calibration Description Driving Time Timing Target Value Print Rate(B/W) Calib Setting: [Permission] 1. Display Permission Time Interval Mode On/Sleep Out AP/NE Leaving Time Description Setting to turn calibration on/off Setting the interval time of calibration after printing Setting the color print execution mode Setting execution parameters for calibration when powered up or reverted from auto-sleep Paper interval calibration ON/OFF setting at the time of calibration/near end after toner feed Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry out calibration based on the sleep time when the machine recovers from the sleep mode Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry out paper interval calibration based on the driving time during printing Setting the standard time for judging whether or not to carry out calibration based on the continuous print driving time during printing Setting the sensor target values for toner thick layer calibration and light amount calibration Setting the proportion of black/white printing at which black/ white calibration is executed during color printing. Display On Off Description Turns calibration ON Turns calibration OFF Initial setting: On 2. Press the start key. Purpose To restrict calibration when poor image quality is generated. 1-3-168 . Press the start key. 2. U464 Setting the ID correction operation Description Turns ID correction (calibration) on or off. The setting is set. this allows individual settings for calibration operation. To perform the calibration when replacing the maintenance kit. Select On or Off. Also. Also.

Setting: [Mode] 1.keys or numeric keys. Display On Off Description Executes calibration if fuser temperature is less than 50°C/ 122°F at power-up or recovery from auto sleep mode Executes calibration regardless of fuser temperature at powerup or recovery from auto sleep mode Initial setting: On 2. The value is set. Setting: [AP/NE] 1. Press the start key. Select On or Off. Change the setting value using the +/. The setting is set. The setting is set. Setting: [On/Sleep Out] 1. 1-3-169 . The setting is set. Select On or Off.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the item. Press the start key. Press the start key. Press the start key. U464 Description Setting: [Time Interval] 1. Display Time(sec) Description Setting the interval time of calibration Setting range 0 to 9999 (s) Initial setting 480 2. Display On Off Description Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end after toner feed is carried out Paper interval calibration at the time of calibration/near end after toner feed is not carried out Initial setting: On 2. Display Short Normal Long Custom Auto Description Setting the color print execution mode: short Setting the color print execution mode: normal Setting the color print execution mode: long Setting the color print execution mode: custom Setting the color print execution mode: auto Initial setting: 2.

Setting: [Timing] 1. Setting: [Driving Time] 1. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/. Setting: [Target Value] 1.keys. Display Time(sec) Description Setting range Initial setting 1800 Setting the drive standard time of con.300 to 3600 (s) tinuous print 2.keys or numeric keys. Select the item. The value is set. 1-3-170 . The value is set. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the +/.keys or numeric keys.keys. Display Time(min) Description Setting the standard time of sleep mode Setting range 0 to 480 (min) Initial setting 60 2. Change the setting value using the +/. Press the start key. 2. The value is set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Change the setting value using the +/. Press the start key. Display Time(sec) Description Setting the drive standard time Setting range 300 to 3000 (s) Initial setting 600 2. U464 Description Setting: [Leaving Time] 1. The value is set. Display Thickness(C) Thickness(M) Thickness(Y) Thickness(K) Gamma(C) Gamma(M) Gamma(Y) Gamma(K) Description Toner thick layer calibration (cyan) Toner thick layer calibration (magenta) Toner thick layer calibration (yellow) Bias for addition in toner thick layer calibration (black) Light amount calibration (cyan) Light amount calibration (magenta) Light amount calibration (yellow) Light amount calibration (black) Setting range 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 -100 to +100 0 to 500 0 to 500 0 to 500 0 to 500 Initial setting 500 500 500 10 300 300 300 300 3.

Change the setting value using the +/. Method: [Calib] 1. The value is set. Select the item to be reference. Display Threshold Description Proportion of black/white printing Setting range 0 to 100 (%) Initial setting 50 2. Display Before(C) Before(M) Before(Y) Before(Y) After(C) After(M) After(Y) After(K) Description Developer bias control value for cyan before ID correction Developer bias control value for magenta before ID correction Developer bias control value for yellow before ID correction Developer bias control value for black before ID correction Developer bias control value for cyan after ID correction Developer bias control value for magenta after ID correction Developer bias control value for yellow after ID correction Developer bias control value for black after ID correction 1-3-171 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. Method 1. Select [TCOUNT]. Calibration is executed. Press the start key. 2. is displayed. The current value is displayed. Purpose To check the corresponding data. Select [Execute]. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.keys or numeric keys. Display TCONT Laser Power Bias Calib T7 CTD Description Developer bias control value after ID correction Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration T7 control value Displaying: [TCOUNT] 1. U465 Data reference for ID correction Description References the data related to ID correction. U464 Description Setting: [Print Rate(B/W)] 1.

Display C M Y K T7 control value (cyan) T7 control value (magenta) T7 control value (yellow) T7 control value (black) Description Completion Press the stop key. 1-3-172 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select [Bias Calib]. Display C M Y K Description Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (cyan) Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (magenta) Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (yellow) Scaling factor to the value determined in light amount calibration (black) Displaying: [Bias Calib] 1. U465 Description Displaying: [Laser Power] 1. Select [Laser Power]. The current value is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. The current value is displayed. The current value is displayed. Select [T7 CTD]. Display C M Y K Description Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan) Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (magenta) Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (yellow) Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (black) Displaying: [T7 CTD] 1.

determines the conditions by which color registration correction is executed depending on the LSU temperature. is displayed. Purpose If color variance is uneven due to a sensor failure. etc. Display On Off Description Enables the transfer belt speed correction operation. Select On or Off. Press the start key. The setting is set. Initial setting: On 2. Completion Press the stop key. The value is set. Also. Press the start key. Select the item to be set.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Disables the color registration correction operation. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. turn this off and temporarily make a manual adjustment. Select On or Off. Press the start key. Setting: [Timing] 1. Display Color Regist Belt Speed Timing Description Setting the color registration correction operation Setting the transfer belt speed correction operation After the previous correction is executed. Disables the transfer belt speed correction operation. The setting is set.. 2. Setting: [Color Regist] 1. 1-3-173 . Setting: [Belt Speed] 1.keys or numeric keys. Press the start key. Display On Off Description Enables the color registration correction operation. Change the setting value using the +/. Initial setting: On 2. Display Timing Description Conditions for execution depending on the LSU temperature variation Setting range 2 to 10 Initial setting 10 2. U467 Description Setting the color registration adjustment Description Sets the color registration adjustment and transfer belt speed correction. Method 1. color registration is compensated as the LSU temperature varies by the value determined.

The current value is displayed. Select the item to be reference. U468 Checking the color registration data Description Displays the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data. Select [Manual(C)].2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The current value is displayed. Display V Correction Auto(C) Auto(M) Auto(Y) Manual(C) Manual(M) Manual(Y) Description Display the transfer speed adjustment value Display the auto color registration adjustment value for cyan Display the auto color registration adjustment value for magenta Display the auto color registration adjustment value for yellow Display the manual color registration adjustment value for cyan Display the manual color registration adjustment value for magenta Display the manual color registration adjustment value for yellow Description Displaying: [V Correction] 1. Press the start key. [Auto(M)] or [Auto(Y)]. Display Horizon Vertical Magnification Description Manual color registration adjustment value of the main scanning direction Manual color registration adjustment value of the auxiliary scanning direction Manual color registration adjustment value of the magnification 1-3-174 . Display Speed Status transfer speed transfer speed adjustment value Description Displaying: [Auto(C)/Auto(M)/Auto(Y)] 1. Select [V Correction]. Select [Auto(C)]. 2. The current value is displayed. Display Horizon Vertical Magnification Description Auto color registration adjustment value of the main scanning direction Auto color registration adjustment value of the auxiliary scanning direction Auto color registration adjustment value of the magnification Displaying: [Manual(C)/Manual(M)/Manual(Y)] 1. Purpose To check the corresponding data. Method 1. [Manual((M)] or [Manual((Y)].

Set the output chart for adjustment as the original. 6. 4. Press the start key. Purpose To perform when replacing the maintenance kit or laser scanner unit. Chart for adjustment Figure 1-3-33 1-3-175 . Select [Print]. 3. Adjusting the color registration Description Performs the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction. Press the start key. Select [Execute]. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. error code is displayed. Method 1. A chart for adjustment is outputted. If a problem occurs during auto adjustment. Press the start key. 2. Select the item. Display Auto Manual Belt Initialize Description Executing the auto color registration correction Executing the manual color registration correction Executing the transfer belt speed correction U469 Method: [Auto] 1. When normally completed. Color registration correction starts. 2. U468 Description Completion Press the stop key. [OK] is displayed. 5.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 3. U469 Error codes Codes S001 S002 S003 Description Patch not detected Original deviation in the main scanning direction Original deviation in the auxiliary scanning direction Codes S004 S005 SFFF CFFF Description Original inclination error Original type error Scanner other error Controller other error Description Method: [Manual] 1. Press the start key. Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A. Press the start key. The scale must be corresponding within the range of "A" from "1". 5. Read figures at MH-1 to 7/CH-1 to 7/YH-1 to 7 and MV-3/CV-3/YV-3 of the reference chart and enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M/C/Y fine lines. 2. Print a chart for adjustment. Select [Print]. Color registration correction starts. 4. Select [Regist]. Chart for adjustment Figure 1-3-34 (example) When a red bar exactly coincides with B. The value is set. 6. 7. 8. using the # key or * key. Press the start key after all values have been entered. enter B as a value. Figure 1-3-35 1-3-176 . A chart for adjustment is outputted.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Setting: [Cycle] 1. is displayed. is displayed.keys. Display Cycle Description Cleaning cycle Setting range 0 to 5000 Initial setting 1000 The setting can be changed by 1000 per step. Press the start key. 1-3-177 . Also. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. Select [Execute]. U474 Checking LSU cleaning operation Description Provides cleaning LSU by means of the LSU cleaning motor. 2. 2. The value is set. Change the setting value using +/. the cleaning cycle can be adjusted. Press the start key. Select the item. Press the start key. Cleaning the LSU slit glass. 2. Press the start key. Transfer belt speed correction starts. Display Execute Cycle Description Executing the cleaning operation Setting the cleaning cycle Method: [Execute] 1. Completion Press the stop key. U469 Description Method: [Belt Initialize] 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop key.

Purpose To change the detection level when the confidential document guard is not printed well for detection in scanning. Method 1. Detection PDF Rotation Description Confidential document guard detection level Processing the rotation of PDF images Description Setting: [Conf. 2. Press the start key. changes the process of how PDF images are rotated. Select the item. is displayed. The value is set. Also. sets the process PDF images are rotated. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display Conf. The value is set.keys or numeric keys. U485 Setting the image processing mode Description Sets the detection level for scanning printed matter outputted with the confidential document guard function. Change the setting value using +/. A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection. Also. Display Conf. Doc. Doc. Change the setting value using +/. 1-3-178 . Doc.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Detection] 1. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. Display 0 1 Description Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter Assigns the image rotation with the actual image Initial setting: 0 2. Setting: [PDF Rotation] 1. Press the start key. Detection Description Confidential document guard detection level Setting range 1 to 5 1 Initial setting A smaller value raises the detection sensitivity but increases the possibility of false detection.keys or numeric keys. 2.

sets operation mode after a color document is detected. 1-3-179 . The setting is set. Purpose To ensure productivity when copying color and B/W documents in ACS mode. 2. However. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. and yellow color developer units even when there is a B/W original after a color original. magenta. selecting Mode3 will increase the maintenance count for cyan. Completion Press the stop key. is displayed. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U486 Description Setting color/black and white operation mode Description When color and B/W documents are mixed. Display Mode1 Description Line speed: Color and B/W line speed is switched according to each original Controlling developer motor MCY: Color and B/W mode is switched according to each original Line speed: Fixed at color line speed Controlling developer motor MCY: Color and B/W mode is switched according to each original Line speed: Fixed at color line speed on and after a color original Controlling developer motor MCY: Fixed at color mode on and after a color original Automatic selection of Mode1 to 3 depending on the using pattern Mode2 Mode3 Auto Initial setting: Mode2 3. Setting 1. Select the mode. select Mode3.

is displayed. [Cassette3]. Select the counts for all and press [Clear]. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U901 Description Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears paper feed counts by paper feed locations. [Cassette4]. Clearing 1. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts. [Cassette6] and [Cassette7] cannot be cleared. 1-3-180 . 3. Select the counts to be cleared. the corresponding count is not displayed. Press the start key. Display MPT Cassette1 Cassette2 Cassette3 Cassette4 Cassette5 Cassette6 Cassette7 Duplex MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder) Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder) Cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder/side feeder) Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder) Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder) Duplex unit Description * : When an optional paper feed device is not installed. Method 1. 2. [Cassette5]. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. The counts is cleared. Completion Press the stop key.

Press the start key. Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed. 3. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. 2. 4. Purpose To check the paper jam status. U903 Description Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations. The total number of jam count cannot be cleared. 1-3-181 . Method: [Total Cnt] 1. Display Cnt Total Cnt Description Displays/clears the jam counts Displays the total jam counts Method: [Cnt] 1. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. The total number of jam code by type is displayed. The count of jam code by type is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. Method 1. Select [Cnt]. The individual counter cannot be cleared. Select the count value for jam code and press [Clear]. The counter value is cleared.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select the item. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts. is displayed. Select [Total Cnt].

is displayed. Display Cnt Total Cnt Description Displays/clears the call for service counts Displays the total call for service counts Method: [Cnt] 1. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. Press the start key. Method 1. Completion Press the stop key. 4. 2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. U904 Description Checking/clearing the call for service counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types. Select [Cnt]. The individual counter cannot be cleared. The counter value is cleared. Select [Total Cnt]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed. Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed. 2. 2. Purpose To check the service call code status by types. Method: [Total Cnt] 1. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. The count for service call detection by type is displayed. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. The total number of service call count cannot be cleared. Select the item. Select the count value for service call code and press [Clear]. 1-3-182 .

1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher. of copies that has passed Frequency the stapler has been activated Frequency the punch has been activated Frequency the stacker has been activated Frequency the saddle eject has been activated Frequency the center folding has been activated Frequency the tri-folding has been activated Description No. 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher. The count of the selected device is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. is displayed. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP No. Purpose To check the use of DP. the count of which is to be checked. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP No. Select the device. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-183 . U905 Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of DP. 2. Method 1. of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP Counts of DP Counts of 1000-sheet or 4000-sheet finisher Description Description * : 4000-sheet finisher only Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. Display DP DF Method: [DP] Display ADP RADP CIS Method: [DF] Display Sorter Staple Punch Stack* Saddle* Fold* Three Fold* Description No.

U910 Clearing the print coverage data Description Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper. Press the start key. Press the start key. Press [Execute]. Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sections. Turn the main power switch off and on. 3. Method 1. The print coverage data is cleared. Press the start key to reset partial operation control.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Select [Execute]. Completion Press the stop key. Purpose To check the total counter value. 4. Press the start key. U906 Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control. Method 1. 3. U908 Checking the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value. is displayed. Method 1. and the related parts are serviced. Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service. is displayed. The total count value is displayed. 2. Press the start key. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Description 1-3-184 .

2. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-185 . Display (metric) A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 Folio ETC Description Paper feed counts for A3 Paper feed counts for B4 Paper feed counts for A4 Paper feed counts for B5 Paper feed counts for A5 Paper feed counts for Folio Paper feed counts for other size ETC Display (inch) Ledger Legal Letter Statement Description Paper feed counts for Ledger Paper feed counts for Legal Paper feed counts for Letter Paper feed counts for Statement Paper feed counts for other size Description Clearing 1. Press the start key. The counts is cleared. Select the paper size of counts to be cleared. Method 1. Press the start key. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed. Purpose To check the counts after replacing consumable parts.

7. Turn the main power switch on. 8. 3. Wait for 10 seconds to allow the machine to recognize the USB memory. user managements and document box information Job accountings and user managements Job accountings. the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed. Press the power key on the operation panel. Display Import Export 6. 9. Select the item. When an error occurs. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. 1-3-186 . Enter maintenance item U917. U917 Setting backup data reading/writing Description Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine. 4. 5. data other than those assigned are also retrieved or written in. When normally completed. [Finish] is displayed. Purpose To store and write data when replacing the HDD. user managements and document box information Depending data Description Writing data from the USB memory to the machine Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory Description * : Since data are dependent with each other. The progress of selected item is displayed in %. Starts reading or writing. and after verifying the power indicator has gone off. Method 1. Select [Import] or [Export]. 2. Display Address Book Job Account One Touch User Program Shortcut Document Box Fax Forward Description Address book Job accounting Information on one-touch key User managements Program information Shortcut information Document box information FAX transfer information Address book Job accounting Job accountings and user managements Job accountings. or writes the data from the USB memory to the machine. Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting [Import].2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. switch off the main power switch.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. U917 Description Error Codes Codes e002 e003 e004 e005 e006 e010 e011 e012 e013 e014 e015 e016 e017 e110 e111 e112 e113 e114 e115 e210 e211 e212 e310 e311 e312 e313 e314 e315 e316 e317 e318 e319 e31a e31b e31c e31d Description Parameter error File write error File initialization error File error Processing error Address book clear error (contact) Address book open error (contact) Address book list error (contact) Address book list error (contact) Address book clear error (group) Address book open error (group) Address book list error (group) Address book list error (group) Job accounting clear error Job accounting open error Job accounting open error Job accounting error in writing Job accounting list error Job accounting list error One-touch open error One-touch list error One-touch list error User managements backup error User managements clear error User managements open error User managements open error User managements open error User managements error in writing User managements list error User managements list error User managements list error User managements list error User managements open error User managements error User managements error User managements open error Codes e31e e31f e320 e321 e322 e324 e325 e410 e411 e412 e413 e414 e415 e416 e417 e418 e419 e41a e41b e41c e510 e511 e610 e611 e710 e711 e712 e713 e714 e715 e716 e717 e718 e910 e911 e912 Description User managements error User managements open error User managements error User managements open error User managements list error Shortcut open error Shortcut list error Box file open error Box error in writing Box error in reading Box list error Box list error Box error Box error Box open error Box close error Box creation error Box creation error Box deletion error Box movement error Program error in writing Program error in reading Shortcut error in writing Shortcut error in reading Fax memory open error Fax memory initialization error Fax memory list error Fax memory error Fax memory error Fax memory mode error Fax memory error Fax memory error Fax memory mode error File reading error File writing error Data mismatch 1-3-187 .

1-3-188 . U917 Description Error Codes Codes e913 e914 e915 e916 e917 e918 d000 d001 d002 d003 d004 d005 d006 d007 Description Log file open error Log file error in writing Directory open error Directory error in reading Synchronization error Synchronization error Unspecified error HDD unavailable USB memory is not inserted File for writing is not found in the USB File for reading is not found in the HDD USB error in writing USB error in reading USB unmount error Codes d008 d009 d00a d00b d00c d00d d00e d00f d010 d011 d012 d013 d014 d015 Description File rename error File open error File close error File reading error File writing error File copy error File compressed error File decompressed error Directory open error Directory creation error File writing error File reading error File deletion error File copy error to the USB Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No.

Method 1. Press the start key. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The current counts are displayed. Completion Press the stop key. Press the start key. is displayed. U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts. Display Color Copy(H) Color Copy(M) Color Copy(L) Mono Color Copy B/W Copy Color Prn(H) Color Prn(M) Color Prn(L) B/W Prn B/W Fax Description Count value of full color copy (coverage: high) Count value of full color copy (coverage: middle) Count value of full color copy (coverage: low) Count value of single color copy Count value of black/white copy Count value of full color print (coverage: high) Count value of full color print (coverage: middle) Count value of full color print (coverage: low) Count value of black/white print Count value of black/white FAX Description Completion Press the stop key. Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less. Method 1. is displayed. 3. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared. Purpose To check the copy counts. U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) Description Resets all of the counts back to zero. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-189 . Select [Execute]. 2.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed. Purpose To check the count after replacement of the charger roller unit. Method 1. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The current counts of the charger roller count for each color is displayed. The counts is cleared. 3. 1-3-190 . Select the counts to be cleared. U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts. Method 1. Select the counts for all and press [Clear]. is displayed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. U930 Checking/clearing the charger roller count Description Displays the counts of the charger roller counter for checking or clearing. Display C M Y K Description Count value of cyan charger roller Count value of magenta charger roller Count value of yellow charger roller Count value of black charger roller Clearing 1. Completion Press the stop key. Display Cnt Machine life counts Description Description Completion Press the stop key. 2. Purpose To check the machine life counts. Press the start key. To clear the counter value when replacing the charger roller unit.

U942 Description Setting of deflection for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 5. Press the start key. increase the setting value. If wrinkling of original occurs. Press the system menu key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 1-3-191 . Setting 1. is displayed. Change the setting value using the +/. the larger the deflection. 3.31 mm * : The greater the value.31 mm 0.keys or numeric keys. the smaller the value. 6. Press the start key. Select the item to be adjusted. decrease the value.l Display Front Back Description Deflection of single-sided original Deflection of double-sided original Setting range -31 to 31 -31 to 31 Initial Change in setting value per step 0 0 0. oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the document processor is used. the smaller the deflection. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs. Completion Press the stop key. Press the system menu key. Purpose Use this mode if an original non-feed jam. The value is set. 4. 7. 2.

6 Description The area to store workflows in the machine Description Restarting an abandoned workflow Executes a workflow housed in a USB flash device Executes a worlflow stored in the machine Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine Assigns a workflow in the machine manually Displays a list of workflows recently executed Description 3.14 Description Assign a maintenance Nbr. Press the start key. Select [Entry]. Select the area to store workflow. 5. Display Continue Execute(USB) Execute Entry(USB) Entry Log Method: [Execute] 1. The setting is set. Method: [Entry] 1. Setting 1.keys or numeric keys to assign a maintenance Nbr. U952 Maintenance mode workflow Description The maintenance modes configured in the machine or a USB flash device as a workflow must be executed in succession. 4. Select the workflow. 1-3-192 . Press the +/. Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in sccession. Display Data1 . Display Data1 . Press the start key. Purpose This allows maintenance mode to be preset as a template. Select the item.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Press the start key. Press the start key. 2. 2.6 Description The area to store workflows in the machine 3. 2. Display Flow1 . into a workflow. Select [Execute]. Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in sccession.

Select [Entry(USB)]. switch off the main power switch. Turn the main power switch on. switch off the main power switch. Press the start key. 3. Executes maintenance modes defined in a workflow in sccession. 5. Display WorkFlowData01 . 6. is displayed. 6. 5. Select the work flow save area. Select [Execute(USB)]. Display Data1 . Press the power key on the operation panel. Select the workflow. Completion Press the stop key. 4. Method: [Entry(USB)] 1.6 Description The area to store workflows in the machine 8. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. Exports a workflow housed in a USB flash device to the machine. and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off. 4. Enter maintenance item U952. Select [Execute]. Select the workflow.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. U952 Description Method: [Execute(USB)] 1. 3. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. Turn the main power switch on. Enter maintenance item U952. 1-3-193 . Press the power key on the operation panel. and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off.07 Description Workflow data in the USB flash device 7. Display WorkFlowData01 .07 Description Workflow data in the USB flash device 7. 2.

Press the start key. The toner area code is displayed. Turn the main power switch off and on. Starts sending the log file saved on the HDD to the USB memory. 1-3-194 . Purpose To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunctions. and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off. Enter maintenance item U964. is displayed. 2. Error codes Display No Usb Storage No File Mount Error File Delete Error Copy Error Unmount Error Other Error File is not found USB memory mount error File deletion error File copy error USB memory unmount error Other error Description USB memory is not inserted Description U969 Checking of toner area code Description Displays the toner area code. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 4. error code is displayed. Select [Execute].2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 5. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. 6. 3. If a problem occurs during auto correction. Method 1. switch off the main power switch. Press the start key. Turn the main power switch on. Purpose To check the toner area code. U964 Checking of log Description Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory. 7. Press the power key on the operation panel. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On.

Turn the main power switch on. Display C M Y K Description Cyan developer unit number Magenta developer unit number Yellow developer unit number Black developer unit number Description Completion Press the stop key. [Finish] will be displayed. 7. Method 1. 6. is displayed. U984 Checking the developer unit number Description Displays the developer unit number. Press the power key on the operation panel. The developer unit number for each color is displayed. switch off the main power switch. Enter maintenance item U977. Purpose To check the developer unit number. Select [Execute]. is displayed. and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off. Completion Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. 4. Method 1. 1-3-195 . Insert USB memory in USB memory slot. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Once the print data is stored into USB memory.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. 5. check the print data sent to the machine. 2. U977 Data capture mode Description Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory. Send the print data to the machine. Purpose In case to occur the error at printing. 3.

Method 1. Press the start key. U985 Displaying the developer unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developer counter. Method 1. Select [Execute]. Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed. Display C M Y K Description Cyan developer unit past record Magenta developer unit past record Yellow developer unit past record Black developer unit past record Description The history of a machine number and a developer counter for each color is displayed by three cases.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Display Machine History1 . Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the developer counter. 2. When scanning of the disk is complete. U989 HDD Scandisk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Allow more than 5 seconds between Off and On. Turn the main power switch off and on. 1-3-196 . the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged. Press the start key. 2. 3. is displayed. Press the start key. Use this mode to restore the data.3 Cnt History1 . 4.3 Description Historical records of the machine number Historical records of developer counter Completion Press the stop key. Select the color to check. the execution result is displayed.

Purpose To check duration of use of the CIS. Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. Method 1. U990 Description Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes. U991 Checking the scanner operation count Description Displays the scanner operation count. Display Copy Scan Fax Scan Other Scan Description Scanner operation counts for copying Scanner operation counts for fax Scanner operation counts except for copying Completion Press the stop key. is displayed. The current operation counts is displayed. item is displayed. Press the start key.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Item No. Method 1. Press the start key. 1-3-197 . Display CIS Description The accumulated time for the CIS to light Completion Press the stop key.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC This page is intentionally left blank. 1-3-198 .

Misfeed in document processor (option) I. Misfeed in the MP tray E. Misfeed in bridge unit (option) K. Misfeed in the fuser section H. Misfeed in cassette 2 C. To remove paper misfed in the machine. K H K K K K K J I G G E F D A E B C E C L M L L M M M I C K K Figure 1-4-1 Paper misfeed indication A. Misfeed in the duplex section G. pull out the cassette. Misfeed in paper conveying unit. open the paper conveying unit or paper conveying cover. Misfeed in job separator (option) J. Misfeed in cassette 3 or 4 (option) D. Misfeed in cassette 1 B. paper conveying cover or PF paper conveying cover F. the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed message on the operation panel. Misfeed in cassette 5 (option) M. Misfeed in document finisher (option) L. Misfeed in cassette 6 or 7 (option) 1-4-1 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection 1-4 Troubleshooting (1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Paper misfeed detection condition Machine SBS EFS DUS1 FUES LPS DUS2 RS MS FS1 PCS1 FS2 MPFS PCS2 Figure 1-4-2 Paper jam location 1-4-2 .

The paper conveying cover is opened during printing. Waiting for conveying package to become ready Registration sensor not detected Paper feeding request for duplex printing time out Waiting for fuser package to become ready Waiting for option package to become ready Paper conveying unit open Front cover open Duplex cover open Paper conveying cover open Bridge cover open Bridge eject cover open Receiving a duplex paper feeding request while paper is empty Exceeding number of duplex pages circulated MP lift sensor upper limit detection Machine sequence error PF paper conveying cover open Paper conveying cover open Conveying package won’t become ready. 1-4-3 . The front cover is opened during printing. Waiting for the image-sustain. Secondary paper feed request Secondary paper feed request given by the contime out troller is unreachable. The bridge cover is opened during printing. Paper feeding request for duplex printing given by the controller is unreachable. The paper conveying cover is opened during printing. MP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within specified time of the MP lift plate rising. Option package won’t become ready. Activation of the registration sensor (on/off) is undetected for 90 s during printing. The PF paper conveying cover is opened during printing. Waiting for process package to become ready Waiting for toner package to become ready Process package won’t become ready. Toner package won’t become ready. Fuser package won’t become ready. The bridge eject cover is opened during printing. Paper feed request was received from the duplex section despite the absence of paper in the duplex section. The paper conveying unit is opened during printing. 0121 F 0131 0200 0210 0211 D E E *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* E F E J J F Code 0000 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0120 Initial jam Contents Conditions The power is turned on when a sensor in the conveying system is on.The image-sustaining package won’t become ing package to become ready ready. A sequence error has caused. The duplex cover is opened during printing. The controller issued the duplex section a request for more pages than the duplex print cycle contains.

Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. No paper feed from duplex section No paper feed from MP tray Multiple sheets in cassette 1 Multiple sheets in cassette 2 Multiple sheets in cassette 3 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 Multiple sheets in cassette 5 Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. 0506 M 0507 M 0508 0509 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 F D A B C C L 0516 Multiple sheets in cassette 6 M *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). No paper feed from cassette 4 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). SMT feed sensor (SMTFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). No paper feed from cassette 2 Feed sensor 2 (FS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. No paper feed from cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). No paper feed from cassette 1 Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. No paper feed from cassette 7 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Feed sensor 1 (FS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. No paper feed from cassette 5 SMT feed sensor (SMTFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). 1-4-4 . No paper feed from cassette 6 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* L M L A B C C L Code 0212 0213 0214 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 Contents SMT top cover open PF paper conveying cover (side) open SMT paper conveying cover open Conditions The SMT top cover is opened during printing. The PF paper conveying cover (side) is opened during printing. The SMT paper conveying cover is opened during printing.

PF feed sensor (PFFS) does not turn off during paper feed from side feeder. PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity feeder). No paper feed from cassette 7 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder). 0524 C 0525 L 0526 M 0527 M 0533 C 0534 Multiple sheets in cassette 4 C 0535 Multiple sheets in cassette 5 L 0536 Multiple sheets in cassette 6 M 0537 Multiple sheets in cassette 7 M 0545 0555 No paper feed from side feeder Multiple sheets in side feeder L L *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). SMT feed sensor (SMTFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). PF feed sensor (PFFS) does not turn on during paper feed from side feeder. 1-4-5 . Multiple sheets in cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* M Code 0517 Contents Multiple sheets in cassette 7 Conditions PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section. 0518 0519 0523 Multiple sheets in duplex section Multiple sheets in MP tray F D C No paper feed from cassette 3 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder). MP feed sensor (MPFS) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. No paper feed from cassette 4 PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). No paper feed from cassette 5 SMT feed sensor (SMTFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder). No paper feed from cassette 6 PF feed sensor 1 (PFFS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity feeder). PF feed sensor 2 (PFFS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder).

PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 1704 C 1713 PF paper conveying sensor 1 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Paper conveying sensor stay jam Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. PF paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Middle sensor stay jam Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 1-4-6 . Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). E 1714 E *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Middle sensor (MS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* A B C C E E E E B C C E E E C Code 1301 1302 1303 1304 1311 1312 1313 1314 1502 1503 1504 1512 1513 1514 1703 Contents Middle sensor non arrival jam Conditions Middle sensor (MS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Paper conveying sensor non arrival jam Paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2.

PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). 1914 E 2106 M 2107 M 2116 PF paper conveying sensor 1 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* C Code 1904 Contents PF paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam Conditions PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). L 2117 L 2307 PF paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder). 1-4-7 . E 2614 E 2704 PF paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (large capacity feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). C 2714 E *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). M 2317 M 2603 C 2604 C 2613 PF paper conveying sensor 1 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (large capacity feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).

L 3416 L 3417 L *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). SMT paper conveying sensor 1 (SMTPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). 1-4-8 . SMT paper conveying sensor 1 (SMTPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 1 (SMTPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder). M 3317 L 3405 L 3406 M 3407 M 3415 SMT paper conveying sensor 1 stay jam SMT paper conveying sensor 1 (SMTPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 1 (SMTPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder). 3107 M 3116 PF paper conveying sensor 1 stay jam PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 1 (SMTPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* M Code 3106 Contents PF paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam Conditions PF paper conveying sensor 1 (PFPCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side large capacity feeder). L 3117 L 3307 PF paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 stay jam SMT paper conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam PF paper conveying sensor 2 (PFPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side large capacity feeder).

1-4-9 . SMT paper conveying sensor 2 (SMTPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). L 3616 L 3617 M *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). SMT paper conveying sensor 3 (SMTPCS3) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 2 (SMTPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). L 3516 L 3517 L 3605 SMT paper conveying sensor 3 non arrival jam SMT paper conveying sensor 3 (SMTPCS3) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 3 (SMTPCS3) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). 3506 M 3507 M 3515 SMT paper conveying sensor 2 stay jam SMT paper conveying sensor 2 (SMTPCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 2 (SMTPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 3 (SMTPCS3) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). L 3606 M 3607 M 3615 SMT paper conveying sensor 3 stay jam SMT paper conveying sensor 3 (SMTPCS3) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* L Code 3505 Contents SMT paper conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam Conditions SMT paper conveying sensor 2 (SMTPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 3 (SMTPCS3) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 2 (SMTPCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder).

Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. SMT paper conveying sensor 4 (SMTPCS4) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 4 (SMTPCS4) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). SMT paper conveying sensor 4 (SMTPCS4) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (SMT paper feeder). 3706 M 3707 M 3715 SMT paper conveying sensor 4 stay jam SMT paper conveying sensor 4 (SMTPCS4) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). 1-4-10 . Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* L Code 3705 Contents SMT paper conveying sensor 4 non arrival jam Conditions SMT paper conveying sensor 4 (SMTPCS4) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). E E E E E E E E E *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). L 3716 L 3717 L 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 Registration sensor non arrival jam Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. SMT paper conveying sensor 4 (SMTPCS4) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (SMT paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).

Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). 1-4-11 . Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Loop sensor non arrival jam Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E Code 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 Contents Registration sensor stay jam Conditions Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Registration sensor (RS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor non arrival jam Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* E E E E E E E E E E E E E E Code 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 Contents Loop sensor stay jam Conditions Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. 4206 E 4207 E 4208 4209 E E *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Loop sensor (LPS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 1-4-12 .

Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* G G G G G Code 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 Contents Fuser eject sensor stay jam Conditions Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 1-4-13 . Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). 4216 G 4217 G 4218 4219 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4309 Duplex sensor 1 non arrival jam G G G G G G G G G G Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Fuser eject sensor (FUES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder).

*: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 1-4-14 . Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Duplex sensor 2 non arrival jam Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F Code 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4319 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4409 Contents Duplex sensor 1 stay jam Conditions Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder).

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Eject full sensor non arrival jam Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). 1-4-15 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* F F F F F F F F G G G G G G G G G Code 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4419 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 Contents Duplex sensor 2 stay jam Conditions Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2.

Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). 1-4-16 . Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G Code 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4709 Contents Eject full sensor stay jam Conditions Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Eject full sensor (EFS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Switchback sensor non arrival jam Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).

Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* I I I I I I I I G G G Code 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 4719 4901 4902 4903 Contents Switchback sensor stay jam Conditions Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Bridge conveying sensor 1 non arrival jam Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 1-4-17 . Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). 4904 G 4905 G 4906 G 4907 G 4908 4909 G G *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Switchback sensor (SBS) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray.

4914 J 4915 J 4916 J 4917 J 4918 4919 5001 5002 5003 Bridge conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam J J J J J Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1. Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* J J J Code 4911 4912 4913 Contents Bridge conveying sensor 1 stay jam Conditions Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 1-4-18 . Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). 5004 J 5005 J 5006 J 5007 J *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Bridge conveying sensor 1 (BRCS1) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray.

5106 J *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). 1-4-19 . Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2. Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section. Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). 5014 J 5015 J 5016 J 5017 J 5018 5019 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 Bridge eject sensor non arrival jam J J J J J J J Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* J J J J J Code 5008 5009 5011 5012 5013 Contents Bridge conveying sensor 2 non arrival jam Conditions Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder). Bridge conveying sensor 2 stay jam Bridge conveying sensor 2 (BRCS2) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1.

Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from duplex section. Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from MP tray. Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4 (paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2. 1-4-20 . Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 (paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 5 (SMT paper feeder). DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine (1000sheet finisher). 5108 5109 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 Bridge eject sensor stay jam J J J J J J J Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1. 5116 J 5117 J 5118 5119 6000 DF paper entry error J J K DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turns on before the eject signal is output from the machine (4000sheet finisher). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from duplex section.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* J Code 5107 Contents Bridge eject sensor non arrival jam Conditions Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 7 (side paper feeder). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from MP tray. 6001 K 6020 6021 6041 6050 DF front cover open DF front upper cover is opened during operation (4000-sheet finisher) DF front cover is opened during operation (1000sheet finisher) K K K K DF top cover open CF eject cover open DF top cover is opened during operation (1000sheet finisher) CF eject cover is opened during operation (4000sheet finisher) *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). Bridge eject sensor (BRES) does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 6 (side paper feeder).

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* K K K K Code 6060 6070 6080 6100 Contents MB cover open Center folding unit open CF left guide open DF paper entry sensor non arrival jam Conditions MB cover is opened during operation (4000-sheet finisher) Center folding unit is opened during operation (4000-sheet finisher) CF left guide is opened during operation (4000sheet finisher) DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received (4000-sheet finisher). K 6210 6220 6300 K K K 6301 K *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turning on (1000-sheet finisher). DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turning on (4000-sheet finisher). DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet finisher). DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received (1000-sheet finisher). K 6121 K 6200 DF sub eject sensor non arrival jam DF sub eject sensor stay jam DF sub eject sensor remaining jam DF middle eject sensor non arrival jam DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turning on. DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close. K 6111 K 6120 DF paper entry sensor remaining jam DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close (4000-sheet finisher). 1-4-21 . DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close (1000-sheet finisher). 6101 K 6110 DF paper entry sensor stay jam DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet finisher). DF sub eject sensor (DFSES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.

K 6510 K 6511 K 6600 DF drum sensor non arrival jam DF drum sensor (DFDRS) does not turn on within specified time of DF paper entry sensor (DFPES) turning on. K 6401 K 6410 DF tray upper surface sensor stay jam DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet finisher). K 6421 K 6500 DF bundle discharge sensor non arrival jam DF bundle discharge sensor stay jam DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) does not turn on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) turning on. DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) is not turned off since the bundle discharge starts (1000-sheet finisher). DF bundle discharge sensor (DFBDS) is not turned off since the bundle discharge starts (4000-sheet finisher). DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not turn on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) turning on (1000-sheet finisher). DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet finisher). 6311 K 6320 DF middle eject sensor remaining jam DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close (4000-sheet finisher). K *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). K 6411 K 6420 DF tray upper surface sensor remaining jam DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close (4000-sheet finisher). 1-4-22 . DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close (1000-sheet finisher). DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on (1000-sheet finisher). DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close (1000-sheet finisher). K 6321 K 6400 DF tray upper surface sensor non arrival jam DF tray upper surface sensor (DFTUSS) does not turn on within specified time of DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) turning on (4000-sheet finisher).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* K Code 6310 Contents DF middle eject sensor stay jam Conditions DF middle eject sensor (DFMES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on (4000-sheet finisher).

DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not turned off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 (DFSRM1) (1000sheet finisher). K 7110 7120 7200 7210 K K K K 7220 CF eject sensor remaining jam K *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). During centerfold operation. DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not turned off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 2 (DFSRM2) (1000sheet finisher). 6810 DF side registration sensor 1 stay jam K 6811 K 6910 DF side registration sensor 2 stay jam DF side registration sensor 2 (DFSRS2) is not turned off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 2 (DFSRM2) (4000sheet finisher).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* K K K Code 6610 6620 6710 Contents DF drum sensor stay jam DF drum sensor remaining jam Center folding unit stay jam Conditions DF drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. CF eject sensor (CFES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close. During paper conveying to center folding unit. CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within specified time since centerfold operation starts. K 7001 K 7100 CF paper entry sensor non arrival jam CF paper entry sensor stay jam CF paper entry sensor remaining jam CF eject sensor non arrival jam CF eject sensor stay jam CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. DF drum sensor (DFDRS) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close. CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close. 1-4-23 . K 6811 K 7000 DF staple operation error DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within specified time after driving the DF staple motor (DFSTM) (4000-sheet finisher). DF staple sensor (DFSTS) is not turned on within specified time after driving the DF staple motor (DFSTM) (1000-sheet finisher). DF drum sensor (DFDRS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. CF paper entry sensor (CFPES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. DF side registration sensor 1 (DFSRS1) is not turned off within specified time after driving the DF side registration motor 1 (DFSRM1) (4000sheet finisher).

During three fold operation. 1-4-24 . CF staple sensor (CFSTS) is not turned on within specified time after driving the CF staple motor (CFSTM). MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. DP registration sensor (DPRS) is not turned on within specified time since original switchback operation starts. CF side registration sensor 1 (CFSRS1) is not turned on within specified time after driving the CF side registration motor 1 (CFSRM1). DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within specified time of the lift plate rising. 9001 9002 9004 DP original conveying jam DP sensor stay jam DP switchback jam 2 H H H 9005 9008 9009 No original feed 2 No original feed 3 DP original conveying jam 2 H H H *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1). An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has occurred (1000-sheet finisher). CF paper sensor (CFPS) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close. Sensor in the conveying system is on since original feeding starts. DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within specified time of the paper feed starting. Next feed original became the stand-by states of paper feed while reading the image. DP timing sensor (DPTS) turns off within the specified time since the sensor turns on. MB eject sensor (MBES) does turned on when the power is turned on or cover close.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* K K Code 7300 7310 Contents CF eject sensor non arrival jam CF eject sensor stay jam Conditions CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned on within specified time since three fold operation starts. CF side registration sensor 2 (CFSRS2) is not turned on within specified time after driving the CF side registration motor 2 (CFSRM2). MB eject sensor (MBES) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received. An illegal inter-page or inter-copy interval has occurred (4000-sheet finisher). CF eject sensor (CFES) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on. 7400 CF side registration sensor 2 non arrival jam CF side registration sensor 1 non arrival jam CF staple operation error K 7500 K 7600 K 7720 7800 CF paper sensor remaining jam MB eject sensor non arrival jam MB eject sensor stay jam MB eject sensor remaining jam Paper interval error jam K K 7810 7820 7950 7951 9000 K K K K H No original feed DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn on within specified time during the first sheet feeding (Retry 5 times).

1-4-25 . DP registration sensor (DPRS) does not turn off within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on. H 9310 H 9400 DP timing sensor non arrival jam DP timing sensor stay jam H 9410 H 9500 DP switchback sensor non arrival jam DP eject sensor non arrival jam DP eject sensor stay jam H 9600 H 9610 H *: Refer to figure 1-4-1 for paper misfeed indication (see page 1-4-1).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Jam location* H Code 9010 Contents Document processor open Conditions Document processor is opened during original feeding. DP CIS sensor stay jam DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn off within specified time of DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning off. DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning off. DP registration sensor (DPRS) does not turn on within specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning on. DP skew sensor (DPSS) does not turn on within specified time of DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on. 9011 9020 DP top cover open Original skew feed jam H H 9110 DP feed sensor stay jam H 9200 DP registration sensor non arrival jam DP registration sensor stay jam H 9210 H 9300 DP CIS sensor non arrival jam DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within specified time of DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on. DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn on within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on. The DP top cover is opened during original feeding. DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on. DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn off within specified time of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning off. DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn on within specified time during original feeding (Retry 5 times). DP switchback sensor (DPSBS) does not turn on within specified time of DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.

C#### Figure 1-4-3 1-4-26 . When a problem is detected. C#### Error occurred.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-2 Self-diagnostic function (1) Self-diagnostic function This machine is equipped with self-diagnostic function. Call service. Turn the main power switch off and on. Machine failure. the machine stops printing and display an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting a contact to service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of the error.

Defective engine PWB. ware.Install the fax software. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 0120 MAC address data error For data in which the MAC address is invalid. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Billing counting error A checksum error is detected in the main and engine backup memories for the billing counters. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. Defective FAX con. use the unit including the part for replacement. any normal communication command is not transmitted.Replace the fax control PWB and check for trol PWB. Check the installation of the EEPROM and remedy if necessary. correct operation.Replace the fax control PWB and check for trol PWB. 1-4-27 . Contact the Service Administrative Division.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Self diagnostic codes If the part causing the problem was not supplied. Improper installation EEPROM. 0170 Data damage of EEPROM. 0070 Defective FAX soft. 0150 0160 Backup memory data error (engine PWB) Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal. Replace the main PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 15-49. FAX control PWB incompatible detection error Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility In the initial communication with the FAX control PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Data damage of EEPROM. 0180 Data damage of EEPROM. 1-5-54). correct operation. Backup memory read/write error (engine PWB) Detecting engine PWB EEPROM communication error. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Code 0030 Contents FAX control PWB system error Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware problem. Device damage of EEPROM. Defective PWB. Defective main PWB. Defective flash memory. Backup memory device error Causes Check procedures/ corrective measures Defective FAX con. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Machine number mismatch Machine number of main and engine does not match. Contact the Service Administrative Division. 0100 Defective flash memory.

Defective main PWB. Replace the hard disk and check for correct operation. Image processing error JAM010X is detected twice. Causes DIMM installed incorrectly. Install the fax software. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Poor contact in the connector terminals.Check visually and remedy if necessary connected from the main PWB. Fax control PWB software switch checksum error A checksum error occurred with the software switch value of the fax control PWB. The battery is dis.Install the fax software. Defective fax software. Defective main PWB. FAX image DIMM check error Improper DIMM is installed. Code 0620 Contents FAX image DIMM error DIMM is not installed correctly. Defective main PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly. Defective fax control PWB. Defective fax control PWB. Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Defective fax software. Install the fax software. DIMM installed incorrectly. FAX control PWB flash program area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the program of the FAX control PWB. Fax control PWB CG ROM checksum error A checksum error occurred with the CG ROM data of the fax control PWB. Defective main PWB. correct operation. DMA error DMA transmission of image data does not complete within the specified period of time. 0840 0860 1-4-28 . Defective main PWB. DIMM cannot be accessed. 0630 0640 Hard disk error The hard disk cannot be accessed. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Check the connection the signal cable for CIS and the main PWB. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Faults of RTC The time is judged to go back based on the comparison of the RTC time and the current time or five years or more have passed. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Defective FAX con.Replace the fax control PWB and check for trol PWB. Defective hard disk. Defective main PWB. Repair or replace if necessary. 0650 0800 0820 0830 Defective FAX soft. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). ware.

Replace the FAX control PWB or main PWB trol PWB or main and check for correct operation (see page 1PWB. the compressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not successfully decompressed. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Install the fax software. Defective fax control PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 0880 Defective fax software. 5-49). The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the FAX control PWB. Defective FAX con. Defective MP plate elevation mechanism.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinstall the FAX control PWB. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the MP lift motor. Check for broken gears and replace if any. MP lift motor and relay PWB (YC3) Relay PWB (YC12) and feed PWB 1 (YC17) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective engine PWB. Check to see if the MP plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found.5 s. If not.Replace the fax control PWB and check for Fax file system error trol PWB. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. Fax control PWB CG FONT archive error When power is turned on. 0920 Defective FAX con. the ON status of MP lift sensors 1 and 2 cannot be detected for 1. Program archive error When power is turned on. Causes Improper installation FAX control PWB. correct operation. 0890 Defective fax software. the compressed CG font in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not successfully decompressed. Code 0870 Contents FAX control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer error High-capacity data transfer between the FAX control PWB and the main PWB of the machine was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times. Reinsert the connector. MP lift motor error After the MP lift motor is driven. Install the fax software. 1-4-29 . If none. Defective fax control PWB. replace the cable. 1000 Defective drive transmission system of motor. grease the bushes and gears. Defective MP lift motor.

played 4 times successively. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). This error is detected four times successively. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s. 1-4-30 . If not. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Lift motor 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. This error is detected four times successively. 1020 Lift motor 2 error After cassette 2 is inserted. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the lift motor 1. If not. Lift motor 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC3) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Code 1010 Contents Lift motor 1 error After cassette 1 is inserted. grease the bushes and gears. grease the bushes and gears. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 12 s. Replace the lift motor 2.played 4 times successively. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective lift motor 1. Causes Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. Defective lift motor 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found.

The lock signal of the motor is detected continuously for 200 ms. Code 1030 Contents PF lift motor 1 error (paper feeder) After cassette 3 is inserted. Replace the SMT lift motor. the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 500 ms or more 2 times successively. This error is detected 2 times successively. Defective SMT lift motor. PF lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 12 s. replace the cable. Replace the PF lift motor 1. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Reinsert the connector. grease the bushes and gears. However. However. replace the cable. Defective SMT main PWB. the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 500 ms or more 2 times successively. 1050 SMT lift motor error (SMT paper feeder) After cassette 5 is inserted. If none. If none. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1040 PF lift motor 2 error (paper feeder) After cassette 4 is inserted. the first 1 s after PF lift motor 2 is turned on is excluded from detection. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the SMT main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Defective PF lift motor 1. Reinsert the connector. PF lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. During driving the motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Causes Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Check for broken gears and replace if any. 1-4-31 . PF lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Replace the PF lift motor 2. Defective PF main PWB. This error is detected 2 times successively. During driving the motor. SMT lift motor and SMT main PWB (YC5) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. SMT lift sensor does not turn on within 10 s. grease the bushes and gears. the first 1 s after PF lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PF lift motor 2. Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found. grease the bushes and gears. PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective PF main PWB. If none.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found. Reinsert the connector. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). If not. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If not. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If not. replace the cable.

Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If not. the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 500 ms or more 2 times successively. PF lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 12 s. During driving the motor. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective drive transmission system of motor. grease the bushes and gears. PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Reinsert the connector. the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 500 ms or more 2 times successively. the first 1 s after PF lift motor 2 is turned on is excluded from detection. However. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Code 1060 Contents PF lift motor 1 error (side paper feeder) After cassette 6 is inserted. Defective PF lift motor 1. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). If none. the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 500 ms or more 2 times successively. Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. the first 1 s after PF lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection. Replace the PF lift motor 1. This error is detected 2 times successively. 1-4-32 . Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PF lift motor 2. Causes Defective bottom plate elevation mechanism in the cassette. However. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. During driving the motor. Defective PF main PWB. Replace the PF lift motor 2. During driving the motor. grease the bushes and gears.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found. replace the cable. If none. 1100 PF lift motor 1 error (large capacity feeder) After cassette 3 is inserted. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1070 PF lift motor 2 error (side paper feeder) After cassette 4 is inserted. This error is detected 2 times successively. PF lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. However. PF lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Check to see if the bottom plate can move smoothly and repair it if any problem is found. grease the bushes and gears. If not. the first 1 s after PF lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection. Replace the PF lift motor 1. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Defective PF lift motor 1. Defective PF main PWB. PF lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 12 s. If none. This error is detected 2 times successively. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If not. PF lift motor 1 and PF main PWB (YC7) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective PF main PWB. Defective drive transmission system of motor.

Contact the Service Administrative Division. the lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected for 500 ms or more 2 times successively. PF main PWB (YC13) and engine PWB (YC19) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error When writing the data. Reinsert the connector. grease the bushes and gears. Replace the SF lift motor. grease the bushes and gears. the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times. Replace the SF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Check for broken gears and replace if any. Improper installation paper feeder. SF lift motor error (Side feeder) After cassette 5 is inserted. Code 1110 Contents PF lift motor 2 error (large capacity feeder) After cassette 4 is inserted. Check for broken gears and replace if any. SF lift motor and SF main PWB (YC8) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective PF main PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. The lock signal of the motor is detected continuously for 200 ms. PF lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 12 s. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1140 1800 Paper feeder communication error A communication error from paper feeder is detected 10 times in succession. PF lift motor 2 and PF main PWB (YC7) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. This error is detected 2 times successively. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective SF lift motor. SF lift sensor does not turn on within 30 s. replace the cable. During driving the motor. If none. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If not. Defective PF main PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Device damage of EEPROM. Replace the PF lift motor 2. replace the cable. Defective SF main PWB. Defective PF main PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If not. However. Reinsert the connector. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Defective drive transmission system of motor. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). If none. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Defective engine PWB. Defective PF lift motor 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. the first 1 s after PF lift motor 2 is turned on is excluded from detection. Follow installation instruction carefully again. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. 1-4-33 .

Reinsert the connector. Mismatch of reading data from 2 locations occurs 8 times successively. If none. If not. the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continuously. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective drive transmission system of motor. If none. replace the cable. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. After developer motor K is stabilized. [45 ppm/55 ppm model] After developer motor K is driven. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Code 1950 Contents Transfer belt unit EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated 5 times successively. 2102 Developer motor MCY error After developer motor MCY is driven.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Developer motor K error [30 ppm/35 ppm model] After developer motor K is driven. grease the bushes and gears. Defective developer motor MCY. Reinsert the connector. Defective transfer belt unit. Defective developer motor K. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. the ready signal cannot be detected for 5 s. 1-4-34 . grease the bushes and gears. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 2101 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Replace the developer motor K. Defective engine PWB. the ready signal cannot be detected for 5 s. Developer motor K and motor control PWB (YC7) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If not. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If none. Developer motor MCY and motor control PWB (YC7) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Transfer belt unit and engine PWB (YC3) Replace the transfer belt unit and check for correct operation (see 1-5-41). Replace the developer motor MCY.

grease the bushes and gears. Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective drum motor K. If none. Defective engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. If not. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the drum motor M. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Check for broken gears and replace if any. Drum motor M and motor control PWB (YC5) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. the ready signal is at the H level for 5 s continuously. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Drum motor K and motor control PWB (YC5) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If none. Code 2201 Contents Drum motor K steady-state error After drum motor K is stabilized. 2202 Drum motor C steady-state error After drum motor C is stabilized. 1-4-35 . Replace the drum motor K. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. replace the cable. Defective drum motor M.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 2203 Drum motor M steady-state error After drum motor M is stabilized. Replace the drum motor C. Defective drive transmission system of motor. grease the bushes and gears. the ready signal is at the H level for 5 s continuously. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective drum motor C. the ready signal is at the H level for 5 s continuously. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If not. replace the cable. grease the bushes and gears. If not. Defective engine PWB. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Drum motor C and motor control PWB (YC4) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly.

the ready signal is at the H level for 5 s continuously. Reinsert the connector. If not. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective drum motor K. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Code 2204 Contents Drum motor Y steady-state error After drum motor Y is stabilized. Drum motor Y and motor control PWB (YC4) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Drum motor K and motor control PWB (YC5) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. grease the bushes and gears. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective drum motor Y. Drum motor C and motor control PWB (YC4) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. 2212 Drum motor C startup error Drum motor C is not stabilized within 5 s since the motor is activated. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If none. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the drum motor K. 1-4-36 . Defective drum motor C. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. replace the cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective engine PWB. Defective drive transmission system of motor. grease the bushes and gears. grease the bushes and gears. replace the cable. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Replace the drum motor C. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. 2211 Drum motor K startup error Drum motor K is not stabilized within 5 s since the motor is activated. Reinsert the connector. If not. Replace the drum motor Y. If not.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. replace the cable.

2214 Drum motor Y startup error Drum motor Y is not stabilized within 5 s since the motor is activated. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the drum motor Y. If not. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Fuser motor and feed PWB 1 (YC18) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If none. grease the bushes and gears. Defective drive transmission system of motor. After fuser motor is stabilized. Drum motor M and motor control PWB (YC5) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective drum motor M. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Code 2213 Contents Drum motor M startup error Drum motor M is not stabilized within 5 s since the motor is activated. replace the cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the fuser motor. Reinsert the connector. Defective drive transmission system of motor. If not. If not. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective fuser motor. 2300 Fuser motor error After fuser motor is driven. Drum motor Y and motor control PWB (YC4) Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If none. Replace the drum motor M. grease the bushes and gears. grease the bushes and gears. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 1-4-37 . the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continuously. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. Defective drum motor Y.

Defective drive transmission system of motor. 2600 PF paper feed motor error (paper feeder) After PF paper feed motor is driven. PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB (YC16) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. feed motor. grease the bushes and gears. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective engine PWB. feed motor. Defective PF main PWB. grease the bushes and gears. If none. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. If none. grease the bushes and gears. the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continuously. replace the cable. Defective paper feed motor. Paper feed motor and feed PWB 2 (YC2) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Defective PF main PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If not. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Code 2550 Contents Paper feed motor error After paper feed motor is driven. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If not. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor. After paper feed motor is stabilized. If not. Check for broken gears and replace if any. replace the cable. 1-4-38 . Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the paper feed motor. 2610 PF paper feed motor error (side paper feeder) After PF paper feed motor is driven. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). PF paper feed motor and PF main PWB (YC16) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Replace the PF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper feed motor.

Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. Defective drive transmission system of motor. SF paper feed motor and SF main PWB (YC16) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. the color release sensor does not turn on/off for 1 s. replace the cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If none. Defective drive transmission system of motor. If not. If none. Defective drive transmission system of motor. grease the bushes and gears. 2650 SMT paper feed motor error (SMT paper feeder) After SMT paper feed motor is driven. Defective SMT main PWB. grease the bushes and gears. Replace the SMT paper feed motor. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Check for broken gears and replace if any. 1-4-39 . grease the bushes and gears. Defective SF paper Replace the SF paper feed motor. Code 2640 Contents SF paper feed motor error (side feeder) After SF paper feed motor is driven. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. feed motor. Replace the SF main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). If not. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the color release motor. Defective SF main PWB. Defective SMT paper feed motor. Reinsert the connector. the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continuously. After SMT paper feed motor is stabilized. Color release motor and engine PWB (YC3) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If not.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. replace the cable. SMT paper feed motor and SMT main PWB (YC5) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the SMT main PWB (Refer to the service manual for the paper feeder). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. Defective color release motor. 2700 Color release motor error When the color release motor is driven. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s.

1-4-40 . replace the cable. 2760 Transfer motor startup error Transfer motor is not stabilized within 5 s since the motor is activated. Defective transfer skew sensor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. grease the bushes and gears. grease the bushes and gears. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Check for broken gears and replace if any. 2770 Transfer skew error An abnormal value is detected to transfer skew sensor. Transfer motor and feed PWB 1 (YC13) Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. 2780 Transfer skew sensor error An abnormal value is detected to transfer skew sensor. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. replace the cable. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Reinsert the connector. If not. Code 2730 Contents Transfer release motor error When the transfer release motor is driven. Transfer release motor and relay PWB (YC14) Relay PWB (YC14) and feed PWB 1 (YC14) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the transfer motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective transfer motor. If none.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Transfer belt unit and engine PWB (YC3) Replace the transfer skew sensor. Reinsert the connector. Defective transfer skew sensor. Replace the transfer release motor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If not. Defective transfer release motor. Transfer belt unit and engine PWB (YC3) Replace the transfer skew sensor. Defective engine PWB. If none. Defective engine PWB. the transfer release sensor does not turn on/off for 1 s. If none.

Transfer belt sensor and engine PWB (YC3) Replace the transfer belt sensor. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective drive transmission system of motor. After transfer cleaning motor is stabilized. Defective engine PWB. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. grease the bushes and gears. Defective transfer skew motor. Defective transfer cleaning motor. Transfer cleaning motor and engine PWB (YC3) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Transfer motor and feed PWB 1 (YC13) Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5) Check if the gears rotate smoothly.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If not. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Check for broken gears and replace if any. the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. the ready signal is at the H level for 5 s continuously. If not. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Replace the transfer motor. If none. timeouts were detected twice in a row. 2820 Transfer motor steady-state error After transfer motor is stabilized. Replace the transfer cleaning motor. 2840 Transfer cleaning motor error After transfer cleaning motor is driven. the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continuously. Defective transfer belt sensor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective engine PWB. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If not. replace the cable. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Code 2790 Contents Transfer skew motor error When the transfer skew motor is driven. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 2850 Transfer belt sensor error The signal is not received for 100 ms in succession. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. If none. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Transfer skew motor and engine PWB (YC3) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. Defective drive transmission system of motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective transfer motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. grease the bushes and gears. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-41 . Replace the transfer skew motor.

Defective main PWB. Defective home position sensor. 3100 Scanner carriage error The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table. replace the cable. Motor control PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC9) Replace the motor control PWB and check for correct operation. Defective main PWB. Replace the scanner motor. Defective LED PWB. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Defective motor control PWB. 2950 Motor control PWB communication error A communication error from the motor control PWB is detected 10 times in succession. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). LED PWB and ISC PWB (YC6) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Replace the LED PWB and check for correct operation. Defective transfer belt sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective scanner motor. Defective ISC PWB. Defective ISC PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Code 2860 Contents Transfer belt sensor error The signal is not received for 100 ms in succession. 1-4-42 . If none. Home position sensor and ISC PWB (YC8) Scanner motor and ISC PWB (YC5) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Replace the home position sensor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective engine PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Transfer belt sensor and engine PWB (YC3) Replace the transfer belt sensor. Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. Defective engine PWB. 3200 Exposure lamp error When input value at the time of LED PWB illumination does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable.

Defective CCD PWB. Defective DP main PWB. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-43 . Reinsert the connector. operation. 3300 Optical system (AGC) error After AGC. ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. correct input is not obtained at CCD. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. If none. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Defective main PWB. Defective ISC PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CIS. correct input is not obtained at CIS. Defective ISC PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 3310 CIS AGC error After AGC. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. CCD connector inserted incorrectly. Defective DP relay PWB. replace the cable. Defective DP relay PWB. If none. replace the cable. Defective DP main PWB. 3500 Communication error between scanner and ASIC An error code is detected. DP main PWB (YC1) and ISC PWB (YC12) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Replace the CIS and check for correct operation. Replace the DP relay PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective exposure Replace the LED PWB and check for correct lamp. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 3600 3700 Scanner sequence error Scanner device error Defective ISC PWB. Replace the CCD PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the CIS and check for correct operation. Defective main PWB. Replace the DP relay PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CIS. Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. If none. CCD PWB (YC2) and ISC PWB (YC9) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Code 3210 Contents CIS lamp error When input value at the time of CIS illumination does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s. Reinsert the image scanner unit connector if necessary.

Defective polygon motor C. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 4002 Polygon motor C synchronization error After polygon motor C is driven. Defective polygon motor M. the ready signal does not turn to L within 30 s. If none. Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB (YC9) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Backup memory data error (ISC PWB) Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values. the ready signal does not turn to L within 30 s. 3910 Defective backup memory or PWB. 1-4-44 . Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. If none. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. the ready signal does not turn to L within 30 s. Causes Defective backup memory or PWB. replace the cable. Code 3900 Contents Backup memory read/write error (ISC PWB) Read and write data does not match. Defective engine PWB. replace the cable. Polygon motor K synchronization error After polygon motor K is driven. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Polygon motor M and LSU relay PWB (YC7) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective polygon motor K. 4001 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB (YC4) LSU relay PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). 4003 Polygon motor M synchronization error After polygon motor M is driven. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable.

Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. Polygon motor M and LSU relay PWB (YC7) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective polygon motor M.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB (YC11) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Code 4004 Contents Polygon motor Y synchronization error After polygon motor Y is driven. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. the ready signal is at the H level for 15 s continuously. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective polygon motor K. replace the cable. replace the cable. Polygon motor C and LSU relay PWB (YC9) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). If none. 1-4-45 . replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. 4012 Polygon motor C steadystate error After polygon motor C is stabilized. Defective polygon motor C. the ready signal does not turn to L within 30 s. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective engine PWB. 4011 Polygon motor K steadystate error After polygon motor K is stabilized. If none. the ready signal is at the H level for 15 s continuously. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). the ready signal is at the H level for 15 s continuously. Defective polygon motor Y. Polygon motor K and LSU relay PWB (YC4) LSU relay PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective engine PWB. 4013 Polygon motor M steadystate error After polygon motor M is stabilized.

4102 BD initialization error C After polygon motor C is driven. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). ASIC detects a BD error for 1 s. Defective engine PWB. Code 4014 Contents Polygon motor Y steadystate error After polygon motor Y is stabilized. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. ASIC detects a BD error for 1 s. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Polygon motor Y and LSU relay PWB (YC11) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). If none. 1-4-46 . replace the cable. Defective PD PWB M. Defective PD PWB K. 4101 BD initialization error K After polygon motor K is driven. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PD PWB C. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC8) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. If none. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective polygon motor Y. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. ASIC detects a BD error for 1 s.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. the ready signal is at the H level for 15 s continuously. 4103 BD initialization error M After polygon motor M is driven. replace the cable. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC5) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25).

Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PD PWB M. If none. Code 4104 Contents BD initialization error Y After polygon motor Y is driven. tor cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). 4201 BD steady-state error K Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. tor cable or poor contact in the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 4202 BD steady-state error C Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. ASIC detects a BD error for 1 s. Defective PD PWB Y. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. If none. Reinsert the connector. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC12) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective PD PWB K. replace the cable. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC8) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC5) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 4203 BD steady-state error M Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. Defective engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. 1-4-47 . Defective engine PWB. Defective PD PWB C. tor cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable.

4300 Polygon motor phase error ASIC won’t settle in completion of phase adjustment for 2 seconds after a BD signal is detected. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). If none. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC5) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective laser scanner unit. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC12) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. Code 4204 Contents Causes BD steady-state error Y Defective connecThe BD signal is not detected. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. 4402 LD over-current detection error C An over current signal has been detected for 15 ms in succession when LD is illuminated. tor cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-48 . 4401 Defective APC PWB K. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Defective APC PWB C. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Defective PD PWB Y. Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. LD over-current detection error K An over current signal has been detected for 15 ms in succession when LD is illuminated. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.

LSU cleaning motor and engine PWB (YC21) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. 4600 LSU cleaning motor error After LSU cleaning motor is driven. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective APC PWB M. 5101 Main high-voltage error K Abnormality of charger roller K is detected when Vpp adjustment. replace the cable. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. If none. Reinsert the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If none. Defective APC PWB Y. 4404 LD over-current detection error Y An over current signal has been detected for 15 ms in succession when LD is illuminated. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. Defective high volt. replace the cable. grease the bushes and gears. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective engine PWB. Replace the LSU cleaning motor. the ready signal is at the H level for 1 s continuously. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC8) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). for correct operation (see page 1-5-59). High voltage PWB 1 (YC4) and engine PWB (YC17) Code 4403 Contents LD over-current detection error M An over current signal has been detected for 15 ms in succession when LD is illuminated. 1-4-49 .Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check age PWB 1. If not. Defective drive transmission system of motor. If none. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC12) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). the ready signal does not turn to L within 2 s. After LSU cleaning motor is stabilized. Defective LSU cleaning motor. If none.

Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. Defective fuser IH. for correct operation (see page 1-5-59). 6000 Broken fuser heater wire Fuser thermistor 1 does not reach 100° C/212 °F even after 60 s during warming up. Reinsert the connector. If none. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). for correct operation (see page 1-5-59). The detected temperature of fuser thermistor 1 does not reach the specified temperature (ready indication temperature) for 60 s in warming up after reached to 100° C/212 °F. See page 1-4-55. Deformed connector pin. replace the cable. replace the cable.Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check age PWB 1. 5104 Main high-voltage error Y Abnormality of charger roller Y is detected when Vpp adjustment. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check age PWB 1. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. High voltage PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC16) Code 5102 Contents Main high-voltage error C Abnormality of charger roller C is detected when Vpp adjustment. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. High voltage PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC16) Defective high volt.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. High voltage PWB 1 (YC3) and engine PWB (YC17) Defective high volt. Reinsert the connector. Fuser thermostat triggered. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). If none. 1-4-50 . Defective engine PWB.Replace the high voltage PWB 1 and check age PWB 1. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Power source PWB (YC3) and fuser IH PWB (YC1) Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55. Defective triac. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). for correct operation (see page 1-5-59). Defective high volt. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 5103 Main high-voltage error M Abnormality of charger roller M is detected when Vpp adjustment.

6030 Broken fuser thermistor 1 wire Input from fuser thermistor 1 is 984 or more (A/D value) continuously for 1 s. replace the cable. 6040 Fuser heater error Input from fuser thermistor 2 is abnormal value continuously for 1 s. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Broken fuser thermistor 2 wire. Defective fuser IH. replace the cable. Defective triac. Fuser thermostat triggered. Causes Deformed connector pin. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. See page 1-4-55. Deformed connector pin. If none. Defective engine PWB. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Shorted fuser thermistor 1. Defective engine PWB. Deformed connector pin. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective triac. Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55. Defective triac. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). See page 1-4-55.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures See page 1-4-55. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-51 . If none. See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Code 6020 Contents Abnormally high fuser thermistor 1 temperature Fuser thermistor 1 detects a temperature higher than 240°C/464°F for 1 s. Reinsert the connector. Broken fuser thermistor 1 wire. Defective fuser IH. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55.

Shorted fuser thermistor 4. 6130 Broken fuser thermistor 4 wire Input from fuser thermistor 4 is 992 or more (A/D value) continuously for 1 s. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Reinsert the connector. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective fuser IH. Defective fuser thermistor 1. Broken fuser thermistor 4 wire. See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Deformed connector pin. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Deformed connector pin. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Defective triac. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective triac. Defective fuser IH. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Causes Deformed connector pin. Defective triac. Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55. 6150 Abnormally low fuser thermistor 4 temperature Fuser thermistor 4 detects a temperature lower than 30°C/ 86°F for 1 s after warming up. See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If none. See page 1-4-55.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures See page 1-4-55. 6120 Abnormally high fuser thermistor 4 temperature Fuser thermistor 1 detects a temperature higher than 190°C/374°F for 1 s. Defective fuser thermistor 1. 1-4-52 . Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective triac. Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective fuser IH. See page 1-4-55. See page 1-4-55. Defective engine PWB. Deformed connector pin. Code 6050 Contents Abnormally low fuser thermistor 1 temperature Fuser thermistor 1 detects a temperature lower than 100°C/212°F for 1 s after warming up. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. See page 1-4-55.

Fuser thermostat triggered. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Power source PWB (YC3) and fuser IH PWB (YC1) Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55. Defective engine PWB. 1-4-53 . Defective fuser IH. Deformed connector pin. The detected temperature of fuser thermistor 2 does not reach the specified temperature (ready indication temperature) for 60 s in warming up after reached to 100° C/212 °F. If none. Deformed connector pin.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective triac. replace the cable. 6230 Broken fuser thermistor 2 wire Input from fuser thermistor 2 is 992 or more (A/D value) continuously for 1 s. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective triac. Code 6200 Contents Broken fuser edge heater wire Fuser thermistor 2 does not reach 100° C/212 °F even after 60 s during warming up. replace the cable. If none. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective engine PWB. See page 1-4-55. See page 1-4-55. Reinsert the connector. Defective triac. See page 1-4-55. 6220 Abnormally high fuser thermistor 2 temperature Fuser thermistor 2 detects a temperature higher than 250°C/482°F for 1 s. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Deformed connector pin. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Broken fuser thermistor 2 wire. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Shorted fuser thermistor 2. Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55. Fuser thermostat triggered. Defective fuser IH. See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

Defective engine PWB. Defective engine PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. See page 1-4-55. Defective engine PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) See page 1-4-55. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Shorted fuser thermistor 3. Fuser thermostat triggered. Causes Deformed connector pin. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 6320 Abnormally high fuser thermistor 3 temperature Fuser thermistor 3 detects a temperature higher than 240°C/464°F for 1 s. Reinsert the connector. See page 1-4-55. Broken fuser thermistor 3 wire. Defective fuser IH. Defective triac. replace the cable. Code 6250 Contents Abnormally low fuser thermistor 2 temperature Fuser thermistor 2 detects a temperature lower than 50°C/ 122°F for 1 s after warming up. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective fuser thermistor 2. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). 1-4-54 . See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). See page 1-4-55. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Defective triac. 6330 Broken fuser thermistor 3 wire Input from fuser thermistor 3 is 992 or more (A/D value) continuously for 1 s. If none. Defective triac. Defective fuser IH. Deformed connector pin. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Deformed connector pin.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures If the I/F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit are deformed owing to foreign matters. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). such as paper dusts. 1-4-55 . Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If not. Defective fuser release motor. Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) Check if the gears rotate smoothly. replace the power source PWB (see page 15-56). grease the bushes and gears. Defective engine PWB. T1 T2 TRA51 Power source PWB Figure 1-4-4 Fuser release motor error When the fuser release motor is driven. Remove the power cord and check that the resistance between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac TRA51 is of several Mega-Ohms and not shorted (see figure 1-4-4). Defective drive transmission system of motor. replace the connectors or the units including the connectors. If failed. Check for broken gears and replace if any. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Code 6000 6020 6030 6040 6050 6120 6130 6150 6200 6220 6230 6250 6320 6330 Combined 6610 Contents Broken fuser heater wire Abnormally high fuser thermistor 1 temperature Broken fuser thermistor 1 wire Fuser heater error Abnormally low fuser thermistor 1 temperature Abnormally high fuser thermistor 4 temperature Broken fuser thermistor 4 wire Abnormally low fuser thermistor 4 temperature Broken fuser edge heater wire Abnormally high fuser thermistor 2 temperature Broken fuser thermistor 2 wire Abnormally low fuser thermistor 2 temperature Abnormally high fuser thermistor 3 temperature Broken fuser thermistor 3 wire Causes Deformed connector pin. the fuser release sensor does not turn on/off for 5 s. Defective triac. replace the cable. Replace the fuser release motor.

Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 6740 Abnormally high fuser IH PWB temperature 2 The input detect temperature is greater than 105°C/221 °F. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. 6730 Abnormally high fuser IH PWB temperature 1 The input detect temperature is greater than 105°C/221 °F.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Defective fuser IH PWB. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. If none. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. sensor. Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Defective fuser IH PWB. replace the cable. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. Defective fuser IH PWB. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective fuser IH PWB. Defective engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. 6720 Fuser IH belt rotation error A belt rotating pulse is not received for 1 second. Defective engine PWB. 6750 Fuser IH output over-current error The output current is greater than 75A for 10 ms in succession. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-56 . Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective engine PWB. Defective fuser belt Replace the fuser belt sensor. Fuser unit and engine PWB (YC26) Code 6710 Contents Fuser IH PWB CPU reset error Watch doc timer has been overflowed.

Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. 6770 Fuser IH low electric power error The preset power is less than 0. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective engine PWB. If none. 1-4-57 . Defective engine PWB. Defective fuser front fan motor. replace the cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. If none. alarm signal is detected for 5 s continuously. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. alarm signal is detected for 5 s continuously. Defective engine PWB. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective fuser IH PWB. Defective fuser IH PWB. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 6780 Fuser IH input over-voltage error The input voltage is greater than 140V for 200 ms in succession. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. replace the cable. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation.6 times of it for 120 ms in succession. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. Fuser front fan motor and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser front fan motor. Code 6760 Contents Fuser IH input over-current error The input current is greater than 20A for 10 ms in succession. Defective fuser IH PWB. 6910 Fuser rear fan motor error When the fuser rear fan motor is driven. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective fuser rear fan motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Fuser rear fan motor and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser rear fan motor. 6900 Fuser front fan motor error When the fuser front fan motor is driven. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. IH fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC11) Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5) Replace the IH fan motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective fuser IH PWB. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. If none. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. If none. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). A checksum error is detected 10 times in succession. 6930 Coil fan motor 2 error When the coil fan motor 2 is driven. Coil fan motor 2 and engine PWB (YC26) Replace coil fan motor 2. Defective engine PWB. Defective fuser IH PWB. 6940 IH fan motor error When the IH fan motor is driven. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. 6950 Fuser IH PWB communication error No response is received in 30 ms since a command is sent to IHCPU. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective IH fan motor. Code 6920 Contents Coil fan motor 1 error When the coil fan motor 1 is driven. Defective engine PWB. alarm signal is detected for 5 s continuously. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective coil fan motor 2. 6990 Fuser power supply incompatibility Information won’t match between the engine backup and the fuser IH PWB. Fuser IH PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC26) Replace the fuser IH PWB and check for correct operation. the alarm signal is detected for 5 s continuously. Coil fan motor 1 and front PWB (YC4) Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7) Replace coil fan motor 1. replace the cable. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. alarm signal is detected for 5 s continuously. Defective engine PWB. 1-4-58 . Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective coil fan motor 1. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective screw sensor Y. Replace the toner motor Y. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Toner motor K and engine PWB (YC27) Replace the screw sensor K. If none. If none. Defective engine PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the toner motor C. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. 1-4-59 . replace the cable. Toner motor Y and engine PWB (YC27) Replace the screw sensor Y. Defective toner motor M. 7002 Toner motor C error When the toner motor C is driven.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 7004 Toner motor Y error When the toner motor Y is driven. replace the cable. Defective screw sensor M. Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective screw sensor C. the pulse of screw sensor K is not detected. the pulse of screw sensor Y is not detected. Replace the toner motor M. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Replace the toner motor K. Defective engine PWB. Code 7001 Contents Toner motor K error When the toner motor K is driven. Reinsert the connector. Defective screw sensor K. If none. Defective toner motor Y. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 7003 Toner motor M error When the toner motor M is driven. the pulse of screw sensor M is not detected. Defective toner motor K. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Toner motor M and engine PWB (YC27) Replace the screw sensor M. Defective toner motor C. Toner motor C and engine PWB (YC27) Replace the screw sensor C. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). the pulse of screw sensor C is not detected.

Defective engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. If none. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. 7200 Broken outer temperature sensor 2 wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 230. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-60 . replace the cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Defective outer temperature sensor 2. Toner sensor M and front PWB (YC11) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 7103 Toner sensor M error Sensor output value of 60 or less or 944 or more continued for 3 s. 7104 Toner sensor Y error Sensor output value of 60 or less or 944 or more continued for 3 s. If none. Outer temperature sensor 2 and front PWB (YC19) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace outer temperature sensor 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. 7102 Toner sensor C error Sensor output value of 60 or less or 944 or more continued for 3 s. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Toner sensor Y and front PWB (YC15) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Code 7101 Contents Toner sensor K error Sensor output value of 60 or less or 944 or more continued for 3 s. Defective engine PWB. Toner sensor K and front PWB (YC7) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Toner sensor C and front PWB (YC13) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. If none. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC5) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective engine PWB. replace the cable. Outer temperature sensor 2 and front PWB (YC19) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace outer temperature sensor 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Code 7210 Contents Short-circuited outer temperature sensor 2 The sensor input sampling is less than 69. replace the cable. Defective LSU thermistor M. Reinsert the connector. 7223 Broken LSU thermistor M wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. If none. 7222 Broken LSU thermistor C wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. Defective LSU thermistor C. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. 1-4-61 . Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC8) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Reinsert the connector. Defective outer temperature sensor 2. Defective engine PWB. 7221 Broken LSU thermistor K wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective LSU thermistor K. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective LSU thermistor C.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 1-4-62 . Defective LSU thermistor M. If none. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC8) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective LSU thermistor Y. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC5) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). 7232 Short-circuited LSU thermistor C The sensor input sampling is less than 0. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. 7231 Short-circuited LSU thermistor K The sensor input sampling is less than 0. Defective engine PWB. Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Code 7224 Contents Broken LSU thermistor Y wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. replace the cable. If none. 7233 Short-circuited LSU thermistor M The sensor input sampling is less than 0. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC12) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. If none. Defective LSU thermistor K. Defective engine PWB. If none.

Defective developer thermistor C. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit M (see page 1-536). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective developer thermistor K. Defective developer thermistor M. Defective engine PWB. Code 7234 Contents Short-circuited LSU thermistor Y The sensor input sampling is less than 0. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit C (see page 1-5-36). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. 7242 Broken developer thermistor C wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 7243 Broken developer thermistor M wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. 7241 Broken developer thermistor K wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. If none. Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. If none. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-63 . Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit K (see page 1-5-36). Laser scanner unit and LSU relay PWB (YC12) LSU relay PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC12) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). replace the cable. Defective LSU thermistor Y. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.

Code 7244 Contents Broken developer thermistor Y wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit M (see page 1-536). 7254 Short-circuited developer thermistor Y wire The sensor input sampling is less than 0. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 7252 Short-circuited developer thermistor C The sensor input sampling is less than 0. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective engine PWB. If none. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective developer thermistor Y.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective developer thermistor C. Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit C (see page 1-5-36). Defective developer thermistor M. If none. If none. Defective engine PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. 7251 Short-circuited developer thermistor K The sensor input sampling is less than 0. Defective engine PWB. Defective developer thermistor K. Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit K (see page 1-5-36). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If none. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit Y (see page 1-5-36). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 7253 Short-circuited developer thermistor M The sensor input sampling is less than 0. Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1-4-64 . replace the cable. Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace developer unit Y (see page 1-5-36). Defective developer thermistor Y.

7403 Developer unit M type mismatch error Absence of the developer unit M is detected. Defective engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 7404 Developer unit Y type mismatch error Absence of the developer unit Y is detected. Different type of the developer unit is installed. 7601 ID sensor 1 error An abnormal value is detected in the input data to ID sensor 1. Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Install the correct developer unit. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Different type of the developer unit is installed. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective engine PWB. replace the cable. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Install the correct developer unit. Reinsert the connector. Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Install the correct developer unit. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 7602 ID sensor 2 error An abnormal value is detected in the input data to ID sensor 2. replace the cable. 7402 Developer unit C type mismatch error Absence of the developer unit C is detected. If none. replace the cable. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Install the correct developer unit. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Different type of the developer unit is installed. ID sensor 1 and feed PWB 1 (YC10) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. Different type of the developer unit is installed. 1-4-65 . ID sensor 2 and feed PWB 1 (YC10) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6) Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. If none. Code 7401 Contents Developer unit K type mismatch error Absence of the developer unit K is detected.

Drum PWB C and front PWB (YC12) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the drum unit C (see page 1-5-36). If none. If none. If none. Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Defective engine PWB. 7901 Drum K EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective outer temperature sensor 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Drum PWB K and front PWB (YC7) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the drum unit K (see page 1-5-36). replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective outer temperature sensor 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Outer temperature sensor 1 and front PWB (YC16) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace outer temperature sensor 1. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. Defective drum PWB C. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. 1-4-66 . 7902 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 7810 Short-circuited outer temperature sensor 1 The sensor input sampling is less than 0. If none. Defective drum PWB K. Code 7800 Contents Broken outer temperature sensor 1 wire The sensor input sampling is greater than 255. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Drum C EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Outer temperature sensor 1 and front PWB (YC16) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace outer temperature sensor 1.

Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Drum PWB M and front PWB (YC10) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the drum unit M (see page 1-5-36). Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. If none.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective drum PWB Y. Drum Y EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. replace the cable. Developer unit K and front PWB (YC9) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the developer unit K (see page 1-536). Defective developer unit K. 7911 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Drum PWB Y and front PWB (YC14) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the drum unit Y (see page 1-5-36). Code 7903 Contents Drum M EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. replace the cable. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. 1-4-67 . Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Developer unit K EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. 7904 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective drum PWB M.

If none. Code 7912 Contents Developer unit C EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Defective developer unit Y. Developer unit Y EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. 7914 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. 1-4-68 . Developer unit C and front PWB (YC13) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the developer unit C (see page 1-536). If none. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. 7913 Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. Defective developer unit C. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Developer unit M and front PWB (YC11) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the developer unit M (see page 1-536). Defective developer unit M. Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Developer unit Y and front PWB (YC15) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the developer unit Y (see page 1-536). Developer unit M EEPROM error No response is issued from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this problem is repeated five times successively. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.

1-4-69 . Reinsert the connector. APC PWB K and LSU relay PWB (YC5) LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC11) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Also check for continuity within the connector cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. Laser scanner unit C EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. APC PWB C and LSU relay PWB (YC10) LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC11) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. APC PWB M and LSU relay PWB (YC8) LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC11) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). replace the cable. Laser scanner unit Y EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. replace the cable. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. 7942 Defective APC PWB C. replace the cable. Defective APC PWB K. If none. Code 7941 Contents Laser scanner unit K EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. If none. APC PWB Y and LSU relay PWB (YC12) LSU relay PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC11) Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 15-25). If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Reinsert the connector. Laser scanner unit M EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 8 times successively. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 8 times successively. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 7944 Defective APC PWB Y. 7943 Defective APC PWB M.

Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective punch motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) Reinsert the connector. Defective punch home position sensor. If none. punch home position sensor does not turn on within 200 ms. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). 1-4-70 . replace the cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the punch home position sensor. Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8) Replace the punch motor. Replace the punch motor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective punch motor. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Defective PWB. Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation. 8020 Punch motor error 2 Home position is not obtained in 3 seconds after home position is initialized or in standby. If none. Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4) Punch home position sensor and punch PWB (YC8) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8) Code 8010 Contents Punch motor error 1 When the punch motor is driven. Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4) Punch home position sensor and punch PWB (YC8) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) Reinsert the connector. Defective PWB.

Defective DF main PWB. DF paddle sensor does not turn on within 1 s. replace the cable. Defective DF paddle sensor. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. replace the cable. Replace the DF paddle motor. Defective PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF paddle motor and DF main PWB (YC15) DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. 8090 DF paddle motor error When the DF paddle motor is driven. 1-4-71 . Code 8030 Contents Punch motor error 3 Home position does not turn from On to Off in 50 ms after home position has been initialized. If none. If none. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) Reinsert the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). If none. Defective DF paddle motor. DF paddle motor and DF main PWB (YC11) DF paddle sensor and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace the DF paddle sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Punch motor and punch PWB (YC4) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8) Replace the punch motor. replace the cable. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective punch motor.

DF shift motor 2 and DF main PWB (YC14) DF shift sensor 2 and DF main PWB (YC23) Replace the DF shift sensor 2. replace the cable. DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on within 160 ms. DF eject release motor and DF main PWB (YC10) DF bundle discharge sensor and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace the DF bundle discharge sensor. Replace the DF shift motor 1. Replace the DF shift motor 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Defective DF shift sensor 1. Defective DF bundle discharge sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the DF eject release motor. Defective DF main PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. DF bundle discharge sensor does not turn on within 1 s. Defective DF main PWB. Defective DF main PWB. replace the cable. Defective DF shift motor 1. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Reinsert the connector. Defective DF shift motor 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective DF shift sensor 2. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. If none.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Code 8100 Contents DF eject release motor error When the DF eject release motor is driven. Reinsert the connector. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. replace the cable. If none. Defective DF eject release motor. replace the cable. 8120 DF shift motor 2 error When the DF shift motor 2 is driven. DF shift sensor 2 does not turn on within 160 ms. If none. DF shift motor 1 and DF main PWB (YC14) DF shift sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC23) Replace the DF shift sensor 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1-4-72 . DF eject release motor and DF main PWB (YC12) DF bundle discharge sensor and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. 8110 DF shift motor 1 error When the DF shift motor 1 is driven. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14) DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC20) DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main PWB (YC18) Replace DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper surface sensor. Defective DF main PWB. DF shift release sensor does not turn on within 1 s. replace the cable. Defective sensor. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. DF shift release motor and DF main PWB (YC14) DF shift release sensor and DF main PWB (YC23) Replace the DF shift release sensor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Defective DF shift release sensor. 8140 DF tray motor error 1 When the main tray has started ascending. replace the cable. DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper surface sensor does not turn on within 20 s. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Also check for continuity within the connector cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. 1-4-73 . Replace the DF shift release motor. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. If none. DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16) DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC22) DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main PWB (YC21. Defective DF tray motor. YC13) Reinsert the connector. Defective DF main PWB. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the DF tray motor. Defective DF shift release motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Code 8130 Contents DF shift release motor error When the DF shift release motor is driven.

Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). If none. Defective DF tray sensor 3. 1-4-74 . Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. replace the cable. YC13) Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Defective DF tray motor. DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14) DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace DF tray sensor 3. 8160 DF tray motor error 3 When the main tray has descended.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the DF tray motor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Code 8150 Contents DF tray motor error 2 When the main tray has descended. replace the cable. If none. DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on within 20 s. Replace the DF tray motor. Defective DF tray motor. DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper surface sensor does not turn off within 5 s. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Defective DF main PWB. Defective sensor. DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16) DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC22) DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main PWB (YC21. DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC16) DF tray sensor 3 and DF main PWB (YC23) Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF tray motor and DF main PWB (YC14) DF tray sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC20) DF tray upper surface sensor and DF main PWB (YC18) Replace DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper surface sensor. Defective DF main PWB.

Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Defective DF side registration sensor 1. DF side registration motor 1 and DF main PWB (YC11) DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace DF side registration sensor 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace DF side registration motor 1. DF side registration motor 1 and DF main PWB (YC15) DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. If none. Defective DF side registration motor 1. Code 8170 Contents DF side registration motor 1 error 1 When initial operation. DF side registration motor 1 and DF main PWB (YC11) DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace DF side registration sensor 1. Defective DF side registration sensor 1. Replace DF side registration motor 1. replace the cable. Defective DF side registration motor 1. Defective DF main PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). DF side registration motor 1 and DF main PWB (YC15) DF side registration sensor 1 and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. replace the cable. If none. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 1-4-75 . Defective DF main PWB. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. If none. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 8180 DF side registration motor 1 error 2 JAM6810 is detected twice. DF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on within 3 s. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

Defective DF main PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF side registration motor 2 and DF main PWB (YC15) DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. Defective DF side registration sensor 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF side registration motor 2 and DF main PWB (YC11) DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace DF side registration sensor 2. Defective DF side registration motor 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). 8200 DF side registration motor 2 error 2 JAM6910 is detected twice. 1-4-76 . Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on within 3 s. replace the cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). DF side registration motor 2 and DF main PWB (YC11) DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace DF side registration sensor 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Code 8190 Contents DF side registration motor 2 error 1 When initial operation. Defective DF side registration sensor 2. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective DF main PWB. DF side registration motor 2 and DF main PWB (YC15) DF side registration sensor 2 and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. If none. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. If none. Replace DF side registration motor 2. replace the cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. If none. Replace DF side registration motor 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Defective DF side registration motor 2.

Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF slide motor and DF main PWB (YC12) DF staple sensor and DF main PWB (YC22) Reinsert the connector. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CF set sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Defective DF staple sensor. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Replace the DF slide motor. CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB (YC9) Replace the CF set sensor. If none. Defective DF staple motor. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. Defective DF staple sensor. Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC11) Replace the staple unit. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). 8230 DF staple motor error JAM7000 is detected twice. replace the cable. Defective DF slide motor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. replace the cable. 1-4-77 . Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Staple unit and DF main PWB (YC17) Reinsert the connector. If none. If none. Defective PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective DF main PWB. If none. 8300 Center-folding unit communication error Communication with the center-folding unit is not possible. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF slide motor and DF main PWB (YC10) DF staple sensor and DF main PWB (YC20) Replace the DF staple sensor. Replace the CF main PWB or the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective DF main PWB. Code 8210 Contents DF slide motor error When initial operation. Reinsert the connector. If none. DF staple sensor does not turn on within 3 s.

CF adjustment sensor does not turn on within 2. Defective CF main PWB. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective CF adjustment sensor 1. Code 8310 Contents CF side registration motor 2 error When initial operation. If none. CF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on within 1 s. 2 and CF main PWB (YC10) CF adjustment sensor 1. 2 and CF main PWB (YC20) Replace CF adjustment sensor 1. If none. Defective CF main PWB. 1-4-78 . 2.5 s. If none. Replace the CF blade motor. CF adjustment motor 1. 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 2. 8330 CF blade motor error When initial operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace CF adjustment motor 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. CF blade motor and CF main PWB (YC15) CF blade sensor and CF main PWB (YC20) Replace the CF blade sensor.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 2. Defective CF adjustment motor 1. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace CF side registration motor 2.5 s. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CF blade sensor. CF blade sensor does not turn on within 1. Defective CF blade motor. 8320 CF adjustment motor error When initial operation. Defective CF side registration sensor 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Defective CF side registration motor 2. replace the cable. replace the cable. Defective CF main PWB. CF side registration motor 2 and CF main PWB (YC10) CF side registration sensor 2 and CF main PWB (YC20) Replace CF side registration sensor 2. Reinsert the connector.

Reinsert the connector. Defective CF staple motor. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CF main PWB. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. lock signal is detected for 1 s continuously. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1-4-79 . CF main motor and CF main PWB (YC16) Replace the CF main motor. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective CF side registration sensor 1. Code 8340 Contents CF staple motor error JAM7600 is detected twice. Defective CF main motor. If none. Defective CF side registration motor 1. 8350 CF side registration motor 1 error When initial operation.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 8360 CF main motor error During driving the motor. If none. Defective CF main PWB. If none. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. CF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on within 1 s. Defective CF staple sensor. Replace CF side registration motor 1. replace the cable. CF staple unit and CF main PWB (YC13) Replace the CF staple unit. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective CF main PWB. CF side registration motor 1 and CF main PWB (YC10) CF side registration sensor 1 and CF main PWB (YC20) Replace CF side registration sensor 1.

the paper edge cannot be detected in 30 mm move. replace the cable. If none. Code 8410 Contents Punch slide motor error 1 The punch slide sensor won’t turn On when home position has been moved by 30 mm. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Defective PWB. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). 8420 Punch slide motor error 2 In detection of paper edges. Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8) Replace the punch PWB or the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. replace the cable. Defective PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective punch slide motor. Replace the punch slide motor. Defective punch slide motor. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). Reinsert the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3) Punch slide sensor and punch PWB (YC6) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8) Replace the punch slide sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Replace the punch PWB or DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. 1-4-80 . Defective PWB. Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC8) Replace the punch slide motor. replace the cable. 8430 Punch unit communication error Communication with the punch unit is not possible. If none. Defective slide sensor. replace the cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) Reinsert the connector. Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3) Punch slide sensor and punch PWB (YC6) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) Reinsert the connector. Punch slide motor and punch PWB (YC3) Punch PWB (YC1) and DF main PWB (YC7) Reinsert the connector.

If none. If none. Reinsert the connector. Replace the MB main PWB and check for correct operation. If none. Replace the MB conveying motor. 1-4-81 . MB home position sensor does not turn on within 5 s. Defective MB conveying motor. replace the cable. Defective MB main PWB. Defective MB Replace the MB home position sensor. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective MB main PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective MB conveying motor. 8510 MB conveying motor error 1 When initial operation. 8520 MB conveying motor error 2 When standby operation. home position sensor. Reinsert the connector. MB conveying motor and MB main PWB (YC5) MB home position sensor and MB main PWB (YC2) Code 8500 Contents Mailbox communication error Communication with the mailbox is not possible. replace the cable. Replace the MB conveying motor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective PWB. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. home position sensor. MB home position sensor does not turn off within 1 s. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. MB conveying motor and MB main PWB (YC5) MB home position sensor and MB main PWB (YC2) Defective MB Replace the MB home position sensor. Replace the MB main PWB and check for correct operation. MB main PWB (YC3) and DF main PWB (YC6) Replace the MB main PWB or the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

If none. If none. replace the cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective DF main PWB. 9000 Document processor communication error Communication with the document processor is not possible. replace the cable. Defective CF main PWB. Defective PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). 1-4-82 . Reinsert the connector. 8900 Document finisher backup error Read and write data does not match 3 times in succession. DF main PWB (YC7) and engine PWB (YC18) Replace the DF main PWB or the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Improper installation EEPROM. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. CF main PWB (YC7) and DF main PWB (YC9) Check the installation of the EEPROM and remedy if necessary. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PWB. If none. If none. 8930 Center-folding unit backup error Read and write data does not match 3 times in succession. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DF main PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC18) Reinsert the connector. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (4000-sheet finisher). DF main PWB (YC4) and engine PWB (YC18) Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Improper installation EEPROM. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Replace the CF main PWB and check for correct operation. DF main PWB (YC7) and engine PWB (YC18) Check the installation of the EEPROM and remedy if necessary. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector (1000-sheet finisher). replace the cable. Code 8800 Contents Document finisher communication error Communication with the document finisher is not possible. Replace the DF main PWB and check for correct operation. DP main PWB (YC1) and ISC PWB (YC12) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Replace the DP main PWB or the ISC PWB and check for correct operation.

Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Defective DP lift sensor 2. If none. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. 9060 DP EEPROM error Mismatch of reading data from two locations occurs 3 times successively. Defective DP lift sensor 1. Replace the DP lift motor. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5) DP lift sensor 1 and DP main PWB (YC4) Replace the DP lift sensor 1. Defective DP lift motor. 1-4-83 . Defective coin vender control PWB. Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 9040 DP lift motor going up error When the DP lift motor is driven. 9050 DP lift motor going down error When the DP lift motor is driven. Defective DP main PWB. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the coin vender control PWB. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5) DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB (YC2) Replace the DP lift sensor 2. Code 9010 Contents Coin vender communication error A communication error from coin vender is detected 10 times in succession. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the DP lift motor. Device damage of EEPROM. Mismatch between writing data and reading data occurs 3 times successively. replace the cable. Data setup failure. replace the cable. Set maintenance mode U206 to off when a coin vender is not installed. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective DP main PWB. If none. DP lift sensor 1 does not turn on within 2 s. DP lift sensor 2 does not turn on within 2 s. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. Defective DP lift motor. Defective DP main PWB.

Check visually and remedy. Check if the change empty sensor is intact. Code 9070 Contents Communication error between DP and SHD A communication error is detected. Defective ISC PWB. If none. Check visually and remedy. Replace the coin mec. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. DPSHD PWB and DP main PWB (YC10) DPSHD PWB and DP relay PWB (YC2) Replace CIS and check for correct operation. 9080 Communication error between DP and CIS A communication error is detected. 9100 Coin vender control PWB error Communication error has been detected at the coin mec of the coin vender control PWB. Defective CIS. Replace the rejector. Reinsert the connector. Replace the coin mec. ISC PWB and DP main PWB (YC1) Replace the ISC PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the coin mec. replace the cable. Replace the coin mec. Defective rejector. Coin jam in the change tube Poor contact in the connector. Sensor error in coin vender change (Yen 10) Change is empty despite change is enough. Check if the change empty sensor is intact. 9110 Rejector installed incorrectly. Defective coin vender control PWB. replace the cable. 1-4-84 . Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective coin vender control PWB. if not. Replace the DPSHD PWB and check for correct operation. Defective change empty sensor. Defective DPSHD PWB. Defective coin vender control PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Check the rejector is properly installed and. 9120 Coin jam in the change tube Poor contact in the connector. Defective change empty sensor. Replace the coin mec. Coin vender error Communication error has been detected in connection with the coin mec and the rejector. If none. 9130 Sensor error in coin vender change (Yen 50) Change is empty despite change is enough. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. perform the corrective action.

Defective pay-out motor. 1-4-85 . Replace the coin mec. Defective change empty sensor. If the error is not resolved. Check visually and remedy. If the error is not resolved. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Defective pay-out sensor. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Check if the change empty sensor is intact. 9160 Coin vender pay-out error Coin is paid out despite the pay-out motor is determined not active. replace main PWB (see page 1-5-49). Defective coin vender control PWB. Code 9140 Contents Sensor error in coin vender change (Yen 100) Change is empty despite change is enough. Replace the coin mec. Turn the main power switch off/on to restart the machine. Coin jam in the change tube Poor contact in the connector. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Replace the coin mec. Causes Coin jam in the change tube Poor contact in the connector. Check visually and remedy. Replace the coin mec. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Check if the change empty sensor is intact. Defective change empty sensor. 9500 9510 9520 9530 9540 9550 F000 Communication error between main PWB and operation PWB Defective main PWB. F010 Main PWB checksum error Defective main PWB. Defective coin vender control PWB. replace main PWB (see page 1-5-49).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Check visually and remedy. Replace the operation PWB and check for correct operation. Turn the main power switch off/on to restart the machine. Replace the coin mec. 9170 Change jam at the pay-out. Replace the coin mec. Replace the coin mec. 9150 Sensor error in coin vender change (Yen 500) Change is empty despite change is enough. Coin vender pay-out sensor error Coin is paid out despite the pay-out motor is determined not active. Defective operation PWB. Defective pay-out motor. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Contact the Service Administrative Division.

F041 Communication error between main PWB and scanner engine Print engine ROM checksum error Communication error between main PWB and fax control PWB Defective main PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Check procedures/ corrective measures Turn the main power switch off/on to restart the machine. Turn the main power switch off/on to restart the machine. Defective engine PWB. If the error is not resolved. replace engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). replace main PWB (see page 1-5-49). Turn on power. Turn the main power switch off/on to restart the machine. replace main PWB (see page 1-5-49). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Turn the main power switch off/on to restart the machine. Defective engine PWB. replace main PWB (see page 1-5-49). If the error is not resolved. 1-4-86 .) Code F040 Contents Communication error between main PWB and print engine Causes Defective main PWB. F050 F090 F278 Power supply in drive system error Main power switch was turned off without using the power key. If the error is not resolved. or a power failure has occurred. Defective fax control PWB. If the error is not resolved. Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation. then turn the main power switch off. Defective main PWB. (To switch off power. first press the power key until the main power indicator goes off.

(5) White streaks are printed vertically. See page 1-4-92 (13)Paper is wrinkled. See page 1-4-92 (14)Offset occurs. (4) The background is colored. use the unit including the part for replacement. tally. See page 1-4-88 See page 1-4-89 See page 1-4-90 (8) One side of the print image is darker than the other. See page 1-4-91 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. See page 1-4-93 See page 1-4-93 See page 1-4-93 (18)Image center does not align with the original center. (7) Streaks are (6) Black streaks are printed vertiprinted horizoncally. See page 1-4-91 (10)Image is blurred. See page 1-4-92 (15)Part of image is missing. appears (entirely appears (entirely black). See page 1-4-94 See page 1-4-95 See page 1-4-95 1-4-87 . (17)Image is out of focus. See page 1-4-94 See page 1-4-94 (16)Fusing is loose. See page 1-4-91 (12)The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. See page 1-4-90 (9) Spots are printed.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-3 Image formation problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied. white). (3) Image is too (2) No image (1) No image light.

If none. Defective developer bias output. Defective high voltage PWB 1. Defective engine PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). 2) and engine PWB (YC16) High voltage PWB 1 (YC3. Defective high voltage PWB 2. 4) and engine PWB (YC17) Replace the high voltage PWB 1 (see page 1-5-59).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (1) No image appears (entirely white). Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Defective laser scanner unit. High voltage PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC8) Replace the high voltage PWB 2 (see page 1-5-60). replace the cable. If none. Defective engine PWB. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-25). High voltage PWB 1 (YC1. Print example Defective transfer bias output. 1-4-88 . No LSU laser is output. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB.

Defective engine PWB. Replace the high voltage PWB 1 (see page 1-5-59). 4) and engine PWB (YC17) Defective charger roller unit. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1-4-89 . Print example No main charging. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective high voltage PWB 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) No image appears (entirely black). High voltage PWB 1 (YC1. Replace the ISC PWB. Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. The laser is activated simultaneously for all colors. Defective exposure lamp. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. 2) and engine PWB (YC16) High voltage PWB 1 (YC3. Causes Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective ISC PWB. Defective main PWB. LED PWB and ISC PWB (CN6) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) Replace the LED PWB (see page 1-5-19). If none. If none. Replace the charger roller unit (see page 1-5-38). Replace the main PWB (see page 1-5-49). Defective laser scanner unit. Exposure lamp fails to light. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-25).

1-4-90 . Defective color calibration. If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment. (4) The background is colored. replace the paper. check the output status of the four colors. check the output status of the four colors. Paper damp. Defective engine PWB. Defective high voltage PWB 1. Replace the high voltage PWB 2 (see page 1-5-60). Insufficient toner. Check the paper storage conditions. Causes Defective developer unit. and replace the developer unit for any faulty color (see page 1-5-36). Defective transfer bias output. Print example Defective developer bias output. Defective color calibration. Defective high voltage PWB 1. Insufficient agitation of toner container. Shake the toner container vertically approximately 10 times. Perform the color calibration (Refer to operation guide). Perform the color calibration (Refer to operation guide). Print example Defective developer bias output. Check procedures/corrective measures Run maintenance mode U089 to output fourcolor bar PG. Defective transfer belt unit. Replace the high voltage PWB 1 (see page 1-5-59). and replace the developer unit for any faulty color (see page 1-5-36). Defective high voltage PWB 2. replace the container. Replace the high voltage PWB 1 (see page 1-5-59). Causes Defective developer unit. Dirty drum unit. Perform the drum refresh. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Image is too light. Replace the transfer belt unit (see page 1-541). Check procedures/corrective measures Run maintenance mode U089 to output fourcolor bar PG. Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB (see page 1-5-54). Defective engine PWB.

Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit. Perform the drum refresh. Defective transfer roller. Flawed drum. 1-4-91 . Dirty or flawed drum. Dirty transfer belt. If it operates incorminal of drum unit. Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the contact glass. Dirty LSU slit glasses. (7) Streaks are printed horizontally. Check procedures/corrective measures Perform the drum refresh. Print example Causes Dirty contact glass. Clean the shading plate. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36). Dirty transfer roller. Dirty developer section. Replace the transfer belt unit if it is extremely dirty (see page 1-5-41). Print example Causes Dirty or flawed drum. Replace the transfer belt unit (see page 1-5-41). Clean the contact glass. Check procedures/corrective measures Run maintenance mode U089 to output four-color bar PG. check the output status of the four colors. Clean the scanner mirror. Clean the scanner mirror.Check the installation of the drum unit. Clean the slit glass. Clean lens of ISU. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36). Poor contact of grounding ter. Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developer section. and replace the developer unit for any faulty color (see page 1-5-36). Dirty contact glass. Replace the transfer roller (see page 1-5-43). Clean the transfer roller. Dirty shading plate. Dirty lens of ISU. Perform the laser scanner cleaning. rectly. Flawed drum. Worn transfer belt. Dirty scanner mirror. Clean the transfer belt. Replace the transfer roller if it is extremely dirty (see page 1-5-43). Dirty slit glass. (6) Black streaks are printed vertically. replace it (see page 1-5-36). Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (5) White streaks are printed vertically. Print example Causes Foreign object in one of the developer units. Dirty scanner mirror.

Print example Causes Scanner moves erratically. Check procedures/corrective measures Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails. Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit. Dirty or flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36). Flawed drum. (9) Spots are printed. Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the contact glass. Flawed developer roller. Check the gears and belts and. Clean the heat roller and press roller. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36). Deformed press roller.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (8) One side of the print image is darker than the other. grease them. Dirty heat roller and press roller. if necessary. If any. 1-4-92 . Print example Causes Defective exposure lamp. remove it. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the LED unit (see page 1-5-19). Paper conveying section drive problem. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Print example Causes Dirty contact glass. Perform the drum refresh. (10) Image is blurred. Replace the developer unit (see page 1-5-36).

Check the paper storage conditions. Misadjusted the deflection in the paper. Print example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Misadjusted leading edge reg. (30 ppm/35 ppm model) Check the installation of the clutch or motor. registration clutch or duplex clutch operating incorrectly. clutch. Defective pressure springs. Print example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Check the installation of the clutch. registration (see page 1-3-33). (45 ppm/55 ppm model) (13) Paper is wrinkled. If it operates Paper feed clutch.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Run maintenance mode U051 to readjust the deflection in the paper (see page 1-3-40). replace it. Print example Causes Paper curled. 1-4-93 . motor. replace it. registration motor or duplex motor operating incorrectly. If it operates incorPaper feed clutch. middle incorrectly. Paper damp. Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-3-53). (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the paper storage conditions. middle rectly.Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge istration.

Print example Causes Paper damp.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (14) Offset occurs. Check if the paper meets specifications. Dirty transfer roller. Defective fuser IH. Defective fuser unit. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the paper storage conditions. Dirty or flawed drum. Clean the contact glass and scanner mirror. Perform the drum refresh. Replace paper. (16) Fusing is loose. Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Wrong types of paper. Check procedures/corrective measures Check if the paper meets specifications. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36). Replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). replace paper. Clean the transfer roller. Clean the transfer belt. Replace the paper. Perform the drum refresh. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-36). Print example Causes Deformed or worn cleaning blade in the drum unit. Defective pressure springs. Flawed drum. Dirty transfer belt. Replace the transfer roller if it is extremely dirty (see page 1-5-43). Drum condensation. Print example Causes Wrong types of paper. Replace the transfer belt unit (see page 1-5-41). Dirt on the back surface of the contact glass and scanner mirror. (15) Part of image is missing. Flawed heat roller or press roller. Defective transfer belt cleaning. Paper creased. Replace the transfer belt unit if it is extremely dirty (see page 1-5-41). 1-4-94 .

Place the paper correctly. Print example Causes Misadjusted image center line. 1-4-95 . Perform the drum refresh. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-5-22).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (17) Image is out of focus. (18) Image center does not align with the original center. Misadjusted scanner center line. Paper is not placed correctly. Original is not placed correctly. Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-3-54). Drum condensation. Check procedures/corrective measures Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing (see page 1-3-36). Place the original correctly. Print example Causes Defective image scanning unit.

Problem (1) The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on. Defective motor. Defective motor. 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-4 Electric problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied. Defective PWB. Replace the registration motor. (2) MP lift motor does not operate. 5. Check for broken gears and replace if any. 1. replace the cable. Replace the power source PWB (see page 1-5-56). Check procedures/corrective measures Measure the input voltage. 3. Causes 1. Defective PWB. 1. replace the cord. Defective motor. Defective drive trans. Replace the scanner motor. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. (4) Registration motor does not operate (45 ppm/55 ppm model only). 1. 3. Scanner motor and ISC PWB (YC5) ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11) 2. (3) Scanner motor does not operate. mission system. grease the bushes and gears. grease the bushes and gears. Check for continuity. Reinsert the connector. 3. Check for broken gears and replace if any. replace the cable. Replace the MP lift motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Defective PWB. replace the power source PWB (see page 1-5-56). 1-4-96 . 4. Reinsert the connector. MP lift motor and relay PWB (YC3) Relay PWB (YC12) and engine PWB (YC17) 2. Broken power cord. Check for continuity across the contacts. Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet. 3. 2. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 4. No electricity at the power outlet. Defective drive trans.Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. mission system. If none. replace the cable. The power cord is not plugged in properly. If not. Defective main power switch. use the unit including the part for replacement. If none. Defective power source PWB. If not. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If not. Reinsert the connector. If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective drive trans. mission system. Registration motor and feed PWB 1 (YC25) Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5) 2. If none. 4. grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any.Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly.

Replace the duplex motor 1. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). grease the bushes and gears. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1-4-97 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (5) Middle motor does not operate (45 ppm/55 ppm model only). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Causes 1. Defective motor.Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not. 2. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Duplex motor 2 and relay PWB (YC7) Relay PWB (YC1) and engine PWB (YC14) (8) Duplex motor 2 does not operate (45 ppm/55 ppm model only). Duplex motor 1 and relay PWB (YC16) Relay PWB (YC13) and engine PWB (YC23) 2.Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PWB. mission system. 4. Defective drive trans. 3. Replace the duplex motor 2. 4. grease the bushes and gears. Defective PWB. Defective PWB. If none. mission system. 3. If none. mission system. Defective drive trans. replace the cable. Eject motor and front PWB (YC5) Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7) (6) Eject motor does not operate. Middle motor and feed PWB 2 (YC7) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) 2. 1. Defective motor. If not. 3. Reinsert the connector. Defective PWB. If not. Replace the eject motor. 4. grease the bushes and gears. mission system. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 1. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54).Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Replace the middle motor. 3. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. If none. Defective motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. (7) Duplex motor 1 does not operate (45 ppm/55 ppm model only). Check for broken gears and replace if any. 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Defective drive trans. Defective motor. grease the bushes and gears. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If not. Defective drive trans. Reinsert the connector. 4. Check for broken gears and replace if any. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector.

Eject fan motor 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 2 does not operate. If none. Defective motor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 2 and relay PWB (YC16) Relay PWB (YC13) and engine PWB (YC23) Replace the fuser fan motor 1 or 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. (10) Developer fan motor 1. Developer fan motor 1. 2 and engine PWB (YC19) Replace the Belt fan motor 1 or 2. Fuser fan motor 1. Defective PWB. 3. 2 and front PWB (YC6) Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7) Replace the Developer fan motor 1 or 2. Defective motor. 2 and engine PWB (YC19) Replace the toner fan motor 1 or 2. Reinsert the connector. 2. 3. replace the cable. Defective motor. 2 does not operate. Defective PWB. 1-4-98 . Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 2. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Reinsert the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. If none. 2. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (9) Toner fan motor 1. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Causes 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PWB. If none. 3. If none. 1. (14) Eject fan motor 1. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Defective motor. Defective motor. If none. 1. Defective motor. Belt fan motor 1. 2 does not operate. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 2 does not operate. 2 does not operate. 1. 2. 3. Toner fan motor 1. 3. Defective PWB. LSU fan motor and front PWB (YC16) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the LSU fan motor. 2. (12) Belt fan motor 1. replace the cable. Defective PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 2 and relay PWB (YC11) Relay PWB (YC13) and engine PWB (YC23) Replace the eject fan motor 1 or 2. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). (11) LSU fan motor does not operate. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. 3. 1. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. 1. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. replace the cable. (13) Fuser fan motor 1.

If none. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1-4-99 . 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC4) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the paper feed clutch 1 or 2. Causes 1. Reinsert the connector. (19) Paper feed clutch 1. Defective PWB. Defective clutch. replace the cable. 1. 3. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Paper feed clutch 1. 2. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective clutch.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (15) Eject front fan motor does not operate. 3. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 2 does not operate (45 ppm/55 ppm model only). Defective PWB. 2. Defective motor. 2. Defective PWB. (16) Eject rear fan motor does not operate. replace the cable. Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-49). 3. If none. If none. Controller fan motor and main PWB (YC23) Replace the controller fan motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Reinsert the connector. If none. Defective motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Eject rear fan motor and feed PWB 1 (YC19) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC6) Replace the eject rear fan motor. Defective PWB. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. (17) Power source fan motor does not operate. 1. If none. (20) Assist clutch 1. 1. 2. 2 does not operate. 3. 2. (18) Controller fan motor does not operate. Defective PWB. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 2. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Power source fan motor and engine PWB (YC22) Replace the power source fan motor. replace the cable. If none. Eject front fan motor and front PWB (YC4) Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7) Replace the eject front fan motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 3. 3. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1. Reinsert the connector. Defective motor. Assist clutch 1 and feed PWB 2 (YC10) Assist clutch 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC12) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the assist clutch 1 or 2. 1.

Paper conveying clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC5) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the paper conveying clutch. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective clutch. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 3. 2. If none. replace the cable. MP paper feed clutch and relay PWB (YC3) Relay PWB (YC12) and engine PWB (YC17) Replace the MP paper feed clutch. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 3. Reinsert the connector. If none. Defective clutch. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Defective PWB. (23) Registration clutch does not operate (30 ppm/35 ppm model only). Middle clutch and feed PWB 2 (YC7) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the middle clutch. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). (24) Middle clutch does not operate (30 ppm/35 ppm model only). (26) Duplex clutch 2 does not operate (30 ppm/35 ppm model only). replace the cable. Defective PWB. 1. If none. Duplex clutch 2 and relay PWB (YC7) Relay PWB (YC1) and engine PWB (YC14) Replace the Duplex clutch 2. Defective clutch. replace the cable. 1. If none. 2. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the cable. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 2. Defective PWB. 1. Defective clutch. If none. Defective PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PWB. Registration clutch and feed PWB 1 (YC22) Feed PWB 1 (YC2) and engine PWB (YC5) Replace the registration clutch. 3. replace the cable. 3. Reinsert the connector. replace the cable. 2. Defective clutch. (25) Duplex clutch 1 does not operate (30 ppm/35 ppm model only). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective clutch. Duplex clutch 1 and relay PWB (YC11) Relay PWB (YC13) and engine PWB (YC23) Replace the Duplex clutch 1. 3. Defective PWB. 2. Causes 1. If none. 3. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 2. Reinsert the connector. 1. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 1-4-100 . 1. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (21) Paper conveying clutch does not operate. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. (22) MP paper feed clutch does not operate. Reinsert the connector.

Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If none. 1. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. 2. replace the cable. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Reinsert the connector. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). (29) Cleaning solenoid does not operate. Deformed actuator. Paper sensor 1. Replace the paper sensor 1 or 2. Defective PWB. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PWB. 3. Defective solenoid. replace the cable. Feedshift and front PWB (YC5) Front PWB (YC3) and engine PWB (YC7) Replace the feedshift solenoid 1 or 2. Reinsert the connector. MP paper sensor and relay PWB (YC3) Relay PWB (YC12) and engine PWB (YC17) Check visually and replace if necessary. 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Check visually and replace if necessary. 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC8) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the pickup solenoid 1 or 2. Reinsert the connector. Defective sensor. 1. 1-4-101 . 4. Cleaning solenoid and feed PWB 1 (YC10) Feed PWB 1 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the pickup solenoid 1 or 2. Replace the MP paper sensor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). (30) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cassette. Defective solenoid. 2. 1. Defective PWB. If none. replace the cable. replace the cable. Reinsert the connector. 3. 3. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. (28) Feedshift solenoid does not operate. Defective solenoid. (31) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the MP tray. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective PWB. Causes 1. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Defective PWB. 2. If none. 4. Deformed actuator. 2. Pickup solenoid 1. 2 does not operate (45 ppm/55 ppm model only). 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (27) Pickup solenoid 1. 3. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective sensor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). If none. 3. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 2.

Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Check visually and remove it. 2. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (32) The size of paper on the cassette is not displayed correctly. 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3) Paper width switch 1. fuser eject sensor. 2. 2. Causes 1. If none. If none. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). replace the cable. loop sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. duplex sensor 1. 3. 3. loop sensor. (36) A message indicating unit open is displayed when the paper conveying unit is closed. duplex sensor 1. replace the cable. replace the cable. (34) A paper jam in the paper feed. paper conveying or eject section is indicated when the main power switch is turned on. middle sensor. 2. 2. 2. eject full sensor or switchback sensor. 2. paper conveying sensor. (33) The size of paper on the MP tray is not displayed correctly. registration sensor. registration sensor. if any. MP feed sensor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Defective sensor. 1. 1-4-102 . Defective switch. MP feed sensor. (35) A message indicating cover open is displayed when the front cover is closed. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. Reinsert the connector. Defective PWB. replace the cable. 2 and feed PWB 2 (YC3) Feed PWB 2 (YC1) and engine PWB (YC4) Replace the paper length switch 1. Reinsert the connector. middle sensor. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. 2. If none. Defective switch. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. fuser eject sensor. If none. Front cover switch and front PWB (YC16) Front PWB (YC2) and engine PWB (YC10) Replace the front cover switch. 2. Defective switch. 2 or paper width switch 1. 1. 1. A piece of paper torn from paper is caught around feed sensor 1. Defective PWB. Replace the feed sensor 1. paper conveying sensor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. eject full sensor or switchback sensor. Paper length switch 1. Paper conveying unit switch and feed PWB 1 (YC15) Feed PWB 1 (YC4) and power source PWB (YC12) Replace the paper conveying unit switch. Defective switch. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. MP paper length switch and relay PWB (YC2) MP paper width switch and relay PWB (YC2) Relay PWB (YC12) and engine PWB (YC17) Replace the MP paper length switch or MP paper width switch. 1. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation (see page 1-5-54). 2.

2. replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Duplex cover switch and relay PWB (YC7) Relay PWB (YC1) and engine PWB (YC14) Replace the duplex cover switch. Reinsert the connector. 1. If none. Defective switch. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Causes 1. replace the cable.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (37) A message indicating cover open is displayed when the duplex cover is closed. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. 2. 1-4-103 . Defective switch. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector. If none. Paper conveying cover switch and feed PWB 2 (YC6) Feed PWB 2 (YC14) and power source PWB (YC4) Replace the paper conveying cover switch. (38) A message indicating cover open is displayed when the paper conveying cover is closed. Defective connector cable or poor contact in the connector.

(5) Paper jams.Clean with isopropyl alcohol.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-5 Mechanical problems If the part causing the problem was not supplied. Check if the paper is excessively curled. ers are dirty with paper powder. Clean the drum unit or developer unit. Check if the paper is excessively curled. Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Check if the surfaces of the following roll. Check visually and remedy if necessary. (30 ppm/35 ppm model) Check visually and remedy if necessary. Check if the separation pulley is worn. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn (see page 1-5-7. use the unit including the part for replacement. (4) Multiple sheets of paper are fed. Change the paper. Check the paper width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary. Load the paper correctly. Change the paper. ers are dirty with paper powder. 2 installation. Problem (1) No primary paper feed. Paper width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly.Clean with isopropyl alcohol. Check visually and replace any deformed (see page 1-5-7. Check if the surfaces of the following roll. (6) Check if the drum unit or developer unit Toner drops on the is extremely dirty. (2) No secondary paper feed. (45 ppm/55 ppm model) Defective registration clutch installation. Paper is loaded incorrectly. Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct. 1-5-10). Check if the heat roller or press roller is extremely dirty or deformed. Right registration roller Left registration roller Defective registration motor installation. 1-4-104 . (3) Skewed paper feed. 1-5-10. Forwarding pulley Paper feed pulley MP paper feed pulley Check if the following rollers is deformed. Check visually and remedy if necessary. paper conveying path. Check visually and replace the fuser unit (see page 1-5-45). Paper feed pulley MP paper feed pulley Defective paper feed clutch 1. 1-5Forwarding pulley 14).

Paper feed clutch 1. 2 Assist clutch 1. Causes/check procedures Check if the rollers. Check if the following clutches are installed correctly. 2*2 *1: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only *2: 30 ppm/35 ppm model only Corrective measures Grease the bushes and gears.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Problem (7) Abnormal noise is heard. 2*1 Paper conveying clutch MP paper feed clutch Registration clutch*2 Middle clutch*2 Duplex clutch 1. 1-4-105 . Check visually and remedy if necessary. pulleys and gears operate smoothly.

preventive actions. Check procedures/corrective measures 1. and/or file names are invalid. (1) Scan to SMB error codes Code 1101 Contents Host destined does not exist on the network. 1105 2101 SMB protocol is not enabled. Confirm device's network parameters. Login to the host has failed. If such an error is encountered. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-6 Send error code This section describes the scanning errors and descriptions. 1. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 2. 5. 1102 Login to the host has failed. turn power off then on. 3. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 2. 1. Check the scanning file name. 3. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Check the host if the folder is properly shared. 1. 4. Confirm user name and password. Confirm device's network parameters. 1-4-106 . 2. Confirm destined host. Check illegal characters are not contained within these names. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device. folder. 3. 3. 1. 1103 Destined host. Confirm device's SMB protocols. Check the SMB port number. 2201 Writing scanned data has failed. and advise the service representative. Check the name of the folder and files conform with the naming syntax. 1. Error codes not described here could fall within software errors. Confirm destined host. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Confirm device's network parameters. Confirm destined host and folder. 3. as well as corrective actions.

3. (FTPS communication) FTP server responded with an error. Confirm device's network parameters. 1. 2. 4. 1. 2. 2102 Access to the FTP server has failed. 3. 5. Check the FTP port number. 4. Confirm device's security parameters. 2. 1. Initializing TLS has failed. Confirm device's network parameters. 1. 4. 3. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. Check the FTP server name. Confirm device's network parameters. Check the FTP server name. Destined folder is invalid. Check the FTP server name. Check the FTP server name. TLS negotiation has failed. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 2202 Connection with the FTP server has failed. 3. Check the FTP server name. 1. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 1105 1131 1132 2101 FTP protocol is not enabled. Check the FTP server name. Check illegal characters are not contained within these names. 6. Confirm destined folder. 1. 1. 2. Confirm device's security parameters. 2. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Confirm device's network parameters. Check the FTP port number. 3. Confirm device's FTP protocols.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Scan to FTP error codes Code 1101 Contents FTP server does not exist on the network. Check the FTP server name. Confirm device's network parameters. 2. 1. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. 1102 1103 Login to the FTP server has failed. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Access to the FTP server has failed. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Confirm user name and password. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. (Timeout) Connection with the FTP server has failed. 2231 3101 1-4-107 . Check the FTP server name. Check the FTP server name. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. (Connection timeout) 2201 Connection with the FTP server has failed. Check procedures/corrective measures 1. Check the FTP server. 2. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device. 5. 2. 2. 1. 2.

Check the SMTP/POP3 server. 3. 5. 4. 1. The domain the destined address belongs is prohibited by scanning restriction. Confirm device's SMTP protocols. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 2. 3. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 2. 1105 1106 2101 1. 3. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Check procedures/corrective measures 1. 2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. Confirm that the LAN cable is properly connected to the device. Confirm device's network parameters. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. 2. 2. PLAIN and LOGIN. 3. 1. SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Scan to E-mail error codes Code 1101 Contents SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network. 1102 1104 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. 1. Confirm device's SMTP protocols. Confirm device's SMTP parameters. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name. The device supports SMTP authentication services including CRAM-MD5. 1-4-108 . 1. Confirm device's network parameters. Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout) 2201 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. 1. Confirm user name and password. 1. 2. Check the SMTP/POP3 server. Confirm device's network parameters. 5. Check the SMTP/POP3 server. Check the SMTP/POP3 server. (Timeout) The size of scanning exceeded its limit. Sender’s address is not specified. 2202 2204 3101 3201 No SMTP authentication is found. 6. Confirm device's network parameters. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name. Confirm the network parameters the device is connected. Check the SMTP/POP3 server name. SMTP protocol is not enabled. DIGEST-MD5. 1. 1. Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. Confirm device's network parameters. 2. 1. 2. 1. Confirm device's network parameters. Check the SMTP/POP3 port number. Check the SMTP server. Confirm device's network parameters. 4.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-4-7 Error codes (1) Error code Error codes are listed on the communication reports. etc. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indication. while the lower two indicate the detailed classification.) The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause. Error code UXXXXX Detailed classification of error code General classification of error code Error code indication Figure 1-4-5 1-4-109 . followed by five digits. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits. activity report. The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5-digit number.

1-4-112 U009XX error code table).1-4-115 U018XX error code table). In interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception. Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.8 mode. in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception. An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Table of general classification Error code U00000 U00100 U00200 U00300 U004XX U006XX U00700 U008XX U009XX U010XX U011XX U01400 U01500 U01600 U017XX U018XX U03000 U03200 U03300 Description No response or busy after the set number of redials. Or. Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.1-4-112 U008XX error code table). An interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number.1-4-112 U004XX error code table). Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to P. operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number. A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.34 mode (refer to P. Interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-based bulletin board transmission capability. A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to P. data was not stored in the box specified by the destination unit. Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. or data was not stored in any subaddress confidential box in the destination unit.1-4-115 U017XX error code table).34 mode (refer to P. In interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception. A communication error occurred before starting T. A communication error occurred when calling in V.1-4-112 U006XX error code table).1-4-113 U010XX error code table). A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to P. U03400 U03500 U03600 U03700 1-4-110 .1-4-114 U011XX error code table). the specified Subaddress confidential box number was not registered in the destination unit. No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started. Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer). A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.30 protocol during transmission in V. operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number. A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to P. In polling reception from a unit of our make. Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to P. Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key. Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to P.

the specified subaddress box number was not registered in the destination unit. memory overflowed. Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication capability. Or. In encrypted transmission. or the destination receiver did not return its phone number. the rejected FAX number’s did match. Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Error code U04000 U04100 U04200 U04300 U04400 U04500 U05100 U05200 Description In interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode. Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission. Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys. Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree. memory overflowed in the destination unit. the rejected numbers did match. or the machine in question did not acknowledge its phone number. U05300 U14000 U14100 U19000 U19100 U19300 1-4-111 . Memory overflowed during memory reception. Password check transmission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the permit ID’s did not agree with. The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted numbers did not match. the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit. Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit ID’s did not match. in subaddress-based confidential reception. In interoffice subaddress-based transmission. Subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddressbased reception capability. Memory overflowed during confidential reception.

An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in Subaddress confidential box numbers. subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit. Subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the subaddress confidential box. An subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was not registered.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B Error code U00430 Description Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number. 1-4-112 . Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not registered. System error. Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not registered. Description Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum. (2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error Error code U00900 U00910 Description An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error. A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode. A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode. Subaddress-based confidential reception was interrupted because the specified subaddress box was not registered. Or. (2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error Error code U00800 U00811 Description A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal. U00431 U00432 U00433 U00440 U00450 U00460 U00462 (2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit Error code U00601 U00613 U00656 U00690 Image writing section problem Data was not transmitted to a modem error. The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit ID’s did not agree with while the destination transmitter is in password-check transmission or restricted transmission.

T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM). and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM). U01001 U01016 U01019 U01020 U01021 U01022 U01028 U01052 U01080 U01092 U01093 U01094 U01095 U01096 U01097 1-4-113 . A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.Q signal. No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal. The preset number of command retransfers for DCS/NSS signals was exceeded during phase B of transmission. communication was interrupted because of an impossible combination of the symbol speed and communication speed. The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an RR signal or no response. and T1 timeout was detected. A DCN signal or invalid command was received during phase D of transmission. Or.NULL signal. an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps. A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS. During transmission in V. A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM). and the preset number of command transfers was exceeded. and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make). No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS (Q) signal during phase D of transmission. An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal. Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal. No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission Error code U01000 Description An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.34 mode. No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal. and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).

communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS signal. No message was received during phase C of reception. A DCN signal was received during phase B of reception. Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception. A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit. No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol). No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal. Error line control was exceeded and a decoding error occurred for the message being received. A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal. Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception sequence in the V. Function of the unit (excl. No response after transmission of a DIS signal. During message reception. There was no response. No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make). No response after transmission of an FTT signal. during phase C/D of reception. A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal. transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line. or a DCN signal or invalid command was received.34 mode.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception Error code U01100 U01101 U01102 U01110 U01111 U01113 U01125 U01129 U01141 U01143 U01155 U01160 U01162 U01191 U01193 U01194 U01195 U01196 Description Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal. 1-4-114 . A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).

34 transmission Error code U01700 U01720 U01721 Description A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing). For example. U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange. A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar.30 process. Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units. A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange). For example.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2-7) U017XX error code table: V. in response to the signal. For example. 1) a DCN signal was received from the destination unit. for polling reception)/probing tone was not detected. U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T. a DCN signal was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut. CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and. INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar. U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).34 reception Error code U01800 U01810 U01820 U01821 Description A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing). PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected. U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange. or 2) a DIS (NSF. U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example. U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T. Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units. for polling transmission)/INFOh was not detected. 1-4-115 . A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).30 process. PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected. S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected. the unit transmitted a DCN signal. and the line was cut. For example. U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). (2-8) U018XX error code table: V. and the line was cut.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC This page is intentionally left blank. 1-4-116 .

Do not touch the drum surface with any object. use the original screws. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity. When removing the drum unit. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 1-5-1 . When removing the hook of the connector. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known. be sure to release the hook. Avoid direct light and high humidity. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards). Take care not to get the cables caught. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. do not touch parts with bare hands. (3) Toner Store the toner container in a cool. When the fax kit is installed. Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a relative humidity not higher than 85% RH. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil. be sure to disconnect the modular cable before starting disassembly. (2) Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum. press the Power key on the operation panel to off. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. never expose the drum surface to strong direct light. Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum. refer to the PARTS LIST. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. clean it.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1-5 Assembly and disassembly (1) Precautions Before starting disassembly. To reassemble the parts. dark place.

it is a counterfeit. See through the left window ( marking) Validation viewer See through the right window ( marking) Validation viewer Brand protection seal Brand protection seal A black-colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window Figure 1-5-1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse. the Kyocera Mita toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual validation. otherwise. Incision Cut Figure 1-5-2 1-5-2 . Through each window of the validation viewer. A validation viewer is required to accomplish this.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container As a means of brand protection. the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows: A black-colored band when seen through the left side window ( ) ) A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window ( The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera Mita branded toner container. Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container.

Open the right lower cover. Remove the strap and then remove the right lower cover. Pull the cassette 1 and cassette 2 out completely. 3. 2. Strap Conveying unit Right lower cover Figure 1-5-3 1-5-3 . 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-2 Paper feed section (1) Detaching and refitting the primary paper feed unit Procedure Remove the primary paper feed unit 1. Pull the conveying unit out.

9. 7. Open the handle cover. Unhook the hook and then remove the right lower front cover. 10. Remove two screws A and then remove the right middle rear cover.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. 6. Right middle rear cover Screws A Right lower rear cover Screws B Figure 1-5-4 8. Remove three screws B and then remove the right lower rear cover. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-65). Right lower front cover Hook Screws Right lower front cover Screw Handle cover Figure 1-5-5 1-5-4 . Remove three screws.

*: Use the specific primary paper feed unit depending on model .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 11. Connector Connector Figure 1-5-6 12. [45ppm/55ppm] Primary paper feed unit Screws Primary paper feed unit Screws [30ppm/35ppm] Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Figure 1-5-7 1-5-5 .30 ppm/35 ppm or 45 ppm/55 ppm. Remove two connectors. 13. Remove two screws each from primary paper feed unit. Remove the primary paper feed unit.

[45ppm/55ppm] Driving coupler Pin Pin Driving coupler Primary paper feed unit [30ppm/35ppm] Pin Driving coupler Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Primary paper feed unit Retard release lever Primary paper feed unit (lower side) [45ppm/55ppm] Figure 1-5-8 1-5-6 . you must install the primary paper feed unit while pushing the retard release lever of the lower side. *: For 45ppm/55ppm model. Check or replace the primary paper feed unit and refit all the removed parts.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 14. *: When refit the primary paper feed unit. when the primary paper feed unit is refitted (see page 1-5-10). you must confirm the inserted pin to the driving coupler.

Remove the spring and forwarding pulley holder assembly.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley. Remove the primary paper feed unit (see page 1-5-3). Remove the joint and three bushes. Remove four stop rings. [30 ppm model / 35 ppm model] Procedure 1. paper feed pulley and separation pulley. Detaching the forward pulley and paper feed pulley 2. Stop ring Stop rings Stop ring Primary paper feed unit Figure 1-5-9 3. 5. Forwarding pulley holder assembly Spring Bush Bush Joint Bush Paper feed pulley shaft Figure 1-5-10 1-5-7 . 4. Slide the paper feed pulley shaft.

*: To refit the feed gear Z30H OW. so that the on-way clutches meet each other. Paper feed pulley Feed gear Z30H OW Paper feed pulley Feed gear Z30H OW Oneway clutch Primary paper feed shaft Forwarding pulley holder Figure 1-5-11 8. Pull the primary paper feed shaft out from the forwarding pulley holder. 7. be sure to correctly align it with the paper feed pulley.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 6. Remove the feed gear Z30H OW and paper feed pulley. Pull the forwarding pulley from the axis hole of forwarding pulley holder. Forwarding pulley Axis hole Gear Axis hole Forwarding pulley holder Figure 1-5-12 1-5-8 .

Remove the separation pulley from the retard holder. 12. 10. Spring Hole Hole Primary lower plate Retard holder Figure 1-5-13 11. Remove the spring. 14. 13. perform maintenance mode U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see page 13-181). Clean or replace the forwarding pulley. paper feed pulley and separation pulley to the primary paper feed unit. Remove the retard holder from the primary lower plate.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Detaching the separation pulley 9. Refit the forwarding pulley. Separation pulley Axis hole Axis hole Retard holder Figure 1-5-14 1-5-9 . When the forwarding pulley. paper feed pulley and separation pulley. paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced.

Remove the separation pulley while push the retard release lever. paper feed pulley. Remove the stop ring A and then remove the one way clutch and the paper feed pulley. paper feed pulley or separation pulley is replaced. separation pulley to the primary paper feed unit. Clean or replace the forwarding pulley. paper feed pulley. [45 ppm model / 55 ppm model] Procedure 1. Paper feed pulley Feed gear Z30R OW Oneway clutch Stop ring A Primary paper feed unit Forwarding pulley Stop ring B Pickup gear Z30R Figure 1-5-15 4. Detaching the forward pulley and paper feed pulley 2. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley. paper feed pulley and separation pulley. Refit the forwarding pulley. Torque limiter Separation pulley Stop ring Retard release lever Figure 1-5-16 1-5-10 . Remove the primary paper feed unit (see page 1-5-3). 6. Remove the stop ring B and then remove the forwarding pulley. separation pulley. 8. Remove the stop ring. perform maintenance mode U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see page 13-181). 7. 5. When the forwarding pulley.

2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Detaching and refitting the MP tray paper feed unit Procedure 1. Remove four screws. MP tray Right cover Hooks Hook Hooks DU cover assembly Figure 1-5-18 1-5-11 Right cover . Screw Screw Conveying unit Figure 1-5-17 4. Open the MP tray. 3. Pull the conveying unit out. Unhook seven hooks and then remove the DU cover assembly.

Connector Connector Wire saddle Installation hole Wire saddle Figure 1-5-19 8. Remove the wire saddle. Remove two connectors. MP tray Lift arm MP tray paper feed unit Figure 1-5-20 MP tray 1-5-12 . 6. insert it in the MP tray paper feed unit side by turning the lift arm. *: To refit the wire saddle. be sure to fit in the positioning hole that was previously used. Remove the MP tray. *: When refitting the MP tray.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. 7. Release the wire saddle.

Screw MP tray paper feed unit Screw MP tray paper feed unit Figure 1-5-21 1-5-13 . 10.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 9. Remove two screws. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit.

5. MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley Procedure 1. *: Remove the DU lower guide easy by bending the top base that the hook is hooking because the hook of the DU lower guide lacks flexibility. DU lower guide Hooks Hook MP tray paper feed unit Top base Figure 1-5-22 3. Remove the stop ring B and then remove the bush B. Remove the MP tray paper feed unit (see page 1-5-11). Driving joint Bush A Stop ring A Bush B Stop ring B Figure 1-5-23 1-5-14 . Slide the bush A. Unhook three hooks and then remove the Du lower guide. Remove the stop ring A and then slide the driving joint. Detaching forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley 2. 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (5) Detaching and refitting the MP forwarding pulley.

*: To refit the one-way gear Z30R.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 6. 10. one way gear Z30R and MP paper feed pulley. Remove the spring and the feed holder assembly from the top base. Unhook the hook of the feed holder assembly. Spring Hook Feed holder assembly Top base Top base Spring Hook Figure 1-5-24 8. mount the gear in the correct direction as shown. Pull the feed MPF shaft out. Remove the two stop ring. 7. Remove the two bushes. Oneway gear Z30R MP paper feed pulley Oneway gear Z30R Stop ring Oneway clutch Bush Bush Stop ring Feed MFP shaft Figure 1-5-25 1-5-15 . 9.

Hook Hook Middle guide Figure 1-5-27 1-5-16 . Pickup MFP shaft MP forwarding pulley Pickup gear Z30R Feed gear Z26H Axis hole Axis hole Feed MPF holder Figure 1-5-26 Detaching the MP separation pulley 13. Unhook two hooks and then remove the middle guide. Pull the pickup gear Z30R and MP forwarding pulley out from the pickup MFP shaft. 12. Remove the pickup MPF shaft from the axis holes of feed MPF holder.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 11.

Joint Retard holder assembly Spring Figure 1-5-28 16. Retard holder assembly Figure 1-5-29 1-5-17 . Remove the retard holder assembly by turning it as shown. Remove the spring. 15. Release the uniting of joint by sliding the retard holder assembly.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 14.

22. Remove two bushes. 21. 19. Pull the retard MPF shaft out and then remove the torque limiter and the MP separation pulley. MP paper feed pulley or MP separation pulley is replaced. perform maintenance mode U903 (clearing the jam counter) (see page 1-3-181). Refit the MP forwarding pulley.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 17. Remove two stop rings. MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley to the MP tray paper feed unit. Retard MPF shaft Torque limiter MP separation pulley Bush Stop ring Retard holder Bush Stop ring Figure 1-5-30 1-5-18 . Clean or replace the MP forwarding pulley. 18. When the MP forwarding pulley. 20. MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley.

Remove two screws and then remove the ISU front cover. the light guiding plate. 2. 3. Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover. and reflector. Remove the original cover or the document processor. Do not clean it using a cleaning cloth that adheres the fiber easily. ISU front cover Screws Screws ISU right cover Figure 1-5-32 1-5-19 . Use air blow when you clean the diffusion seat.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-3 Optical section (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Notes on handling the LED mount assembly Do not touch the diffusion seat and the light guiding plate. LED mount assembly Diffusion seat Light guiding plate Reflector LED PWB White LED Diffusion seat Figure 1-5-31 Procedure 1.

Remove two screws and then remove the ISU rear cover. Remove the platen.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 4. Screw ISU rear cover Screw Figure 1-5-33 5. Platen Film Film Film Film Figure 1-5-34 1-5-20 . 6. Peels two films off.

the light guiding plate and the diffusion sheet of the LED mount assembly. When the LED mount assembly is replaced. 9. clean it by air blow. Remove two screws and then remove the LED mount assembly. *: When cleaning the reflector. Remove the FFC from the FFC connector.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 7. Not to leave the hair dust. Screw LED mount assembly Screw Figure 1-5-36 1-5-21 . 12. 13. Unhook two hooks and remove the FFC guide from the LED mount assembly. Check or replace the LED mount assembly and refit all the removed parts. Unhook the hook and remove the FFC cover from LED mount assembly. 8. LED mount assembly Cutting lack part Cutting lack part FFC cover Hook Hook FFC FFC connector FFC guide Hook LED mount assembly Figure 1-5-35 11. Move the LED mount assembly to the cutting lack part. perform maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) (see page 1-3-153). 10.

Remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. Worn the electrostatic prevention band for the destruction prevention of the ISU circuit board by static electricity. Remove six screws and then remove the lens cover. Remove the platen (see page 1-5-19). 5. *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. Screw Lens cover Screws Screw ISU PWB Figure 1-5-37 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the ISU Procedure Detaching the ISU 1. remove it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up (see page 1-5-50). 3. Remove the connector. 2. FFC FFC connector with a lock Connector Figure 1-5-38 1-5-22 .

[45ppm/55ppm] Screw Screw Screw Screw ISU [30ppm/35ppm] Screw Screw Screw Screw ISU Figure 1-5-39 1-5-23 . *: The ISU's are different depending on 30ppm model/35ppm model and 45ppm model/55ppm model. Remove four screws and then remove the ISU.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 6.

Refit all the removed parts. 8. 9. Fix the ISU as before with four screws. The rear and front of machine: Match the edge (e) of ISU to the positioning line (d) on frame side. The right and left of machine: Confirm the number (a) of seal pasted on lens. Match the line (c) of ISU to the positioning line (b) of same number on frame side. [45ppm/55ppm] c b Lens a e d ISU [30ppm/35ppm] c b Lens a e d ISU Figure 1-5-40 1-5-24 . Decide the fix position of ISU by the following.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Refitting the ISU 7.

Remove the conveying unit (see page 1-5-39). Remove three screws B and then remove the left cover. Screws LSU retainer Screws Figure 1-5-42 1-5-25 . Open the front cover and remove screw A.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and refitting the LSU Procedure 1. Remove the left cover lid. Transfer belt filters Screw A Toner filter Screws B Screw B Left cover Left cover lid Left filter cover Left filter Figure 1-5-41 9. Remove four screws and then remove the LSU retainer. 2. Remove the toner filter. Remove the left filter cover and the left filter. Remove the left upper cover (see page 1-5-49). 7. 8. 4. 3. Remove two transfer belt filters. 5. 6.

Remove the following connector from the LSU. LSU *:45ppm/55ppm only Connectors FFC connector with a lock FFC FFC connector * with a lock FFC Figure 1-5-44 1-5-26 . 11. Remove two screws and then remove the middle feed plate. 13. 30 ppm model/35 ppm model: FFC connector with a lock: 1pcs Connector: 2pcs 45 ppm model/55 ppm model: FFC connector with a lock: 2pcs Connector: 2pcs *: When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 10. Spring LSU retainer pin Screw Middle feed plate Screw Figure 1-5-43 12. removing it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up. Remove two LSU retainer pins and two springs. Pull the LSU out a little.

Screws Screws Screws LSU mount lid Screw Figure 1-5-46 1-5-27 . LSU Figure 1-5-45 15. Remove seven screws and then remove the LSU mount lid. Pull the LSU out from the body of the machine.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 14.

FFC support portions Electric wire support portion FFC FFC connector * with a lock Connector *: 30ppm/35ppm is FFC connector without the lock. Figure 1-5-48 1-5-28 . 17.) *: When remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. 20. Remove all the connectors and the FFC connectors with a lock. 19. Remove the FFC from the FFC support potion.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 16. removing it after release the lock by lifting the lock lever up. (30ppm model/35ppm model has the FFC connector without a lock. Screw Hooks LSU relay PWB cover Hooks Figure 1-5-47 18. Remove the screw. Remove the electric wire from the electric wire support portion. Unhook four hooks and then remove the LSU relay PWB cover.

22. Remove two screws each and then remove the LSU front holder.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 21. Remove the LSU retainer pins and the springs. Screw Spring LSU retainer pin LSU front holder Screw Figure 1-5-49 1-5-29 .

26. be sure to insert the FFC all the way in with the FFC connector. Support portion LSU(Y) LSU(Y) LSU(C) LSU(M) LSU(K) LSU support frame LSU (rear side) LSU (front side) (1) (2) Bos LSU(C) LSU(M) LSU(K) Figure 1-5-50 1-5-30 . *: When reconnecting FFCs.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC LSU (rear side) LSU (front side) Support portion 23. (2) Unhook the protrusions at the front of the LSU. 24. proceed as follows: 1)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-175). Remove four LSUs. *: Be sure to handle the front and rear handholds when handling the LSU.This is to avoid a lengthy servicing due to a possible error which could cause re-disassembly and -assembly. *: Do not touch terminals and FFC contacts in the LSU APC board. When replacing the new LSU. following the precautions and instructions below. Check or replace the LSU and refit all the removed parts. *: Do not get the LSU in direct contact with the holding frame subsequently applying shocks to the polygon motor inside. (1) Lift the far end of the LSU. Wrap an antistatic discharging belt around your wrist to prevent damage to the LSU. 25. 2)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-151).

Press [Registration]. 6. Press [Color Registration]. Chart for adjustment Figure 1-5-51 Manual correction 5. Press the system menu key. Press [Start] after all values have been entered. Procedure 1. Press [Color Registration]. [Auto] and then [Start]. 4. enter B as a value. A chart is printed. Color registration begins. Read figures at MH-1 to 7/CH-1 to 7/YH-1 to 7 and MV-3/CV-3/YV-3 of the reference chart and enter the figure marked at the scale which the BK fine line is in line with the M/C/Y fine lines.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Color registration adjustment Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit. 1-5-31 . 2. [Chart] and then [Ptint]. [Manual]. using the +/. Place the printed chart as the original and then [Start].keys. Auto correction 3. A chart is printed. Calibration begins. Chart for adjustment Figure 1-5-52 (example) When a red bar exactly coincides with B. Press [Adjustment/Maintenance]. [Calibration] and then [Start]. Color registration begins. 7.

If they are out of range. If they are within the range. Verify that each scale is within the range of 1to A. proceed to step 10.5/CV1. repeat steps 6 through 9. Verify that scales of MV-1. Press [Chart] and [Print] to print a chart.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 8. Chart for adjustment Figure 1-5-54 If manual color registration has failed: 11.2. perform the following steps: Sample 1 Sample 2 V-1 V-2 V-3 V-4 V-5 Figure 1-5-55 V-1 V-2 V-3 V-4 V-5 1-5-32 . adjustment is complete. proceed to step 11.5 coincide within the range of 1 to A.2.4. Figure 1-5-53 10. 9. If scales are out of range.4.4. If the balance between V-1 and V-5 is more than 2 scales (sample 1) or less than -2 scales (sample 2).5/YV-1. If they are within the range. The scale must be corresponding within the range of "A" from "1".2.

Rotate the adjustment knob using a 5 mm hex wrench. Hexagon socket Allen wrench Hexagon socket Hexagon socket Figure 1-5-56 Hexagon socket 1-5-33 . Number of rotation (V-1. 13.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 12. Refit the waste toner box tray as before and then close the front cover. 16. Turn the main power switch off and on.V-5) x 4 clicks 14. Direction of rotation (V-1 . (V-1 . 15. Open the front cover and then pull out the waste toner box tray (see page 1-5-34). Correction automatically starts.V-5) >= 2 scales (sample 1): rotate counterclockwise. Print a reference chart and verify the result.V-5) <= -2 scales (sample 2): rotate clockwise.

Open the front cover. 5. Remove four fixed screw of inner unit. Hook Waste toner box tray Hook Figure 1-5-57 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-4 Image formation section (1) Detaching and refitting the inner unit Procedure 1. Inner unit Connector cover Screw Inner unit Connector Screw Screw Screw Screw Figure 1-5-58 1-5-34 . 2. 3. Remove the screw and then open the connector cover. Remove the connector. 6. Detach the waste toner box tray while pushing up the hook of both ends. Remove all toner container each.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 7. 8. Remove the inner unit. Inner unit Fixed lever Figure 1-5-59 1-5-35 . Release the lock by pushing the fixed lever at the right and left of inner unit.

Detach the developer unit while supporting bottom. Remove two connectors. (The developer unit becomes basic and the drum units are combined.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the developer unit and drum unit Detaching example: Developer unit Y and Drum unit Y Procedure 1. 5. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-545). Developer unit Drum unit Drum unit Developer unit Figure 1-5-61 1-5-36 . 2. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-534).) 7. 3. Connectors Toner supply shutter Developer unit Figure 1-5-60 6. Pull out as one body the developer unit and the drum unit. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see page 1-5-41). Close the toner supply shutter. 4.

2)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-168). Check or replace the drum unit and the developer unit and refit all the removed parts. When replacing the new developer unit. 2) Performs maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) for 45 ppm/55 ppm model only (see page 1-3-91). 3)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-175). Developer unit Figure 1-5-62 1-5-37 . 4)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-151).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 8. proceed as follows: 1) Performs maintenance mode U140 (AC calibration) for 45 ppm/55 ppm model only (see page 1-3-91). 5)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-151). When replacing the new drum unit. 11. 9. Remove the drum unit from the developer unit. 3)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-168). Drum unit 10. proceed as follows: 1) Performs maintenance mode U119 (drum setup) (see page 1-3-83). 4)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-175).

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and refitting the charger roller unit Detaching example: Charger roller unit Y Procedure 1. *: When refitting the charger roller unit. proceed as follows: Performs maintenance mode U930 (clearing the charger roller count) (see page 1-3-190). that must hook the hook certain by operating the MC lock lever after inserting the charger roller unit until bumping. Charger roller unit Hook MC lock lever Figure 1-5-63 1-5-38 . Check or replace the charger roller unit and refit all the removed parts. Remove the inner unit (see page 1-534). 4. 3. Pull out the charger roller unit by picking and releasing the MC lock lever. When replacing the new charger roller unit. 2.

Remove three screws. Conveying unit Hook Hook Conveying inner cover Figure 1-5-65 1-5-39 . Pull the conveying unit out. 2. Unhook two hooks and then remove the conveying inner cover from the conveying unit. Conveying unit Right front cover Screw Hook Hook Hook Right front cover Screw ? 1?5?64 4. Unhook three hooks and then remove the right front cover. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-5 Transfer section (1) Detaching and refitting the conveying unit Procedure 1.

6. Remove four screws.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. Remove the conveying unit by lifting upward. Conveying unit Screws Screws Conveying unit Figure 1-5-66 1-5-40 .

Pull out the transfer belt unit by lifting up both ends. 3. Remove the conveying unit (see page 1-5-39). Connector Figure 1-5-67 4. Remove the connector. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt unit Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-545). Transfer belt unit Figure 1-5-68 1-5-41 .

Remove the transfer belt unit. proceed as follows: 1) Performs maintenance mode U469 (Transfer belt speed correction) (see page 1-3-175). 4)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-151). Check or replace the transfer belt unit and refit all the removed parts.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. 7. 2)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-168). *: When refitting the new transfer belt unit. 3)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-175). set the projected part aligned with the rail entrance. 6. When replacing the new transfer belt unit. Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit Rail entrance Rail entrance Projection part Projection part Transfer belt unit Transfer belt unit Figure 1-5-69 1-5-42 .

Pull out the conveying unit.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and reffiting the transfer roller Procedure 1. Unhook the hook and remove the TC gear Z29R. Loosen two fixed screws on the TC guide. 5. 3. Remove the transfer roller. Remove two bearings. Remove the stop ring. Conveying unit Figure 1-5-70 2. Transfer roller (shaft) Bearing Bearing Stop ring Hook TC gear Z29R Transfer roller (shaft) Transfer roller TC guide Screw TC guide TC guide Screw Figure 1-5-71 1-5-43 . 4. 6.

proceed as follows: 1) Performs maintenance mode U127 (clearing the transfer counter) (see page 1-3-85).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 7. 3)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-175). Ground plate Ground plate (terminal) Figure 1-5-72 Ground plate (frame) 1-5-44 . When replacing the new transfer roller. 4)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-151). *: When refitting the transfer roller. 8. Check or replace the transfer roller and refit all the removed parts. confirm that the terminal of the ground plate is in contact with the ground plate in the frame. 2)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-168).

2. 3. Pull out the conveying unit.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-6 Fuser section (1) Detaching and reffiting the fuser unit Procedure 1. Remove the screw and then the fuser electric wire cover. Remove two connectors Connector Connector Fuser electric wire cover Screw Conveying unit Figure 1-5-73 1-5-45 .

6. Fuser unit Screws (M4×10) Screws (M4×10) Figure 1-5-74 1-5-46 . Remove four screws (M4 × 10) and then remove the fuser unit. proceed as follows: 1) Performs maintenance mode U167 (clearing the fuser count) (see page 1-3-100). 4)Performs maintenance mode U410 (Adjusting the halftone automatically) (see page 1-3-151). 5. 2)Performs maintenance mode U464 (Calibration) (see page 1-3-168). 3)Performs maintenance mode U469 (Auto color registration correction) (see page 1-3-175). Check or replace the fuser unit and refit all the removed parts. When replacing the new fuser unit.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 4.

*: Confirm the power plug is removed from the outlet without fail when you remove the connector because a high current is supplied to fuser IH unit by this connector. 9. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-65). 6. Remove the IH electric wire cover (see page 1-5-65). 4. 3. 5. Remove four screws and then remove the fuser IH PWB cover (see page 1-565). Release the wire saddle. Remove two connectors from the fuser IH PWB according to the following notes. Remove the right upper cover (see page 1-5-65). *: Confirm the connected connector was surely locked when you connect this connector again. Remove the electric wire holder. Fuser IH PWB Electric wire holder Wire saddle Connector Fuser IH PWB Figure 1-5-75 1-5-47 . 2. 8. Remove the right middle rear cover (see page 1-5-65). 7.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and reffiting Fuser IH unit Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-545).

Remove two screws. Unhook the hook by lifting up the fuser IH unit a little and then remove it. Fuser IH unit Screw Screw Hook Hook Fuser IH unit Figure 1-5-76 1-5-48 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 10. 11.

Release six wire saddles on the controller box. Remove the electric wire holder. Unhook six hooks and then remove the left upper cover. Remove two screws. 4. Open the controller lid. 3. Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-65). 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-7 PWBs (1) Detaching and refitting the main PWB Procedure 1. 6. Electric wire holder Wire saddle Wire saddles Controller box Wire saddle Wire saddle Figure 1-5-78 1-5-49 . Left upper cover Controller lid Screws Hooks Hook Left upper cover Hooks Figure 1-5-77 5.

lock by knocking down the lock lever after inserting the FFC to the connector until both projections are hidden (see figure c). Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB from the outside of the control box. YC25 YC11 YC30 YC24 YC3 (FFC connector with a lock) YC17 (BK) YC21 (WH) YC12 YC25 Controller box Main PWB YC17YC21 YC12 *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 7. remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever (see figure a and b). *: When connecting the FFC that there is a projection in the terminal both sides. YC11 YC30 YC24 YC3 Main PWB FFC connector with a lock [Lock release/FFC detaching] FFC a [State of lock] 1 2 Lock lever Lock lever [Lock release/FFC detaching] b [State of lock] Lock lever 1 2 Lock lever FFC c [FFC connection/Lock] Projection Lock lever 2 1 Projection FFC Figure 1-5-79 1-5-50 .

Unhook two hooks and then remove the controller box.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 8. Controller box Hook Hook Screws Screw Screws Figure 1-5-80 10. YC23 YC27 YC32 YC8 (FFC connector with a lock) YC9 YC1 [BLACK] (with a lock) YC2 [BLUE] (with a lock) *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. 9. Remove the following connectors that connected to the main PWB. Remove five screws. remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever (see page 1-5-50) Main PWB YC23 YC27 YC32 YC1 YC9 YC8 BLACK YC2 BLUE FFC connector with a lock Main PWB Controller box Figure 1-5-81 1-5-51 .

14. Remove the fan motor holder. Screws Main PWB Screws Screw Main PWB Figure 1-5-83 1-5-52 . Remove two screws. Remove two electric wire holders. 13. 12. Release the wire saddle. Electric wire holder Fan mootor holder Screws Electric wire holder Controller box Wire saddle Figure 1-5-82 15.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 11. Remove five screws from the main PWB.

remove the following devices from the main PWB and then reattach it to the new main PWB. *: When replacing the main PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 16. Network connector Network connector Projections for ground Main PWB Main PWB BK WH YS4 Code DIMM (YS4) YS1 Memory DDR (YS1) BLACK YC14 BLUE EEPROM (YC14) Figure 1-5-84 1-5-53 . Remove the main PWB by releasing the projection of ground plate in the network connector. EEPROM (YC14) Code DIMM (YS4) Memory DDR (YS1) *: Exchange EEPROM (YC14) and code DIMM (YC4) by the set. *: Check or replace the main PWB and refit all the removed parts.

remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever (see page 1-5-50) Engine PWB FFC connector with a lock YC2 YC5 YC7 YC10 YC4 YC1 YC27 YC3 YC26 YC6 1-5-54 YC9 YC45 YC8 YC46 YC17 YC12 YC15 YC16 YC18 YC22 YC21 YC20 YC19 Engine PWB Figure 1-5-85 . Remove twenty three connectors of following from the engine PWB. YC1 YC2 YC3 YC4 YC5 (FFC connector with a lock) YC6 (FFC connector with a lock) YC7 (FFC connector with a lock) YC10 (FFC connector with a lock) YC26 YC9 YC8 YC46 (FFC connector with a lock) YC12 (FFC connector with a lock) YC15 YC16 YC18 YC17 YC19 YC20 YC21 YC22 YC45 *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the engine PWB Procedure 1. Remove the controller box (see page 15-49).

Hook Engine PWB Hook Engine PWB Screws Screws Screws Engine PWB Engine PWB U100 EEPROM (U100) Figure 1-5-86 1-5-55 . Unhook two hooks and then remove the engine PWB. 5. Remove six screws.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 3. Check or replace the engine PWB and refit all the removed parts. *: When replacing the engine PWB. remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB and then reattach it to the new engine PWB. 4.

Remove the rear under cover (see page 1-5-65). YC3 YC1 TB1 TB2 TB5 YC7 YC8 YC17 YC14 YC12 YC16 YC13 YC10 YC11 YC3 Wire saddle Power source assembly Wire saddles Wire saddles Power source PWB YC17 YC14 YC12 YC16 YC13YC10 YC11 YC1 TB1 TB2 TB5 YC7 YC8 Power source PWB Figure 1-5-88 1-5-56 . 2. 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and refitting the power source PWB Procedure 1. Release three wire saddles. Connector Connector Connectors Wire saddle Wire saddle Waire saddle Figure 1-5-87 4. Remove the following eleven connectors and three tabs from the power source PWB. Release six wire saddles. 5. Remove four connectors.

Remove the connector from the coin vender plate. Connctor Wire saddle Coin vender plate Figure 1-5-89 8. 7. Remove two screws.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 6. 9. Remove the power source assembly. Screw Screw Power source assembly Figure 1-5-90 1-5-57 . Release the wire saddle.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 10. Remove the power source PWB. 12. Screws Screws Screws Power source PWB Screw Figure 1-5-91 1-5-58 . Remove eight screws. 11. Check or replace the power source PWB and refit all the removed parts.

3. 2. 5. 6. Unhook two hooks of PWB spacer and then remove the high voltage PWB 1. Remove the power source PWB (see page 1-5-56). Remove the main drive unit (see page 1-5-73). Screws Screw Screws Screw PWB spacer Screws High voltage PWB 1 Figure 1-5-93 1-5-59 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 1 Procedure 1. Remove eight screws. Check or replace the high voltage PWB 1 and refit all the removed parts. High voltage PWB 1 Connectors YC4 YC18 Connectors YC10 YC11 High voltage PWB 1 Connector Figure 1-5-92 YC3 4. Remove five connectors from high voltage PWB.

Check or replace the high voltage PWB 2 and refit all the removed parts. 3. Hook Hook Screws High voltage PWB 2 assembly Figure 1-5-95 1-5-60 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (5) Detaching and refitting the high voltage PWB 2 Procedure 1. Unhook two hooks and then remove the high voltage PWB 2. Remove two screws. High voltage PWB 2 assembly Connectors High voltage PWB 2 assembly Figure 1-5-94 4. 2. Remove the main drive unit (see page 1-5-73). 5. Remove two connectors from the high voltage PWB 2 assembly. Pull the transfer belt unit out a little (see page 1-5-41). 6.

Remove the screw from the right upper cover. 4. Remove the screw and then remove the fan cover. Open the front cover. Right upper cover Screw Figure 1-5-96 3. Unhook three hooks and then remove the front upper right cover. Pull the conveying unit out. 2. 5. Hooks Front upper right cover Screw Fan cover Figure 1-5-97 1-5-61 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (6) Detaching and refitting the operation PWB Procedure 1.

Remove two screws and then remove the USB electric wire (connector).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 6. Remove the screw and then remove the operation panel cover. Screws USB electric wire (connector) Figure 1-5-99 1-5-62 . Screw Operation panel cover Operation panel cover Figure 1-5-98 7.

11. Remove four connectors from the operation PWB. 12. Remove four screws. Release three wire saddles. 10. Operation panel unit Operation PWB Connectors Connector Wire saddle Operation panel unit Connector Waire saddles Figure 1-5-101 1-5-63 . Pull the operation panel unit upward. Remove the operation panel unit. Screws Screws Figure 1-5-100 9.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 8.

FFC Operation PWB FFC connector with a lock Connectors FFC Connectors Figure 1-5-102 14.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 13. Remove four screws and then remove the operation PWB. Check or replace the operation PWB and refit all the removed parts. remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever (see page 1-5-50). *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. 15. Screws Operation PWB Screw Screw Figure 1-5-103 1-5-64 . Remove four connectors and two FFC from the operation PWB.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (7) Detaching and refitting the fuser IH PWB Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-545). Release two hanging parts and then remove the rear lower cover. 3. Remove seven screws and then remove the rear upper cover. 4. Remove eight screws. Rear upper cover Screws Screws Screws Screw Figure 1-5-104 2. Screw Screw Screws Rear lower cover Screws Figure 1-5-105 1-5-65 .

Remove the screw and five hooks and then remove the right upper cover. Remove two screws and then remove the ISU right cover. Remove two screws. Unhook two hooks and then remove the right middle rear cover. Screws ISU right cover Right upper cover Screw Figure 1-5-106 7. 6. 8.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. Right middle rear cover Screws Figure 1-5-107 1-5-66 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 9. IH electric wire cover Screw Screws Screw Fuser IH PWB cover Figure 1-5-108 11. Remove four screws and the remove the fuser IH PWB cover. 12. Release two wire saddles. 10. Remove four connector from the fuser IH PWB. Remove the IH electric wire cover. Wire saddle Connector Connectors Fuser IH PWB Connector Wire saddle Figure 1-5-109 1-5-67 .

Remove three screws. Connector (YC27) Feed PWB 1 Electric wire holder Electric wire holder Figure 1-5-110 15.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 13. 14. IH box assembly Screw Hook Hook Screws IH box assembly Figure 1-5-111 1-5-68 . Remove the connector (YC27) from feed PWB 1. 16. Remove two electric wire holders. Unhook two hooks and then remove IH box assembly.

Remove two connectors. 19.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 17. Screws Screws Connector Screws Connector Fuser IH PWB PWB spacer IH box assembly Figure 1-5-112 1-5-69 . Remove six screws. Check or replace the fuser IH PWB and refit all the removed parts. 20. 18. Unhook the hook of the PWB spacer and then fuser IH PWB.

Release the wire saddle. *: Do not have a shaft part alone when you carry drum drive unit K. 3. Screw Screws Screw (Shaft portion) Screws Drum drive unit K (housing portion) Figure 1-5-114 1-5-70 . Remove the connector. 5. Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-65). Connector Wire saddle Figure 1-5-113 4. Remove three screws. 2. (Have the housing.) *: Put support on the tip of the shaft so that the shaft may become the horizontal when you put drum drive unit K on the table etc. Remove the drum drive unit K.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-8 Drive section (1) Detaching and refitting the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY Procedure Detaching the drum drive unit K 1.

the toner fan motor 1 and the toner fan motor 2. Remove the connector. Screw Toner fan motor 2 Screw Toner fan motor 1 Toner unit duct Figure 1-5-116 1-5-71 . Remove as one body the toner unit duct. Remove the screw. 9.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Detaching the drum drive unit MCY 6. Remove the left upper cover (see page 1-5-49). Remove the left cover (see page 1-525). 7. 8. Connector Screw Figure 1-5-115 10.

*: Do not have a shaft part alone when you carry drum drive unit MCY. 14. 12. Remove five screws and then remove the drum drive unit MCY. Connector Wire saddle Connector Wire saddle Connector Figure 1-5-117 13.) *: Put support on the tip of the shaft so that the shaft may become the horizontal when you put drum drive unit CMY on the table etc.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 11. (Shaft portion) (Shaft portion) Drum drive unit MCY (housing portion) Screw Screw Screw Screws Figure 1-5-118 1-5-72 . Check or replace the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY and refit all the removed parts. Remove three connector. (Have the housing. Release two wire saddles.

Main drive unit Connector Wire saddle Main drive unit Wire saddles Figure 1-5-119 4. Connector Main drive unit Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Figure 1-5-120 1-5-73 . Remove the drum drive unit K and the drum drive unit MCY (see page 1-5-70). Remove two connectors. Remove five screws.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the main drive unit Procedure 1. 6. 3. 2. Release three wire saddles on the main drive unit. Check or replace the main drive unit and refit all the removed parts. Remove the main drive unit. 5.

Remove the rear upper cover and the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-65).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and refitting the fuser drive unit. YC16 YC13. YC14 YC10. YC19 YC18 YC20 YC3 YC27 YC26 Feed PWB 1 YC1 1-5-74 YC17 YC2 FFC connector with a lock YC14 YC13 YC15 YC16 YC23 YC25 YC11 YC5 YC10 YC12 Figure 1-5-122 YC4 . transfer drive unit and feed drive unit Procedure Detaching the fuser drive unit 1. YC3 YC17. YC19 YC20. YC27 YC26. Remove the following twenty connectors from the feed PWB 1. YC4 YC1 (FFC connector with a lock) YC2 (FFC connector with a lock) *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. Remove five electric wire holders of feed PWB 1 assembly. 3. YC18. Feed PWB 1 assembly Feed PWB 1 assembly Electric wire holder Electric wire holder Wire saddle Electric wire holder Electric wire holder Electric wire holder Figure 1-5-121 4. YC25 YC15. remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever (see page 1-5-50). 2. YC12 YC23. YC11 YC5. Release the wire saddle.

7. Remove the feed PWB 1 assembly. Remove three screws.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 5. Engine PWB FFC connector with a lock (YC4) FFC FFC connector with a lock (YC1) Feed PWB 2 Figure 1-5-123 6. Feed PWB 1 assembly Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Feed PWB 1 assembly Figure 1-5-124 1-5-75 . *: When removing the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock. Remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock (YC4) on the engine PWB. remove the FFC after released by lifting up the lock lever (see page 1-5-50). Remove the FFC from the FFC connector with a lock (YC1) on the feed PWB 2.

14. Remove three screws. Remove the connector. Remove three screws. 9. Remove the connector. 13. Release the clamp. Pull out the transfer belt unit a little (see page 1-5-41). 10.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 8. 15. Remove the transfer drive unit. Transfer drive unit Screw Transfer drive unit Screw Transfer drive unit Clamp Connector [45ppm/55ppm] Clamp Screws Connector Screws [30ppm/35ppm] Figure 1-5-126 1-5-76 . Remove the fuser drive unit. 12. Fuser drive unit Screw Fuser drive unit Connector Screw Screw Figure 1-5-125 Detaching the transfer drive unit 11.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Detaching the feed drive unit 16. Remove three electric wires from the feed 2 FFC guide. Remove two screws and then remove the feed 2 FFC guide. Electric wire holder Feed 2 FFC guide Electric wire holders Figure 1-5-127 17. Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Screw Screw Feed 2 FFC guide Screw Figure 1-5-128 1-5-77 .

Remove three screws. Remove the following nine connectors from the feed PWB 2. 20. YC10 YC11 YC7 YC8 YC3 YC5 YC6 YC13 YC12 Feed PWB 2 YC10 YC11 YC7 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC8 YC5 YC6 Figure 1-5-129 19. Remove the feed drive unit. Feed drive unit Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw [45ppm/55ppm] [30ppm/35ppm] Figure 1-5-130 1-5-78 YC12 Feed PWB 2 YC13 YC3 18.

Check or replace the feed drive unit and refit all the removed parts. Feed drive unit Paper feed clutch 1 Connector Connector (Yellow) Paper feed clutch 2 Marking [YELLOW] Figure 1-5-131 1-5-79 . *: Connect the connector (yellow) to the connector of paper feed clutch 1 on stamp [YELLOW] side as before.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 21. when removing the connector of the paper feed clutch as the check of the feed drive unit etc.

3. Check or replace the lift motor and refit all the removed parts. Remove the lift motor 1 and 2. 5. Remove the power source assembly (see page 1-5-56). 6. Lift motor 1 Lift motor 2 Lift motor Connector Screws Figure 1-5-132 1-5-80 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Detaching and refitting the lift motor 1 and 2 Procedure 1. Remove the connector each. 4. 2. Remove two screws each. Remove the rear lower cover (see page 1-5-65).

Check or replace the eject filters and refit the filter. 2. Eject filter units Eject filter Hook Hook Eject cover Figure 1-5-133 1-5-81 . 3. Unhook the hook and remove the eject filter units.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-5-9 Others (1) Detaching the eject filter Procedure 1. Remove the eject filters from the eject covers.

Check or replace the toner filter unit and refit the filter.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Detaching and refitting the toner filter Procedure 1. 2. Toner filter unit Levers Toner filter unit Figure 1-5-134 1-5-82 . Remove the toner filter unit while gripping the levers.

2. 3. Remove the fan filter by releasing the lever. Clean the fan filter. Front cover Fan filter Lever Fan filter Figure 1-5-135 1-5-83 . Refit the fan filter. Open the front cover. 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Detaching and refitting the fan filter Procedure 1.

3. Remove two transfer belt filters by releasing the lever. Refit the transfer belt filter.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Detaching and refitting the transfer belt filter Procedure 1. 2. Clean the transfer belt filter. Lever Transfer belt filter Lever Transfer belt filters Figure 1-5-136 1-5-84 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (5) Detaching and refitting the DU filter Procedure 1. Open the MP tray. Clean the DU filter. Refit the DU filter. 2. Remove two DU filters by releasing the lever. 4. DU filter DU filter Lever Lever DU filter MP tray Figure 1-5-137 1-5-85 . 3.

Left filter Lever Left filter cover Figure 1-5-138 1-5-86 . Remove the left filter cover by releasing the lever. 3. Check or replace the left filter and refit the filter. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (6) Detaching and refitting the left filter Procedure 1. Remove the left filter.

Remove the rear upper cover (see page 1-5-65). 3. Screws Wire saddle Figure 1-5-139 5. 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (7) Detaching and refitting the hard disk unit Procedure 1. Perform maintenance mode U917 (backup data reading) (see page 1-3186). Unhook two hooks and pull out the HDD bracket a little. Release the wire saddle. Remove two screws. 4. Hook Hook HDD bracket Figure 1-5-140 1-5-87 .

Replace the hard disk unit and refit all the removed parts. Remove two connectors from the hard disk unit while pushing the lock lever.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 6. Number of hard disk unit equipment 30ppm model/35ppm model: 1 45ppm model/55ppm model: 2 [30ppm/35ppm] [45ppm/55ppm] Hard disk unit Hard disk unit Hard disk unit Lever Lever Connector Connector Figure 1-5-141 7. FMU application.7 resource. Perform maintenance mode U024 (HDD formatting) (see page 1-3-29). and the PDF1. 2)Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved WeeklyTimer. 1)Connects to the machine the USB memory that preserved Software LANGUAGE BR.) 3. 1. Installs the firmware from the application screen of the system menu. 2. (Refer to operation guide.Opt Msg). Perform maintenance mode U917 (backup data writing) (see page 1-3186). Install the firmwares by the following procedure. Remove four screws and then remove the hard disk unit from the HDD bracket. JP (Opt Font. The firmware is installed by switching the main power switch to ON/OFF. 8. Screw Screw HDD bracket Screw Screw Screw Hard disk unit (45ppm/55ppm only) Hard disk unit Figure 1-5-142 1-5-88 .

be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust).2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (8) Direction of installing the principal fan motors When detaching or refitting the fan motors. Fuse rear fan motor Developer fan motor 2 LSU fan motor IH fan motor Developer fan motor 1 Coil fan motor1 Fuser front fan motor Fuse fan motor 1 Eject fan motor 2 Fuser fan motor 2 Eject fan motor 1 Eject front fan motor Eject rear fan motor (Rating label:outside) Coil fan motor 2 Belt fan motor 1 (Rating label:inside) Controller fan motor Fuser fan motor 1 (Rating label:inside) Eject fan motor 1 (Rating label:inside) Toner fan motor 2 Belt fan motor 2 (Rating label:inside) Eject fan motor 2 (Rating label:inside) Toner fan motor 1 Fuser fan motor 2 (Rating label:inside) Power source fan motor (Rating label:inside) Figure 1-5-143 1-5-89 .

switch off the main power switch. 5. and after verifying the power indicator has gone off. Press the power key on the operation panel. engine PWB. and after verifying the power indicator has gone off. USB memory Figure 1-6-1 6. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB. Upgrading firmware starts (blinking the memory LED). Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. [Completed] is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete. Wait for several seconds and then remove the USB memory from the machine. Procedure 1. Preparation Extract the file that has the download firmware and put them in the USB Memory. optional language. Press the power key on the operation panel. switch off the main power switch. Caution: Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading. 3. operation PWB. 1-6-1 . 8. Perform maintenance item U000 (maintenance report output) and check that U019 ROM version has been upgraded. 9. 7. motor control PWB. 4. color table and optional devices. Insert the USB memory in which the firmware has been written into a notch hole of the machine. 2. fuser IH PWB. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. Perform maintenance item U000 (maintenance report output) and check U019 ROM version. ISC PWB.

Main PWB EEPROM YC14 Figure 1-6-2 When refitting DIMM. Main PWB YS4 CODE FLS YS3 DIMM Figure 1-6-3 1-6-2 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-6-2 Remarks on main PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB. remove the EEPROM (YC14) and code DIMM (YS4) from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB. check "CODE" and "FLS" marked on the PWB and refit them to the original positions.

Main PWB YC1 BLACK YC2 BLUE Figure 1-6-4 When connecting the USB cables (YC17. YC21) to the PWB. YC2) to the PWB.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC When connecting the hard disk cables (YC1. match "BLACK" and "BLUE" marked on the PWB with the connector colors. match "BK" and "WH" marked on the PWB with the connector colors. Main PWB WH YC17 YC21 BK Figure 1-6-5 1-6-3 .

remove the EEPROM (U100) from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new engine PWB. Engine PWB EEPROM U100 Figure 1-6-6 1-6-4 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1-6-3 Remarks on engine PWB replacement When replacing the engine PWB.

Actuator (Paper conveying sensor) *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only . Feed sensor 2 (FS2) 23. Paper conveying roller 10. Feed sensor 1 (FS1) 22. 11 4 5 21 7 1 17 3 15 13 8 6 2 12 4 23 9 5 22 7 16 24 10 1 20 14 8 2 6 3 18 10 9 19 Figure 2-1-1 Cassette paper feed section 1. Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (PGS2(U)) 2-1-1 19. Paper sensor 1 (PS1) 12. paper feed pulley and separation pulley. (1) Cassette paper feed section Cassette paper feed section consists of the paper holder with the cassette operation plate activated by lift motor 1 and 2. Forwarding pulleys 5. Assist pulleys* 9. Actuator (Paper gauge sensor 1) 18. Cassette base 2. Lift sensor 1 (LS1) 14. and the paper conveying section that conveys the fed paper to the transfer/separation section. Paper conveying sensor (PCS) 24. such as the forwarding pulley. Cassette operation plate 3. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L) (PGS2(L)) 20. Paper is fed out of the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley. Assist rollers* 8. Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) (PGS1(L)) 17. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (PGS1(U)) 16. Paper sensor 2 (PS2) 13. and the pulleys. Actuator (Paper gauge sensor 2) 21. Separation pulleys 7. Lift sensor 2 (LS2) 15. Paper conveying pulley 11. Cassette 4.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-1 Paper feed/conveying section 2-1 Mechanical Construction Paper feed/conveying section consists of the paper feed unit that feeds paper from the cassette and the MP tray paper feed unit that feeds paper from the MP tray. the paper feed pulley and the separation pulley. Paper feed pulleys 6. for extracting and conveying the paper.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC2-2 YC2-3 YC2-4 YC2-5 YC10-1 YC4-1 YC8-11 YC8-2 YC8-3 YC8-6 YC8-9 YC3-13 YC3-14 YC3-19 YC3-22 YC8-23 YC8-14 YC8-15 YC8-18 YC8-21 YC3-15 YC3-16 YC3-25 YC3-28 YC4-3 YC12-1 YC6-3 YC5-3 FPWB2 YC1 FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_REM ASIST_CL1 FEED_CL1_REM CAS1_P0_SENS PICK_SOL1_REM PICK_SOL1_RET CAS1_EMPTY_SENS CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS LIFT_MOT1_RET LIFT_MOT1_DR CAS1_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS2_P0_SENS PICK_SOL2_REM PICK_SOL2_RET CAS2_EMPTY_SENS CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS LIFT_MOT2_RET LIFT_MOT2_DR CAS2_QUANT1 CAS2_QUANT2 FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 FEED2_SENS V-FEED_CL_REM PGS2(U) PGS2(L) PUSOL2* PS2 LS2 LM2 PGS1(U) PGS1(L) PFCL2 FS2 PUSOL1* PS1 LS1 LM1 PFCL1 FS1 6 5 4 3 PFM ASCL1* PCCL PCS ASCL2* *: 45 ppm/55 ppm model only YC4 EPWB Figure 2-1-2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram 2-1-2 .

MP support Tray 6. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) 9. 9 2 3 8 7 1 6 4 12 11 14 5 15 10 13 Figure 2-1-3 MP tray paper feed section 1. MP paper width switch (MPPWSW) 13. MP paper length switch (MPPLSW) 11. MP table 5. The MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter. MP paper sensor (MPPS) 7.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) MP tray paper feed section Paper is fed out of the MP tray by the rotation of the MP forwarding pulley. MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2) 10. MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley. Actuator (MP paper sensor) 8. MP forwarding pulley 2. MP tray switch (MPTSW) 14. MP separate pulley 4. MP feed sensor (MPFS) 2-1-3 . Actuator (MP paper length switch) 12. MP paper feed pulley 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC RYPWB YC3-5 MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPLS1 MPPS YC3-3 MPF_PPR_SET YC3-13 MPF_CL_REM MP PFCL MPLS2 MPPWSW MPPLSW MPTSW YC3-8 YC3-11 MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPF_JAM_SENS MPFS YC3-11 YC3-11 YC2-7 YC2-5 YC2-4 YC2-2 YC2-9 MPF_LIFT_DR_B MPF_LIFT_DR_A MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG MPF_TABLE MPLM YC12 YC17 FPWB1 YC1 YC6 EPWB Figure 2-1-4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram 2-1-4 .

Paper conveying pulley 6. Middle pulley 3. 4 3 5 9 8 7 1 6 2 Figure 2-1-5 Paper conveying section 1. and then sent to the transfer/separation section by the right registration roller and left registration roller. Middle sensor (MS) 7. or as paper refeeding for duplex printing. Actuator (regist deflection sensor) 9. Paper by feeding is conveyed by the middle roller to the position where the registration sensor (RS) is turned on. Registration sensor (RS) 2-1-5 . Regist deflection sensor (RDS) 8. Middle roller 2.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Paper conveying section The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer/separation section as paper feeding from the cassette or MP tray. Left registration roller 4. Right registration roller 5.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC FPWB2 RCL REG_SENS REG_CL_REM YC22-2 YC7-12 RS YC7-5 BEND_SENS RDS YC8-9 FFED1_SENS FPWB1 MS YC7-14 MID_CL_REM MCL YC2-2 YC2-3 YC2-4 YC2-5 FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_REM 6 5 4 3 PFM YC1 YC4 EPWB YC5-42 YC2-9 Figure 2-1-6 Paper conveying section block diagram (30 ppm/35 ppm model) 2-1-6 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC FPWB2 RM YC7-12 REG_SENS RS REG_MOT_B/ REG_MOT_A/ REG_MOT_B REG_MOT_A YC25-1 YC25-2 YC25-3 YC25-4 YC7-5 BEND_SENS RDS YC8-9 YC7-1 YC7-2 YC7-3 YC7-4 YC2-2 YC2-3 YC2-4 YC2-5 FFED1_SENS MID_B/ MID_A/ MID_B MID_A FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_REM MS FPWB1 MM 6 5 4 3 PFM YC1 YC4 EPWB YC5-42 YC2-9 Figure 2-1-7 Paper conveying section block diagram (45 ppm/55 ppm model) 2-1-7 .

Cleaning blade 7.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-2 Drum section The drum section consists of the charger roller unit. The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging. Drum 2. Drum screw 10. The drum is electrically charged uniformly by means of a charger roller to form a latent image on the surface. Cleaning roller 8. 1 7 10 6 8 2 9 5 4 3 Figure 2-1-8 Drum section 1. Control roller 9. Charger case 5. drum and cleaning section. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and the cleaning roller which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer. Drum frame 6. Cleaning lamp (CL) 2-1-8 . Charger cleaning roller 4. Charger roller 3.

Main chager high voltage Y Drum unit Y DRPWB-Y EEPROM 6 5 YC14-2 YC14-3 CL-Y YC4-16 YC4-18 YC4-20 YC14-8 YC10 YC4-13 YC12-2 YC12-3 EEP_SDA YC4-15 YC4-17 YC4-19 YC12-8 ERS_C_REM FRPWB EPWB MCPWB DRPWB-C EEPROM EEP_SCL YC2 ERS_Y_REM START /STOP CLOCK LD YC4-14 EEP_SCL EEP_SDA DRM-Y Main chager high voltage C 4 3 CW/CCW [45 ppm/55 ppm model only] Drum unit C CL-C 6 START /STOP CLOCK DRM-C 5 4 3 LD CW/CCW HVPWB1 Figure 2-1-9 Drum section block diagram 2-1-9 Main chager high voltage M DRPWB-M EEPROM Drum unit M 6 5 4 3 YC10-2 YC10-3 YC5-18 YC5-20 YC10-8 YC3 YC9 START /STOP CLOCK LD CW/CCW YC5-14 YC5-16 EEP_SCL EEP_SDA ERS_M_REM DRM-M*2 DRM -MCY*1 YC5-13 YC5-15 YC5-17 YC5-19 YC7-8 YC7-2 YC7-3 EEP_SCL EEP_SDA CL-M *1: 30 ppm/35 ppm model *2: 45 ppm/55 ppm model ERS_K_REM Main chager high voltage K DRPWB-K EEPROM 6 5 START /STOP CLOCK LD 2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC DRM-K Drum unit K 4 3 CW/CCW CL-K .

the developer blade and the developer screws that agitate the toner. Magnet roller 3. Also. Developer screw A 4. Toner sensor (TS) 2-1-10 . Developer case 7. Sleeve roller 2. the toner sensor (TS) checks whether or not toner remains in the developer unit. Developer blade 6. 1 1 2 2 8 6 5 8 6 5 3 4 7 9 [30 ppm/35 ppm model] 4 7 9 3 [45 ppm/55 ppm model] Figure 2-1-10 Developer section 1. the magnet roller. Developer cover 8. Developer screw B 5. Magnet cover 9.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-3 Developer section The developer unit consists of the sleeve roller that forms the magnetic brush.

Developer unit Y Magnet bias Y Sleeve bias Y TS-Y YC15-1 YC15-2 YC15-3 YC15-4 YC15-8 YC15-9 VM-Y YC15-12 YC10 YC7-2 TS-C YC7-3 YC7-4 YC7-5 VM-C FRPWB EPWB MCPWB YC13-12 VIB_MOT YC2 VIB_MOT TPD_TEMP VCONT TPD_Y TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL 6 5 START /STOP CLOCK Developer unit C DRM-MCY 4 3 LD CW/CCW YC13-1 YC13-2 YC13-3 YC13-4 YC13-8 YC13-9 TPD_TEMP VCONT TPD_C TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL Magnet bias C Sleeve bias C HVPWB Figure 2-1-11 Developer section block diagram 2-1-11 Developer unit M TS-M YC11-1 YC11-2 YC11-3 YC11-4 YC11-8 YC11-9 YC11-12 VIB_MOT TPD_TEMP VCONT TPD_M TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL Magnet bias M Sleeve bias M VM-M YC3 YC9 Developer unit K 6 5 YC7-11 YC7-12 START /STOP CLOCK YC7-9 YC7-10 TS-K 4 3 LD CW/CCW YC9-1 YC9-2 YC9-3 YC9-4 YC9-8 YC9-9 YC9-12 TPD_TEMP VCONT TPD_K TN_CLK EEP_SDA EEP_SCL VIB_MOT DEVM-K Magnet bias K Sleeve bias K VM-K 2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC .

ISU lens 8. Original detection switch (ODSW) 2-1-12 . Contact glass 12. Mirror frame B 3. 6 12 13 4 3 11 9 15 6 2 14 5 1 7 8 10 Figure 2-1-12 Image scanner section 1. Mirror frame A 2. Slit glass 13. Scanner reflector 5. Home position sensor (HPS) 15.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-4 Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for printing. Mirror A 6. Original size indicator plate 14. ISU cover 10. The speed of the mirror frame B is half the speed of the mirror frame A. CCD PWB (CCDPWB) 9. Mirror B 7. LED mount 4. Scanner wire drum 11. the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal. (1) Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD image sensor in the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) via the three mirrors and ISU lens. The mirror frame A and B travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side.

Image scanner unit HPS YC8-3 SDA SCL VSET POW HP_SW LEDPWB YC6-3 YC6-4 YC6-5 YC6-9 ORG_SW OSS YC13-2 ISCPWB MPWB Lens Figure 2-1-13 Image scanner section block diagram 2-1-13 Original CCDPWB CCD image sensor YC11 YC25 YC4 YC3 YC9 Reading image data YC2 SM YC5-1 YC5-2 YC5-3 YC5-4 SMOT_AP SMOT_BP SMOT_AN SMOT_BN 2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC ODSW YC14-3 CO_SW .

The laser beam is dispersed as the polygon motor (PM) revolves to reflect the laser beam over the drum. and focalize it at the drum surface. Polygon motor (PM) 2. f-θ lens B 6. LSU spiral 2-1-14 . LSU dust shield glass 8. Mirror B 5. Mirror A 4. adjust the diameter of the laser beam.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Laser scanner section The charged surface of the drum is then scanned by the laser beam from the laser scanner unit. Various lenses and mirror are housed in the laser scanner unit. Also the LSU cleaning motor (LSUCM) is activated to conduct automatically cleaning of the LSU dust shield glass. 5 4 8 7 6 3 2 1 Figure 2-1-14 Laser scanner section 1. f-θ lens A 3. Mirror C 7.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC5-2 YC5-3 YC5-9 YC5-25 YC5-26 YC5-28 YC5-29 YC4-3 YC4-4 YC4-5 BD_Bk LSU_TH_Bk LDD_CS_Bk DATA_1N_Bk DATA_1P_Bk DATA_2N_Bk DATA_2P_Bk REM_Bk LOCK_Bk CLK_Bk YC1-29 YC1-28 YC1-22 YC1-6 YC1-5 YC1-3 YC1-2 TH BD APC PWB-K PDPWB-K Laser scanner unit K 3 2 1 PM-K YC8-2 YC8-3 YC8-9 YC8-25 YC8-26 YC8-28 YC8-29 YC7-3 YC7-4 YC7-5 LSURPWB YC10-2 YC10-3 YC10-9 YC10-25 YC10-26 YC10-28 YC10-29 YC9-3 YC9-4 YC9-5 BD_M LSU_TH_M LDD_CS_M DATA_1N_M DATA_1P_M DATA_2N_M DATA_2P_M REM_M LOCK_M CLK_M YC1-29 YC1-28 YC1-22 YC1-6 YC1-5 YC1-3 YC1-2 TH BD APC PWB-M PDPWB-M Laser scanner unit M 3 2 1 PM-M BD_C LSU_TH_C LDD_CS_C DATA_1N_C DATA_1P_C DATA_2N_C DATA_2P_C REM_C LOCK_C CLK_C YC1-29 YC1-28 YC1-22 YC1-6 YC1-5 YC1-3 YC1-2 TH BD APC PWB-C PDPWB-C Laser scanner unit C 3 2 1 PM-C YC12-2 YC12-3 YC12-9 YC12-25 YC12-26 YC12-28 YC12-29 YC11-3 YC11-4 YC11-5 YC2 YC3 BD_Y LSU_TH_Y LDD_CS_Y DATA_1N_Y DATA_1P_Y DATA_2N_Y DATA_2P_Y REM_Y LOCK_Y CLK_Y YC1-29 YC1-28 YC1-22 YC1-6 YC1-5 YC1-3 YC1-2 TH BD APC PWB-Y PDPWB-Y Laser scanner unit Y 3 2 1 PM-Y YC11 YC12 EPWB DR_CCW YC21-1 DR_CW YC21-2 LSU CM Figure 2-1-15 Laser scanner unit block diagram 2-1-15 .

Tension roller 8. 18 17 16 7 10 11 13 15 8 1 19 20 2 6 5 4 2 3 14 12 9 2 Figure 2-1-16 Intermediate transfer unit section 1. Primary transfer roller K 4. Backup roller 3. The transfer cleaning unit collects toner remaining on the transfer belt after secondary transfer and forwards it as waste toner to the waste toner box. Transfer belt 9. Primary transfer roller Y 7. Cleaning pre brush 17. (1) Intermediate transfer unit section The intermediate transfer unit section consists of the transfer cleaning unit. Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS) 13. Drive roller 2. Primary transfer roller M 5. the toner density on the transfer belt is measured. Transfer skew sensor (TRSS) 14. the transfer belt. Cleaning roller 19. Also with the ID sensors (IDS) mounted on the machine frame.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-5 Transfer/Separation section The transfer/separation section consists of the intermediate transfer unit section and the secondary transfer roller section. Cleaning blade 20. Transfer edge motor (TREM) 16. Cleaning fur brush 18. Color release sensor (CRS) 12. Primary transfer roller C 6. ID sensor (IDS) 10. Cleaning screw 2-1-16 . Color release motor (CRM) 11. and the four primary transfer rollers for respective color drums. Transfer edge sensor (TRES) 15. and forms a full-color toner image by superimposing and transferring single-color toner images formed on each drum onto the transfer belt.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC HVPWB2 Primary transfer bias Y Primary transfer bias M Primary transfer bias C Primary transfer bias K Cleaning bias DCS Transfer belt unit DES CRS TRPWB TRCM 3 4 5 6 CRM DCM ZIG_REV_SENS YC3-B8 ZIG_DR_CCW ZIG_DR_CW BELT_SPEED IDS1 IDS2 CLSOL 7 6 5 4 3 TRM YC3-B5 TRBLS RLS_SENS ZIG_SENS YC3-A12 YC3-A13 YC3-A3 YC3-A4 YC3-A5 YC3-A6 YC3-A7 YC3-B12 YC3-A10 YC6 YC1 YC2 YC5 EPWB YC10-6 YC10-7 YC10-11 YC10-12 YC10-14 YC10-15 REG_SENS_F_P REG_SENS_F_S REG_SENS_R_P REG_SENS_R_S CLN_SOL_REM CLN_SOL_RET TR_BRK TR_DIR TR_RDY TR_CLK TR_REM FPWB1 YC13-1 YC13-2 YC13-3 YC13-4 YC13-5 Figure 2-1-17 Intermediate transfer unit section block diagram 2-1-17 YC3-B13 YC3-B2 EEP_SDA EEP_SCL ICL_REM ICL_CLK ICL_RDY ICL_DIR RLS_DR .

Secondary transfer roller 2. The toner image formed on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper by the potential difference and the paper is separated by curvature separation. DC bias is applied from the high voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2). Transfer guide 5.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Secondary transfer roller section The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller mounted to the paper conveying unit and the separation brush. Secondary transfer frame 4. 2 5 1 6 3 4 Figure 2-1-18 Secondary transfer roller section 1. To the secondary transfer roller. Transfer release motor (TRRM) 2-1-18 . Separation brush 3. Transfer release sensor (TRRS) 6.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC HVPWB2 Separation brush Separation bias YC1-7 YC1-8 SP_REM T2_REM EPWB YC8-5 YC8-6 Secondary transfer bias TRRS Secondary transfer roller TRRM PRS_REM1 PRS_REM2 PRS_SENS FPWB1 PRS_REM1 PRS_REM2 PRS_SENS YC-14-4 YC-14-5 YC-14-2 YC1-16 YC1-15 YC1-14 YC6-49 YC6-50 YC6-51 RYPWB YC1 YC14 Figure 2-1-19 Secondary transfer roller section block diagram 2-1-19 .

Fuser belt sensor (FUBLS) 12. Fuser eject roller 9. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) 14.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-6 Fuser section The paper sent from the transfer/separation section is interleaved between the heat roller and the press roller. Right fuser cover 8. The surface temperature of heat roller and press roller are detected by the fuser thermistor (FTH) and controlled by the engine PWB (EPWB). Fuser thermistor 4 (FTH4) 2-1-20 . The heat roller (fuser belt) is heated by the fuser IH (FIH). Fuser eject pulley 10. Arch core 6. 9 16 8 4 3 6 5 15 7 3 13 4 14 11 12 10 1 2 Figure 2-1-20 Fuser section 1. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1) 13. IH coils 4. and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed onto the paper because the press roller is pressed by the fuser press spring. Fuser thermistor 3 (FTH3) 15. Press roller 3. Separators 7. Loop sensor (LPS) 11. Heat roller (Fuser belt) 2. Side core 5.

17 YC26-B15 YC26-B11 MAIN_TH1.2 GUIDE_TH EDGE_TH YC1-5.2 YC3-2.3 GUIDE_TH YC4-1 EDGE_TH 6 5 4 3 FUM YC5-1 COIL_COM YC26-A19 FSR_BLT_PLS FUBLS YC26-B16.6 YC1-7 YC1-9 FUPWB FPWB1 YC6-21 YC6-20 YC6-19 YC6-18 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP YC1-44 YC1-45 YC1-46 YC1-47 YC18-2 YC18-3 YC18-4 YC18-5 Figure 2-1-21 Fuser section block diagram 2-1-21 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC26-B9 YC26-A13 YC26-A11 YC26-A12 YC26-A16 PRESS_TH FSR_SIZE_SENS FSR_RLS_DR_CW FSR_RLS_DR_CCW FSR_RLS_SENS FURS Y5 COIL_LIVE FTH4 FUES FURM Fuser unit EPWB FIHPWB Y6 YC26 YC4 YC6-1 YC6-2 +15V1 +15V2 FTS FTH2 FTH3 FTH1 MAIN_TH1.

Upper duplex roller 7. Switchback sensor (SBS) 14. Eject pulley 4. Upper change guide 11. Eject roller 5. Eject roller 3. Lower change guide 10. 5 14 13 4 10 11 7 3 9 2 12 1 8 6 Figure 2-1-22 Eject/Feed shift section 1.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-7 Eject/Feedshift section The paper eject/feedshift section consists of the conveying path which sends the paper that has passed the fuser section to the top tray. Eject full sensor (EFS) 12. Middle pulley 2. duplex conveying section or job separator. Actuator (switchback sensor) 2-1-22 . Lower duplex roller 9. Actuator (eject full sensor) 13. Eject pulley 6. Duplex pulley 8.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC5-19 YC5-20 YC5-13 JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET EXIT_FEED_SENS FSSOL SBS YC5-16 FRPWB YC5-8 YC5-9 YC5-10 YC5-11 EXIT_PAP_SENS EFS SB_CORE_B/ SB_CORE_A/ SB_CORE_B SB_CORE_A MM YC3 YC7 EPWB Figure 2-1-23 Eject/Feed shift section block diagram 2-1-23 .

Middle duplex roller 3. 7 6 1 4 4 5 2 9 5 4 8 3 Figure 2-1-24 Duplex conveying section 1. Duplex pulleys B 2-1-24 6. Actuator (duplex sensor 2) . Lower duplex roller 4. Actuator (duplex sensor 1) 8.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-1-8 Duplex conveying section The duplex conveying section consists of conveying path which sends the paper sent from the eject/feedshift section to the paper feed/conveying section when duplex printing. Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) 7. Duplex pulleys A 5. Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) 9. Upper duplex roller 2.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2 DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1 YC23-4 YC13-9 YC11-9 DU_CL1_REM DUCL1 FPWB1 RYPWB YC14-5 YC1-14 YC9-2 DU_SENS DUS2 YC14-12 YC1-7 YC7-2 DU_CL2_REM DUCL2 YC1 YC6 YC5 EPWB Figure 2-1-25 Duplex conveying section block diagram (30 ppm/35 ppm model) YC2 2-1-25 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC YC23-1 YC13-12 YC11-2 DU_ENTER_SENS DUS1 YC23-6 YC23-7 YC23-8 YC23-9 YC13-7 YC13-6 YC13-5 YC13-4 YC16-1 YC16-2 YC16-3 YC16-4 DU1_B/ DU1_A/ DU1_B DU1_A DUM1 FPWB1 RYPWB YC14-5 YC14-14 YC14-15 YC14-16 YC14-17 YC1 YC2 YC1-14 YC1-5 YC1-4 YC1-3 YC1-2 YC9-2 YC7-5 YC7-6 YC7-7 YC7-8 DU_SENS DU2_B/ DU2_A/ DU2_B DU2_A DUS2 DUM2 YC6 YC5 EPWB Figure 2-1-26 Duplex conveying section block diagram (45 ppm/55 ppm model) 2-1-26 .

...... Engine PWB (EPWB)............ 2-2-1 ....... CCD PWB (CCDPWB)..... Controls printer hardware such as high voltage/bias output control.... Controls the software such as the print data processing and provides the interface with computers.................... After full-wave rectification of AC power source input. Controls the scanner section.. and fuser temperature control.. paper conveying system control. 9... etc...... Current PWB (CRPWB)*.......... Main PWB (MPWB) ..... switching for converting to 24 V DC and 12 V DC for output.. Power source PWB (PSPWB) ..... After full-wave rectification of AC power source input...... High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) ... 3... LED PWB (LEDPWB) .............. Generates transfer bias and separation bias. 6.. High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2) . 4...................... switching for converting to 5 V DC for output... 2.... Generates main charging and developing bias...................... Controls the fuser heater. Reads the image of originals....... ISC PWB (ISCPWB) ......... 5..... 8..........2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout (1) PWBs 9 1 35 14 34 13 6 30 29 18 22 26 25 21 24 20 23 15 17 3 19 28 27 5 31 16 32 10 7 2 12 8 33 11 Machine right Machine inside 4 Figure 2-2-1 PWBs Machine left 1. Exposes originals....... 7............

........... Front PWB (FRPWB) ............... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (yellow)............... Drum PWB Y (DRPWB-Y) ......... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (magenta). 17... 26......... Consists of wiring relay circuits between main PWB and Fax control PWB.... 24.................... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and laser scanner unit.. Fuser IH PWB (FIHPWB)..... eject unit.. PD PWB M (PDPWB-M) ........ Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum motors..... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage............ 22................... 16.............. Controls the fuser IH. Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1)............2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 10.................................................... 12...... 25........ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (black)........ 33.. Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and drum units.. 15............ relay PWB........... 21. Transfer PWB (TRPWB) .. 28.... Relay PWB (RPWB) ...... Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2).. 34.... 20.................. PD PWB K (PDPWB-K) .... 2-2-2 . Fuser PWB (FUPWB) ............. Operation PWB 3 (OPWB3)............... 23... LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB)... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam (cyan)............. Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and paper conveying section. Drum individual information in EEPROM storage. Generates and controls the laser beam (yellow)... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage..... RFID PWB (RFPWB) .... 30.. APC PWB M (APCPWB-M) ...................... Operation PWB 1 (OPWB1)............. Generates and controls the laser beam (magenta).... APC PWB Y (APCPWB-Y) .. 13... *: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only. Drum PWB C (DRPWB-C)..... Operation PWB 2 (OPWB2). drive section....... developer motors.......... Generates and controls the laser beam (black).......... Consists of the LED indicators............... PD PWB C (PDPWB-C)..... 31. Consists of wiring relay circuit between feed PWB 1 and paper conveying unit.... Interface PWB (IFPWB) . Controls touch panel and LCD indication... 32.. Relays wirings from electrical components on the fuser unit........ APC PWB K (APCPWB-K) ... APC PWB C (APCPWB-C) ..... Drum PWB K (DRPWB-K) ....... Drum PWB M (DRPWB-M) ..... PD PWB Y (PDPWB-Y) ....... Drum individual information in EEPROM storage..... 29. 11...... Consists of wiring relay circuit between engine PWB and fuser drive unit........ Consists of the LED indicators and key switches.......... developer units... 18... Motor control PWB (MCPWB)..... 35. 27........ 14........ 19......... Generates and controls the laser beam (cyan)............... Transfer belt individual information in EEPROM storage................ Reads the container information...........

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Name used in service manual Main PWB (MPWB) Engine PWB (EPWB) Power source PWB (PSPWB) Current PWB (CRPWB) High voltage PWB 1 (HVPWB1) High voltage PWB 2 (HVPWB2) ISC PWB (ISCPWB) CCD PWB (CCDPWB) LED PWB (LEDPWB) Operation PWB 1 (OPWB1) Operation PWB 2 (OPWB2) Operation PWB 3 (OPWB3) Front PWB (FRPWB) Feed PWB 1 (FPWB1) Feed PWB 2 (FPWB2) Relay PWB (RPWB) Motor control PWB (MCPWB) LSU relay PWB (LSURPWB) APC PWB K (APCPWB-K) APC PWB M (APCPWB-M) APC PWB C (APCPWB-C) APC PWB Y (APCPWB-Y) PD PWB K (PDPWB-K) PD PWB M (PDPWB-M) PD PWB C (PDPWB-C) PD PWB Y (PDPWB-Y) Drum PWB K (DRPWB-K) Drum PWB M (DRPWB-M) Drum PWB C (DRPWB-C) Drum PWB Y (DRPWB-Y) Transfer PWB (TRPWB) Fuser PWB (FUPWB) Fuser IH PWB (FIHPWB) RFID PWB (RFPWB) Interface PWB (IFPWB) Name used in parts list PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE SP PARTS PWB CURRENT AVE ASSY SP PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SP PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER SP PARTS PWB ISC ASSY SP PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY J SP PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP PARTS PWB OPERATION LED ASSY SP PARTS PWB FRONT CLR ASSY SP PARTS PWB FEED 1 ASSY SP PARTS PWB FEED 2 ASSY SP PARTS PWB JUNCTION ASSY SP PARTS PWB MOTOR CONTROL ASSY SP PARTS PWB LSU JUNC CLR ASSY SP PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP 2-2-3 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC List of correspondences of PWB names No.

.... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 1).... Paper width switch 1 (PWSW1) ....... 15......... Detects the presence of paper (cassette 2). Paper gauge sensor 1 (L) (PGS1(L))... 3........ 2-2-4 .... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1)... Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 2).......... 9.. Paper gauge sensor 1 (U) (PGS1(U))....... 18.. 10................. 4................ Paper length switch 1 (PLSW1) ......... Detects the width of paper (cassette 2)...... Turns ON/OFF the AC power source.............. 11. 2. Front cover switch (FRCSW) .... 17.......... 12. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper feed section (cassette 1)..2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Switches and sensors 28 30 55 54 53 34 33 32 31 51 47 2 63 41 43 44 42 39....... Detects the presence of paper (MP tray). 6..... Feed sensor 2 (FS2) .. Paper gauge sensor 2 (L) (PGS2(L))... Detects a paper misfeed in the vertical conveying section... Detects the length of paper (cassette 2)... Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 2)..... 16.... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2)...40 38 37 36 60 3 5 13 11 14 12 7 8 4 6 9 10 16 64 Machine right Machine inside Machine left 29 56 48 50 49 52 46 58 45 57 61 19 24 25 20 62 1 18 22 21 23 35 27 26 59 15 17 Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1................. Detects the length of paper (cassette 1)....... Paper sensor 1 (PS1) ......... Paper sensor 2 (PS2) ....... Lift sensor 2 (LS2). Paper width switch 2 (PWSW2) .................. 5........... Detects activation of upper limit of the bottom plate (cassette 1)...... 8.. MP paper sensor (MPPS) .. 14........... 7. 13........... Paper gauge sensor 2 (U) (PGS2(U))........ Paper length switch 2 (PLSW2) . Detects the opening and closing of the front cover....... Lift sensor 1 (LS1). Detects the width of paper (cassette 1).......... Detects the paper gauge (cassette 2)......... Main power switch (MSW) ........ Paper conveying sensor (PCS).. Detects the paper gauge (cassette 1)....... Feed sensor 1 (FS1) ...........

.. 50.............. 53. Middle sensor (MS).. 33...................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit K... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container C.... Screw sensor M (SRS-M) ...... Waste toner sensor 2 (WTS2).. Paper conveying unit switch (PCUSW) .... Eject full sensor (EFS) ... 39......... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature.. 26.... 20................. Registration sensor (RS).... Detects the length of paper (MP tray)........ Switchback sensor (SBS) ...... Detects the opening/closing of the document processor... Detects when the inner tray is full............... MP tray switch (MPTSW).... 47. Detects activation of upper limit of the MP plate.. 49......... Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature.............. Fuser thermistor 4 (FTH4) ................................... Transfer skew sensor (TRSS)... Measures image density for color calibration. Detects separation of primary transfer rollers M.. Detects fuser pressure release setting (envelope mode)........... Duplex cover switch (DUCSW) .. 51................. 27. MP lift sensor 1 (MPLS1) .............. 28...... Transfer release sensor (TRRS) ......... Detects when the waste toner box is full............ Detects the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. 32..... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section.... Color release sensor (CRS).......... Toner sensor K (TS-K) . Detects positioning of fuser belt rotation..... Detects the size of the original..... MP lift sensor 2 (MPLS2) ...... and Y......... 23........... 57............... Controls the fuser motor by detecting deflection in the paper....... Home position sensor (HPS) .............. 44......... 48............. Regist deflection sensor (RDS)..................... Detects edge position of the transfer belt................ Toner sensor M (TS-M) ... Screw sensor K (SRS-K) ..... MP paper width switch (MPPWSW)....... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.... Detects the opening and closing of the duplex cover. Detects the optical system in the home position.. Toner sensor C (TS-C)...... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex section...... Duplex sensor 2 (DUS2) ............ Detects the outside temperature and humidity....... ID sensor 2 (IDS2) ........ Waste toner sensor 1 (WTS1)............... 2-2-5 ..... 55.. 52....................................... 56......... 43.... 45..... Transfer belt sensor (TRBLS) . Fuser belt sensor (FUBLS) ..... Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section..... Loop sensor (LPS) ....... Detects activation of lower limit of the MP plate........ 54.... Transfer edge sensor (TRES) .......... 31.... Detects the toner density in the developing unit M. Fuser eject sensor (FUES) ............. 59......... 60....... Detects positioning of transfer belt rotation.......................................... Detects the deflection in the paper............ Detects a paper misfeed in the paper conveying section.... 46.............. MP feed sensor (MPFS) ... 35........ Fuser thermistor 3 (FTH3) ...... 42........... Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... ID sensor 1 (IDS1) ................... 61.................. Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying unit........................ Detects the MP tray extension is extend...... 38.... Fuser release sensor (FURS) ... Outer temperature sensor 1 (OTEMS1)..... Detects the press roller temperature.. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1) .... 29. Detects a paper misfeed in the eject and switchback sections... 40. 64... 62.... Detects skew of transfer belt center position... 34.. Screw sensor Y (SRS-Y) ............... MP paper length switch (MPPLSW)....................... Detects the width of paper (MP tray)..... Detects the toner density in the developing unit C....... Paper conveying cover switch (DUCSW) .... Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) ........... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container K. 36........................ Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container Y.... 24....... Detects the opening and closing of the paper conveying cover...... Duplex sensor 1 (DUS1) ....2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 19...... C.............. Toner sensor Y (TS-Y) ..... Detects a paper misfeed. 22........ 30........ 41......... 58....... 21................. Detects a paper misfeed in the MP paper feed section.. Detects the outside temperature and humidity......... Controls the toner replenishing for the toner container M.... Detects when the waste toner box is full..... Detects separation of secondary transfer roller.............. Measures image density for color calibration... Screw sensor C (SRS-C) ....... Outer temperature sensor 2 (OTEMS2)..... 25..... 37... Original size sensor (OSS) ..... Detects a paper misfeed in the eject section..... 63....... Detects the toner density in the developing unit Y..

....... 9.... Drives the registration section.. Polygon motor M (PM-M)....... 11........................... 3.............. Drum motor C (DRM-C)*2 .... Drives the paper feed section........... 6............. Paper feed motor (PFM) .................... Registration motor (RM)*2.............. Operates the MP plate..........2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Motors 5 35 36 19 18 17 16 34 33 30 29 27 25 21 24 31 23 20 22 28 10 12 6 11 1 32 26 9 15 8 14 7 13 37 4 2 Machine right Machine inside 3 Machine left Figure 2-2-3 Motors 1............. Drives the drum unit M.. Drum motor K (DRM-K) .. Drum motor Y (DRM-Y)*2 .... 16............................ Drives the drum units M......... MP lift motor (MPLM) .............. 4................... Lift motor 2 (LM2)................ 5..... 8.... Replenishes toner to the developing unit M 2-2-6 . Toner motor K (TM-K) ........................ Middle motor (MM)*2 ........ 7...... 15........... 14......... Polygon motor C (PM-C)....... Drives the polygon mirror K.. Drives the polygon mirror Y..... 13..... Toner motor M (TM-M) ... Drives the polygon mirror M........... Replenishes toner to the developing unit K 17..... Drives the polygon mirror C.. Operates the bottom plate (cassette 2)........ Drives the drum unit C....... 10.. C and Y.. Drives the drum unit K.......................... Polygon motor K (PM-K) . Drives the paper conveying section...... Scanner motor (SM)................ Drives the drum unit Y... Drum motor MCY (DRM-MCY)*1 .......... Lift motor 1 (LM1)...... Operates the bottom plate (cassette 1).. 12. 2............. Drum motor M (DRM-M)*2 .... Drives the optical system....... Polygon motor Y (PM-Y) ..................

.................... 31................. Duplex motor 2 (DUM2)*2 .... 28........... Drives the eject section.... Drives LSU dust shield glass cleaning system.... 24.. 23...... Developer motor MCY (DEVM-MCY) ......... *1: 30 ppm model /35 ppm model only..... Toner lump in the developer unit Y vibrates.... 26.............. 22.......... C..... 30... Drives the duplex section.... C and Y................. 25... Drives separation of secondary transfer roller........ *2: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only..... 29.. Vibration motor Y (VM-Y) ....... Transfer release motor (TRRM) . 37........ 2-2-7 .... Toner lump in the developer unit M vibrates.............. Drives the developer units M.. Drives separation of primary transfer rollers M.... Color release motor (CRM).... 32....... Drives waste toner system...... Eject motor (EM) .... Drives the developer unit K.. and Y.............. 35............... Toner lump in the developer unit C vibrates... Waste toner motor (WTM)...... Drives the transfer cleaning section........... Replenishes toner to the developing unit C 19..... 33................ Toner motor Y (TM-Y) ... Drives fuser pressure release.... Fuser release motor (FURM) . Duplex motor 1 (DUM1)*2 .. 34....... 36....... Vibration motor K (VM-K) .......... Transfer motor (TRM) ................... Replenishes toner to the developing unit Y 20... 21.. Drives skew of transfer tension roller............. Toner lump in the developer unit K vibrates..... Transfer skew motor (TRSM). Drives the duplex section..... Vibration motor C (VM-C) . Drives the transfer section........2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 18... Transfer cleaning motor (TRCM) ... Drives the fuser section..... Developer motor K (DEVM-K).... LSU cleaning motor (LSUCM) .................. Toner motor C (TM-C)........ Fuser motor (FUM) ... Vibration motor M (VM-M)............ 27..........

. 16...2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Fan motors 16 10....... Developer fan motor 2 (DEVFM2) . Cools the developer section. Cools the toner container section. Fuser rear fan motor (FURFM) .... 8................... Cools the fuser section (front side)................... Toner fan motor 2 (TFM2) .......... IH fan motor (IHFM) ..........7 1 2 8...... 9... Fuser front fan motor (FUFFM). Coil fan motor 2 (CFM2) .................. Cools the eject section (front side).... 5. Cools the IH coil. 15........ 13.... Belt fan motor 1 (BLFM1).9 4 3 14 5 Machine right 19 Machine inside Machine left Figure 2-2-4 Motors 1.... Toner fan motor 1 (TFM1) ......... Eject rear fan motor (ERFM). 3......... 6....18 20 13 15 10 17 18 11 12 6... Eject front fan motor (EFFM) ..11 17......... 10. Cools the toner container section... 11.... 7. Cools the transfer belt section........... Cools the transfer belt section............ Coil fan motor 1 (CFM1) ......... LSU fan motor (LSUFM) ............ 2-2-8 .. Belt fan motor 2 (BLFM2). Cools the IH coil.. 4....... Cools the laser scanner unit section.............. 14....... Belt fan motor 2 (BLFM2)....... Cools the fuser IH PWB............ Belt fan motor 1 (BLFM1).. Cools the developer section.. Cools the transfer belt section.................... Cools the fuser section (rear side)...... 2.......... Developer fan motor 1 (DEVFM1) ............... Cools the eject section (rear side)... 12......... Cools the transfer belt section.....

........2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 17....... Cools the eject section........... 2-2-9 ..... Cools the eject section....... Cools the power source section. Eject fan motor (EFM).... Power source fan motor (PSFM) .............. 18.. 19.. Cools the controller section............ 20.... Eject fan motor (EFM)........ Controller fan motor (CONFM)..

............ Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ............ 4. 17..... Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)... Controls the drive of duplex section............... 3....... 16....................... Assist clutch 1 (ASCL1)*2 .. Duplex clutch 1 (DUCL1)*1 ............... Controls the secondary paper feed......... Pickup solenoid 1 (PUSOL1)*2 .. Controls the drive of duplex section................................. 7..... Controls primary paper feed from the MP tray............. MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) .. Controls the drive of vertical conveying section. Controls the drive of paper conveying section.. Paper conveying clutch (PCCL)......... Cleaning lamp M (CL-M)............ Registration clutch (RCL)*1 . Controls the pickup roller.... Controls the pickup roller..... Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (magenta)...... 15. Cleaning lamp K (CL-K) . Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) .... Cleaning solenoid (CLSOL) .. Cleaning lamp C (CL-C).... 2-2-10 ... Controls the drive of the assist roller.... 5.. Duplex clutch 2 (DUCL2)*1 .... Primary paper feed from cassette 1..... 8................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (cyan). 13..... Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (black)...... 2...............2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (5) Others 13 22 9 19 20 18 17 16 15 14 1 11 8 7 10 6 3 2 5 4 Machine right Machine inside 12 21 Figure 2-2-5 Others Machine left 1.. Pickup solenoid 2 (PUSOL2)*2 ............... Controls the ID sensor cleaning. Middle clutch (MCL)*1 ...... Assist clutch 2 (ASCL2)*2 .......... Controls the drive of the assist roller......... 10..................... Primary paper feed from cassette 2. 14.. 9..... Controls the feedshift guide... 6.. 11.. 12.....

........ Dehumidifies the cassette section (option)................ Eliminates the residual electrostatic charge on the drum (yellow).... Prevents overheating of the heat roller (fuser belt)...... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.... 21...... 19.......... 22. *2: 45 ppm model /55 ppm model only....................... Cleaning lamp Y (CL-Y) .. Hard disk (HDD).......... Fuser thermostat (FTS)............................................ Heats the heat roller (fuser belt)........ Fuser IH (FIH) ...2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 18... *1: 30 ppm model /35 ppm model only.... 20........... 2-2-11 . Cassette heater (CH) .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC This page is intentionally left blank. 2-2-12 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-1 Main PWB 2-3 Operation of the PWBs WH 5 1 5 BK 1 6 U45 50 YC25 1 1 1 1 7 YC13 YC16 1 YC12 13 YC17 YC21 1 YC5 1 8 YC11 6 YC30 U113 80 1 U25 YC20 YC10 1 1 YC7 12 1 1 1 8 15 1 1 10 U112 YC33 1 YS4 2 YC23 3 1 YC27 3 YC32 1 YC24 9 1 72 CODE FLS YS2 YS1 YS3 72 U1 U6 200 200 7 1 1 YC1 YC9 1 40 BLACK 7 1 YC18 5 BAT1 YC2 1 5 YC8 YC3 BLUE YC15 YC14 Figure 2-3-1 Main PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-1 .

3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to hard disk 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC2 Connected to hard disk 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC3 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 GND TXP TXN GND RXN RXP GND GND TXP TXN GND RXN RXP GND HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND TCLKP TCLKN SGND TCP TCN Signal I/O O O I I O O I I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage Ground HDD1 data signal HDD1 data signal Ground HDD1 data signal HDD1 data signal Ground Ground HDD2 data signal HDD2 data signal Ground HDD2 data signal HDD2 data signal Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 2-3-2 .3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.

3 V DC power output 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to engine PWB Pin 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC5 Connected to ethernet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Signal SGND TBP TBN SGND TAP TAN SGND SLEEP HLD_ENG NC SGND EG IRN EG SO EG SBSY EG SDIR EG_SI EG_SCLK SGND TD1+ TD1TD2+ TD2CT1 CT2 TD3+ TD3TD4+ TD4GRLED_A1 GRLED_K1 YWLED_A2 YWLED_K2 I/O O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power output 3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC LED emitter signal LED emitter signal LED emitter signal LED emitter signal 2-3-3 .3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC Ground Sleep signal Engine hold signal Not used Ground Engine interrupt signal Engine busy signal Engine communication direction signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Engine lock signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 3.

3 V DC power to IFPWB Ground Reset signal Control signal Audio signal Ground USB data signal USB data signal 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 3.3 V DC Analog 3.3 V DC Description KMAS set signal Not used KMAS control signal KMAS control signal Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power to KMAS 5 V DC power to KMAS Reset signal Control signal Audio signal Ground USB data signal USB data signal 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power to IFPWB Ground 5 V DC cut signal Ground 5 V DC power to IFPWB Ground 5 V DC cut signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS received data signal 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC7 Connected to KMAS Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC8 Connected to interface PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 YC9 Connected to interface PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal KMDET NC KMDREQ KMACK KMRXD SGND KMTXD SGND SGND SGND +5V +5V RESET0 WAKEUP0 AUDIO0 GND USB_DP0 USB_DN0 VBUS0 GND RESET1 WAKEUP1 AUDIO1 GND USB_DP1 USB_DN1 VBUS1 GND 5V_CUT0 GND 5V GND 5V_CUT1 I/O I I O O I O O I O I I/O I/O O I O I I/O I/O O I O I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KMAS transmission data signal 2-3-4 .3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3V 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB Description 0/3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3V 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3V 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB MREB signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 2-3-5 .3 V DC Voltage Ground Ground 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB HSYNCB signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to DP relay PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 GND GND 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB VSYNCB signal 0/3.3V VCLKB VSYNCB HSYNCB MREB GND DRB0 DRB1 DRB2 DRB3 DRB4 DRB5 DRB6 DRB7 GND DGB0 DGB1 DGB2 DGB3 DGB4 DGB5 DGB6 DGB7 GND DBB0 DBB1 DBB2 DBB3 DBB4 DBB5 DBB6 Signal I/O O O O O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.

3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal 2-3-6 .3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB Control signal DPRPWB Control signal DPRPWB Control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to DP main PWB Pin 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 DBB7 HHALF SLEEP TWS_DET GND LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10 LA11 LA12 LA13 LA14 LA15 LA16 LA17 GND LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 GND INT RESETZ GND CEZ WEZ Signal I/O I O O I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I O O O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC Ground DPRPWB Control signal DPRPWB Control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.

3 V DC power to DPRPWB Ground Ground Ground Scanner interrupt signal Scanner communication direction signal Scanner hold signal Scanner busy signal 0/3.3V GND GND GND SC_IRN SC_DIR SC_HLDN SC_BSY SC_SI SC_SO SC_CLK DEEP_POWERO N ENERGY_SAVE SUPND_POWER LED_MEMORY_N LED_ATTENTION _N LED_PROCESSI NG_N SHUT_DOWN LIGHTOFF_POW ERON AUDIO PANEL RESET INT_POWERKEY _N PANEL_STATUS GND Signal I/O O O O O O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O O O O I I Voltage Description 0/3.3V 3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3V 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3 V DC 3.3V 3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power to OPWB1 Memory LED control signal Attention LED control signal Processing LED control signal 24 V down signal Sleep return signal Audio output signal Reset signal Power key: On/Off Operation panel status signal Ground 2-3-7 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power to DPRPWB 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal 3.3 V DC 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to DP main PWB Pin 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 YC11 Connected to ISC PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC12 Connected to operation PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 OEZ SCLKIN 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Sleep return signal Energy save signal 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB Control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC16 Connected to CF card Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 GND D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 /CE1 A10 /OE A9 A8 A7 VCC A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D0 D1 D2 WP /CD2 /CD1 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 /CE2 /VS1 /IORD /IOWD /WE Signal I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I/O I/O I/O O O O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O O O Voltage Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Control signal Control signal Control signal Control signal Control signal 2-3-8 .3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Control signal Control signal Control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC Control signal Control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal 0/3.3 V DC Control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC Description Control signal Control signal Control signal Control signal Reset signal Control signal Control signal REG signal Control signal Control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC16 Connected to CF card Pin 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 YC17 Connected to operation PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 YC20 Connected to USB 1 2 3 4 YC21 Connected to USB host 1 2 3 4 5 YC23 Connected to controller fan motor 1 2 Signal RDY/BSY VCC CSEL VS2 RESET /WAIT INPACK /REG BVD2 BVD1 D8 D9 D10 GND VBUS DATA DATA + NC GND VBUS DATADATA+ GND VBUS DATA DATA + NC GND +12V GND I/O I O O O I O O I O O I/O I/O I/O O I/O I/O O I/O I/O O I/O I/O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 12 V DC Ground 5 V DC power output USB data signal USB data signal Not used Ground 5 V DC power output USB data signal USB data signal Ground 5 V DC power output USB data signal USB data signal Not used Ground CONFM: On/Off Ground 2-3-9 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data signal 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC Ground Ground 5 V DC power to HDD1 Ground 5 V DC power from OPWB1 5 V DC power from OPWB1 5 V DC power from OPWB1 Ground Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power to HDD2 Ground 2-3-10 .3 V DC Description 12 V DC power from PSPWB 12 V DC power from PSPWB 12 V DC power from PSPWB 12 V DC power from PSPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Control signal Lock signal Ground 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC24 Connected to power source PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC25 Connected to ISC PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC27 Connected to hard disk 1 YC30 Connected to operation PWB 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC32 Connected to hard disk 2 1 2 3 +12V +12V +12V +12V GND GND GND GND GND HTPDN LOCKN GND RX0N RX0P GND GND +5V_HDD GND +5V +5V +5V GND GND GND GND +5V_HDD GND Signal I/O O O O O I I I I O O O O O Voltage 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC33 Connected to fiery relay PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Signal SGND SDOCLK SDO SGND SDICLK SDI SGND SGND 12V 12V I/O O O O I O O Voltage Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 12 V DC 12 V DC Ground Ground 12 V DC power to FIRPWB 12 V DC power to FIRPWB 2-3-11 .3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal Ground 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-2 Engine PWB 24 1 4 A20 A1 A10 A1 1 12 6 1 2 1 20 1 B19 B1 YC27 B1 1 YC1 13 12 B1 YC49 A16 YC17 11 3 1 12 14 7 22 1 6 1 YC26 B20 B10 YC24 1 YC25 B1 YC23 YC22 YC21 YC20 A1 YC19 A19 YC3 A1 YC4 1 1 B16 1 4 U1 U13 U100 U8 YC48 YC4 1 50 64 20 YC5 21 50 1 11 12 1 YC7 1 50 1 YC10 22 40 YC9 12 YC8 1 YC50 40 1 YC46 40 1 YC47 40 Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-12 1 YC11 64 1 YC12 YC6 40 1 60 YC15 YC2 U4 28 1 10 1 YC16 15 YC18 8 1 .

3 V DC power to FRPWB 3.3V2 +3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal A10 RLS_SENS A11 +5V A12 ZIG_MOT_DR_C CW A13 ZIG_MOT_DR_C W A14 GND A15 BLT_INDEX A16 +5V B1 GND 2-3-13 .3 V DC power to FRPWB 24 V DC power to TRCM Ground TRCM: On/Off TRCM ready signal TRCM drive switch signal CRM: On/Off 24 V DC power to CRM Ground CRS: On/Off 5 V DC power to CRS TRSM: On/Off (CCW) TRSM: On/Off (CW) Ground Not used Ground Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC2 Connected to front PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC3 Connected to transfer belt unit A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 GND +5V GND +12V GND GND +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND GND GND +24V +24V +5V +3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Voltage Ground 5 V DC power from FPWB1 Ground 12 V DC power from FPWB1 Ground Ground 24 V DC power from FPWB1 24 V DC power from FPWB1 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to FRPWB 24 V DC power to FRPWB 5 V DC power to FRPWB 3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3V1 +24V1 GND ICL_MOT_REM ICL_MOT_CLK ICL_MOT_RDY ICL_MOT_DIR RLS_MOT_DR +24V1 GND Signal I/O I I I I O O O O O O I O I O O O I O O O 5 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.

3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal 2-3-14 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3V2 B12 EEP_SCL2 B13 EEP_SDA2 B14 GND B15 A0 B16 A1 YC4 Connected to feed PWB 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 GND FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_CL1_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 LIFT_MOT2_REM GND LIFT_MOT1_REM 1 CAS2_WID CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_LNG2 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_WID CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_LNG2 CAS1_LNG1 GND 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground Not used Not used Ground PFM: On/Off PFM ready signal PFM drive switch signal PFCL1: On/Off PFCL2: On/Off ASCL2: On/Off LM2: On/Off Ground LM1: On/Off PWSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off PWSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off Ground 0/3.3 V DC Description TRSS: On/Off 5 V DC power to TRSS Ground Ground TRBLS: On/Off 5 V DC power to TRBLS TEMP signal TRES: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power to TRES 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to transfer belt unit Pin B2 B3 B4 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Signal ZIG_SENS +5V GND GND BLT_SPEED +5V TEMP ZIG_REV_SENS GND I/O I O I O I I O O O I/O O O I O O O O O O I I I I I I I I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC power to TRPWB B10 +5V B11 +3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Analog 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description PGS2(L): On/Off PGS2(U): On/Off PGS1(L): On/Off PGS1(U): On/Off LM1 lock signal LM2 lock signal Current signal PCCL: On/Off RLCSW: On/Off PFPCS1: On/Off FS1: On/Off LS1: On/Off Ground PS1: On/Off PUSOL1: On/Off (RET) PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT) FS2: On/Off LS2: On/Off PS2: On/Off PUSOL2: On/Off (RET) PUSOL2: On/Off (ACT) Ground RS: On/Off PCS: On/Off RDS: On/Off MM control signal MM/MCL: On/Off 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC MM control signal ASCL1: On/Off 2-3-15 .3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC4 Connected to feed PWB 2 Pin 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Signal CAS2_QUANT2 CAS2_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_QUANT1 LIFT_MOT1_LOC K LIFT_MOT2_LOC K CURRENT_SIG V-FEED_CL COVER_OPEN FEED2_SENS CAS1_P0 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND CAS1_EMPTY PICK_SOL1_RET PICK_SOL1_REM CAS2_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_EMPTY PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_REM GND REG_SENS FEED1_SENS BEND_SENS MID_MOT_PH MID_MOT_REM( ROL_CL) MID_MOT_CLK MID_MOT_PD ASIST_CL1 I/O I I I I I I I O I I I I I O O I I I O O I I I O O O O O Voltage 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground Not used LPS: On/Off Ground FUFM: On/Off DUM1 control signal DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off Ground EFM: On/Off DUS1: On/Off Not used Ground TRCM: On/Off Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC TRCM ready signal TRCM drive switch signal TRCM break signal Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used 2-3-16 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC5 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 GND M_TEMP LOOP_SENS GND EDGE_FAN_H DU1_MOT_PD DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_REM( CL_H) GND EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SEN S TCON_SET GND TRANS_MOT_RE M TRANS_MOT_CL K TRANS_MOT_RD Y TRANS_MOT_DI R TRANS_MOT_BR K GND DRM_MOT_BK_R EM DRM_MOT_BK_R DY DRM_MOT_BK_D IR DRM_MOT_BK_B RK GND DLP_MOT_BK_R EM DLP_MOT_BK_C LK DLP_MOT_BK_R DY Signal I/O I O O O O O I O O I O O 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC5 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Signal DLP_MOT_BK_DI R GND DRM_MOT_CLR_ REM DRM_MOT_BK_C LR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_ RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_ DIR GND DLP_MOT_CLR_ REM DLP_MOT_CLR_ CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_ RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_ DIR GND REG_MOT_PD REG_MOT_CLK REG_MOT_REM( CL) GND IH_PWB_FAN_L IH_PWB_FAN_H IH_PWB_FAN_AL M POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM IH_PWB_FAN(U) _ALM GND I/O O O O O I O 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal 2-3-17 .3 V DC Voltage Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground RM control signal RM/RCL: On/Off Ground Not used IHFM: On/Off IHFM alarm signal Power off signal Not used Not used Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JEM clock signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC6 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 GND JOB_SET JOB_MOT_REM JOB_MOT_CLK JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SEN S JOB_SOL_REM GND MAIN_HEAT_RE M SUB_HEAT_REM ZEROC FSR_RELAY PRESS_REM EXIT_REAR_FAN _L EXIT_REAR_FAN _H GND FSR_CL_REM FSR_MOT_REM FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_BRK GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG GND MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP MPF_LIFT_DOW N MPF_JAM O O O I I I I I I I I I Signal I/O I O O O I O O O O O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground Job separator set signal JEM: On/Off JEM drive switch signal JOCS: On/Off JFSSOL: On/Off Ground Not used Not used Not used Fuser relay signal Not used ERFM: On/Off ERFM: On/Off Ground Not used FUM: On/Off Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC FUM ready signal FUM drive switch signal FUM break signal Ground MPTSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPLSW: On/Off Ground MPPS: On/Off MPLS1: On/Off MPLS2: On/Off MPFS: On/Off 2-3-18 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Description MPPFCL: On/Off MPLM: On/Off MPLM: On/Off Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used DUM2 control signal DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off Ground DUCSW: On/Off Not used TRRM: On/Off TRRM: On/Off TRRS: On/Off DUS2: On/Off Not used Ground CLSOL: On/Off (RET) CLSOL: On/Off (ACT) IDS2 detection signal IDS2 detection signal IDS2 control signal Ground IDS1 detection signal IDS1 detection signal IDS1 control signal Ground 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC6 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Signal MPF_CL MPF_LIF2 MPF_LIFT1 GND TC_MOT_LOCK TC_TONER_LED TC_TONER_FUL L TC_TONER_VCO NT INTER_LOCK DU2_PD DU2_CLK DU2_REM(CL_L OW) GND DU_OPEN DU_FAN PRESS_MOT_RE M1 PRESS_MOT_RE M2 PRESS_RLS_SE NS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS GND CLN_SOL_RET CLN_SOL_REM REG_SENS_R_S REG_SENS_R_P REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_F_S REG_SENS_F_P REG_F_LED GND I/O O O O O O O I O O I I O O I I O I I O Voltage 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal 2-3-19 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC7 Connected to front PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 GND WTNR_SET INTER_LOCK IH_CORE_SENS IH_CORE_MOT_ REM IH_CORE_CLK WTNR_LED IH_COIL_FAN_AL M IH_COIL_FAN_H IH_COIL_FAN_L EXIT_FAN CONTAIN_FAN JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET GND EXIT_PAPE_SEN S EXIT_FEED_SEN S SB_MOT_REM SB_MOT_PH SB_MOT_CLK SB_MOT_PD SB_MOT_DIR GND DLP_FAN_ Bk_H DLP_FAN_ Bk_L DLP_FAN_CLR_ H DLP_FAN_CLR_L WTNR_SET WTNR_NEAR WTNR_VCONT GND ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_CLK Signal I/O O I O O O O O I I O O O O O O O O O I I O 0/3.3 V DC EM control signal EM drive switch signal Ground DEVFM2: On/Off DEVFM2: On/Off DEVFM1: On/Off DEVFM1: On/Off WTS2 detection signal WTS2 detection signal WTS2 control signal Ground Not used Not used 2-3-20 .3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used CFM1 alarm signal CFM1: On/Off CFM1: On/Off EFFM: On/Off Not used FSSOL: On/Off (ACT) FSSOL: On/Off (RET) Ground EFS: On/Off SBS: On/Off EM: On/Off EM control signal Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC7 Connected to front PWB Pin 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 YC8 Connected to high voltage PWB 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_DIR ROT_HP_SENS THOP_MOT_Bk_ REM THOP_MOT_M_R EM THOP_MOT_C_R EM THOP_MOT_Y_R EM GND ENCODE_ Bk ENCODE_M ENCODE_C ENCODE_Y THOP_ Bk THOP_M THOP_C THOP_Y GND SGND SGND SP_CNT T2_CNT SP_REM T_REM FB_CNT T1_CNT_Bk T1_CNT_M T1_CNT_C T1_CNT_Y T1_CLR_OFF_RE M I/O O O O O O O O O O O Analog Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Ground Ground Separation bias control voltage Secondary transfer bias control voltage Separation bias: On/Off Secondary transfer bias: On/Off Primary transfer cleaning bias: On/Off Primary transfer bias K control voltage Primary transfer bias M control voltage Primary transfer bias C control voltage Primary transfer bias Y control voltage Primary transfer control signal Description 2-3-21 .3 V DC Analog Analog Analog Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC9 Connected to motor control PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 YC10 Connected to front PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Signal MOT_CLK MOT_SDO MOT_SEL MOT_SDI MOT_RDY EMERGENCY BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_M DRM_INDEX_C DRM_INDEX_Y GND GND +5V +5V BLT_BRAKE BLT_VM BLT_REM MOT_DATA_SET DRM_ON BLT_FG GND DRM_INDEX_Bk ERS_Bk TPD_Bk_1 DLP_VCONT_Bk _1 TPD_TEMP_Bk GND DRM_INDEX_M ERS_M TPD_M_1 DLP_VCONT_M_ 1 I/O O O O I I O O O O O O O O O O I O I O I I O I O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB ready signal MCPWB control signal TBLS: On/Off Not used DRM-K control signal DRM-M control signal DRM-C control signal DRM-Y control signal Ground Ground 5 V DC power to MCPWB 5 V DC power to MCPWB Not used Not used Not used MCPWB control signal MCPWB control signal Not used Ground DRM-K control signal CL-K: On/Off DEVPWB-K detection signal DEVPWB-K control signal Developer thermistor K detection signal Ground DRM-M control signal CL-M: On/Off DEVPWB-M detection signal DEVPWB-M control signal 2-3-22 .3 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC MCPWB select signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal 0/3.

3 V DC Analog Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Description Developer thermistor M detection signal Ground DRM-C control signal CL-C: On/Off DEVPWB-C detection signal DEVPWB-C control signal Developer thermistor C detection signal Ground Ground Ground Ground DEVPWB-Y detection signal DEVPWB-Y control signal Developer thermistor Y detection signal CL-Y: On/Off DRM-Y control signal FRCSW: On/Off Ground Ground Ground LSUFM: On/Off WTM lock signal WTM: On/Off Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to front PWB Pin 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Signal TPD_TEMP_M GND DRM_INDEX_C ERS_C TPD_C_1 DLP_VCONT_C_ 1 TPD_TEMP_C GND TN_CLK GND EEP_SCL1 GND EEP_SDA1 GND TPD_Y_1 DLP_VCONT_Y_ 1 TPD_TEMP_Y ERS_Y DRM_INDEX_Y FRONT_OPEN GND I2C_SCL GND I2C_SDA GND LSU_FAN_REM CLEAN_MOT_LO CK CLEAN_MOT_RE M GND I/O I I O I O I O O I/O I O I O I I O I/O O I O Voltage Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 2-3-23 .

3 V DC Ground APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) 2-3-24 .3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC11 Connected to LSU relay PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Signal SGND DATA_2PBK(LVD S) DATA_2NBK(LVD S) SGND GAIN_FIX_BK PARA_SIG_P2_B K PARA_SIG_P1_B K PARA_SIG_P0_B K INT_ST_1_BK INT_ST_2_BK PARA_SIG_P3_2 BK SGND DATA_4PBK(LVD S) DATA_4NBK(LVD S) SGND DATA_3PBK(LVD S) DATA_3NBK(LVD S) SGND DATA_2P_M(LVD S) DATA_2N_M(LVD S) SGND GAIN_FIX_M PALA_STG_P2_M PALA_STG_P1_M PALA_STG_P0_M INT_ST_M SGND DATA_2P_C(LVD S) I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage Ground Description 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-Y control signal Ground Control signal Ground Ground 0/3.3 V DC Ground APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC11 Connected to LSU relay PWB Pin 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Signal DATA_2N_C(LVD S) SGND GAIN_FIX_C PALA_STG_P2_C PALA_STG_P1_C PALA_STG_P0_C INT_ST_C SGND DATA_2P_Y(LVD S) DATA_2N_Y(LVD S) SGND GAIN_FIX_Y PALA_STG_P2_Y PALA_STG_P1_Y PALA_STG_P0_Y INT_ST_Y SGND EEPROM_CS_1_ BK IDD_CS_1_BK EEPROM_CS_2_ BK IDD_CS_2_BK EEPROM_CS_M IDD_CS_M EEPROM_CS_C IDD_CS_C EEPROM_CS_Y IDD_CS_Y SGND MSET_N SGND SDO SGND I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I/O O I/O O I/O O I/O O I/O O O O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) 0/3.3 V DC Ground APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 2-3-25 .3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC11 Connected to LSU relay PWB YC12 Connected to LSU relay PWB Pin 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 SDI SGND CLK SGND CLK_BK LOCK_BK REM_BK SGND DATA_1PBK(LVD S) DATA_1NBK(LVD S) SGND SDCLK_BK SGND PARA_SIG_P4_B K PARA_SIG_P3_B K CUALM_BK LSU_TH_BK BD_BK SGND CLK_M LOCK_M REM_M SGND DATA_1P_M(LVD S) DATA_1N_M(LVD S) SGND SDCLK_M SGND PARA_SIG_P4_M PARA_SIG_P3_M CUALM_M LSU_TH_M Signal I/O I O O I O O O O O O I I I O I O O O O O O I I Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC Analog Ground Ground APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K alarm signal LSU thermistor K detection signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Ground Ground PM-K lock signal PM-K: On/Off Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC PM-M lock signal PM-M: On/Off Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal 2-3-26 .3 V DC Analog Ground Ground APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M alarm signal LSU thermistor M detection signal 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Ground PM-C lock signal PM-C: On/Off Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC12 Connected to LSU relay PWB Pin 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Signal BD_M SGND CLK_C LOCK_C REM_C SGND DATA_1P_C(LVD S) DATA_1N_C(LVD S) SGND SDCLK_C SGND PARA_SIG_P4_C PARA_SIG_P3_C CUALM_C LSU_TH_C BD_C SGND CLK_Y LOCK_Y REM_Y SGND DATA_1P_Y(LVD S) DATA_1N_Y(LVD S) SGND SDCLK_Y SGND PARA_SIG_P4_Y PARA_SIG_P3_Y CUALM_Y LSU_TH_Y BD_Y SGND I/O I O I O O O O O O I I I O I O O O O O O I I I Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Ground Ground APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C alarm signal LSU thermistor C detection signal Ground PM-Y lock signal PM-Y: On/Off Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y 2-3-27 .3 V DC Analog Ground Ground APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y alarm signal LSU thermistor Y detection signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias C control voltage PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM 0/3.3 V DC PWM PWM Main charger C control signal AC charger roller C control signal AC sleeve bias C control voltage DC magnet bias C control voltage DC sleeve bias C control voltage DC main charger C: On/Off DC charger roller C control signal DC charger roller C control signal Ground 0/3.C DC_REC_REM AC_MAG_CLK_C AC_MAG_CNT_C DISCHARGE_C AC_MAIN_CNT_ C AC_SLV_CNT_C DC_MAG_CNT_C DC_SLV_CNT_C AC_SLV_CLK_C DC_MAG_REM MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAIN_CNT_ C SGND Signal I/O I I O O O O O O O O O I O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O 3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias Y control voltage 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias Y clock signal PWM PWM DC bias Y control voltage Not used DC bias C control voltage 0/3.3V3 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC13 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 YC16 Connected to high voltage PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 GND GND 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1 3.3 V DC PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM Voltage Ground Ground 3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias Y clock signal 0/3.3V2 SGND AC_MAIN_CLK DC_MAIN_REM DC_MAIN_CNT_ Y MAIN_IDC_Y AC_SLV_CLK_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_ Y DISCHARGE_Y AC_MAG_CNT_Y AC_MAG_CLK_Y DC_REC_CNT N.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias C clock signal 2-3-28 .3 V DC (pulse) AC charger roller Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC power from FPWB1 Ground DC main charger Y: On/Off DC charger roller Y control signal DC charger roller Y control signal DC sleeve bias Y control voltage DC magnet bias Y control voltage AC sleeve bias Y control voltage AC charger roller Y control signal Main charger Y control signal Description 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB select signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC DFMPWB ready signal DFMPWB detection signal Ground 2-3-29 .3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias M control voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC magnet bias M clock signal PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM DC charger roller K control signal DC charger roller K control signal Main charger K control signal DC sleeve bias K control voltage DC magnet bias K control voltage AC sleeve bias K control voltage AC charger roller K control signal DC charger roller K control signal DC charger roller K control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DFMPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) AC sleeve bias M clock signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC17 Connected to high voltage PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 YC18 Connected to 1000-sheet/ 4000-sheet finisher 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signal SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_ M MAIN_IDC_M AC_SLV_CLK_M DC_SLV_CNT_M DC_MAG_CNT_ M AC_SLV_CNT_M AC_MAIN_CNT_ M DISCHARGE_M AC_MAG_CNT_M AC_MAG_CLK_M AC_MAG_CLK_B k AC_MAG_CNT_B k DISCHARGE_Bk AC_SLV_CNT_Bk DC_MAG_CNT_B k DC_SLV_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CLK_Bk AC_MAIN_CNT_ Bk MAIN_IDC_Bk DC_MAIN_CNT_ Bk SGND DF_CLK DF_SDO DF_SEL DF_SDI DF_RDY DF_DET GND I/O O O O O O O O I O O O O I O O O O O O O O O O O I O PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM Voltage Ground DC charger roller Y control signal DC charger roller M control signal DC sleeve bias M control voltage DC magnet bias M control voltage AC sleeve bias M control voltage AC charger roller M control signal Main charger M control signal Description 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data signal (side) 0/3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB Ground Ground TFM1: On/Off 24 V DC power to TFM1 TFM2: On/Off 24 V DC power to TFM2 Not used Not used Not used Not used A10 GND A11 GND A12 TN_FAN1 A13 +24V1 A14 TN_FAN2 A15 +24V1 A16 LVU_FAN1 A17 +24V1 A18 LVU_FAN2 A19 +24V1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 SIDE_CLK SIDE_SDO SIDE_SEL SIDE_SDI SIDE_RDY SIDE_PAUSE TANDEM_CAS1O PEN TANDEM_CAS2O PEN SIDE_MULTI_OP EN 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC PFMPWB ready signal PFMPWB pause signal PFMPWB control signal PFMPWB control signal 3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data signal (side) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB serial communication data signal 0/3. and belt fan motor 1/2 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Signal PF_CLK PF_SDO PF_SEL PF_SDI PF_RDY PF_PAUSE PF_CAS1_OPEN PF_CAS2_OPEN +3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal input 24 V DC BLFM124 V DC power to BLFM1 2-3-30 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC19 Connected to paper feeder/ large capacity feeder.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC PFMPWB select signal (side) 0/3.3V4 I/O O O O I I O I I O O O O O O O O I I O I I O O I O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFMPWB clock signal (side) 0/3.3 V DC power to PFMPWB (side) B10 +3. toner fan motor 1/2.3 V DC 3.3 V DC PFMPWB ready signal (side) PFMPWB pause signal (side) PFMPWB control signal (side) PFMPWB control signal (side) PFMPWB control signal (side) 3.3V4 B11 GND B12 +24V1 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM2 clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3. toner fan motor 1/2. and belt fan motor 1/2 YC20 Connected to bridge unit Pin Signal I/O O O O O O O I I O O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) BRCM1 clock signal 2-3-31 .3 V DC Description BLFM1: On/Off 24 V DC power to BLFM2 BLFM2: On/Off Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 24 V DC power to BRSOL BRSOL: On/Off (ACT) BRSOL: On/Off (RET) Ground BRECSW: On/Off Ground BRES: On/Off 5 V DC power to BRES Not used BRCM2: On/Off BRCM2 control signal BRCM2 control signal BRCM2 drive switch signal BRCM2: On/Off BRCM1 control signal BRCM1 control signal B13 BELT_FAN1 B14 +24V1 B15 BELT_FAN2 B16 DLP_FAN1 B17 +24V1 B18 DLP_FAN2 B19 +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 DECAL_HP_SEN S GUIDE_REM GUIDE_CLK GUIDE_PD GUIDE_DIR DECAL_REM DECAL_PH DECAL_CLK DECAL_PD DECAL_DIR +24V EXIT_SOL_REM EXIT_SOL_RET GND EXIT_COV_OPE N GND EXIT_SENS +5V N.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC19 Connected to paper feeder/ large capacity feeder.C BRIDGE2 REM BRIDGE2 PH BRIDGE2 CLK BRIDGE2 PD BRIDGE2 DIR BRIDGE1 REM BRIDGE1 PH BRIDGE1 CLK BRIDGE1 PD 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) MCL: On/Off YC24 Connected to key counter 1 2 3 4 2-3-32 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC power to coin vender Ground Ground Coin vender enable signal Ground Coin vender control signal Coin vender control signal Coin vender control signal Serial communication data signal Ground Ground Key counter set signal Key counter count signal 24 V DC power to key card 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC20 Connected to bridge unit Pin 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 YC22 Connected to power source fan motor YC23 Connected to coin vender 1 2 Signal BRIDGE1 DIR BRIDGE_SENS 2 BRIDGE_OPEN BRIDGE_SENS 1 GND 5V GND GND +24V1 +24V1 LVU_FAN +24V1 I/O O I I I O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC Description BRCM1 drive switch signal BRCS2: On/Off BRCSW: On/Off BRCS1: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power to BRPWB Ground Ground 24 V DC power to BRPWB 24 V DC power to BRPWB PSFM: On/Off 24 V DC power to PSFM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 +24V GND GND COIN_EN FGND FEED_COUNT EJECT_COUNT COPYING_SIG TXD_COIN GND RXD_COIN GND GND DC1_SET DC1_COUNT +24V 1 O I O O O O I I O O 24 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC25 Connected to key card Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 YC26 Connected to fuser unit and fuser IH PWB A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V COPY_ENABLE KEY7 KEY6 KEY5 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 KEY0 GND EDGE_FAN_ALM EDGE_FAN +24V1 EDGE_FAN_ALM EDGE_FAN +24V1 FSR_FAN_ALM FSR_FAN +24V1 Signal I/O O O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O O O I O O I O O I O O O O I O Voltage 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Description 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card 5 V DC power to key card Key card enable signal 24 V DC power to key card Key card control signal Key card control signal Key card control signal Key card control signal Key card control signal Key card control signal Key card control signal Key card control signal Ground Key card count signal FURFM alarm signal FURFM: On/Off 24 V DC power to FURFM FUFFM alarm signal FUFFM: On/Off 24 V DC power to FUFFM CFM2 alarm signal CFM2: On/Off 24 V DC power to CFM2 FURM: On/Off (CCW) FURM: On/Off (CW) Ground FUES: On/Off 5 V DC power to FUES Ground A10 +24V B10 COUNT A10 FSR_RLS_DR_C CW A11 FSR_RLS_DR_C W A12 GND A13 FSR_SIZE_SENS A14 +5V A15 GND 2-3-33 .3 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3V2 GND GND PRESS_TH 0/3. toner motor K/M/C/Y and screw sensor K/M/C/Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 EEP_SDA2 GND EEP_SCL2 3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power to RFPWB 24 V DC power to TM-Y TM-Y: On/Off 24 V DC power to TM-C TM-C: On/Off 24 V DC power to TM-M TM-M: On/Off 24 V DC power to TM-K B10 GND B11 EDGE_TH B12 GND B13 GUIDE_TH1 B14 GND B15 GUIDE_TH2 B16 MAIN_TH2 B17 MAIN_TH1 B18 GND B19 +24V1 B20 BRIDGE_FAN YC27 Connected to RFID PWB.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC FIH control signal FIH: On/Off 5 V DC power to FIH Ground Ground FTH4 detection signal Ground FTH3 detection signal Ground Not used Ground FTH2 detection signal FTH1 detection signal FTH1 detection signal Ground 24 V DC power to BRFM BRFM: On/Off Ground 3.3V2 +24V1 TMOT_Y_DR +24V1 TMOT_C_DR +24V1 TMOT_M_DR +24V1 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Description FURS: On/Off 5 V DC power to FURS Ground FUBLS: On/Off 5 V DC power to FUBLS Not used A16 FSR_RLS_SENS Connected to A17 +5V fuser unit and A18 GND fuser IH PWB A19 FSR_BLT_PLS A20 +5V B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 PRESS_HEART_ REM IH_RXD IH_TXD ROTATION IH_HEAT_REM +3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 2-3-34 .3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC26 Pin Signal I/O I O I O I O O O O I I I I I O O I/O I O O O O O O O I Voltage 0/3.

3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Description TM-K: On/Off Ground SRS-Y: On/Off 24 V DC power to SRS-Y Ground SRS-C: On/Off 24 V DC power to SRS-C Ground SRS-M: On/Off 24 V DC power to SRS-M Ground SRS-K: On/Off 24 V DC power to SRS-K 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC27 Connected to RFID PWB.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 2-3-35 .3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3. toner motor K/M/C/Y and screw sensor K/M/C/Y Pin 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 YC46 Connected to main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Signal TMOT_Bk_DR GND ENCODE_Y +5V GND ENCODE_C +5V GND ENCODE_M +5V GND ENCODE_K +5V HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND TCLKP TCLKN SGND TCP TCN SGND I/O O I O I O I O I O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Voltage 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Engine lock signal Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground Sleep signal Engine hold signal Not used Ground Engine interrupt signal Engine busy signal Engine communication direction signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 2-3-36 .3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC46 Connected to main PWB Pin 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC47 Connected to fiery relay PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 TBP TBN SGND TAP TAN SGND SLEEP HLD_ENG NC SGND EG IRN EG SO EG SBSY EG SDIR EG_SI EG_SCLK SGND NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC SGND CH1_N CH1_P SGND CH2_N CH2_P SGND CH3_N Signal I/O I I I I I I I O I I I I O O O O O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 2-3-37 .3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC47 Connected to fiery relay PWB Pin 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Signal CH3_P SGND VCLK_N VCLK_P SGND VSYNC_DP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_AN HSYNC_DP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_AN I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal Ground 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-3 Power source PWB 30 ppm model/35 ppm model 1 4 3 18 1 1 8 1 6 16 YC3 1 3 YC14 YC12 YC11 1 1 4 1 6 YC9 YC13 YC10 YC7 YC8 1 2 YC1 TB1 TB2 TB3 YC4 1 1 4 6 1 3 YC5 YC6 Figure 2-3-3 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) 2-3-38 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector TB Connected to AC inlet and main power switch YC1 Connected to main power switch YC3 Connected to fuser IH PWB YC5 Connected to cassette heater Pin 1 2 3 1 2 LIVE NEUTRAL DH_LIVE MSW_OUT MSW_IN Signal I/O I I I O I Voltage 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC Description AC power input AC power input AC power input AC power output to MSW AC power output from MSW 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 IH_NEUTRAL NC IH_LIVE DH_LIVE DH_LIVE NC NC DH_NEUTRAL DH_NEUTRAL DH_LIVE DH_NEUTRAL O O O O O O O O AC power output to IHPWB Not used AC power output to IHPWB AC power output to CH AC power output to CH Not used Not used AC power output to CH AC power output to CH AC power output to PFCH AC power output to PFCH YC6 Connected to paper feeder /large capacity feeder YC7 Connected to LSU relay PWB 1 2 1 2 3 4 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND O O - 24 V DC 24 V DC - 24 V DC power to LSURPWB 24 V DC power to LSURPWB Ground Ground 2-3-39 .

1000-sheet/ 4000-sheet finisher and ISC PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GND GND GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Voltage Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to MCPWB 24 V DC power to MCPWB 24 V DC power to MCPWB 24 V DC power to FPWB1 24 V DC power to FPWB1 24 V DC power to FPWB1 12 V DC power to FPWB1 Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to paper feeder/large capacity feeder 24 V DC power to paper feeder/large capacity feeder 24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000sheet finisher 12 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000sheet finisher 24 V DC power to ISCPWB 12 V DC power to ISCPWB Not used Not used Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Description 2-3-40 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC8 Connected to motor control PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC9 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC10 Connected to paper feeder/ large capacity feeder.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC13 Connected to high voltage PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC14 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND PGND POWER_OFF DRUM_HEAT_RE M GND FSR_RELAY_RE M +12V1 +12V1 +12V1 +12V1 GND GND GND GND I/O O O O I I I O O O O Voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC Description 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 Ground Ground Ground Sleep mode signal: On/Off FH: On/Off Ground Power relay signal: On/Off 12 V DC power to MPWB 12 V DC power to MPWB 12 V DC power to MPWB 12 V DC power to MPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground 2-3-41 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 45 ppm model/55 ppm model 1 4 3 18 1 1 8 1 6 16 1 1 4 1 6 YC3 1 3 YC17 YC15 YC14 YC12 YC16 YC13 YC10 YC11 TB4 TB3 1 1 2 YC2 2 YC1 TB5 TB1 TB2 1 4 YC5 1 4 YC18 YC7 1 3 1 1 4 6 1 3 YC4 YC8 YC9 Figure 2-3-4 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) 2-3-42 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector TB Connected to AC inlet and main power switch Pin 1 2 3 4 5 YC1 Connected to main power switch YC3 Connected to fuser IH PWB YC8 Connected to cassette heater 1 2 LIVE NEUTRAL LIVE NEUTRAL DH_LIVE MSW_OUT MSW_IN Signal I/O I I I O I Voltage 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC Description AC power input AC power input Not used Not used AC power input AC power output to MSW AC power output from MSW 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 IH_NEUTRAL NC IH_LIVE DH_LIVE DH_LIVE NC NC DH_NEUTRAL DH_NEUTRAL DH_LIVE DH_NEUTRAL O O O O O O O O AC power output to IHPWB Not used AC power output to IHPWB AC power output to CH AC power output to CH Not used Not used AC power output to CH AC power output to CH AC power output to PFCH AC power output to PFCH YC9 Connected to paper feeder/ large capacity feeder YC10 Connected to LSU relay PWB 1 2 1 2 3 4 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND O O - 24 V DC 24 V DC - 24 V DC power to LSURPWB 24 V DC power to LSURPWB Ground Ground 2-3-43 .

1000-sheet/ 4000-sheet finisher and ISC PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GND GND GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Voltage Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to MCPWB 24 V DC power to MCPWB 24 V DC power to MCPWB 24 V DC power to FPWB1 24 V DC power to FPWB1 24 V DC power to FPWB1 12 V DC power to FPWB1 Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to paper feeder/large capacity feeder 24 V DC power to paper feeder/large capacity feeder 24 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000sheet finisher 12 V DC power to 1000-sheet/4000sheet finisher 24 V DC power to ISCPWB 12 V DC power to ISCPWB Not used Not used Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Description 2-3-44 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC11 Connected to motor control PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC12 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC13 Connected to paper feeder/ large capacity feeder.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC14 Connected to main PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC16 Connected to high voltage PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC17 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 3 Signal +12V1 +12V1 +12V1 +12V1 GND GND GND GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND PGND POWER_OFF DRUM_HEAT_RE M GND I/O O O O O O O O I I Voltage 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description 12 V DC power to MPWB 12 V DC power to MPWB 12 V DC power to MPWB 12 V DC power to MPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 24 V DC power to HVPWB1 Ground Ground Ground Sleep mode signal: On/Off FH: On/Off Ground 2-3-45 .3 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-4 ISC PWB 4 1 3 1 YC5 1 YC14 YC1 5 1 YC13 3 1 YC9 40 1 YC6 11 Figure 2-3-5 ISC PWB silk-screen diagram 1 YC11 6 1 YC4 7 1 8 YC7 6 1 YC3 1 1 YC12 16 3 YC8 1 YC2 5 2-3-46 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Scanner busy signal Scanner hold signal Scanner communication direction signal Scanner interrupt signal Ground Ground Control signal Lock signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scanner clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Ground SM drive control signal SM drive control signal SM drive control signal SM drive control signal 5 V DC power to LEDPWB Error signal Data signal Analog voltage Ground Ground PWM signal LED driver: On/Off 24 V DC power to LEDPWB 24 V DC power to LEDPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 2-3-47 .3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to main PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC4 Connected to main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC5 Connected to scanner motor YC6 Connected to LED PWB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC7 Connected to power source PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal SC_CLK SC_SO SC_SI SC_BSY SC_HLDN SC_DIR SC_IRN GND(SPARE) GND HTPDN LOCKN GND TX0N TX0P GND SMOT AP SMOT BP SMOT AN SMOT BN +5V FAIL SDA SCL VSET SGND PGND PWM POW +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND +24V2 +24V2 I/O I O I I I I I O O O O O O O O O I I/O O O O O O O I I I Voltage Description 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Enable signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 2-3-48 .3 V DC Description 3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC8 Connected to home position sensor YC9 Connected to CCD PWB Pin 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Signal +3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3V GND HP_SW GND CCDCLK1 GND CCDCLK2 GND CP GND RS VSG TG SH AFE_SI AFE_EN AFE_SO AFECLK GND DIS_CIS_1P DIS_CIS_1N GND DIS_CIS_2P DIS_CIS_2N GND DIS_CIS_3P DIS_CIS_3N GND DIS_CIS_4P DIS_CIS_4N GND DIS_CIS_5P DIS_CIS_5N GND DIS_CISCKP DIS_CISCKN I/O O I O O O O O O O I O O O I I I I I I I I I I O O Voltage 3.3 V DC power to HPS Ground HPS: On/Off Ground Ground Ground Clamp signal Ground Reset signal Control signal Control signal Shift gate signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal Ground 0/3.

3 V DC 5 V DC DPOCSW: On/Off Not used Ground Ground Ground Not used 24 V DC power to DPMPWB 24 V DC power to DPMPWB 24 V DC power to DPMPWB Ground OSS: On/Off 5 V DC power to OSS 2-3-49 .3 V DC Voltage Ground Select signal Ground Ground Clamp signal Ground 5 V DC power to CCDPWB Ground 10 V DC power to CCDPWB Ground 3.1V GND +10V GND +3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC power to CCDPWB Ground Ground DPTS: On/Off ready signal Select signal Description 0/3.1V Signal I/O O O O O O O I I O O O I I O O O I O 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC DC10V 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC9 Connected to CCD PWB Pin 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC11 Connected to CCD PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC12 Connected to DP main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC13 Connected to original size sensor 1 2 3 GND CCDSEL GND AFE_MCLK GND(AFE_SHD) CLPIN GND(AFE_SHP) +5.3V GND GND(SPARE) DP_TMG DP_RDY DP_SEL DP_CLK DP_SO DP_SI DP_OPEN Reserve GND GND GND Reserve 24V2 24V2 24V2 GND ORG_SW +5.3 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC14 Connected to original detection switch Pin 1 2 3 Signal +3.3 V DC power to ODSW Ground ODSW: On/Off 2-3-50 .3V GND CO_SW I/O O I Voltage 3.3 V DC Description 3.3 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-5 Operation PWB 1 1 6 12 5 1 1 1 12 YC3 15 YC15 40 YC4 1 YC9 1 1 4 YC6 1 20 YC11 1 YC8 2 9 YC14 YC13 YC12 1 5 4 Figure 2-3-6 Operation PWB 1 silk-screen diagram 2-3-51 SW1 1 YC5 1 1 4 1 YC10 YC1 12 YC2 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power from MPWB Memory LED control signal Attention LED control signal Processing LED control signal 24 V down signal Sleep return signal Audio output signal Reset signal Power key: On/Off Operation panel status signal Ground 2-3-52 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to main PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 YC2 Connected to main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 YC3 Connected to main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 +5V +5V +5V GND GND VBUS DN DP ID GND GND SECOND_TRAY_ SW BEEP_POWERO N ENERGY_SAVE SUPND_POWER LED_MEMORY_N LED_ATTENTION _N LED_PROCESSI NG_N SHUT_DOWN LIGHTOFF_POW ERON AUDIO PANEL RESET INT_POWERKEY _N PANEL_STATUS SGND Signal I/O I I I I I/O I/O I I I I I I I I I I O O Voltage 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description 5 V DC power from MPWB 5 V DC power from MPWB 5 V DC power from MPWB Ground Ground 5 V DC power input USB data signal USB data signal Not used Ground Ground Not used Sleep return signal Energy save signal 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground Ground Ground Ground LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal Ground LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal Ground LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal Ground LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal Ground LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal Ground LCD Control signal LCD Control signal LCD Control signal Ground Ground Ground LCD enable signal LCD mode switch signal Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD vertical synchronization signal 2-3-53 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC4 Connected to LCD Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Signal SGND SGND CK SGND SGND SC R0(LSB) R1 R2 SGND R3 R4 R5(MSB) SGND G0(LSB) G1 G2 SGND G3 G4 G5(MSB) SGND B0(LSB) B1 B2 SGND B3 B4 B5(MSB) SGND H_SYNC SGND V_SYNC SGND ENB CM I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD horizontal synchronization signal 0/3.

3 V DC Power key: On/Off 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 1 0/3.position signal Touch panel X+ position signal Touch panel Y+ position signal Touch panel X.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2 0/3.3 V DC power to LCD 3.3 V DC power to LCD 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4 0/3.3 V DC power to LCD 3.3V 3.3V 3.3 V DC power to LCD Touch panel Y.3V 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC4 Connected to LCD Pin 37 38 39 40 YC5 Connected to touch panel 1 2 3 4 YC6 Connected to operation PWB 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3.position signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog Analog Analog Analog Description 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 2-3-54 .3 V DC power to OPWB2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 3 0/3.3V BOT YLEFT X+ TOP Y+ RIGHT XKEY4 SCAN2 INT_POWERKEY _N SCAN1 LED1 SUPND_POWER KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 LED0 KEY0 SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN0 GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal I/O O O O O I I I I I O I O O O I I I O I O O O Voltage 3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 0 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 0 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground Processing LED control signal Memory LED control signal Attention LED control signal Ground Speaker sound signal (+) Speaker sound signal (-) LED control signal Not used LED control signal Not used 2-3-55 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 7 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 5 0/3.3 V DC Analog Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 6 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 3 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC7 Connected to operation PWB 2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC8 Connected to operation PWB 3 YC11 Connected to speaker YC14 Connected to LCD 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 Signal SCAN4 KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 SCAN0 SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 LED2 LED3 LED4 GND PROCESSING_L ED MEMORY LED ATTENTION_LED GND VO2 VO1 LED_A NC LED_C NC I/O O I I I O O O O O O O O O O O O O I Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 4 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 1 1 1 8 YC4 9 1 10 40 1 1 YC5 YC1 YC2 50 20 20 YC3 10 1 1 YC17 YC12 10 YC18 1 10 YC19 1 YC8 10 YC14 1 11 1 YC13 YC11 1 10 1 YC15 YC10 11 1 YC9 10 1 3 1 YC7 11 2-3-6 Front PWB 40 1 2-3-56 YC16 1 9 Figure 2-3-7 Front PWB silk-screen diagram 20 YC6 21 .

3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC power from EPWB 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to engine PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC2 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Signal +3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 2-3-57 .3 V DC power from EPWB 5 V DC power from EPWB 24 V DC power from EPWB 24 V DC power from EPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground DRM-K control signal CL-K: On/Off DEVPWB-K detection signal DEVPWB-K control signal Developer thermistor K detection signal Ground DRM-M control signal CL-M: On/Off DEVPWB-M detection signal DEVPWB-M control signal Developer thermistor M detection signal Ground DRM-C control signal CL-C: On/Off DEVPWB-C detection signal DEVPWB-C control signal Developer thermistor C detection signal Ground Ground 0/3.3 V DC Analog Description 3.3V2 +5V +24V +24V GND GND GND GND GND GND DRM_INDEX_Bk ERS_Bk_REM TPD_ Bk_1 DLP_VCONT_Bk _1 TPD_TEMP_Bk GND DRM_INDEX_M ERS_ M_REM TPD_M_1 DLP_VCONT_M_ 1 TPD_TEMP_M GND DRM_INDEX_C ERS_C_REM TPD_C_1 DLP_VCONT_C_ 1 TPD_TEMP_C GND TN_CLK GND EEP_SCL1 I/O I I I I I O I O I O O I O I O O I O I O I I Voltage 3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3V1 +3.3 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.

3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Voltage Ground Ground DEVPWB-Y detection signal DEVPWB-Y control signal Developer thermistor Y detection signal CL-Y: On/Off DRM-Y control signal FRCSW: On/Off Ground Ground Ground LSUFM: On/Off WTM lock signal WTM: On/Off Ground Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used CFM1 alarm signal CFM1: On/Off CFM1: On/Off EFFM: On/Off Not used FSSOL: On/Off (ACT) FSSOL: On/Off (RET) Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC2 Connected to engine PWB Pin 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC3 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 GND EEP_SDA1 GND TPD_Y_1 DLP_VCONT_Y_ 1 TPD_TEMP_Y ERS_Y_REM DRM_INDEX_ Y FRONT_OPEN GND I2C_SCL GND I2C_SDA GND LSU_FAN_REM CLEAN_MOT_LO CK CLEAN_MOT_RE M GND GND WTNR_SET INTER_LOCK IH_CORE_SENS IH_CORE_MOT_ REM IH_CORE_CLK WTNR_LED IH_COIL_FAN_AL M IH_COIL_FAN_H IH_COIL_FAN_L EXIT_FAN CONTAIN_FAN JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET GND Signal I/O I/O O I O I O O I I/O I O I I O I I I I I Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal 2-3-58 .3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EM clock signal 2-3-59 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to engine PWB Pin 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Signal EXIT_PAPER_SE NS EXIT_FEED_SEN S SB_MOT_REM SB_MOT_PH SB_MOT_CLK SB_MOT_PD SB_MOT_DIR GND DLP_FAN_ Bk _H DLP_FAN_ Bk _L DLP_FAN_CLR_ H DLP_FAN_CLR_L WTNR_FULL WTNR_NEAR WTNR_VCONT GND ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_CLK ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_DIR ROT_HP_SENS THOP_MOT_Bk_ REM THOP_MOT_M_R EM THOP_MOT_C_R EM THOP_MOT_Y_R EM GND ENCODE_ Bk ENCODE_M ENCODE_C ENCODE_Y THOP_ Bk THOP_M I/O O O I I I I I I I I I O O I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog Analog 0/3.3 V DC EFS: On/Off SBS: On/Off EM: On/Off EM control signal EM control signal EM drive switch signal Ground DEVFM2: On/Off DEVFM2: On/Off DEVFM1: On/Off DEVFM1: On/Off WTS2 detection signal WTS2 detection signal WTS2 control signal Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Voltage Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used CFM1 alarm signal CFM1: On/Off 24 V DC power to CFM1 24 V DC power to EFFM EFFM: On/Off Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal Ground SBS: On/Off 5 V DC power to SBS Ground EFS: On/Off 5 V DC power to EFS 24 V DC power to FSSOL FSSOL: On/Off (ACT) FSSOL: On/Off (RET) Description 2-3-60 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to engine PWB YC4 Connected to coil fan motor 1 and eject front fan motor Pin 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YC5 Connected to eject unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal THOP_C THOP_Y GND 5V LED1 5V LED2 IH_COIL_FAN_AL M IH_COIL_FAN 24V 24V EXIT FAN ROT_CORE A ROT_CORE B ROT_CORE A/ ROT_CORE B/ GND ROT_HP_SENS 5V SB_CORE B/ SB_CORE A/ SB_CORE B SB_CORE A GND EXIT_FEED_SEN S 5V GND EXIT_PAPER_SE NS 5V +24V1 JUNC_SOL_KYU JUNC_SOL_FUK I/O I O O O O O O O O I O I O O O O 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.

3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_Bk DRM_ADR1_Bk 24V ERS_Bk_REM 5V WTNR_FULL WTNR_LED 5V_LED GND WTNR_SET 5V WTNR_NEAR WTNR_LED 5V_LED TPD_TEMP_BK DLP_VCONT_BK _1 TPD_BK_1 TN_CLK_BK GND DLP_ADR1_BK DLP_ADR0_BK EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3 V DC (pulse) WTS1 LED emitter signal 0/3.3V2 3V VIB_MOT Signal I/O O O O O O O I/O O O O I O O I O I O I O I/O O O O O Voltage 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC6 Connected to developer fan motor 1/2 YC7 Connected to drum unit K Pin 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC8 Connected to waste toner sensor 1/2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC9 Connected to developer unit K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 24V DLP_FAN_Bk 24V DLP_FAN_M 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC Analog 5 V DC Analog 5 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC power to VM-K VM-K: On/Off 2-3-61 .3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-K 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-K 0/3.3 V DC Analog Ground Not used Not used 24 V DC power to CL-K CL-K: On/Off 5 V DC power to WTS1 WTS1 detection signal 5 V DC power to WTS1 Ground WTS2 detection signal 5 V DC power to WTS2 Not used Not used Not used Developer thermistor K detection signal DEVPWB-K control signal DEVPWB-K detection signal Ground Not used Not used 0/3.3 V DC Description 24 V DC power to DEVFM2 DEVFM2: On/Off 24 V DC power to DEVFM1 DEVFM1: On/Off 3.

3V2 3V VIB_MOT 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 24 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC Description 3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_M DRM_ADR1_M 24V ERS_M_REM TPD_TEMP_M DLP_VCONT_M_ 1 TPD_M_1 TN_CLK_M GND DLP_ADR1_M DLP_ADR0_M EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3 V DC power to VM-M VM-M: On/Off 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC Analog Ground Not used Not used 24 V DC power to CL-M CL-M: On/Off Developer thermistor M detection signal DEVPWB-M control signal DEVPWB-M detection signal Ground Not used Not used 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_C DRM_ADR1_C 24V ERS_C_REM Signal I/O O O I/O O O I O I O I/O O O O O O O I/O O O Voltage 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 24 V DC 0/24 V DC Ground Not used Not used 24 V DC power to CL-C CL-C: On/Off 2-3-62 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to drum unit M Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC11 Connected to developer unit M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC12 Connected to drum unit C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-M 0/3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-C 0/3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-M 3.

3 V DC power to DEVPWB-C 3.3 V DC power to VM-Y VM-Y: On/Off 2-3-63 .3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 24 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC power to DRPWB-Y 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC power to VM-C VM-C: On/Off 3.3V2 3V VIB_MOT 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.3 V DC power to DEVPWB-Y 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog Ground Not used Not used 24 V DC power to CL-Y CL-Y: On/Off Developer thermistor Y detection signal DEVPWB-Y control signal DEVPWB-Y detection signal Ground Not used Not used 0/3.3 V DC 3.3V2 3V VIB_MOT I/O I O I O I/O O O O O O O I/O O O I O I O I/O O O O O Voltage Analog 0/3.3 V DC Analog Description Developer thermistor C detection signal DEVPWB-C control signal DEVPWB-C detection signal Ground Not used Not used 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC13 Connected to developer unit C Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC14 Connected to drum unit Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC15 Connected to developer unit Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal TPD_TEMP_C DLP_VCONT_C_ 1 TPD_C_1 TN_CLK_C GND DLP_ADR1_C DLP_ADR0_C EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_ Y DRM _ADR1_ Y 24V ERS_ Y _REM TPD_TEMP_Y DLP_VCONT_Y_ 1 TPD_Y_1 TN_CLK_Y GND DLP_ADR1_Y DLP_ADR0_Y EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.

3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 2-3-64 .3 V DC Description 3.3 V DC power to OTEM1 Ground FRCSW: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power to LSUFM LSUFM: On/Off WTM: On/Off 24 V DC power to WTM Ground 3. front cover switch.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC DC0V/243V DC0V/243V 24 V DC 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC16 Connected to outer temperature sensor 1. LSU fan motor and waste toner motor Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC19 Connected to outer temperature sensor 2 1 2 3 4 3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC power to OTEM2 Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EEPROM data signal 0/3.3V1 I2C_SDA GND I2C_SCL Signal I/O O I O O O O O O O I O Voltage 3.3V1 I2C_SDA GND I2C_SCL FRONT_OPEN GND 24V LSU_FAN_OUT CL_MOT 24V GND 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-7 Feed PWB 1 11 YC20 2 1 YC19 1 7 8 YC3 1 64 YC18 1 20 1 YC27 9 4 YC26 1 YC4 1 YC17 YC4 1 18 50 1 YC14 1 1 2 15 YC16 YC10 12 1 6 1 1 1 YC23 YC4 YC12 YC13 10 8 3 YC22 2 1 YC25 4 1 8 YC9 1 7 Figure 2-3-8 Feed PWB 1 silk-screen diagram 1 YC8 1 1 YC11 3 1 YC5 3 1 YC15 2-3-65 .

3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to engine PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 GND REG_F_LED REG_SENS_F_P REG_SENS_F_S GND REG_R_LED REG_SENS_RP( BK) REG_SENS_RS( BK) CLN_SOL_REM CLN_SOL_RET GND BELT_JAM_SENS DU_SENS PRESS_RLS_SE NS PRESS_MOT_RE M2 PRESS_MOT_RE M1 DU_FAN DU_OPEN GND DU2_REM(CL_L OW) DU2_CLK DU2_PD INTER_LOCK TC_TONER_VCO NT TC_TONER_FUL L TC_TONER_LED TC_MOT_LOCK GND MPF_LIFT1 MPF_LIF2 MPF_CL Signal I/O I O O I O O I I O O I I O I I I I I I Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC DUM2 control signal Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground MPLM: On/Off MPLM: On/Off MPPFCL: On/Off 2-3-66 .3 V DC (pulse) DUM2 clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground IDS1 control signal IDS1 detection signal IDS1 detection signal Ground IDS2 control signal IDS2 detection signal IDS2 detection signal CLSOL: On/Off (ACT) CLSOL: On/Off (RET) Ground Not used DUS2: On/Off TRRS: On/Off TRRM: On/Off TRRM: On/Off Not used DUCSW: On/Off Ground DUM2/DUCL2: On/Off Description 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JEM clock signal 2-3-67 .3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description MPFS: On/Off MPLS2: On/Off MPLS1: On/Off MPPS: On/Off Ground MPPLSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPTSW: On/Off Ground FUM break signal FUM drive switch signal FUM ready signal FUM: On/Off Not used Ground ERFM: On/Off ERFM: On/Off Not used Fuser relay signal Not used Not used Not used Ground JFSSOL: On/Off JOCS: On/Off JEM drive switch signal JEM: On/Off Job separator set signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to engine PWB Pin 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Signal MPF_JAM MPF_LIFT_DOW N MPF_LIFT_UP MPF_PPR_SET GND MPF_LNG MPF_WID3 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID1 MPF_TABLE GND FSR_MOT_BRK FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_REM FSR_CL_REM GND EXIT_REAR_FAN _H EXIT_REAR_FAN _L PRESS_REM FSR_RELAY ZEROC SUB_HEAT_REM MAIN_HEAT_RE M GND JOB_SOL_REM JOB_OPEN_SEN S JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_MOT_CLK JOB_MOT_REM JOB_SET GND I/O O O O O O O O O O I I O I I I I I I O I I I O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC Voltage Ground Not used Not used Power off signal IHFM alarm signal IHFM: On/Off Not used Ground RM/RCL: On/Off Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC RM control signal Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used 2-3-68 .3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) RM clock signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC2 Connected to engine PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GND IH_PWB_FAN(U) _ALM DRM_HEAT_REM POWER_OFF IH_PWB_FAN_AL M IH_PWB_FAN_H IH_PWB_FAN_L GND REG_MOT_REM( CL) REG_MOT_CLK REG_MOT_PD GND DLP_MOT_CLR_ DIR DLP_MOT_CLR_ RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_ CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_ REM GND DRM_MOT_CLR_ DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_ RDY DRM_MOT_BK_C LR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_ REM GND DLP_MOT_BK_DI R DLP_MOT_BK_R DY DLP_MOT_BK_C LK DLP_MOT_BK_R EM Signal I/O I O I I I I 0/3.

3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC DUM1 control signal FUFM: On/Off Ground LPS: On/Off Not used Ground 2-3-69 .3 V DC (pulse) DUM1 clock signal 0/3.3 V DC TRCM: On/Off Ground Not used DUS1: On/Off EFM: On/Off Ground DUM1/DUCL1: On/Off 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC2 Connected to engine PWB Pin 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 GND DRM_MOT_BK_B RK DRM_MOT_BK_D IR DRM_MOT_BK_R DY DRM_MOT_BK_R EM GND TRANS_MOT_BR K TRANS_MOT_DI R TRANS_MOT_RD Y TRANS_MOT_CL K TRANS_MOT_RE M GND TCON_SET DU_ENTER_SEN S EXIT_FAN GND DU1_MOT_REM( CL_H) DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_PD EDGE_FAN_H GND LOOP_SENS M_TEMP GND Signal I/O I I O I I O I I I I I O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRCM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground TRCM break signal TRCM drive switch signal TRCM ready signal Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC Analog Analog Analog 3.3V REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_R_P REG_SENS_R_S 24V CLN_SOL_REM CLN_SOL_RET I/O O O O O I I I I O O O O I I O O I I O O O Voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to engine PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC4 Connected to power source PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC5 Connected to power source PWB YC10 Connected to ID sensor1/2 and cleaning solenoid 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal +24V1 +24V1 GND GND +12V GND +5V GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND GND DRM_HEAT_REM POWER_OFF GND M_TEMP 3.3 V DC Analog Analog Analog 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Description 24 V DC power to EPWB 24 V DC power to EPWB Ground Ground 12 V DC power to EPWB Ground 5 V DC power to EPWB Ground 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB 12 V DC power from PSPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground FH: On/Off Sleep mode signal: On/Off Ground Not used 3.3 V DC power to IDS1 IDS1 control signal Ground IDS1 detection signal IDS1 detection signal 3.3 V DC power to IDS2 IDS2 control signal Ground IDS2 detection signal IDS2 detection signal 24 V DC power to CLSOL CLSOL: On/Off (ACT) CLSOL: On/Off (RET) 2-3-70 .3V REG_F_LED GND REG_SENS_F_P REG_SENS_F_S 3.3 V DC 3.

3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC11 Connected to IH fan motor YC12 Connected to feed PWB 2 Pin 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC13 Connected to transfer motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC14 Connected to relay PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal +24V1 IH_PWB_FAN IH_PWB_FAN_AL M +24V2 +24V2 +5V GND GND GND TRANS_MOT_BR K TRANS_MOT_DI R TRANS_MOT_RD Y TRANS_MOT_CL K TRANS_MOT_RE M GND 24V2 GND 24V2 TANK_SET REG_BK_LED REG_BK_SENS1 _P REG_BK_SENS1 _S BELT_JAM_SENS DU_SENS PRESS_RLS_SE NS 5V PRESS_RLSMOT 21 PRESS_RLSMOT 2 I/O O O I O O O O O I O O O I I O O O Voltage 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC TRM: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power to TRM Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used DUS2: On/Off TRRS: On/Off 5 V DC power to FPWB2 TRRM: On/Off TRRM: On/Off 2-3-71 .3 V DC Description 24 V DC power to IHFM IHFM: On/Off IHFM alarm signal 24 V DC power to FPWB2 24 V DC power to FPWB2 5 V DC power to FPWB2 Ground Ground Ground TRM break signal TRM drive switch signal TRM ready signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) TRM clock signal 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Not used Not used Not used Not used MPLM: On/Off MPLM: On/Off 24 V dc power to FPWB2 MPPFCL: On/Off MPFS: On/Off MPLS2: On/Off MPLS1: On/Off MPPS: On/Off 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 24 V DC 24 V DC Description 24 V DC power to FPWB2 Not used DUCL2: On/Off DUCSW: On/Off DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal Not used 24 V DC power to PCUSW Not used 24 V DC power from PCUSW 1 2 +24V2 GND O - 24 V DC - 24 V DC power to HVPWB2 Ground 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 TC_TONER_LED TC_TONER_FUL L TC_TONER_MOT _B TC_TONER_MOT _A MPF_LIFT_MOT_ B MPF_LIFT_MOT_ A 24V2 MPF_CL_REM MPF_JAM_SENS MPF_LIFT_DOW N_SENS MPF_LIFT_UP_S ENS MPF_PPR_SET LED_3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC14 Connected to relay PWB Pin 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 YC15 Connected to paper conveying unit switch YC16 Connected to high voltage PWB 2 YC17 Connected to relay PWB 1 2 3 24V2 DU_FAN DU_CL_LOWER_ REM DU_OPEN_SW DU2_B/ DU2_A/ DU2_B DU2_A 5V_LED +24V1 N.3 V DC 0/3.C +24V2 Signal I/O O O I O O O O O I Voltage 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power to FPWB2 MPPLSW: On/Off 2-3-72 .3 V DC 0/3.3V3 MPF_LNG O O O O I I I I O I 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC - Job separator set signal Ground Ground JEM: On/Off 24 V DC power to JMPWB 5 V DC power to JMPWB JEM drive switch signal JOCS: On/Off JFSSOL: On/Off Not used 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FUM clock signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 JOB_SET GND GND JOB_MOT_REM 24V1 JOB_MOT_CLK 5V JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SEN S JOB_SOL_REM NC I O O O O O I O - 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) JEM clock signal 2-3-73 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC17 Connected to relay PWB Pin 15 16 17 18 19 20 YC18 Connected to fuser motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC19 Connected to eject rear fan motor YC20 Connected to job separator 1 2 Signal MPF_WID3 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID1 MPF_TABLE GND GND FSR_MOT_BRK FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_REM GND 24V2 EXIT_REAR_FAN +24V1 I/O I I I I O O I O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC Description MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPTSW: On/Off Ground Ground FUM break signal FUM drive switch signal FUM ready signal FUM: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power to FUM ERFM: On/Off 24 V DC power to ERFM 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC power to EPWB Ground Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Fuser relay signal 24 V DC power to IHPWB Not used 2-3-74 .3 V DC 24 V DC Description DUS1: On/Off EFM: On/Off 24 V DC power to FPWB2 DUCL1: On/Off Ground DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal FUFM: On/Off LPS: On/Off 3.3 V DC 0/3.3V2 3.3 V DC power to FPWB2 RM drive control signal RM drive control signal RM drive control signal RM drive control signal 3.3 V DC 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC23 Connected to relay PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC25 Connected to registration motor YC26 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC27 Connected to fuser IH PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal DU_ENTER_SEN S EXIT_FAN 24V2 DU_CL_UPPER_ REM GND DU1_B/ DU1_A/ DU1_B DU1_A EDGE_FAN_REM LOOP_SENS 3.3 V DC power to EPWB 3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC 0/3.3V3 GND GND MAIN_HEAT_RE M SUB_HEAT_REM +24V2 ZEROC GND GND FSR_RELAY +24V1 PRESS_REM I/O I O O O O O O O O I O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3V REG_MOT_B/ REG_MOT_A/ REG_MOT_B REG_MOT_A 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-8 Feed PWB 2 50 1 1 6 YC10 YC1 YC11 1 7 2 1 YC2 YC4 28 15 1 YC7 1 24 1 15 YC8 YC3 13 12 1 1 2 14 3 1 YC5 3 Figure 2-3-9 Feed PWB 2 silk-screen diagram 5 YC6 2-3-75 YC13 YC12 1 1 4 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal 2-3-76 .3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground PFM: On/Off PFM ready signal PFM drive switch signal PFCL1: On/Off PFCL2: On/Off ASCL2: On/Off LM2: On/Off Ground LM1: On/Off PWSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off PWSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off Ground PGS2(L): On/Off PGS2(U): On/Off PGS1(L): On/Off PGS1(U): On/Off LM1 lock signal LM2 lock signal Current signal PCCL: On/Off RLCSW: On/Off PFPCS1: On/Off FS1: On/Off LS1: On/Off Ground PS1: On/Off Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to engine PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 GND FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_CL1_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 LIFT_MOT2_REM GND LIFT_MOT1_REM 1 CAS2_WID CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_LNG2 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_WID CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_LNG2 CAS1_LNG1 GND CAS2_QUANT2 CAS2_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_QUANT1 LIFT_MOT1_LOC K LIFT_MOT2_LOC K CURRENT_SIG V-FEED_CL COVER_OPEN FEED2_SENS CAS1_P0 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND CAS1_EMPTY Signal I/O I I O I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I O O O O O 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal 2-3-77 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3. lift motor 1/2.3 V DC (pulse) MM clock signal 0/3. paper width switch 1/2.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description PUSOL1: On/Off (RET) PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT) FS2: On/Off LS2: On/Off PS2: On/Off PUSOL2: On/Off (RET) PUSOL2: On/Off (ACT) Ground RS: On/Off PCS: On/Off RDS: On/Off MM control signal MM/MCL: On/Off 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to engine PWB Pin 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 YC2 Connected to paper feed motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC3 Connected to paper length switch 1/2.3 V DC MM control signal ASCL1: On/Off Not used PFM drive switch signal PFM ready signal PFM: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power to PFM PLSW1: On/Off PLSW1: On/Off Ground PLSW1: On/Off PWSW1: On/Off Ground PLSW2: On/Off PLSW2: On/Off Ground PLSW2: On/Off PWSW2: On/Off Ground 0/3. paper gauge sensor 1(U)/ (L) and paper gauge sensor 2(U)/(L) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal PICK_SOL1_RET PICK_SOL1_REM CAS2_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_EMPTY PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_REM GND REG_SENS FEED1_SENS BEND_SENS MID_MOT_PH MID_MOT_REM( ROL_CL) MID_MOT_CLK MID_MOT_PD ASIST_CL1 FEED_MOT_GAI N FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_REM GND 24V2 CAS1_LNG1 CAS1_LNG2 GND CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_WID GND CAS2_LNG1 CAS2_LNG2 GND CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_WID GND I/O I I O O O I I O O O I I I I I O I O O O I I I I I I I I Voltage 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.

paper width switch 1/2.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC LM1: On/Off LM1: On/Off LM2: On/Off LM2: On/Off 5 V DC power to PGS1(U) Ground PGS1(U): On/Off 5 V DC power to PGS1(L) Ground PGS1(L): On/Off 5 V DC power to PGS2(U) Ground PGS2(U): On/Off 5 V DC power to PGS2(L) Ground PGS2(L): On/Off PFCL1: On/Off PFCL124 V DC power to PFCL1 PFCL2: On/Off 24 V DC power to PFCL2 Not used 24 V DC power to PCCL PCCL: On/Off 5 V DC power to PCS Ground PCS: On/Off PCCSW: On/Off Ground Description 2-3-78 . paper gauge sensor 1(U)/ (L) and paper gauge sensor 2(U)/(L) Pin 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 YC4 Connected to paper feed clutch 1/2 YC5 Connected to paper conveying clutch YC6 Connected to paper conveying sensor and paper conveying cover switch 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 Signal LIFT_MOT1_RET LIFT_MOT1_DR LIFT_MOT2_RET LIFT_MOT2_DR LED_5V GND CAS1_QUANT1 LED_5V GND CAS1_QUANT2 LED_5V GND CAS2_QUANT1 LED_5V GND CAS2_QUANT2 FEED_CL1_REM 24V2 FEED_CL2_REM 24V2 NC 24V2 V-FEED_CL_REM LED_5V GND FEED2_SENS COVER_OPEN GND I/O O O O O O I O I O I O I O O O O O O O I I Voltage 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to paper length switch 1/2.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3. lift motor 1/2.

middle sensor and registration sensor Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 YC8 Connected to primary paper feed unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Signal MID_B/ MID_A/ MID_B MID_A BEND_SENS GND 5V GND FEED1_SENS 5V GND REG_SENS 5V MID_CL_REM 24V2 24V2 PICK_SOL1_REM PICK_SOL1_RET LED_5V GND CAS1_EMPTY_S ENS LED_5V GND CAS1_LIFT_UP_ SENS 5V CAS1_P0_SENS GND 24V2 PICK_SOL2_REM PICK_SOL2_RET LED_5V GND CAS2_EMPTY_S ENS LED_5V I/O O O O O I O I O I O O O O O O O I O I O I O O O O I O Voltage 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC7 Connected to middle motor.3 V DC 5 V DC Description MM drive control signal MM drive control signal MM drive control signal MM drive control signal RDS: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power to RDS Ground MS: On/Off 5 V DC power to MS Ground RS: On/Off 5 V DC power to RS MCL: On/Off 24 V DC power to MCL 24 V DC power to PUSOL1 PUSOL1: On/Off (ACT) PUSOL1: On/Off (RET) 5 V DC power to PS1 Ground PS1: On/Off 5 V DC power to LS1 Ground LS1: On/Off 5 V DC power to FS1 FS1: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power to PUSOL2 PUSOL2: On/Off (ACT) PUSOL2: On/Off (RET) 5 V DC power to PS2 Ground PS2: On/Off 5 V DC power to LS2 2-3-79 .3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3. regist deflection sensor.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC Voltage Ground LS2: On/Off 5 V DC power to FS2 FS2: On/Off Ground ASCL1: On/Off 24 V DC power to ASCL1 Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 GND GND GND +5V +24V2 +24V2 ASIST_CL2 24V2 O O O O O 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power to FPWB1 24 V DC power to FPWB1 24 V DC power to FPWB1 ASCL2: On/Off 24 V DC power to ASCL2 YC12 Connected to assist clutch 2 YC13 Connected to current PWB 1 2 1 2 3 CURRENT_SIG GND 5V1 I I 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC8 Connected to primary paper feed unit Pin 20 21 22 23 24 YC10 Connected to assist clutch 1 YC11 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 GND CAS2_LIFT_UP_ SENS 5V CAS2_P0_SENS GND ASIST_CL1 24V2 Signal I/O I O I O O 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Current signal Ground 5 V DC power from CRPWB 2-3-80 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-9 Relay PWB 1 YC6 7 10 9 YC5 1 2 YC15 Figure 2-3-10 Relay PWB silk-screen diagram YC2 1 1 1 1 YC12 YC3 16 20 1 YC4 4 8 2 1 YC7 1 YC8 1 6 3 YC1 YC14 1 11 YC9 YC10 1 1 18 12 YC13 YC16 1 1 8 YC11 9 1 2-3-81 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 YC2 Connected to MP tray unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal 5V_LED DU2_A DU2_B DU2_A/ DU2_B/ DU_OPEN_SW DU_CL_LOWER_ REM DU_FAN 24V2 PRESS_RLS_RE M2 PRESS_RLS_RE M1 5V PRESS_RLS_SE NS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS REG_BK_SENS1 _S REG_BK_SENS1 _P REG_BK_LED GND MPF_LNG 5V MPF_WID3 MPF_WID2 GND MPF_WID1 GND MPF_TABLE I/O I I I I O I I I I I O O I O I I I I 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Not used DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUCSW: On/Off DUCL2: On/Off Not used 24 V DC power from FPWB1 TRRM: On/Off TRRM: On/Off 5 V DC power from FPWB1 TRRS: On/Off DUS2: On/Off Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground MPPLSW: On/Off 5 V DC power to MPPLSW MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off Ground MPPWSW: On/Off Ground MPTSW: On/Off Description 2-3-82 .3 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power to MPPLSW Ground MPPS: On/Off Ground MPLS1: On/Off 5 V DC power to MPLS1 Ground MPLS2: On/Off 5 V DC power to MPLS1 Ground MPFS: On/Off 5 V DC power to MPFS MPPFCL: On/Off 24 V DC power to MPPFCL MPLM: On/Off MPLM: On/Off 24 V DC power to DUCL2 DUCL2: On/Off DUCSW: On/Off Ground DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal DUM2 drive control signal Ground DUS2: On/Off 5 V DC power to DUS2 2-3-83 . duplex cover switch and duplex motor 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC9 Connected to duplex sensor 2 1 2 3 Signal LED_3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Description 3.3 V DC 0/3.3V3 GND MPF_PPR_SET GND MPF_LIFT_UP_S ENS 5V GND MPF_LIFT_DOW N_SENS 5V GND MPF_JAM_SENS 5V MPF_CL_REM 24V2 MPF_LIFT_DR_A MPF_LIFT_DR_B 24V2 DU_CL2_REM DU_OPEN GND DU2_B/ DU2_A/ DU2_B DU2_A GND DU_SENS 5V I/O O I I O I O I O O O O O O O I O O O O I O Voltage 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to MP tray unit Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC7 Connected to duplex clutch 2.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3. eject fan motor and duplex clutch 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YC12 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal LOOP_SENS GND 5V 3.3 V DC 0/3.3V REG_BK_LED GND REG_BK_SENS1 _P REG_BK_SENS1 _S GND BELT_JAM_SENS 5V GND DU_ENTER_SEN S 5V EXIT_FAN_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN_REM 24V2 24V2 DU_CL_UPPER_ REM GND GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG LED_3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power from FPWB1 MPPS: On/Off MPLS1: On/Off MPLS2: On/Off MPFS: On/Off Description 2-3-84 .3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC LPS: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power to LPS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground DUS1: On/Off 5 V DC power to DUS1 EFM1: On/Off 24 V DC power to EFM1 EFM2: On/Off 24 V DC power to EFM2 24 V DC power to DUCL1 DUCL1: On/Off Ground Ground MPTSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPWSW: On/Off MPPLSW: On/Off 3.3V3 MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP_S ENS MPF_LIFT_DOW N_SENS MPF_JAM_SENS I/O I O I O O O O O O O O O O O O I O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to loop sensor Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC11 Connected to duplex sensor 1.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC12 Connected to feed PWB 1 Pin 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 YC13 Connected to feed PWB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC14 Connected to transfer release sensor and transfer release motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal MPF_CL_REM 24V2 MPF_LIFT_MOT_ A MPF_LIFT_MOT_ B TC_TONER_MOT _A TC_TONER_MOT _B TC_TONER_FUL L TC_TONER_LED 3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Description MPPFCL: On/Off 24 V DC power from FPWB1 MPLM: On/Off MPLM: On/Off Not used Not used Not used Not used 3.3V LOOP_SENS EDGE_FAN_REM DU1_A DU1_B DU1_A/ DU1_B/ GND DU_CL_UPPER_ REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SEN S GND PRESS_RLS_SE NS 5V PRESS_RLS_RE M1 PRESS_RLS_RE M2 NC I/O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O I O O O Voltage 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 3.3 V DC power from FPWB1 LPS: On/Off FUFM: On/Off DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal Ground DUCL1: On/Off 24 V DC power from FPWB1 EFM: On/Off DUS1: On/Off Ground TRRS: On/Off 5 V DC power to TRRS TRRM: On/Off TRRM: On/Off Not used 2-3-85 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC16 Connected to duplex motor 1 and fuser fan motor 1/2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal DU1_B/ DU1_A/ DU1_B DU1_A EDGE_FAN_REM 24V2 EDGE_FAN_REM 24V2 I/O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC (pulse) 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC Description DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal DUM1 drive control signal FUFM1: On/Off 24 V DC power to FUFM1 FUFM2: On/Off 24 V DC power to FUFM2 2-3-86 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-10 Motor control PWB 1 24 YC5 22 12 10 1 1 1 Figure 2-3-11 Motor control PWB silk-screen diagram 1 14 YC3 11 1 14 YC7 YC1 1 YC6 YC4 24 YC2 6 2-3-87 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC2 Connected to power source PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC3 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 GND GND GND +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 DRM_INDEX_C DRM_INDEX_M DRM_INDEX_BK BLT_INDEX BLT_SPEED EMERGENCY ENG_RDY ENG_SDO ENG_SEL ENG_SDI ENG_CLK BLT_FG MOT_ON MOT_DATA_SET BLT_REM BLT_VM BLT_BRAKE +5V +5V GND GND DRM_INDEX_Y Signal I/O I I I I I I I I O O I I I I I I I I 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground Ground Ground 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB DRM-C control signal DRM-M control signal DRM-K control signal Not used TBLS: On/Off MCPWB control signal MCPWB ready signal Description 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Not used MCPWB control signal MCPWB control signal Not used Not used Not used 5 V DC power to MCPWB 5 V DC power to MCPWB Ground Ground DRM-Y control signal 2-3-88 .3 V DC MCPWB select signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MCPWB clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC4 Connected to drum motor C/Y Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 YC5 Connected to drum motor K/M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC DRM_C_BRAKE DRM_Y_BRAKE DRM_C_GAIN DRM_Y_GAIN DRM_C_CW/ CCW DRM_Y_CW/ CCW DRM_C_LD DRM_Y_LD DRM_C_CLK DRM_Y_CLK DRM_C_S/S DRM_Y_S/S PGND PGND +24V1 +24V1 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC DRM_BK_BRAKE DRM_M_BRAKE DRM_BK_GAIN Signal I/O O O O O O O O O O O 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used DRM-C: On/Off DRM-Y: On/Off DRM-C control signal DRM-Y control signal Description 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC DRM-C control signal DRM-Y control signal Ground Ground 24 V DC power to DRM-C 24 V DC power to DRM-Y Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 2-3-89 .3 V DC (pulse) DRM-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-C clock signal 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC5 Connected to drum motor K/M Pin 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 YC7 Connected to developer motor MCY/K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Signal DRM_M_GAIN DRM_BK_CW/ CCW DRM_M_CW/ CCW DRM_BK_LD DRM_M_LD DRM_BK_CLK DRM_M_CLK DRM_BK_S/S DRM_M_S/S PGND PGND +24V1 +24V1 DLP_M_GAIN DLP_M_CW/CCW DLP_M_LD DLP_M_CLK DLP_M_S/S PGND +24V1 DLP_BK_GAIN DLP_BK_CW/ CCW DLP_BK_LD DLP_BK_CLK DLP_BK_S/S PGND +24V1 I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-MCY clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DEVM-K clock signal 2-3-90 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC DRM-K control signal DRM-M control signal Ground Ground 24 V DC power to DRM-K 24 V DC power to DRM-M Not used DEVM-MCY: On/Off DEVM-MCY control signal DEVM-MCY control signal Ground 24 V DC power to DEVM-MCY Not used DEVM-K: On/Off DEVM-K control signal DEVM-K control signal Ground 24 V DC power to DRM-K 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Not used DRM-K: On/Off DRM-M: On/Off DRM-K control signal DRM-M control signal Description 0/3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-3-11 LSU relay PWB 10 1 5 1 10 1 5 1 10 1 5 1 10 YC2 60 YC1 8 1 Figure 2-3-12 LSU relay PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-91 YC3 YC4 YC5 YC6 YC7 YC8 YC9 YC10 1 1 5 1 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC1 Connected to power source PWB and engine PWB Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC2 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Signal +24V1 +24V1 GND GND +5V1 +5V1 GND GND +3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC Description 24 V DC power from PSPWB 24 V DC power from PSPWB Ground Ground 5 V DC power from EPWB 5 V DC power from EPWB Ground Ground 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power from EPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Control signal Ground APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal Ground APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal 2-3-92 .3 V DC 0/3.3V2 GND SGND CLK SGND SDI SGND SDO SGND MSET_N SGND LDD_CS 1 Y EEPROM CS Y LDD_CS 1 C EEPROM CS C LDD_CS 1 M EEPROM CS M LDD_CS 2 Bk EEPROM CS 2 Bk LDD_CS 1 Bk EEPROM CS 1 Bk SGND INT_ST 1 Y PALA_SIG P0 Y PALA_SIG P1 Y PALA_SIG P2 Y GAIN FIX Y SGND I/O O O O O O I O I I I I/O I I/O I I/O I I/O I I/O I I I I I Voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC2 Connected to engine PWB Pin 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Signal DATA_2N_Y(LVD S) DATA_2P_Y(LVD S) SGND INT_ST 1 C PALA_SIG P0 C PALA_SIG P1 C PALA_SIG P2 C GAIN FIX C SGND DATA_2N_C(LVD S) DATA_2P_C(LVD S) SGND INT_ST 1 M PALA_SIG P0 M PALA_SIG P1 M PALA_SIG P2 M GAIN FIX M SGND DATA_2N_M(LVD S) DATA_2P_M(LVD S) SGND DATA_3NBk(LVD S) DATA_3PBk(LVD S) SGND DATA_4NBk(LVD S) DATA_4PBk(LVD S) SGND PALA_SIG P3_2Bk I/O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 0/3.3 V DC Ground APCPWB-K control signal 2-3-93 .3 V DC Ground APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC Ground Ground LSU thermistor Y detection signal APCPWB-Y alarm signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal Ground Ground 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal 2-3-94 .3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y 0/3.3 V DC Ground PM-Y: On/Off PM-Y lock signal Ground LSU thermistor C detection signal APCPWB-C alarm signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal Ground Ground 0/3.3 V DC Description APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal Ground 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC2 Connected to engine PWB Pin 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 YC3 Connected to engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Signal INT_ST 2 Bk INT_ST 1 Bk PALA_SIG P0 Bk PALA_SIG P1 Bk PALA_SIG P2 Bk GAIN FIX Bk SGND DATA_2NBk(LVD S) DATA_2PBk(LVD S) SGND SGND BD Y LSU_TH Y CUALM Y PALA_SIG P3 Y PALA_SIG P4 Y SGND SDCLK Y SGND DATA_1N_Y(LVD S) DATA_1P_Y(LVD S) SGND REM Y LOCK Y CLK Y SGND BD C LSU_TH C CUALM C PALA_SIG P3 C PALA_SIG P4 C SGND SDCLK C SGND I/O I I I I I I I I O O O I I I I I I O I O O O I I I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground PM-M: On/Off PM-M lock signal Ground LSU thermistor K detection signal APCPWB-K alarm signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal Ground Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 2-3-95 .3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to engine PWB Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Signal DATA_1N_C(LVD S) DATA_1P_C(LVD S) SGND REM C LOCK C CLK C SGND BD M LSU_TH M CUALM M PALA_SIG P3 M PALA_SIG P4 M SGND SDCLK M SGND DATA_1N_M(LVD S) DATA_1P_M(LVD S) SGND REM M LOCK M CLK M SGND BD Bk LSU_TH Bk CUALM Bk PALA_SIG P3 Bk PALA_SIG P4 Bk SGND SDCLK Bk SGND DATA_1NBk(LVD S) DATA_1PBk(LVD S) I/O I I I O I O O O I I I I I I O I O O O I I I I I Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC Ground PM-C: On/Off PM-C lock signal Ground LSU thermistor M detection signal APCPWB-M alarm signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal Ground Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K 0/3.

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal K 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Voltage Ground PM-K: On/Off PM-K lock signal 24 V DC power to PM-K Ground PM-K: On/Off PM-K lock signal Ground LSU thermistor K detection signal Not used Not used 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K 5 V DC power to APCPWB-K APCPWB-K control signal Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 2-3-96 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-K clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K alarm signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal APCPWB-K control signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC3 Connected to engine PWB Pin 57 58 59 60 YC4 Connected to polygon motor K 1 2 3 4 5 YC5 Connected to APC PWB K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Signal SGND REM Bk LOCK Bk CLK Bk 24V PGND REM Bk LOCK Bk CLK Bk SGND BD Bk LSU_TH Bk PALA_SIG P3_2Bk LDD_CS 2 Bk 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 Bk SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS 1 Bk MSET_N CUALM Bk INT_ST 2 Bk INT_ST 1 Bk PALA_SIG P0 Bk PALA_SIG P1 Bk PALA_SIG P2 Bk PALA_SIG P3 Bk PALA_SIG P4 Bk SDCLK Bk GAIN FIX Bk DATA_1NBk(LVD S) DATA_1PBk(LVD S) I/O I O I O O I O I I O O O O I O O I/O O I O O O O O O O O O O O 0/24 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC Ground 24 V DC power to PM-M Ground PM-M: On/Off PM-M lock signal Ground LSU thermistor M detection signal Not used Not used 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M 5 V DC power to APCPWB-M APCPWB-M control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal M 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal K (P) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC5 Connected to APC PWB K Pin 27 28 29 30 YC7 Connected to polygon motor M 1 2 3 4 5 YC8 Connected to APC PWB M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Signal SGND DATA_2NBk(LVD S) DATA_2PBk(LVD S) SGND 24V PGND REM M LOCK M CLK M SGND BD M LSU_TH M 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 M SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS M MSET_N CUALM M INT_ST 1 M PALA_SIG P0 M PALA_SIG P1 M PALA_SIG P2 M PALA_SIG P3 M PALA_SIG P4 M SDCLK M GAIN FIX M DATA_1N_M(LVD S) I/O O O O O I O I I O O O O I O O I/O O I O O O O O O O O O O Voltage Ground Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) 2-3-97 .3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-M clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M alarm signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal APCPWB-M control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal C 0/3.3 V DC Ground 24 V DC power to PM-C Ground PM-C: On/Off PM-C lock signal Ground LSU thermistor C detection signal Not used Not used 5 V DC power to APCPWB-C 5 V DC power to APCPWB-C 5 V DC power to APCPWB-C APCPWB-C control signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C alarm signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal APCPWB-C control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (P) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC8 Connected to APC PWB M Pin 26 27 28 29 30 YC9 Connected to polygon motor C 1 2 3 4 5 YC10 Connected to APC PWB C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Signal DATA_1P_M(LVD S) SGND DATA_2N_M(LVD S) DATA_2P_M(LVD S) SGND 24V PGND REM C LOCK C CLK C SGND BD C LSU_TH C 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 C SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS C MSET_N CUALM C INT_ST 1 C PALA_SIG P0 C PALA_SIG P1 C PALA_SIG P2 C PALA_SIG P3 C PALA_SIG P4 C SDCLK C GAIN FIX C I/O O O O O O I O I I O O O O I O O I/O O I O O O O O O O O O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-C clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal 2-3-98 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-C EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal M (N) 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Ground 24 V DC power to PM-Y Ground PM-Y: On/Off PM-Y lock signal Ground LSU thermistor Y detection signal Not used Not used 5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y 5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y 5 V DC power to APCPWB-Y APCPWB-Y control signal 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC10 Connected to APC PWB C Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 YC11 Connected to polygon motor Y 1 2 3 4 5 YC12 Connected to APC PWB Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Signal DATA_1N_C(LVD S) DATA_1P_C(LVD S) SGND DATA_2N_C(LVD S) DATA_2P_C(LVD S) SGND 24V PGND REM Y LOCK Y CLK Y SGND BD Y LSU_TH Y 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 Y SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS Y MSET_N CUALM Y INT_ST 1 Y PALA_SIG P0 Y PALA_SIG P1 Y PALA_SIG P2 Y PALA_SIG P3 Y PALA_SIG P4 Y SDCLK Y I/O O O O O O O I O I I O O O O I O O I/O O I O O O O O O O O Voltage Description 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) Ground 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal Y 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal 2-3-99 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y EEPROM data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) APCPWB-Y clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (P) 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal C (N) 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y alarm signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal APCPWB-Y control signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) Ground 0/3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Connector YC12 Connected to APC PWB Y Pin 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Signal GAIN FIX Y DATA_1N_Y(LVD S) DATA_1P_Y(LVD S) SGND DATA_2N_Y(LVD S) DATA_2P_Y(LVD S) SGND I/O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) 0/3.3 V DC Description APCPWB-Y control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (N) 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal Y (P) Ground 2-3-100 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 2-4-1 Appendixes 2-4 Appendixes (1) Maintenance kits 30 ppm model/35 ppm model Maintenance part name Name used in service MK-8305A/Maintenance kit (600.000 pages) Drum unit C Drum unit M Drum unit Y Developing unit C Developing unit M Developing unit Y MK-8305C/Maintenance kit (300. 072LK0UN 072LK0U1 072LK0U2 - 2-4-1 . 1702LK0UN0 1702LK0UN1 1702LK0UN2 Alternative part No.000 pages) Fuser unit Name used in parts list MK-8305A/MAINTENANCE KIT DK-8505 (K) DV-8305K TR-8505 PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY TRANSFER SP MK-8305B/MAINTENANCE KIT DK-8505 (C) DK-8505 (M) DK-8505 (Y) DV-8305C DV-8305M DV-8305Y MK-8305C/MAINTENANCE KIT FK-UNIT Parts No.000 pages) Drum unit K Developing unit K Transfer belt unit Transfer roller MK-8305B/Maintenance kit (600.

072LC0UN 072LC0U1 072LC0U2 - 2-4-2 .000 pages) Drum unit K Developing unit K Transfer belt unit Transfer roller MK-8505B/Maintenance kit (600.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC 45 ppm model/55 ppm model Maintenance part name Name used in service MK-8505A/Maintenance kit (600. 1702LC0UN0 1702LC0UN1 1702LC0UN2 Alternative part No.000 pages) Fuser unit Name used in parts list MK-8505A/MAINTENANCE KIT DK-8505 (K) DV-8505K TR-8505 PARTS ROLLER SECONDLY TRANSFER SP MK-8505B/MAINTENANCE KIT DK-8505 (C) DK-8505 (M) DK-8505 (Y) DV-8505C DV-8505M DV-8505Y MK-8505C/MAINTENANCE KIT FK-UNIT Parts No.000 pages) Drum unit C Drum unit M Drum unit Y Developing unit C Developing unit M Developing unit Y MK-8505C/Maintenance kit (300.

2 mm/3 11/16" Press roller (30 ppm/35 ppm) 109.5 mm/5" Heat roller 936 mm/36 7/8" Transfer belt 2-4-3 .5 mm/1 1/2" 39 mm/1 9/16" Carger roller Magnet roller Sleeve roller Right registration roller Left registration roller Transfer roller 57 mm/2 1/4" 63 mm/2 1/2" 75 mm/2 15/16" 94 mm/3 11/16" Drum 94.9 mm/4 5/16" Press roller (45 ppm/55 ppm) 127.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (2) Repetitive defects gauge First occurrence of defect 37.

To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values. so you will know the parameter values before the changes are made.) The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence: !R! FRPO parameter. value. FRPO parameters Item Top margin Left margin Page length Page width Default pattern resolution Page orientation Default font No. EXIT. Note: Before changing any FRPO parameter. There parameters may be changed permanently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands. 6.(!R! FRPO INIT. This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples. * FRPO A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B8 C1 C2 C3 C5 PCL font switch Total host buffer size Form feed time-out value Top margin Left margin C8 H8 H9 L1 L2 L3 L4 Setting values Integer value in inches Fraction value in 1/100 inches Integer value in inches Fraction value in 1/100 inches Integer value in inches Fraction value in 1/100 inches Integer value in inches Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0: 300 dpi 1: 600 dpi 0: Portrait 1: Landscape Middle two digits of power-up font Last two digits of power-up font First two digits of power-up font 0: HP compatibility mode 32: Conventional compatibility mode 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) Top margin (integer value) Top margin (decimal value) Left margin (integer value) Left margin (decimal value) Factory setting 0 0 0 0 17 30 17 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 6 0 50 0 50 2-4-4 . EXIT. Example: Changing emulation mode to PCL6 !R! FRPO P1. print out a service status page. send the FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command. Using FRPO commands for reprogramming firmware The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as optional values on the service status page.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (3) Firmware environment commands The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. EXIT.

resolves to KPDL ASCII code of 33 to 126 1 (inner tray) Duplex mode Sleep timer time-out time Ecoprint level Default emulation mode Carriage-return action N5 N6 P1 P2 60 0 120V: 9 220-240V: 6 1 Linefeed action P3 1 Automatic emulation switching Alternative emulation (For KPDL3) Automatic emulation switching trigger P4 P5 P7 120V: 1 220-240V: 0 6 120V: 11 220-240V: 10 Command recognition character Default stacker P9 R0 82 (R) 1 2-4-5 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Factory setting 10 61 8 11 0 Item Page length Page width FRPO L5 L6 L7 L8 N4 Setting values Page length (integer value) Page length (decimal value) Page width (integer value) Page width (decimal value) 0: Off 1: Long edge binding 2: Short edge binding Value in units of 1 minute (1 to 240) 0: Off 2: On 6: PCL 6 9: KPDL 0: Ignores 1: Carriage-return 2: Carriage-return + linefeed 0: Ignores 1: Linefeed 2: Linefeed + carriage-return 0: AES disabled 1: AES enabled Same as the P1 values except that 9 is ignored. if AES fails. 0: Page eject commands 1: None 2: Page eject and prescribe EXIT commands 3: Prescribe EXIT commands 4: Formfeed (^L) commands 6: Pescribe EXIT and formfeed commands 10: Page eject commands.

8 × 18.2 × 25.7 cm) 10: A3 (29.7 × 17.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Factory setting 0 Item Default paper size FRPO R2 Setting values 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.7 inches) 30: C4 (22.9 cm) 5: Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2 inches) 6: US Letter (8-1/2 × 11 inches) 7: US Legal (8-1/2 × 14 inches) 8: A4 (21.) 1: Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2 inches) 2: Business (4-1/8 × 9-1/2 inches) 3: International DL (11 × 22 cm) 4: International C5 (16.8 cm) 32: Ofuku-hagaki (14.7 ´ 42 cm) 11: B4 (25.5 inches 50: Statement 51: Folio 52: Youkei 2 53: Youkei 4 0: MP tray 1: Cassette 1 2: Cassette 2 3: Cassette 3 4: Cassette 4 5: Cassette 5 6: Cassette 6 7: Cassette 7 0: Off 1: On 0: 10 KB 1: 100 KB 2: 1024 KB 0: Off 1: On Lines per inch (integer value) Lines per inch (decimal value) Default cassette R4 1 A4/letter equation Host buffer size S4 S5 1 1 Wide A4 Line spacing * T6 U0 U1 0 6 0 2-4-6 .8 cm) 15: JIS B6 (12.4 cm) 31: Hagaki (10 × 14.9 ´ 32.0 × 29.2 × 22.8 × 20 cm) 33: Officio II 39: 8K 40: 16K 42: 8.6 × 25 cm) 19: Custom (11.7 cm) 9: JIS B5 (18.4 cm) 12: US Ledger (11 ´ 17 inches) 13: ISO A5 14: A6 (10.5 × 13.7 ´ 36.5 × 14.2 cm) 16: Commercial #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8 inches) 17: Commercial #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2 inches) 18: ISO B5 (17.

50. enclosed with single or double quotation marks 0: Courier = darkness Letter Gothic = darkness 1: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = darkness 4: Courier = darkness Letter Gothic = regular 5: Courier = regular Letter Gothic = regular 0: Black & white 1: Color 0: Low (normal) 1: High Code set at power up in daisywheel emulation U7 53 Font pitch for fixedpitch scalable font * Font height for the default scalable font * U8 U9 V0 V1 V2 V3 V9 10 0 0 12 0 Courier 5 Default scalable font * Default weight (courier and letter Gothic) Color mode Gloss mode W1 W6 1 0 2-4-7 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Factory setting 10 0 41 Item Character spacing * Country code FRPO U2 U3 U6 Setting values Characters per inch (integer value) Characters per inch (decimal value) 0: US-ASCII 1: France 2: Germany 3: UK 4: Denmark 5: Sweden 6: Italy 7: Spain 8: Japan 9: US Legal 10: IBM PC-850 (Multilingual) 11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese) 12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French) 13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian) 14: Norway 15: Denmark 2 16: Spain 2 17: Latin America 50 . 75 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters.99: HP PCL symbol set coding Default font pitch (integer value) Default font pitch (decimal value) Integer value in 100 points: 0 to 9 Integer value in points: 0 to 99 decimal value in 1/100 points: 0.99: HP PCL symbol set coding 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 1: IBM 6: IBM PC-8 7 . 25.

0: Off 1: On Value in units of 5 seconds (1 to 99) 0: Not detect 127: Detect Paper type for cassettes 1 and 2 X1 X2 1 Paper type for optional cassettes 3 to 7 X3 X4 X5 X6 X10 1 PCL paper source X9 0 Automatic continue for ‘Press GO’ Automatic continue timer Error message for device error Y0 Y1 Y3 0 6 (30 s) 127 2-4-8 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Factory setting 1 Item Paper type for the MP tray FRPO X0 Setting values 1: Plain 2: Transparency 3: Preprinted 4: Label 5: Bond 6: Recycle 7: Vellum 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 12: Envelope 13: Cardstock 14: Coated 16: Thick 17: High quality 21 to 28: Custom1 to 8 1: Plain 3: Preprinted 5: Bond 6: Recycled 7: Vellum 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 16: Thick 17: High quality 21 to 28: Custom1 to 8 1: Plain 3: Preprinted 5: Bond 6: Recycled 9: Letterhead 10: Color 11: Prepunched 17: High quality 21 to 28: Custom1 to 8 0: Performs paper selection depending on media type. 1: Performs paper selection depending on paper sources.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Factory setting 0 Item Duplex operation for specified paper type (Prepunched. Loads Letter. 1: Through the image. 9: Through the image. Loads paper from the current paper cassette. A4 size paper depending on the image size. Preprintedand Letterhead) Default operation for PDF direct printing FRPO Y4 0: Off 1: On Setting values Y5 0: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size. A4 size paper depending on the image size. A4 size paper depending on the image size. Loads paper which is the same size as the image. Loads paper from the current paper cassette. 2: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size. 3: Prints the error report and displays the error message. 8: Through the image. 0: Does not print the error report and display the error message. A4 size paper depending on the image size. 1: Prints the error report. Loads Letter. 0 e-MPS error Y6 3 *: Ignored in some emulation modes. Loads Letter. 2: Displays the error message. 10: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the current paper size. 3: Through the image. Loads Letter. 2-4-9 .

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC This page is intentionally left blank. 2-4-10 .

1-3-39 Remarks 1 2 Adjusting the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (printing adjustment) Data processing U039 Vertical U039 test pattern P.1-3-146 10 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction (scanning adjustment) Data processing U065 U070 Y Scan Zoom Y Scan Zoom Test chart P.1-3-33 5 Adjusting the leading edge registration of the MP tray (printing adjustment) Registration motor turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P. 6 Adjusting the leading edge registration of the cassette (printing adjustment) Registration motor turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034 LSU Out Top U034 test pattern P.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (4) Chart of image adjustment procedures Adjusting order Item Adjusting the magnification in the main scanning direction (printing adjustment) Image Description Data processing Maintenance mode Item No. 4 Adjusting the center line of the cassettes (printing adjustment) Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left U034 test pattern P.1-3-39 3 Adjusting the center line of the MP tray (printing adjustment) Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU Out Left U034 test pattern P.1-3-33 To make an adjustment for duplex copying.1-3-56 U065: For copying an original placed on the platen. U070: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-33 To make an adjustment for duplex copying.1-3-146 9 Adjusting the left and right margins (printing adjustment) LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A Margin C Margin U402 test pattern P. 2-4-11 . select Duplex. U039 Horizon Mode Original U039 test pattern Page P. select Duplex.1-3-33 7 Adjusting the leading edge margin (printing adjustment) LSU illumination start timing U402 Lead U402 test pattern P.1-3-146 8 Adjusting the trailing edge margin (printing adjustment) LSU illumination end timing U402 Trail U402 test pattern P.1-3-51 P.

1-3-147 P.1-3-147 P. the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the scanner magnification (U065) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the DP) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243). U072: For copying originals from the DP.8 % Using DP: ± 1.0 % Using DP: ± 1.1-3-60 U067: For copying an original placed on the platen. U065 U070 Mode X Scan Zoom X Scan Zoom Item Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the center line (scanning adjustment) Image Description Original scanning speed Original Test chart Page P. the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Image quality Item 100% magnification Enlargement/ reduction Lateral squareness Specifications Machine: ± 0.5 mm Cassette: 1.0 mm/375 mm Skewed paper feed (left-right difference) Lateral image shifting Item Leading edge registration Specifications Cassette: +1. When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005). Adjusting the leading edge registration (scanning adjustment) 13 Original scan start timing U066 P. U071: For copying originals from the DP.5 mm or less Duplex: 2. 11 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U067 Front Rotate Test chart P. U066: For copying an original placed on the platen. To make an adjustment for trailing edge registration.0 mm MP tray: ± 2. U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass U404: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-148 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass U404: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-148 15 Adjusting the trailing edge margin (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 D Margin D Margin Test chart P.1-3-54 12 U072 Front Back Front Rotate Test chart P.5 mm/375 mm Using DP: ± 3.1-3-148 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass U404: For copying originals from the DP. To make an adjustment for duplex copying.0 mm 2-4-12 .1-3-147 P.5 mm MP tray: +1. select Rotate. select Back. To make an adjustment for rotate copying.5 mm Duplex: +1.1-3-51 P.1-3-53 U071 Front Head Back Head B Margin B Margin Test chart P.1-3-56 Remarks U065: For copying an original placed on the platen. U070: For copying originals from the DP.0 mm or less Cassette: ± 2.5 % Machine: ± 1.0 mm Duplex: ± 3. 16 Adjusting the left and right margins (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 A Margin C Margin A Margin C Margin Test chart P. select Back Head.0/-1. select Rotate. To make an adjustment for duplex copying.0/-1.1-3-58 14 Adjusting the leading edge margin (scanning adjustment) Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 P.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC Adjusting order Maintenance mode Item No.0/-1.5 mm or less MP tray: 1.5 % Machine: ± 1.

1 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model/45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC18 DF_CLK DF_SDO DF_SEL DF_SDI DF_RDY DF_DET GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 BRES BRECSW 5V Vout GND 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 5 4 3 Relay 2 1 1 2 3 YC20 4 5 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 N.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC (5) Wiring diagram No.3V4 GND +24V1 BELT_FAN1 +24V1 BELT_FAN2 DLP_FAN1 +24V1 DLP_FAN2 +24V1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 4 3 Relay 2 1 3 4 1 2 Relay Relay TFM1 TFM2 Connector holder KEY CARD MK-2 1 2 1 2 Relay 2 1 2 1 + + - BLFM1 BLFM2 Relay FG COIN VENDER (option) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC23 +24V GND GND COIN_EN FGND FEED_COUNT EJECT_COUNT COPYING_SIG TXD_COIN GND RXD_COIN GND COIN VENDER Relay 2-4-13 .3V4 GND GND A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 2 1 2 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 1 2 1 2 + + BRPWB 5 6 7 8 GUIDE_B/ GUIDE_A/ GUIDE_B GUIDE_A PFEPWB Connector holder BRIDGE UNIT TN_FAN1 +24V1 TN_FAN2 +24V1 LVU_FAN1 +24V1 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 KEY COUNTER Connector holder KEY COUNTER (option) YC24 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 +24V1 DC1_COUNT DC1_SET GND LVU_FAN2 +24V1 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 Connector holder 5 4 3 2 1 Relay B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 KEY CARD (option for JAPAN only) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 YC25 +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V COPY_ENABLE +24V KEY7 KEY6 KEY5 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 KEY0 GND COUNT EPWB SIDE_CLK SIDE_SDO SIDE_SEL SIDE_SDI SIDE_RDY SIDE_PAUSE TANDEM_CAS1_OPEN TANDEM_CAS2_OPEN SIDE_MULTI_OPEN +3.C +5V EXIT_SENS GND EXIT_COV_OPEN GND EXIT_SOL_RET EXIT_SOL_REM +24V1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 DFEPWB From PSPWB (3) BRSOL RET ACT COM 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 3 YC4 YC2 DECAL DIR DECAL PD DECAL CLK DECAL MODE DECAL REM GUIDE DIR GUIDE PD GUIDE CLK GUIDE REM DECAL_HP_SENS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DECAL_DIR DECAL_PD DECAL_CLK DECAL_PH DECAL_REM GUIDE_DIR GUIDE_PD GUIDE_CLK GUIDE_REM DECAL_HP_SENS BRCS2 GND Vout 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 GND BRIDGE_SENS2 +5V YC6 Document finisher (option) Connector holder Connector holder YC1 +24V +24V GND GND +5V GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 19 18 17 16 15 14 Relay BRCSW 1 2 1 2 4 5 6 7 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GND BRIDGE_OPEN +5V NC Connector holder BRCS1 GND Vout 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 GND BRIDGE_SENS 1 +5V YC7 BRCM1 /B /A B A /B /A B A 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 BRIDGE1_B/ BRIDGE1_A/ BRIDGE1_B BRIDGE1_A BRIDGE2_B/ BRIDGE2_A/ BRIDGE2_B BRIDGE2_A 1 2 3 4 5 6 19 18 17 16 15 14 38 37 36 35 34 33 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND 5V GND Paper feeder (option) From PSPWB (2) 1 2 1 2 1 2 PFCH YC3 BRCM2 YC8 1 2 3 4 NC GND DECAL_HP_SENS +5V YC5 1 2 3 4 DECAL_B/ DECAL_A/ DECAL_B DECAL_A BRIDGE_SENS 1 BRIDGE OPEN BRIDGE_SENS 2 BRIDGE1 DIR BRIDGE1 PD BRIDGE1 CLK BRIDGE1 MODE BRIDGE1 REM BRIDGE2 DIR BRIDGE2 PD BRIDGE2 CLK BRIDGE2 MODE BRIDGE2 REM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 BRIDGE_SENS 1 BRIDGE_OPEN BRIDGE_SENS 2 BRIDGE1 DIR BRIDGE1 PD BRIDGE1 CLK BRIDGE1 PH BRIDGE1 REM BRIDGE2 DIR BRIDGE2 PD BRIDGE2 CLK BRIDGE2 PH BRIDGE2 REM YC49 24VC GND SIG 1 2 3 From PSPWB (1) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC19 PF_CLK PF_SDO PF_SEL PF_SDI PF_RDY PF_PAUSE PF_CAS1_OPEN PF_CAS2_OPEN +3.

CLOCK YC10 PM-M 24V PGND REM Y LOCK Y CLK Y 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.CLOCK PM-Y LSURPWB YC1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND +5V1 +5V1 GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC7 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND PSPWB YC15 +5V_AN +5V_AN GND GND +3.CLOCK YC8 PM-K 24V PGND REM C LOCK C CLK C 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.2 (30 ppm model) YC11 SGND CLK SGND SDI SGND SDO SGND MSET_N SGND IDD_CS_Y EEPROM_CS_Y IDD_CS_C EEPROM_CS_C IDD_CS_M EEPROM_CS_M IDD_CS_2_BK EEPROM_CS_2_BK IDD_CS_1_BK EEPROM_CS_1_BK SGND INT_ST_Y PALA_STG_P0_Y PALA_STG_P1_Y PALA_STG P2_Y GAIN_FIX_Y SGND DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) SGND INT_ST_ C PALA_STG_P0_C PALA_STG_P1_C PALA_STG_P2_C GAIN_FIX_C SGND DATA_2N_C(LVDS) DATA_2P_C(LVDS) SGND INT_ST_M PALA_STG_P0_M _ PALA STG_P1_M PALA_STG_P2_M GAIN_FIX_M SGND DATA_2N_M(LVDS) DATA_2P_M(LVDS) SGND DATA_3N_BK(LVDS) DATA_3P_BK(LVDS) SGND DATA_4N_BK(LVDS) DATA_4P_BK(LVDS) SGND PARA_SIG_P3_2_BK INT_ST_2_BK INT_ST_1_BK PARA_SIG_P0_BK PARA_SIG_P1_BK PARA_SIG_P2_BK GAIN_FIX_BK SGND DATA_2N_BK(LVDS) DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS) SGND 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC3 GND TH BD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V YC2 PDPWB-K GND TH PD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V PDPWB-C APCPWB-K APCPWB-C YC3 SGND 1 BD_BK 2 3 LSU_TH_BK 5V 4 5 NC ENABLE_BK 6 7 S/H_BK 8 VCONT_BK DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) 9 DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD_BK LSU_TH_BK 5V NC ENABLE_BK S/H_BK VCONT_BK DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) YC7 SGND BD_C LSU_TH_C 5V NC ENABLE_C S/H_C VCONT_C DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD_C LSU_TH_C 5V NC ENABLE_C S/H_C VCONT_C DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) YC4 24V PGND REM Bk LOCK Bk CLK Bk 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.CLOCK PM-C YC2 GND TH PD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V YC2 PDPWB-M YC12 SGND BD_Y LSU_TH_Y CUALM_Y PARA_SIG_P3_Y PARA_SIG_P4_Y SGND SDCLK_Y SGND DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) SGND REM_Y LOCK_Y CLK_Y SGND BD_C LSU_TH_C CUALM_C PARA_SIG_P3_C PARA_SIG_P4_C SGND SDCLK_C SGND DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) SGND REM_C LOCK_C CLK_C SGND BD_M LSU_TH_M CUALM_M PARA_SIG_P3_M PARA_SIG_P4_M SGND SDCLK_M SGND DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) SGND REM_M LOCK_M CLK_M SGND BD_BK LSU_TH_BK CUALM_BK PARA_SIG_P3_BK PARA_SIG_P4_BK SGND SDCLK_BK SGND DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) SGND REM_BK LOCK_BK CLK_BK 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 YC2 SGND BD_Y LSU_TH_Y CUALM_Y PARA_SIG_P3_Y PARA_SIG_P4_Y SGND SDCLK_Y SGND DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) SGND REM_Y LOCK_Y CLK_Y SGND BD_C LSU_TH_C CUALM_C PARA_SIG_P3_C PARA_SIG_P4_C SGND SDCLK_C SGND DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) SGND REM_C LOCK_C CLK_C SGND BD_M LSU_TH_M CUALM_M PARA_SIG_P3_M PARA_SIG_P4_M SGND SDCLK_M SGND DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) SGND REM_M LOCK_M CLK_M SGND BD_BK LSU_TH_BK CUALM_BK PARA_SIG_P3_BK PARA_SIG_P4_BK SGND SDCLK_BK SGND DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) SGND REM_BK LOCK_BK CLK_BK GND TH PD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V PDPWB-Y EPWB APCPWB-M APCPWB-Y YC5 SGND BD_M LSU_TH_M 5V NC ENABLE_M S/H_M VCONT_M DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD_M LSU_TH_M 5V NC ENABLE_M S/H_M VCONT_M DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) YC9 SGND BD_Y LSU_TH_Y 5V NC ENABLE_Y S/H_Y VCONT_Y DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD_Y LSU_TH_Y 5V NC ENABLE_Y S/H_Y VCONT_Y DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) YC6 24V PGND REM M LOCK M CLK M 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.3V2 GND EPWB YC21 LSUCM 1 2 Relay 2 1 2 1 2 1 DR_CW DR_CCW 2-4-14 .

2 (35 ppm model/45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC11 SGND CLK SGND SDI SGND SDO SGND MSET_N SGND IDD_CS_Y EEPROM_CS_Y IDD_CS_C EEPROM_CS_C IDD_CS_M EEPROM_CS_M IDD_CS_2_BK EEPROM_CS_2_BK IDD_CS_1_BK EEPROM_CS_1_BK SGND INT_ST_Y PALA_STG_P0_Y PALA_STG_P1_Y PALA_STG P2_Y GAIN_FIX_Y SGND DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) SGND INT_ST_ C PALA_STG_P0_C PALA_STG_P1_C PALA_STG_P2_C GAIN_FIX_C SGND DATA_2N_C(LVDS) DATA_2P_C(LVDS) SGND INT_ST_M PALA_STG_P0_M _ PALA STG_P1_M PALA_STG_P2_M GAIN_FIX_M SGND DATA_2N_M(LVDS) DATA_2P_M(LVDS) SGND DATA_3N_BK(LVDS) DATA_3P_BK(LVDS) SGND DATA_4N_BK(LVDS) DATA_4P_BK(LVDS) SGND PARA_SIG_P3_2_BK INT_ST_2_BK INT_ST_1_BK PARA_SIG_P0_BK PARA_SIG_P1_BK PARA_SIG_P2_BK GAIN_FIX_BK SGND DATA_2N_BK(LVDS) DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS) SGND 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 YC2 SGND CLK SGND SDI SGND SDO SGND MSET_N SGND IDD_CS_Y EEPROM_CS_Y IDD_CS_C EEPROM_CS_C IDD_CS_M EEPROM_CS_M IDD_CS_2_BK EEPROM_CS_2_BK IDD_CS_1_BK EEPROM_CS_1_BK SGND INT_ST 1 Y PALA_STG_P0_Y PALA_STG_P1_Y PALA_STG P2_Y GAIN_FIX_Y SGND DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) SGND INT_ST 1 C PALA_STG_P0_C PALA_STG_P1_C PALA_STG_P2_C GAIN_FIX_C SGND DATA_2N_C(LVDS) DATA_2P_C(LVDS) SGND INT_ST 1 M PALA_STG_P0_M _ PALA STG_P1_M PALA_STG_P2_M GAIN_FIX_M SGND DATA_2N_M(LVDS) DATA_2P_M(LVDS) SGND DATA_3N_BK(LVDS) DATA_3P_BK(LVDS) SGND DATA_4N_BK(LVDS) DATA_4P_BK(LVDS) SGND PARA_SIG_P3_2 BK INT_ST 2 BK INT_ST 1 BK PARA_SIG_P0_BK PARA_SIG_P1_BK PARA_SIG_P2_BK GAIN_FIX_BK SGND DATA_2N_BK(LVDS) DATA_2P_ BK(LVDS) SGND YC5 SGND BD Bk LSU_TH Bk PALA_SIG P3_2Bk LDD_CS 2 Bk 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 Bk SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS 1 Bk MSET_N CUALM Bk INT_ST 2 Bk INT_ST 1 Bk PALA_SIG P0 Bk PALA_SIG P1 Bk PALA_SIG P2 Bk PALA_SIG P3 Bk PALA_SIG P4 Bk SDCLK Bk GAIN FIX Bk DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS) DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD Bk LSU_TH Bk PALA_SIG P3_2Bk LDD_CS 2 Bk 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 Bk SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS 1 Bk MSET_N CUALM Bk INT_ST 2 Bk INT_ST 1 Bk PALA_SIG P0 Bk PALA_SIG P1 Bk PALA_SIG P2 Bk PALA_SIG P3 Bk PALA_SIG P4 Bk SDCLK Bk GAIN FIX Bk DATA_1N_Bk(LVDS) DATA_1P_Bk(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_Bk(LVDS) DATA_2P_Bk(LVDS) SGND YC3 GND TH BD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V PDPWB-K YC10 SGND BD C LSU_TH C 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 C SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS C MSET_N CUALM C INT_ST 1 C PALA_SIG P0 C PALA_SIG P1 C PALA_SIG P2 C PALA_SIG P3 C PALA_SIG P4 C SDCLK C GAIN FIX C DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_C(LVDS) DATA_2P_C(LVDS) SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD C LSU_TH C 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 C SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS C MSET_N CUALM C INT_ST 1 C PALA_SIG P0 C PALA_SIG P1 C PALA_SIG P2 C PALA_SIG P3 C PALA_SIG P4 C SDCLK C GAIN FIX C DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_C(LVDS) DATA_2P_C(LVDS) SGND YC2 GND TH PD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V PDPWB-C APCPWB-K APCPWB-C YC6 SDI_2 1 SDO_2 2 3 CLK_2 _ 4 EEPROM CS 2 Bk 5 SGND DATA_3N_Bk(LVDS) 6 DATA_3P_Bk(LVDS) 7 8 SGND DATA_4N_Bk(LVDS) 9 DATA_4P_Bk(LVDS) 10 YC9 24V PGND REM C LOCK C CLK C 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.3V2 GND EPWB YC21 LSUCM 1 2 2 1 2 1 DR_CW DR_CCW 2-4-15 .3V2 GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC10 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND PSPWB YC15 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 +5V_AN +5V_AN GND GND +3.CLOCK YC4 24V PGND REM Bk LOCK Bk CLK Bk 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.CLOCK PM-C PM-K YC8 SGND BD M LSU_TH M 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 M SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS M MSET_N CUALM M INT_ST 1 M PALA_SIG P0 M _ PALA SIG P1 M PALA_SIG P2 M PALA_SIG P3 M PALA_SIG P4 M SDCLK M GAIN FIX M DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_M(LVDS) DATA_2P_M(LVDS) SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 SGND BD M LSU_TH M 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 M SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS M MSET_N CUALM M INT_ST 1 M PALA_SIG P0 M _ PALA SIG P1 M PALA_SIG P2 M PALA_SIG P3 M PALA_SIG P4 M SDCLK M GAIN FIX M DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_M(LVDS) DATA_2P_M(LVDS) SGND YC2 GND TH PD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V YC12 YC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SGND BD Y LSU_TH Y 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 Y SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS Y MSET_N CUALM Y INT_ST 1 Y PALA_SIG P0 Y PALA_SIG P1 Y PALA_SIG P2 Y PALA_SIG P3 Y PALA_SIG P4 Y SDCLK Y GAIN FIX Y DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) SGND PDPWB-M YC12 SGND BD_Y LSU_TH_Y CUALM_Y PARA_SIG_P3_Y PARA_SIG_P4_Y SGND SDCLK_Y SGND DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) SGND REM_Y LOCK_Y CLK_Y SGND BD_C LSU_TH_C CUALM_C PARA_SIG_P3_C PARA_SIG_P4_C SGND SDCLK_C SGND DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) SGND REM_C LOCK_C CLK_C SGND BD_M LSU_TH_M CUALM_M PARA_SIG_P3_M PARA_SIG_P4_M SGND SDCLK_M SGND DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) SGND REM_M LOCK_M CLK_M SGND BD_BK LSU_TH_BK CUALM_BK PARA_SIG_P3_BK PARA_SIG_P4_BK SGND SDCLK_BK SGND DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) SGND REM_BK LOCK_BK CLK_BK 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 YC3 SGND BD_Y LSU_TH_Y CUALM_Y PARA_SIG_P3_Y PARA_SIG_P4_Y SGND SDCLK_Y SGND DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) SGND REM_Y LOCK_Y CLK_Y SGND BD_C LSU_TH_C CUALM_C PARA_SIG_P3_C PARA_SIG_P4_C SGND SDCLK_C SGND DATA_1N_C(LVDS) DATA_1P_C(LVDS) SGND REM_C LOCK_C CLK_C SGND BD_M LSU_TH_M CUALM_M PARA_SIG_P3_M PARA_SIG_P4_M SGND SDCLK_M SGND DATA_1N_M(LVDS) DATA_1P_M(LVDS) SGND REM_M LOCK_M CLK_M SGND BD_BK LSU_TH_BK CUALM_BK PARA_SIG_P3_BK PARA_SIG_P4_BK SGND SDCLK_BK SGND DATA_1N_BK(LVDS) DATA_1P_BK(LVDS) SGND REM_BK LOCK_BK CLK_BK APCPWB-M SGND BD Y LSU_TH Y 5V 5V 5V LDD_CS 1 Y SDI1 SDO1 CLK1 EEPROM CS Y MSET_N CUALM Y INT_ST 1 Y PALA_SIG P0 Y PALA_SIG P1 Y PALA_SIG P2 Y PALA_SIG P3 Y PALA_SIG P4 Y SDCLK Y GAIN FIX Y DATA_1N_Y(LVDS) DATA_1P_Y(LVDS) SGND DATA_2N_Y(LVDS) DATA_2P_Y(LVDS) SGND YC2 GND TH PD +5V 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND TH PD +5V PDPWB-Y EPWB APCPWB-Y YC7 24V PGND REM M LOCK M CLK M 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.CLOCK PM-Y LSURPWB YC1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND +5V1 +5V1 GND GND +3.CLOCK YC11 PM-M 24V PGND REM Y LOCK Y CLK Y 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +24V GND START/STOP LOCKED EXT.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.

3V2 3V VIB_MOT YC2 GND DRM_INDEX_Bk ERS_Bk_REM TPD_Bk_1 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 TPD_TEMP_Bk GND DRM_INDEX_M ERS_M_REM TPD_M_1 DLP_VCONT_M_1 TPD_TEMP_M GND DRM_INDEX_C ERS_C_REM TPD_C_1 DLP_VCONT_C_1 TPD_TEMP_C GND TN_CLK GND EEP_SCL1 GND EEP_SDA1 GND TPD_Y_1 DLP_VCONT_Y_1 TPD_TEMP_Y ERS_Y_REM DRM_INDEX_Y FRONT_OPEN GND I2C_SCL GND I2C_SDA GND LSU_FAN_REM CLEAN_MOT_LOCK CLEAN_MOT_REM GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC10 1 GND DRM_INDEX_Bk 2 3 ERS_Bk 4 TPD_Bk_1 5 DLP_VCONT_Bk_1 TPD_TEMP_Bk 6 GND 7 8 DRM_INDEX_M 9 ERS_M 10 TPD_M_1 11 DLP_VCONT_M_1 TPD_TEMP_M 12 GND 13 14 DRM_INDEX_C ERS_C 15 16 TPD_C_1 17 DLP_VCONT_C_1 18 TPD_TEMP_C 19 GND 20 TN_CLK 21 GND 22 EEP_SCL1 23 GND 24 EEP_SDA1 25 GND 26 TPD_Y_1 27 DLP_VCONT_Y_1 28 TPD_TEMP_Y 29 ERS_Y 30 DRM_INDEX_Y 31 FRONT_OPEN 32 GND I2C_SCL 33 GND 34 I2C_SDA 35 GND 36 LSU_FAN_REM 37 38 CLEAN_MOT_LOCK 39 CLEAN_MOT_REM 40 GND 3.3V EEP SCL EEP SDA GND A0 A1 Drum unit K DRPWB-K Developer unit Y YC1 TPD_TEMP DLP_VCONT TPD_1 TN_CLK GND DLP_ADR1 DLP_ADR0 EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3V EEP SCL EEP SDA GND A0 A1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3.3V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC11 TPD_TEMP_M DLP_VCONT_M_1 TPD_M_1 TN_CLK_M GND DLP_ADR1_M DLP_ADR0_M EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model/45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC16 OTEMS1 FRCSW LSUFM WTM + - +3.3V2 3V VIB_MOT 24V ERS_Bk_REM 7 8 7 8 2 1 2 1 DRM1 ERASER (+) ERS1 DR (-) CL-K TS-Y 5V DRM_INDEX_Bk GND YC8 YC2 +3.3V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 YC1 TPD_TEMP DLP_VCONT TPD_1 TN_CLK GND DLP_ADR1 DLP_ADR0 EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3V2 3V 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V2 +5V +24V +24V GND GND GND GND GND 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 VM-Y Drum unit Y DRPWB-Y +3.3V2 3V VIB_MOT TS-M YC5 ROT_CORE A ROT_CORE B ROT_CORE A/ ROT_CORE B/ GND ROT_HP_SENS 5V SB_CORE B/ SB_CORE A/ SB_CORE B SB_CORE A GND EXIT_FEED_SENS 5V GND EXIT_PAPER_SENS 5V +24V1 JUNC_SOL_KYU JUNC_SOL_FUK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Relay 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 Relay GND Vout 5V 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 B/ A/ B A GND Vout 5V VM-M Eject unit EM SBS EFS COM ACT KEEP Drum unit M DRPWB-M YC10 +3.3V SDA GND SCL OTEMS2 TS-C YC4 5V LED1 1 2 1 2 VM-C Drum unit C DRPWB-C +3.3V SDA GND SCL 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 Relay 2 1 2 1 1 2 Relay Relay 3 4 2 1 9 10 11 4 3 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_Bk DRM_ADR1_Bk 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 +3.3V2 Developer unit K TS-K FRPWB VM-K YC7 3.3V1 I2C_SDA GND I2C_SCL FRONT_OPEN GND 24V LSU_FAN_OUT CL_MOT 24V GND WTNR_SET 5V WTNR_FULL WTNR_LED _ 5V LED 5V WTNR_NEAR WTNR_LED 5V_LED YC9 TPD_TEMP_BK DLP_VCONT_BK_1 TPD_BK_1 TN_CLK_BK GND DLP_ADR1_BK DLP_ADR0_BK EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC15 TPD_TEMP_Y DLP_VCONT_Y_1 TPD_Y_1 TN_CLK_Y GND DLP_ADR1_Y DLP_ADR0_Y EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3V EEP SCL EEP SDA GND A0 A1 YC1 +3.3V1 +3.3V1 +3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_M DRM_ADR1_M CL-M DRM1 ERASER (+) ERS1 DR (-) 2 1 2 1 7 8 7 8 24V ERS_M_REM 5V DRM_INDEX_M GND FSSOL 2-4-16 .3V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC13 TPD_TEMP_C DLP_VCONT_C_1 TPD_C_1 TN_CLK_C GND DLP_ADR1_C DLP_ADR0_C EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3V2 +5V +24V +24V GND GND GND GND GND 5V_LED WTNR_LED WTNR_NEAR 5V WTNR_SET GND 5V_LED WTNR_LED WTNR_FULL 5V 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Relay 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 Relay 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 A K E C 1 2 3 5V Vout GND LED TR YC14 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3.3V EEP SCL EEP SDA GND A0 A1 5V LED2 IH_COIL_FAN_ALM IH_COIL_FAN 24V 24V EXIT FAN 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 S + + - YC12 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3.3V1 I2C_SDA GND I2C_SCL 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 +3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_Y DRM_ADR1_Y WTS2 WTS1 Relay EPWB CL-Y DRM1 ERASER (+) ERS1 DR (-) 2 1 2 1 7 8 7 8 24V ERS_Y_REM 5V DRM_INDEX_Y GND YC7 GND WTNR_SET INTER_LOCK IH_CORE_SENS IH_CORE_MOT_REM IH_CORE_CLK WTNR_LED IH_COIL_FAN_ALM IH_COIL_FAN_H IH_COIL_FAN_L EXIT_FAN CONTAIN_FAN JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET GND EXIT_PAPE_SENS EXIT_FEED_SENS ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_PH ROT_MOT_CLK ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_DIR GND DLP_FAN_Bk_H DLP_FAN_Bk_L DLP_FAN_CLR_H DLP_FAN_CLR_L WTNR_SET WTNR_NEAR WTNR_VCONT GND ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_CLK ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_DIR ROT_HP_SENS THOP_MOT_Bk_REM THOP_MOT_M_REM THOP_MOT_C_REM THOP_MOT_Y_REM GND ENCODE_Bk ENCODE_M ENCODE_C ENCODE_Y THOP_Bk THOP_M THOP_ C THOP_Y GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 YC3 GND WTNR_SET INTER_LOCK IH_CORE_SENS IH_CORE_MOT_REM IH_CORE_CLK WTNR_LED IH_COIL_FAN_ALM IH_COIL_FAN_H IH_COIL_FAN_L EXIT_FAN CONTAIN_FAN JUNC_SOL_REM JUNC_SOL_RET GND EXIT_PAPE_SENS EXIT_FEED_SENS ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_PH ROT_MOT_CLK ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_DIR GND DLP_FAN_Bk_H DLP_FAN_Bk_L DLP_FAN_CLR_H DLP_FAN_CLR_L WTNR_FULL WTNR_NEAR WTNR_VCONT GND ROT_MOT_REM ROT_MOT_CLK ROT_MOT_PD ROT_MOT_DIR ROT_HP_SENS THOP_MOT_Bk_REM THOP_MOT_M_REM THOP_MOT_C_REM THOP_MOT_Y_REM GND ENCODE_Bk ENCODE_M ENCODE_C ENCODE_Y THOP_Bk THOP_M THOP_ C THOP_Y GND YC6 DLP_FAN_M 24V DLP_FAN_Bk 24V 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 Relay Relay 2 1 2 1 + + - DEVFM2 DEVFM1 Developer unit C YC1 TPD_TEMP DLP_VCONT TPD_1 TN_CLK GND DLP_ADR1 DLP_ADR0 EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.3V2 EEP_SCL1 EEP_SDA1 GND DRM_ADR0_C DRM_ADR1_C Relay CFM1 EFFM Relay YC17 GND IH_CORE_SENS 5V IH_CORE B/ IH_CORE B IH_CORE A IH_CORE A/ 24V EXIT PAPER(SUB) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CL-C DRM1 ERASER (+) ERS1 DR (-) 2 1 2 1 7 8 7 8 24V ERS_C_REM 5V DRM_INDEX_C GND Developer unit M YC1 TPD_TEMP DLP_VCONT TPD_1 TN_CLK GND DLP_ADR1 DLP_ADR0 EEP_SDA1 EEP_SCL1 3.

4 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model/45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC26 +5V FSR_BLT_PLS GND +5V FSR_RLS_SENS GND +5V FSR_SIZE_SENS GND FSR_RLS_DR_CW FSR_RLS_DR_CCW +24V1 FSR_FAN FSR_FAN_ALM +24V1 EDGE_FAN EDGE_FAN_ALM +24V1 EDGE_FAN EDGE_FAN_ALM BRIDGE_FAN +24V1 GND MAIN_TH1 MAIN_TH2 GUIDE_TH2 GND GUIDE_TH1 GND EDGE_TH GND PRESS_TH GND A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 1 2 Relay 2 1 + A12 A12 A13 A13 B13 B13 B10 B10 B11 B11 B12 B12 1 2 3 1 2 3 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Relay 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 Relay 2 1 3 2 1 + S 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 5V Vout GND 5V Vout GND 5V Vout GND FUBLS FURS FUES FURM Fuser unit A10 A10 A11 A11 Relay FURFM Connector holder YC1 YC2 YC3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 + S FUFFM FTH1 BRFM B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FUPWB YC4 YC5 GND FSR_NCTH1 FSR_NCTH2 FTH2 FTH3 1 2 Relay 2 1 FTH4 YC4 GND +3.3V2 IH_HEAT_REM ROTATION IH_TXD IH_RXD PRESS_HEART_REM B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SGND Vcc IH_REM ROTATION RXD TXD 1 2 3 Relay 3 2 1 + S CFM2 FIH YC9 COIL_LIVE COIL_COM 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 YC10 YC6 EPWB FTS FIHPWB +15V1 +15V2 3 3 4 YC8 3 2 1 3 2 1 GND FSR_RELAY +24V 4 YC1 IH_NEUTRAL IH_LIVE 1 2 1 2 1 2 From PSPWB FPWB1 YC27 MAIN_HEAT_REM SUB_HEAT_REM +24V2 ZEROC GND GND FSR_RELAY +24V1 PRESS_REM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YC11 +24V1 IH_PWB_FAN IH_PWB_FAN_ALM 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 Relay 3 2 1 + S IHFM YC19 EXIT_REAR_FAN +24V1 1 2 2 1 1 2 Relay 2 1 + ERFM 2-4-17 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.

3V REG_F_LED GND _ REG SENS_F_P REG_SENS_F_S 3.GND SIG_1 +5V S.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V LED_REF GND VO_P VO_S 1 2 3 COM ACT RET ID sensor IDS1 FUM IDS2 CN1 YC13 TRANS_MOT_BRK TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_REM GND 24V2 GND 24V2 TANK_SET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SIG2 SIG1 SGND +5V BRAKE CW/CCW FG VM START/STOP PGND +24V1 CN2 +5V S.3V REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_R_P REG_SENS_R_S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 +3.5 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) YC6 GND JOB_SET JOB_MOT_REM _ JOB MOT_CLK JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_SOL_REM GND MAIN_HEAT_REM SUB_HEAT_REM ZEROC FSR_RELAY PRESS_REM _ EXIT REAR_FAN_L EXIT_REAR_FAN_H GND FSR_CL_REM FSR_MOT_REM FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_BRK GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG GND MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP MPF_LIFT_DOWN MPF_JAM MPF_CL MPF_LIF2 MPF_LIFT1 GND TC_MOT_LOCK TC_TONER_LED _ TC TONER_FULL TC_TONER_VCONT INTER_LOCK DU2_PD DU2_CLK DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) GND DU_OPEN DU_FAN PRESS_MOT_REM1 PRESS_MOT_REM2 PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS GND CLN_SOL_RET CLN_SOL_REM _ REG SENS_R_S(BK) REG_SENS_R_P(BK) REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_F_S REG_SENS_F_P REG_F_LED GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 GND JOB_SET JOB_MOT_REM _ JOB MOT_CLK JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_SOL_REM GND MAIN_HEAT_REM SUB_HEAT_REM ZEROC FSR_RELAY PRESS_REM _ EXIT REAR_FAN_L EXIT_REAR_FAN_H GND FSR_CL_REM FSR_MOT_REM FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_BRK GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG GND MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP MPF_LIFT_DOWN MPF_JAM MPF_CL MPF_LIF2 MPF_LIFT1 GND TC_MOT_LOCK TC_TONER_LED _ TC TONER_FULL TC_TONER_VCONT INTER_LOCK DU2_PD DU2_CLK DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) GND DU_OPEN DU_FAN PRESS_MOT_REM1 PRESS_MOT_REM2 PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS GND CLN_SOL_RET CLN_SOL_REM _ REG SENS_R_S(BK) REG_SENS_R_P(BK) REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_F_S REG_SENS_F_P REG_F_LED GND Fuser drive unit YC18 FSR_MOT_BRK FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_REM GND 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V YC10 GND M_TEMP 3.C 1 2 3 FPWB1 EPWB 2-4-18 .3V LED_REF GND VO_P VO_S +3.GND SIG_2 1 2 3 4 5 6 24V CLN_SOL_REM CLN_SOL_RET Relay CLSOL TRM JMPWB YC2 YC20 JOB_SET GND GND JOB_MOT_REM 24V1 JOB_MOT_CLK 5V JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS _ JOB SOL_REM NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 10 9 2 8 3 7 4 6 5 Relay 5 6 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Job separator YC8 DLP_MOT_BK_DIR DLP_MOT_BK_RDY DLP_MOT_BK_CLK DLP_MOT_BK_REM GND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC1 JOB_SET GND GND JOB_MOT_REM 24V1 JOB_MOT_CLK 5V JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_SOL_REM GND JOB_OPEN_SENS +5V1 JOB_B/ JOB_A/ JOB_B JOB_A +24V1 JOB_SOL_OUT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND Vout 5V B/ A/ B A 1 2 JOCS JEM COM ACT YC6 DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_REM GND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 JFSSOL YC22 YC9 DRM_MOT_BK_BRK DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_CLK DRM_MOT_BK_REM GND +24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 REG_CL_REM 24V2 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 RCL YC5 GND M_TEMP LOOP_SENS GND EDGE_FAN_H DU1_MOT_PD DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) GND EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS TCON_SET GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK GND DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_BK_BRK GND DLP_MOT_BK_REM DLP_MOT_BK_CLK DLP_MOT_BK_RDY DLP_MOT_BK_DIR GND DRM_MOT_CLR_REM DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR GND DLP_MOT_CLR_REM DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR GND REG_MOT_PD REG_MOT_CLK REG_MOT_REM(CL) GND IH_PWB_FAN_L IH_PWB_FAN_H _ IH PWB_FAN_ALM POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC2 GND M_TEMP LOOP_SENS GND EDGE_FAN_H DU1_MOT_PD DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) GND EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS TCON_SET GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK GND DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_BK_BRK GND DLP_MOT_BK_REM DLP_MOT_BK_CLK DLP_MOT_BK_RDY DLP_MOT_BK_DIR GND DRM_MOT_CLR_REM DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR GND DLP_MOT_CLR_REM DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR GND REG_MOT_PD REG_MOT_CLK REG_MOT_REM(CL) GND IH_PWB_FAN_L IH_PWB_FAN_H _ IH PWB_FAN_ALM POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL GND YC25 REG_MOT_B/ REG_MOT_A/ REG_MOT_B REG_MOT_A 1 2 3 4 YC7 DRM_MOT_CLR_BRK DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_REM GND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC21 24V2 FSR_CL_REM N.

3V REG_F_LED GND _ REG SENS_F_P REG_SENS_F_S 3.5 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC6 GND JOB_SET JOB_MOT_REM _ JOB MOT_CLK JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_SOL_REM GND MAIN_HEAT_REM SUB_HEAT_REM ZEROC FSR_RELAY PRESS_REM _ EXIT REAR_FAN_L EXIT_REAR_FAN_H GND FSR_CL_REM FSR_MOT_REM FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_BRK GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG GND MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP MPF_LIFT_DOWN MPF_JAM MPF_CL MPF_LIF2 MPF_LIFT1 GND TC_MOT_LOCK TC_TONER_LED _ TC TONER_FULL TC_TONER_VCONT INTER_LOCK DU2_PD DU2_CLK DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) GND DU_OPEN DU_FAN PRESS_MOT_REM1 PRESS_MOT_REM2 PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS GND CLN_SOL_RET CLN_SOL_REM _ REG SENS_R_S(BK) REG_SENS_R_P(BK) REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_F_S REG_SENS_F_P REG_F_LED GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC1 GND JOB_SET JOB_MOT_REM _ JOB MOT_CLK JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_SOL_REM GND MAIN_HEAT_REM SUB_HEAT_REM ZEROC FSR_RELAY PRESS_REM _ EXIT REAR_FAN_L EXIT_REAR_FAN_H GND FSR_CL_REM FSR_MOT_REM FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_BRK GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG GND MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP MPF_LIFT_DOWN MPF_JAM MPF_CL MPF_LIF2 MPF_LIFT1 GND TC_MOT_LOCK TC_TONER_LED _ TC TONER_FULL TC_TONER_VCONT INTER_LOCK DU2_PD DU2_CLK DU2_REM_(CL_LOW) GND DU_OPEN DU_FAN PRESS_MOT_REM1 PRESS_MOT_REM2 PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS GND CLN_SOL_RET CLN_SOL_REM _ REG SENS_R_S(BK) REG_SENS_R_P(BK) REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_F_S REG_SENS_F_P REG_F_LED GND Fuser drive unit YC18 FSR_MOT_BRK FSR_MOT_DIR FSR_MOT_RDY FSR_MOT_CLK FSR_MOT_REM GND 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V YC10 GND M_TEMP 3.3V REG_R_LED GND REG_SENS_R_P REG_SENS_R_S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 +3.3V LED_REF GND VO_P VO_S +3.GND SIG_1 +5V S.GND SIG_2 1 2 3 4 5 6 24V CLN_SOL_REM CLN_SOL_RET Relay CLSOL TRM JMPWB YC2 YC20 JOB_SET GND GND JOB_MOT_REM 24V1 JOB_MOT_CLK 5V JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS _ JOB SOL_REM NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 10 9 2 8 3 7 4 6 5 Relay 5 6 7 4 8 3 2 9 1 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Job separator YC8 DLP_MOT_BK_DIR DLP_MOT_BK_RDY DLP_MOT_BK_CLK DLP_MOT_BK_REM GND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC1 JOB_SET GND GND JOB_MOT_REM 24V1 JOB_MOT_CLK 5V JOB_MOT_DIR JOB_OPEN_SENS JOB_SOL_REM GND JOB_OPEN_SENS +5V1 JOB_B/ JOB_A/ JOB_B JOB_A +24V1 JOB_SOL_OUT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 GND Vout 5V B/ A/ B A 1 2 JOCS JEM COM ACT YC6 DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_REM GND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 JFSSOL YC22 YC9 DRM_MOT_BK_BRK DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_CLK DRM_MOT_BK_REM GND +24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 REG_CL_REM 24V2 2 1 YC5 GND M_TEMP LOOP_SENS GND EDGE_FAN_H DU1_MOT_PD DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) GND EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS TCON_SET GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK GND DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_BK_BRK GND DLP_MOT_BK_REM DLP_MOT_BK_CLK DLP_MOT_BK_RDY DLP_MOT_BK_DIR GND DRM_MOT_CLR_REM DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR GND DLP_MOT_CLR_REM DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR GND REG_MOT_PD REG_MOT_CLK REG_MOT_REM(CL) GND IH_PWB_FAN_L IH_PWB_FAN_H _ IH PWB_FAN_ALM POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC2 GND M_TEMP LOOP_SENS GND EDGE_FAN_H DU1_MOT_PD DU1_MOT_CLK DU1_MOT_REM(CL_H) GND EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS TCON_SET GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK GND DRM_MOT_BK_REM DRM_MOT_BK_RDY DRM_MOT_BK_DIR DRM_MOT_BK_BRK GND DLP_MOT_BK_REM DLP_MOT_BK_CLK DLP_MOT_BK_RDY DLP_MOT_BK_DIR GND DRM_MOT_CLR_REM DRM_MOT_BK_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR GND DLP_MOT_CLR_REM DLP_MOT_CLR_CLK DLP_MOT_CLR_RDY DLP_MOT_CLR_DIR GND REG_MOT_PD REG_MOT_CLK REG_MOT_REM(CL) GND IH_PWB_FAN_L IH_PWB_FAN_H _ IH PWB_FAN_ALM POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM IH_PWB_FAN(U)_AL GND YC25 REG_MOT_B/ REG_MOT_A/ REG_MOT_B REG_MOT_A 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 B/ A/ B A RM YC7 DRM_MOT_CLR_BRK DRM_MOT_CLR_DIR DRM_MOT_CLR_RDY DRM_MOT_CLR_CLK DRM_MOT_CLR_REM GND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC21 24V2 FSR_CL_REM N.C 1 2 3 FPWB1 EPWB 2-4-19 .3V LED_REF GND VO_P VO_S 1 2 3 COM ACT RET ID sensor IDS1 FUM IDS2 CN1 YC13 TRANS_MOT_BRK TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_REM GND 24V2 GND 24V2 TANK_SET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SIG2 SIG1 SGND +5V BRAKE CW/CCW FG VM START/STOP PGND +24V1 CN2 +5V S.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.

3V 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Relay 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 DU_CL_UPPER_REM DUCL1 OUT GND 5V YC10 MPLM LOOP_SENS GND 5V 3.3V3 MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPF_JAM_SENS MPF_CL_REM 24V2 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A MPF_LIFT_MOT_B _ TC TONER_MOT_A TC_TONER_MOT_B TC_TONER_FULL TC_TONER_LED 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 Drawer Drawer B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 YC12 GND GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG LED_3.3V3 MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPF_JAM_SENS MPF_CL_REM 24V2 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A MPF_LIFT_MOT_B _ TC TONER_MOT_A TC_TONER_MOT_B TC_TONER_FULL TC_TONER_LED MP tray YC3 MPF_LIFT_DR_B MPF_LIFT_DR_A 24V2 MPF_CL_REM 5V MPF_JAM_SENS GND 5V MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS GND 5V MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS GND MPF_PPR_SET GND LED_3.3V LOOP_SENS EDGE_FAN_REM DU1_A DU1_B DU1_A/ DU1_B/ GND DU_CL_UPPER_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC13 3.3V LOOP_SENS EDGE_FAN_REM DU1_A DU1_B DU1_A/ DU1_B/ GND DU_CL_UPPER_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS YC8 24V2 DU_FAN_REM 24V2 DU_FAN_REM 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 Relay 2 1 YC11 GND DU_ENTER_SENS 5V EXIT_FAN_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN_REM 24V2 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 Relay Relay 3 2 1 GND Vout 5V 1 2 1 2 DUS1 + + EFM1 EFM2 YC17 GND GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG LED_3.6 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) YC16 FPWB1 DU1_B/ DU1_A/ DU1_B DU1_A EDGE_FAN_REM 24V2 EDGE_FAN_REM 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 2 1 Relay Relay 1 2 1 2 + + FUFM1 FUFM2 YC23 3.3V3 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Relay 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 5V Vout GND 5V Vout GND Vout GND 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V REG_BK_LED GND REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_SENS1_S GND BELT_JAM_SENS 5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 1 2 3 LPS MPPFCL 5V Vout GND MPFS MPLS2 MPLS1 MPPS YC14 GND PRESS_RLS_SENS 5V PRESS_RLS_REM1 PRESS_RLS_REM2 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 Relay GND Vout 5V 1 2 TRRS TRRM YC14 5V_LED DU2_A DU2_B DU2_A/ DU2_B/ DU_OPEN_SW DU_CL_LOWER_REM DU_FAN 24V2 PRESS_RLSMOT2 PRESS_RLSMOT21 5V PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS REG_BK_SENS1_S REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_LED 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 YC1 5V_LED DU2_A DU2_B DU2_A/ DU2_B/ DU_OPEN_SW DU_CL_LOWER_REM DU_FAN 24V2 PRESS_RLSMOT2 PRESS_RLSMOT21 5V PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS REG_BK_SENS1_S REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_LED YC2 MPF_TABLE GND MPF_WID1 GND MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 5V MPF_LNG GND 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 Relay 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 Vout GND WID1 GND WID2 WID3 1 2 3 YC4 MPTSW MPPWSW 1 2 3 5V Vout GND 24V2 ID_SOL_REM 1 2 Relay MPPLSW YC9 GND DU_SENS 5V 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 GND Vout 5V YC5 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TANK_SET +24V2 GND +24V2 GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK YC6 24V2 GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DUS2 YC7 24V2 DU_CL2_REM DU_OPEN GND DU2_B/ DU2_A/ DU2_B DU2_A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 DUCL2 DUCSW RYPWB 2-4-20 .

3V LOOP_SENS EDGE_FAN_REM DU1_A DU1_B DU1_A/ DU1_B/ GND DU_CL_UPPER_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC13 3.3V REG_BK_LED GND REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_SENS1_S GND BELT_JAM_SENS 5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 1 2 3 OUT GND 5V LPS MPPFCL 5V Vout GND MPFS MPLS2 MPLS1 MPPS YC14 GND PRESS_RLS_SENS 5V PRESS_RLS_REM1 PRESS_RLS_REM2 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 Relay GND Vout 5V 1 2 TRRS TRRM YC14 5V_LED DU2_A DU2_B DU2_A/ DU2_B/ DU_OPEN_SW DU_CL_LOWER_REM DU_FAN 24V2 PRESS_RLSMOT2 PRESS_RLSMOT21 5V PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS REG_BK_SENS1_S REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_LED 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 YC1 5V_LED DU2_A DU2_B DU2_A/ DU2_B/ DU_OPEN_SW DU_CL_LOWER_REM DU_FAN 24V2 PRESS_RLSMOT2 PRESS_RLSMOT21 5V PRESS_RLS_SENS DU_SENS BELT_JAM_SENS REG_BK_SENS1_S REG_BK_SENS1_P REG_BK_LED YC2 MPF_TABLE GND MPF_WID1 GND MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 5V MPF_LNG GND 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 Relay 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 4 Vout GND WID1 GND WID2 WID3 1 2 3 YC4 MPTSW MPPWSW 1 2 3 5V Vout GND 24V2 ID_SOL_REM 1 2 Relay MPPLSW YC9 GND DU_SENS 5V 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 GND Vout 5V YC5 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TANK_SET +24V2 GND +24V2 GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK YC6 24V2 GND TRANS_MOT_REM TRANS_MOT_CLK TRANS_MOT_RDY TRANS_MOT_DIR TRANS_MOT_BRK 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DUS2 YC7 24V2 DU_CL2_REM DU_OPEN GND DU2_B/ DU2_A/ DU2_B DU2_A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 B/ A/ B A DUCSW DUM2 RYPWB 2-4-21 .3V 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 Relay 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 DU_CL_UPPER_REM YC10 MPLM LOOP_SENS GND 5V 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V3 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Relay 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 5V Vout GND 5V Vout GND Vout GND 3.3V3 MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPF_JAM_SENS MPF_CL_REM 24V2 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A MPF_LIFT_MOT_B _ TC TONER_MOT_A TC_TONER_MOT_B TC_TONER_FULL TC_TONER_LED 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 Drawer Drawer B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 YC12 GND GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG LED_3.3V3 MPF_PPR_SET MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS MPF_JAM_SENS MPF_CL_REM 24V2 MPF_LIFT_MOT_A MPF_LIFT_MOT_B _ TC TONER_MOT_A TC_TONER_MOT_B TC_TONER_FULL TC_TONER_LED MP tray YC3 MPF_LIFT_DR_B MPF_LIFT_DR_A 24V2 MPF_CL_REM 5V MPF_JAM_SENS GND 5V MPF_LIFT_DOWN_SENS GND 5V MPF_LIFT_UP_SENS GND MPF_PPR_SET GND LED_3.3V LOOP_SENS EDGE_FAN_REM DU1_A DU1_B DU1_A/ DU1_B/ GND DU_CL_UPPER_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN DU_ENTER_SENS YC8 24V2 DU_FAN_REM 24V2 DU_FAN_REM 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 Relay 2 1 YC11 GND DU_ENTER_SENS 5V EXIT_FAN_REM 24V2 EXIT_FAN_REM 24V2 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 Relay Relay GND Vout 5V 1 2 1 2 DUS1 + + EFM1 EFM2 YC17 GND GND MPF_TABLE MPF_WID1 MPF_WID2 MPF_WID3 MPF_LNG LED_3.6 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC16 FPWB1 DU1_B/ DU1_A/ DU1_B DU1_A EDGE_FAN_REM 24V2 EDGE_FAN_REM 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 Relay Relay B/ A/ B A 1 2 1 2 DUM1 + + FUFM1 FUFM2 YC23 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.7 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) YC12 +24V2 +24V2 +5V GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC11 +24V2 +24V2 +5V GND GND GND YC7 MID_B/ MID_A/ MID_B MID_A BEND_SENS GND 5V GND FEED1_SENS 5V GND REG_SENS 5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 TH OUT GND 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V Middle guide unit RDS YC13 5V1 GND CURRENT_SIG 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 From CRPWB Relay MS RS MCL YC2 FEED_MOT_GAIN FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_REM GND 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V Paper feed drive unit FPWB1 MID_CL_REM 24V2 YC5 V-FEED_CL_REM 24V2 NC 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 PFM PCCL YC10 ASIST_CL1 1 2 Primary paper feed unit YC8 YC4 GND FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK _ FEED MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_CL1_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 LIFT_MOT2_REM GND LIFT_MOT1_REM1 CAS2_WID CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_LNG2 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_WID CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_LNG2 CAS1_LNG1 GND CAS2_QUANT2 CAS2_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_QUANT1 LIFT_MOT1_LOCK LIFT_MOT2_LOCK CURRENT_SIG V-FEED_CL COVER_OPEN FEED2_SENS CAS1_P0 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND CAS1_EMPTY PICK_SOL1_RET PICK_SOL1_REM CAS2_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_EMPTY PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_REM GND REG_SENS FEED1_SENS BEND_SENS MID_MOT_PH MID_MOT_REM(ROL) MID_MOT_CLK MID_MOT_PD ASIST_CL1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 24V2 YC1 GND FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK _ FEED MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_CL1_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 LIFT_MOT2_REM GND LIFT_MOT1_REM1 CAS2_WID CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_LNG2 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_WID CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_LNG2 CAS1_LNG1 GND CAS2_QUANT2 CAS2_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_QUANT1 LIFT_MOT1_LOCK LIFT_MOT2_LOCK CURRENT_SIG V-FEED_CL COVER_OPEN FEED2_SENS CAS1_P0 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND CAS1_EMPTY PICK_SOL1_RET PICK_SOL1_REM CAS2_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_EMPTY PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_REM GND REG_SENS FEED1_SENS BEND_SENS MID_MOT_PH MID_MOT_REM(ROL) MID_MOT_CLK MID_MOT_PD ASIST_CL1 24V2 PICK_SOL1_REM PICK_SOL1_RET LED_5V GND CAS1_EMPTY_SENS LED_5V GND CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS 5V CAS1_P0_SENS GND 24V2 PICK_SOL2_REM PICK_SOL2_RET LED_5V GND CAS2_EMPTY_SENS LED_5V GND CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS 5V CAS2_P0_SENS GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V Vout GND 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V Vout GND YC12 ASIST_CL2 24V2 1 2 PS1 YC4 FEED_CL1_REM 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Relay LS1 FS1 24V2 FEED_CL2_REM 24V2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 PFCL1 PFCL2 Connector holder PS2 LS2 FS2 YC3 CAS1_LNG1 CAS1_LNG2 GND CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_WID GND CAS2_LNG1 CAS2_LNG2 GND CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_WID GND LIFT_MOT1_RET LIFT_MOT1_DR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 SW1 SW2 COM SW3 SW1 SW2 COM SW3 Relay PLSW1 PWSW1 PLSW2 PWSW2 LM1 LM2 Relay Relay YC6 Relay LED_5V GND FEED2_SENS COVER_OPEN GND 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 5V GND Vout PCS PCCSW LIFT_MOT2_RET LIFT_MOT2_DR Connector holder Lower guide unit 15 16 1 2 2 1 2 1 LED_5V GND CAS1_QUANT1 LED_5V GND CAS1_QUANT2 LED_ 5V GND CAS2_QUANT1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 Relay 3 2 1 6 5 4 Relay 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout PGS1(U) PGS1(L) PGS2(U) PGS2(L) EPWB FPWB2 LED_5V GND CAS2_QUANT2 2-4-22 .

7 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC12 +24V2 +24V2 +5V GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC11 +24V2 +24V2 +5V GND GND GND YC7 MID_B/ MID_A/ MID_B MID_A BEND_SENS GND 5V GND FEED1_SENS 5V GND REG_SENS 5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 TH OUT GND 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V B/ A/ B A Middle guide unit MM YC13 5V1 GND CURRENT_SIG 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 From CRPWB RDS Relay MS RS YC2 FEED_MOT_GAIN FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_CLK FEED_MOT_REM GND 24V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V Paper feed drive unit FPWB1 MID_CL_REM 24V2 YC5 V-FEED_CL_REM 24V2 NC 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 PFM PCCL YC10 Primary paper feed unit YC8 YC4 GND FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK _ FEED MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_CL1_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 LIFT_MOT2_REM GND LIFT_MOT1_REM1 CAS2_WID CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_LNG2 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_WID CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_LNG2 CAS1_LNG1 GND CAS2_QUANT2 CAS2_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_QUANT1 LIFT_MOT1_LOCK LIFT_MOT2_LOCK CURRENT_SIG V-FEED_CL COVER_OPEN FEED2_SENS CAS1_P0 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND CAS1_EMPTY PICK_SOL1_RET PICK_SOL1_REM CAS2_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_EMPTY PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_REM GND REG_SENS FEED1_SENS BEND_SENS MID_MOT_PH MID_MOT_REM(ROL) MID_MOT_CLK MID_MOT_PD ASIST_CL1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 ASIST_CL1 24V2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 ASCL1 YC1 GND FEED_MOT_REM FEED_MOT_CLK _ FEED MOT_RDY FEED_MOT_DIR FEED_CL1_REM FEED_CL2_REM ASIST_CL2 LIFT_MOT2_REM GND LIFT_MOT1_REM1 CAS2_WID CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_LNG2 CAS2_LNG1 CAS1_WID CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_LNG2 CAS1_LNG1 GND CAS2_QUANT2 CAS2_QUANT1 CAS1_QUANT2 CAS1_QUANT1 LIFT_MOT1_LOCK LIFT_MOT2_LOCK CURRENT_SIG V-FEED_CL COVER_OPEN FEED2_SENS CAS1_P0 CAS1_LIFT_UP GND CAS1_EMPTY PICK_SOL1_RET PICK_SOL1_REM CAS2_P0 CAS2_LIFT_UP CAS2_EMPTY PICK_SOL2_RET PICK_SOL2_REM GND REG_SENS FEED1_SENS BEND_SENS MID_MOT_PH MID_MOT_REM(ROL) MID_MOT_CLK MID_MOT_PD ASIST_CL1 24V2 PICK_SOL1_REM PICK_SOL1_RET LED_5V GND CAS1_EMPTY_SENS LED_5V GND CAS1_LIFT_UP_SENS 5V CAS1_P0_SENS GND 24V2 PICK_SOL2_REM PICK_SOL2_RET LED_5V GND CAS2_EMPTY_SENS LED_5V GND CAS2_LIFT_UP_SENS 5V CAS2_P0_SENS GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 COM ACT RET 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V Vout GND COM ACT RET 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V Vout GND PUSOL1 PS1 YC12 ASIST_CL2 24V2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1 ASCL2 Relay YC4 FEED_CL1_REM 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 LS1 FS1 PUSOL2 PS2 LS2 FS2 24V2 FEED_CL2_REM 24V2 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 PFCL1 PFCL2 Connector holder 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 3 YC3 CAS1_LNG1 CAS1_LNG2 GND CAS1_LNG3 CAS1_WID GND CAS2_LNG1 CAS2_LNG2 GND CAS2_LNG3 CAS2_WID GND LIFT_MOT1_RET LIFT_MOT1_DR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 SW1 SW2 COM SW3 SW1 SW2 COM SW3 Relay PLSW1 PWSW1 PLSW2 PWSW2 LM1 LM2 Relay Relay YC6 Relay LED_5V GND FEED2_SENS COVER_OPEN GND 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 5V GND Vout PCS PCCSW LIFT_MOT2_RET LIFT_MOT2_DR Connector holder Lower guide unit 15 16 1 2 2 1 2 1 LED_5V GND CAS1_QUANT1 LED_5V GND CAS1_QUANT2 LED_ 5V GND CAS2_QUANT1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 Relay 3 2 1 6 5 4 Relay 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout 5V GND Vout PGS1(U) PGS1(L) PGS2(U) PGS2(L) EPWB FPWB2 LED_5V GND CAS2_QUANT2 2-4-23 .2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.

3V2 YC6 TM-Y SRS-Y GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connector holder 11 12 Connector holder 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 6 5 6 +24V1 TMOT_Y_DR +24V1 TMOT_C_DR +24V1 TMOT_M_DR +24V1 TMOT_Bk_DR 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 12 DLP_Y_GAIN DLP_Y_CW/CCW DLP_Y_LD DLP_Y_CLK DLP_Y_S/S PGND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TM-C SRS-C GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 DLP_C_GAIN DLP_C_CW/CCW DLP_C_LD DLP_C_CLK DLP_C_S/S PGND +24V1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Relay 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 GND ENCODE_Y +5V GND ENCODE_C +5V YC7 DLP_M_GAIN DLP_M_CW/CCW DLP_M_LD DLP_M_CLK DLP_M_S/S PGND +24V1 1 2 1 2 6 5 1 2 2 1 Relay 1 2 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 DEVM-MCY CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V TM-M SRS-M GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 YC22 GND ENCODE_M +5V GND ENCODE_K +5V 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 LVU_FAN +24V1 PSFM DLP_BK_GAIN DLP_BK_CW/CCW DLP_BK_LD DLP_BK_CLK DLP_BK_S/S PGND +24V1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 TM-K SRS-K GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 10 11 12 Relay 3 4 5 6 DEVM-K CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V 3 2 1 2-4-24 .8 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) YC4 NC NC NC NC DRM_C_BRAKE _ DRM C_GAIN DRM_C_CW/CCW DRM_C_LD DRM_C_CLK DRM_C_S/S PGND +24V1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 YC3 TRCM +24V GND START/STOP CLOCK LD CW/CCW 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 +24V1 GND ICL_MOT _ _REM _ ICL MOT_CLK ICL_MOT_RDY ICL_MOT_DIR YC9 YC3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MOT_CLK MOT_SDO MOT_SEL MOT_SDI MOT_RDY EMERGENCY BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_M DRM_INDEX_C CRM CRS GND SIG 5V 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 RLS_MOT_DR +24V1 GND RLS_SENS +5V MOT_CLK MOT_SDO MOT_SEL MOT_SDI MOT_RDY EMERGENCY BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_M DRM_INDEX_C Connector holder Connector holder DCM 2 1 Relay 1 2 DCS TRBLS GND SIG 5V GND SIG 5V TH OUT GND 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 Relay A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 ZIG_MOT_DR_CCW ZIG_MOT_DR_CW GND BLT_INDEX +5V GND ZIG_SENS +5V GND BLT_SPEED +5V TEMP ZIG_REV_SENS GND +5V +3.3V 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 12 11 10 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC27 EEP_SDA2 GND EEP_SCL2 3.3V2 EEP_SCL2 EEP_SDA2 GND A0 A1 DRM_INDEX_Y GND GND +5V +5V BLT_BRAKE BLT_VM BLT_REM MOT_DATA_SET DRM_ON BLT_FG 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 DRM_INDEX_Y GND GND +5V +5V BLT_BRAKE BLT_VM BLT_REM MOT_DATA_SET DRM_ON BLT_FG NC NC NC NC DRM_Y_BRAKE DRM_Y_GAIN DRM_Y_CW/CCW DRM_Y_LD DRM_Y_CLK DRM_Y_S/S PGND +24V1 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 YC5 NC NC NC NC DRM_BK_BRAKE DRM_BK_GAIN DRM_BK_CW/CCW DRM_BK_LD DRM_BK_CLK DRM_BK_S/S PGND +24V1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 DRM-K 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V DES Relay TRPWB +3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V EEP_SCL EEP_SDA GND A0 A1 EPWB MCPWB NC NC NC NC DRM_M_BRAKE DRM_M_GAIN DRM_M_CW/CCW DRM_M_LD DRM_M_CLK DRM_M_S/S PGND +24V1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 DRM-MCY 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V RFPWB YC1 SDA GND SCL +3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.8 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC4 NC NC NC NC DRM_C_BRAKE _ DRM C_GAIN DRM_C_CW/CCW DRM_C_LD DRM_C_CLK DRM_C_S/S PGND +24V1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 YC3 TRCM +24V GND START/STOP CLOCK LD CW/CCW 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 +24V1 GND ICL_MOT _ _REM _ ICL MOT_CLK ICL_MOT_RDY ICL_MOT_DIR DRM-C 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V YC9 YC3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MOT_CLK MOT_SDO MOT_SEL MOT_SDI MOT_RDY EMERGENCY BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_M DRM_INDEX_C CRM CRS GND SIG 5V 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 RLS_MOT_DR +24V1 GND RLS_SENS +5V MOT_CLK MOT_SDO MOT_SEL MOT_SDI MOT_RDY EMERGENCY BLT_SPEED BLT_INDEX DRM_INDEX_BK DRM_INDEX_M DRM_INDEX_C Connector holder Connector holder DCM 2 1 Relay 1 2 DCS TRBLS GND SIG 5V GND SIG 5V TH OUT GND 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 Relay A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 ZIG_MOT_DR_CCW ZIG_MOT_DR_CW GND BLT_INDEX +5V GND ZIG_SENS +5V GND BLT_SPEED +5V TEMP ZIG_REV_SENS GND +5V +3.3V2 EEP_SCL2 EEP_SDA2 GND A0 A1 DRM_INDEX_Y GND GND +5V +5V BLT_BRAKE BLT_VM BLT_REM MOT_DATA_SET DRM_ON BLT_FG 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 DRM_INDEX_Y GND GND +5V +5V BLT_BRAKE BLT_VM BLT_REM MOT_DATA_SET DRM_ON BLT_FG NC NC NC NC DRM_Y_BRAKE DRM_Y_GAIN DRM_Y_CW/CCW DRM_Y_LD DRM_Y_CLK DRM_Y_S/S PGND +24V1 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 DRM-Y 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V YC5 NC NC NC NC DRM_BK_BRAKE DRM_BK_GAIN DRM_BK_CW/CCW DRM_BK_LD DRM_BK_CLK DRM_BK_S/S PGND +24V1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 DRM-K 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V DES Relay TRPWB +3.3V2 YC6 TM-Y SRS-Y GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connector holder 11 12 Connector holder 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 6 5 6 +24V1 TMOT_Y_DR +24V1 TMOT_C_DR +24V1 TMOT_M_DR +24V1 TMOT_Bk_DR 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 12 DLP_Y_GAIN DLP_Y_CW/CCW DLP_Y_LD DLP_Y_CLK DLP_Y_S/S PGND +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TM-C SRS-C GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 DLP_C_GAIN DLP_C_CW/CCW DLP_C_LD DLP_C_CLK DLP_C_S/S PGND +24V1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Relay 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 GND ENCODE_Y +5V GND ENCODE_C +5V YC7 DLP_M_GAIN DLP_M_CW/CCW DLP_M_LD DLP_M_CLK DLP_M_S/S PGND +24V1 1 2 1 2 6 5 1 2 2 1 Relay 1 2 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 DEVM-MCY CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V TM-M SRS-M GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 2 1 YC22 GND ENCODE_M +5V GND ENCODE_K +5V 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 LVU_FAN +24V1 PSFM DLP_BK_GAIN DLP_BK_CW/CCW DLP_BK_LD DLP_BK_CLK DLP_BK_S/S PGND +24V1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 TM-K SRS-K GND SIG 5V 1 2 3 2 1 Relay 2 1 1 2 Relay 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 10 11 12 Relay 3 4 5 6 DEVM-K CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V 3 2 1 2-4-25 .3V EEP_SCL EEP_SDA GND A0 A1 EPWB MCPWB NC NC NC NC DRM_M_BRAKE DRM_M_GAIN DRM_M_CW/CCW DRM_M_LD DRM_M_CLK DRM_M_S/S PGND +24V1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 DRM-M 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 CW/CCW LD CLOCK START/STOP GND +24V RFPWB YC1 SDA GND SCL +3.3V 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 12 11 10 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC27 EEP_SDA2 GND EEP_SCL2 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.9 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) YC15 +24V1 N.C +24V2 1 2 3 1 2 3 PCUSW To FPWB2 3 2 1 1 2 3 YC17 5V1 GND CURRENT_MONI TB1 LIVE IN 1 #250 1 #250 1 1 From Inlet 2 HVPWB2 YC2 TR +24V2 GND 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 TB2 LIVE OUT 1 YC16 +24V2 GND CRPWB YC5 POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM GND 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM GND FSR_RELAY_REM YC14 YC10 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 To Paper feeder 1 2 To Document finisher 1 5 YC1 T1_CLR_OFF_REM T1_CNT1 T1_CNT2 T1_CNT3 T1_CNT4 FB_CNT T2_REM SP_REM T2_CNT SP_CNT SGND SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC8 T1_CLR_OFF_REM T1_CNT1 T1_CNT2 T1_CNT3 T1_CNT4 FB_CNT T2_REM SP_REM T2_CNT SP_CNT SGND SGND YC1 GND +5V GND +12V GND GND +24V1 +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC3 GND +5V GND +12V GND GND +24V1 +24V1 YC4 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC9 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND To ISCPWB 3 4 3 4 2 4 YC13 GND GND 3.3V2 YC3 YC16 YC1 DISCHARGE_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CLK_Y MAIN_IDC_Y DC_MAIN_CNT_Y DC_MAIN_REM AC_MAIN_CLK SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DC_REC_CNT AC_MAG_CLK_Y AC_MAG_CNT_Y DISCHARGE_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CLK_Y MAIN_IDC_Y DC_MAIN_CNT_Y DC_MAIN_REM AC_MAIN_CLK SGND IH_NEUTRAL NC IH_LIVE 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 To IHPWB 2 FPWB1 YC2 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_C MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAG_REM AC_SLV_CLK_C DC_SLV_CNT_C DC_MAG_CNT_C AC_SLV_CNT_C AC_MAIN_CNT_C DISCHARGE_C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_C MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAG_REM AC_SLV_CLK_C DC_SLV_CNT_C DC_MAG_CNT_C AC_SLV_CNT_C AC_MAIN_CNT_C DISCHARGE_C AC_MAG_CNT_C AC_MAG_CLK_C DC_REC_REM NC DH_LIVE TB3 1 #110 1 4 2 1 DH_LIVE MSW_IN MSW_OUT MSW YC1 MSW_OUT MSW_IN 1 2 1 1 2 #250 1 #250 1 2 To CRPWB 1 AC_LIVE TB1 LIVE TB2 NEUTRAL 1 Inlet AC_NEUTRAL PSPWB EPWB YC4 DH_LIVE_OUT DH_LIVE_IN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 YC17 YC3 DISCHARGE_M AC_MAIN_CNT_M AC_SLV_CNT_M DC_MAG_CNT_M DC_SLV_CNT_M AC_SLV_CLK_M MAIN_IDC_M DC_MAIN_CNT_M SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 AC_MAG_CLK_M AC_MAG_CNT_M DISCHARGE_M AC_MAIN_CNT_M AC_SLV_CNT_M DC_MAG_CNT_M DC_SLV_CNT_M AC_SLV_CLK_M MAIN_IDC_M DC_MAIN_CNT_M SGND YC2 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC8 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND YC5 DH_LIVE DH_LIVE NC NC DH_NEUTRAL DH_NEUTRAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 CH CH MCPWB SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk MAIN_IDC_Bk _ AC MAIN_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CLK_Bk DC_SLV_CNT_Bk DC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CNT_Bk DISCHARGE_Bk 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk MAIN_IDC_Bk _ AC MAIN_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CLK_Bk DC_SLV_CNT_Bk DC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CNT_Bk DISCHARGE_Bk AC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_MAG_CLK_Bk YC13 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND PGND YC6 DH_LIVE DH_NEUTRAL 1 2 1 2 3 1 To Paper feeder 2 YC4 DV +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC5 MC +24V1 PGND 1 2 1 2 HVPWB1 2-4-26 .3V3 3.3V3 3.3V2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 YC26 GND GND 3.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V2 YC3 YC1 DC_REC_CNT AC_MAG_CLK_Y AC_MAG_CNT_Y DISCHARGE_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CLK_Y MAIN_IDC_Y DC_MAIN_CNT_Y DC_MAIN_REM AC_MAIN_CLK SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC16 DC_REC_CNT AC_MAG_CLK_Y AC_MAG_CNT_Y DISCHARGE_Y AC_MAIN_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CNT_Y DC_MAG_CNT_Y DC_SLV_CNT_Y AC_SLV_CLK_Y MAIN_IDC_Y DC_MAIN_CNT_Y DC_MAIN_REM AC_MAIN_CLK SGND IH_NEUTRAL NC IH_LIVE 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 To IHPWB 2 FPWB1 TB4 NEUTRAL TB3 LIVE YC2 MSW IN IH_LIVE 1 2 1 #110 1 4 2 1 DH_LIVE MSW_IN MSW_OUT YC2 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_C MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAG_REM AC_SLV_CLK_C DC_SLV_CNT_C DC_MAG_CNT_C AC_SLV_CNT_C AC_MAIN_CNT_C DISCHARGE_C AC_MAG_CNT_C AC_MAG_CLK_C DC_REC_REM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_C MAIN_IDC_C DC_MAG_REM AC_SLV_CLK_C DC_SLV_CNT_C DC_MAG_CNT_C AC_SLV_CNT_C AC_MAIN_CNT_C DISCHARGE_C AC_MAG_CNT_C AC_MAG_CLK_C DC_REC_REM NC YC5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 NEUTRAL_OUT NEUTRAL_IN LIVE_OUT LIVE_IN DH_LIVE TB5 MSW YC1 MSW_OUT MSW_IN 1 2 1 1 2 #250 1 #250 1 2 To CRPWB 1 AC_LIVE TB1 LIVE TB2 NEUTRAL 1 Inlet AC_NEUTRAL PSPWB EPWB YC7 DH_LIVE_OUT DH_LIVE_IN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 YC3 AC_MAG_CLK_M AC_MAG_CNT_M DISCHARGE_M AC_MAIN_CNT_M AC_SLV_CNT_M DC_MAG_CNT_M DC_SLV_CNT_M AC_SLV_CLK_M MAIN_IDC_M DC_MAIN_CNT_M SGND NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC17 AC_MAG_CLK_M AC_MAG_CNT_M DISCHARGE_M AC_MAIN_CNT_M AC_SLV_CNT_M DC_MAG_CNT_M DC_SLV_CNT_M AC_SLV_CLK_M MAIN_IDC_M DC_MAIN_CNT_M SGND YC2 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC11 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND YC8 DH_LIVE DH_LIVE NC NC DH_NEUTRAL DH_NEUTRAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 CH CH YC4 YC4 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk MAIN_IDC_Bk _ AC MAIN_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CLK_Bk DC_SLV_CNT_Bk DC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CNT_Bk DISCHARGE_Bk AC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_MAG_CLK_Bk 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 SGND DC_MAIN_CNT_Bk MAIN_IDC_Bk _ AC MAIN_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CLK_Bk DC_SLV_CNT_Bk DC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_SLV_CNT_Bk DISCHARGE_Bk AC_MAG_CNT_Bk AC_MAG_CLK_Bk MCPWB LIVE NC NEUTRAL 1 2 3 YC16 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND PGND YC9 DH_LIVE DH_NEUTRAL 1 2 1 2 3 1 To Paper feeder 2 YC5 DV +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC6 MC +24V1 PGND 1 2 1 2 HVPWB1 2-4-27 .3V2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 YC26 GND GND 3.3V3 3.C +24V2 1 2 3 1 2 3 PCUSW To FPWB2 3 2 1 1 2 3 YC17 5V1 GND CURRENT_MONI TB1 LIVE IN 1 #250 1 #250 1 1 From Inlet 2 HVPWB2 YC2 TR +24V2 GND 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 TB2 LIVE OUT 1 YC16 +24V2 GND CRPWB YC5 POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM GND 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 POWER_OFF DRM_HEAT_REM GND FSR_RELAY_REM YC17 YC13 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 To Paper feeder 1 2 To Document finisher 1 5 YC1 T1_CLR_OFF_REM T1_CNT1 T1_CNT2 T1_CNT3 T1_CNT4 FB_CNT T2_REM SP_REM T2_CNT SP_CNT SGND SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC8 T1_CLR_OFF_REM T1_CNT1 T1_CNT2 T1_CNT3 T1_CNT4 FB_CNT T2_REM SP_REM T2_CNT SP_CNT SGND SGND YC1 GND +5V GND +12V GND GND +24V1 +24V1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC3 GND +5V GND +12V GND GND +24V1 +24V1 YC4 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC12 +24V1 +24V1 +24V1 +12V GND GND GND GND To ISCPWB 3 4 3 4 2 4 YC13 GND GND 3.9 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC15 +24V1 N.3V3 3.

3V 3.3V GND HP_SW YC5 SM A B A/ B/ 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 SMOT AP SMOT BP SMOT AN SMOT BN YC7 +24V1 GND GND GND +24V1_2 +24V1_2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 From PSPWB 4 5 PSPWB YC14 12V1 12V1 12V1 12V1 GND GND GND GND 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC12 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24V2 24V2 24V2 Reserve GND GND GND Reserve DP_OPEN DP_SI DP_SO DP_CLK DP_SEL DP_RDY DP_TMG GND(SPARE) YC24 +12V +12V +12V +12V GND GND GND GND DPMPWB (option) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 From DPRPWB 2-4-28 .3V VCLKB VSYNCB HSYNCB MREB GND DRB0 DRB1 DRB2 DRB3 DRB4 DRB5 DRB6 DRB7 GND DGB0 DGB1 DGB2 DGB3 DGB4 DGB5 DGB6 DGB7 GND DBB0 DBB1 DBB2 DBB3 DBB4 DBB5 DBB6 DBB7 HHALF SLEEP TWS_DET GND LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10 LA11 LA12 LA13 LA14 LA15 LA16 LA17 GND LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 GND INT RESETZ GND CEZ WEZ OEZ SCLKIN 3.3V 3.3V GND DPRPWB GND A+ AGND BB+ GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC1 GND TXP TXN GND RXN RXP GND YC13 OSS GND ORGSW 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +5.3V GND 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC11 +5.3V 3.3V GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V GND ACT GND 12V 12V 12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 YC27 3 2 1 3 2 1 GND +5V_HDD GND ISCPWB HDD1 YC2 GND HTPDN LOCKN GND RX0N RX0P GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC14 ODSW 3.3V 3.3V VCLKB VSYNCB HSYNCB MREB GND DRB0 DRB1 DRB2 DRB3 DRB4 DRB5 DRB6 DRB7 GND DGB0 DGB1 DGB2 DGB3 DGB4 DGB5 DGB6 DGB7 GND DBB0 DBB1 DBB2 DBB3 DBB4 DBB5 DBB6 DBB7 HHALF SLEEP TWS_DET GND LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10 LA11 LA12 LA13 LA14 LA15 LA16 LA17 GND LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 GND INT RESETZ GND CEZ WEZ OEZ SCLKIN 3.3V GND HPSW 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 5 6 4 5 6 +3.1V GND +10V GND +3.3V 3.3V 3.10 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model) YC2 GND(AFE_SHP) CLPIN GND(AFE_SHD) MCLK GND CCDSEL GND TXCLK1P TXCLK1N GND TXOUTC1P TXOUTC1N GND TXOUTB1P TXOUTB1N GND TXOUTC2P TXOUTC2N GND TXOUTB2P TXOUTB2N GND TXOUTA2P TXOUTA2N GND SCLK SDI SENB SDO SH TG GND RS GND CP GND CCDCLK2 GND CCDCLK1 GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC9 GND(AFE_SHP) CLPIN GND(AFE_SHD) AFE_MCLK GND CCDSEL GND DIS_CISCKN DIS_CISCKP GND DIS_CIS_5N DIS_CIS_5P GND DIS_CIS_4N DIS_CIS_4P GND DIS_CIS_3N DIS_CIS_3P GND DIS_CIS_2N DIS_CIS_2P GND DIS_CIS_1N DIS_CIS_1P GND AFECLK AFE_SO AFE_EN AFE_SI SH TG GND(Mono/Color) RS GND CP GND CCDCLK2 GND CCDCLK1 GND MPWB YC4 GND HTPDN LOCKN GND TX0N TX0P GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC25 GND HTPDN LOCKN GND TX0N TX0P GND YC2 YC10 GND GND 3.3V GND CO_SW To DPDPWB YC8 HPS 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 YC4 GND GND 3.3V 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V 3.1V GND +10V GND +3.1V ORG_SW GND YC6 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +24V1 +24V1 POW PWM PGND SGND VSET SCL SDA FAIL +5V LEDPWB 3.3V 3.3V GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND TXP TXN GND RXN RXP GND YC3 SC_CLK SC_SO SC_SI SC_BSY SC_HLDN SC_DIR SC_IRN GND(SPARE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC11 SC_CLK SC_SO SC_SI SC_BSY SC_HLDN SC_DIR SC_IRN GND(SPARE) CCDPWB YC32 3 2 1 GND +5V_HDD GND YC1 +5.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V GND COSW 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +3.

3V GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V GND ACT GND 12V 12V 12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 YC27 3 2 1 3 2 1 GND +5V_HDD GND ISCPWB HDD1 YC2 GND HTPDN LOCKN GND RX0N RX0P GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC14 ODSW 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.1V GND +10V GND +3.3V GND HP_SW YC5 SM A B A/ B/ 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 SMOT AP SMOT BP SMOT AN SMOT BN YC7 +24V1 GND GND GND +24V1_2 +24V1_2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 From PSPWB 4 5 PSPWB YC14 12V1 12V1 12V1 12V1 GND GND GND GND 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 YC12 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24V2 24V2 24V2 Reserve GND GND GND Reserve DP_OPEN DP_SI DP_SO DP_CLK DP_SEL DP_RDY DP_TMG GND(SPARE) YC24 +12V +12V +12V +12V GND GND GND GND DPMPWB (option) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 From DPRPWB 2-4-29 .3V 3.3V VCLKB VSYNCB HSYNCB MREB GND DRB0 DRB1 DRB2 DRB3 DRB4 DRB5 DRB6 DRB7 GND DGB0 DGB1 DGB2 DGB3 DGB4 DGB5 DGB6 DGB7 GND DBB0 DBB1 DBB2 DBB3 DBB4 DBB5 DBB6 DBB7 HHALF SLEEP TWS_DET GND LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10 LA11 LA12 LA13 LA14 LA15 LA16 LA17 GND LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 GND INT RESETZ GND CEZ WEZ OEZ SCLKIN 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V GND 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC11 +5.3V GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V GND ACT GND 12V 12V 12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 YC32 3 2 1 3 2 1 GND +5V_HDD GND HDD2 YC1 +5.3V GND HPSW 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 5 6 4 5 6 +3.3V 3.1V GND +10V GND +3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V GND COSW 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +3.3V 3.10 (45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC2 GND(AFE_SHP) CLPIN GND(AFE_SHD) MCLK GND CCDSEL GND TXCLK1P TXCLK1N GND TXOUTC1P TXOUTC1N GND TXOUTB1P TXOUTB1N GND TXOUTC2P TXOUTC2N GND TXOUTB2P TXOUTB2N GND TXOUTA2P TXOUTA2N GND SCLK SDI SENB SDO SH TG GND RS GND CP GND CCDCLK2 GND CCDCLK1 GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC9 GND(AFE_SHP) CLPIN GND(AFE_SHD) AFE_MCLK GND CCDSEL GND DIS_CISCKN DIS_CISCKP GND DIS_CIS_5N DIS_CIS_5P GND DIS_CIS_4N DIS_CIS_4P GND DIS_CIS_3N DIS_CIS_3P GND DIS_CIS_2N DIS_CIS_2P GND DIS_CIS_1N DIS_CIS_1P GND AFECLK AFE_SO AFE_EN AFE_SI SH TG GND(Mono/Color) RS GND CP GND CCDCLK2 GND CCDCLK1 GND MPWB YC4 GND HTPDN LOCKN GND TX0N TX0P GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC25 GND HTPDN LOCKN GND TX0N TX0P GND YC2 YC10 GND GND 3.2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 YC4 GND GND 3.3V 3.3V GND GND GND A+ AGND BB+ GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND TXP TXN GND RXN RXP GND YC3 SC_CLK SC_SO SC_SI SC_BSY SC_HLDN SC_DIR SC_IRN GND(SPARE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC11 SC_CLK SC_SO SC_SI SC_BSY SC_HLDN SC_DIR SC_IRN GND(SPARE) CCDPWB 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V VCLKB VSYNCB HSYNCB MREB GND DRB0 DRB1 DRB2 DRB3 DRB4 DRB5 DRB6 DRB7 GND DGB0 DGB1 DGB2 DGB3 DGB4 DGB5 DGB6 DGB7 GND DBB0 DBB1 DBB2 DBB3 DBB4 DBB5 DBB6 DBB7 HHALF SLEEP TWS_DET GND LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10 LA11 LA12 LA13 LA14 LA15 LA16 LA17 GND LD0 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 GND INT RESETZ GND CEZ WEZ OEZ SCLKIN 3.1V ORG_SW GND YC6 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +24V1 +24V1 POW PWM PGND SGND VSET SCL SDA FAIL +5V LEDPWB 3.3V GND CO_SW To DPDPWB YC8 HPS 3.3V GND DPRPWB GND A+ AGND BB+ GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC1 GND TXP TXN GND RXN RXP GND YC13 OSS GND ORGSW 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +5.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.3V 3. PHS DCD N.C.3V 3.3V 3.11 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model/45 ppm model/55 ppm model) CN1 SGND SGND CK SGND SGND SC R0(LSB) R1 R2 SGND R3 R4 R5(MSB) SGND G0(LSB) G1 G2 SGND G3 G4 G5(MSB) SGND B0(LSB) B1 B2 SGND B3 B4 B5(MSB) SGND H_SYNC SGND V_SYNC SGND ENB CM 3.3V 3.3V YC7 KMDET NC KMDREQ KMACK KMRXD SGND KMTXD SGND SGND SGND +5V +5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN1 KMDET NC KMDREQ KMACK KMRXD SGND KMTXD SGND SGND SGND +5V +5V CN2 FG PHS TXD SGND PHS DTR 5V OUT PHS RTS N.3V 3.3V 3.3V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC4 SGND SGND CK SGND SGND SC R0(LSB) R1 R2 SGND R3 R4 R5(MSB) SGND G0(LSB) G1 G2 SGND G3 G4 G5(MSB) SGND B0(LSB) B1 B2 SGND B3 B4 B5(MSB) SGND H_SYNC SGND V_SYNC SGND ENB CM 3. PHS RXD SGND PHS DSR PHS RI PHS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 3 13 16 18 7 15 5 19 11 14 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 17 20 1 3 13 16 18 7 15 5 19 11 14 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 17 20 FG TXD SGND DTR 5V RTS DCD RXD SGND DSR RI CTS NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC KMAS KMASPWB CN3 GND TXD DTR RTS DCD RXD DSR CTS RI NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC11 VO2 VO1 1 2 1 2 2 1 Relay 1 2 + - Speaker YC5 TD1+ TD1TD2+ TD2CT1 CT2 TD3+ TD3TD4+ TD4GRLED_A1 GRLED_K1 YWLED_A2 YWLED_K2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 KMAS (option) YC1 +5V +5V +5V GND GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Relay 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC30 +5V +5V +5V GND GND GND Ethernet LCD YC3 SGND PANEL_STATUS INT_POWERKEY_N PANEL RESET AUDIO LIGHTOFF_POWERON SHUT_DOWN LED_PROCESSING_N LED_ATTENTION_N LED_MEMORY_N SUPND_POWER ENERGY_SAVE DEEP_POWERON SECOND_TRAY_SW GND 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 13 12 2 3 11 4 10 5 9 6 8 7 Relay 7 8 6 9 5 10 4 11 3 2 12 1 13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC12 SGND PANEL_STATUS INT_POWERKEY_N PANEL RESET AUDIO LIGHTOFF_POWERON SHUT_DOWN LED_PROCESSING_N LED_ATTENTION_N LED_MEMORY_N SUPND_POWER ENERGY_SAVE DEEP_POWERON YC16 GND D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 /CE1 A10 /OE A9 A8 A7 VCC A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D0 D1 D2 WP /CD2 /CD1 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 /CE2 /VS1 /IORD /IOWD /WE RDY/BSY VCC CSEL VS2 RESET /WAIT INPACK /REG BVD2 BVD1 D8 D9 D10 GND Lock Pin(1) Lock Pin(2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 YC14 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 LED_A NC LED_C NC YC20 VBUS DATADATA+ GND LockPin1 LockPin2 LockPin3 LockPin4 1 2 3 4 LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 YC5 Touch panel TOP LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 BOT YLEFT X+ TOP Y+ RIGHT X- Type A+B YC1 SCAN4 KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 SCAN0 SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 LED2 LED3 LED4 GND 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 YC7 SCAN4 KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 SCAN0 SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 LED2 LED3 LED4 GND YC2 VBUS DN DP ID GND LockPin(1) LockPin(2) LockPin(3) LockPin(4) 1 2 3 4 5 LP-1 LP-2 LP-3 LP-4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 LP_1 LP_2 LP_3 YC17 VBUS DATA DATA + NC GND LockPin(1) LockPin(2) LockPin(3) YC23 +12V GND 1 2 2 1 CF card CONFM YC31 CD/DAT3 CMD VSS VDD CLK VSS DAT0 DAT1 DAT2 CD COMMON WP LockPin(1) LockPin(2) LockPin(3) LockPin(4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC21 YC1 KEY4 SCAN2 INT_POWERKEY_N SCAN1 LED1 SUPND_POWER KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 LED0 KEY0 SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN0 GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 YC6 KEY4 SCAN2 INT_POWERKEY_N SCAN1 LED1 SUPND_POWER KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 LED0 KEY0 SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN0 GND GND GND GND GND GND USB host VBUS DATA DATA + GND 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 LP1 LP2 LP3 VBUS DATADATA+ NC GND LockPin1 LockPin2 LockPin3 SD card OPWB3 YC8 PROCESSING_LED MEMORY LED ATTENTION_LED GND 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 YC1 PROCESSING_LED MEMORY LED ATTENTION_LED GND MPWB OPWB2 OPWB1 2-4-30 .C.

2LK/2LN/2LM/2LC No.12 (30 ppm model/35 ppm model/45 ppm model/55 ppm model) YC2 YC8 VBUS1 USB_DN1 USB_DP1 GND AUDIO1 WAKEUP1 RESET1 GND VBUS0 USB_DN0 USB_DP0 GND AUDIO0 WAKEUP0 RESET0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FCPWB 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 VBUS USB_DN USB_DP GND NC NC GND NC NC GND NC NC NC AUDIO WAKEUP GND VDD5_CUT RESETN GND VDD5 YC3 VBUS1 USB_DN1 USB_DP1 GND AUDIO1 WAKEUP1 RESET1 GND VBUS0 USB_DN0 USB_DP0 GND AUDIO0 WAKEUP0 RESET0 YC9 5V_CUT1 GND 5V GND 5V_CUT0 GND 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC4 5V_CUT1 GND 5V GND 5V_CUT0 GND VBUS1 USB_DN1 USB_DP1 GND NC NC GND NC NC GND NC NC NC AUDIO1 WAKEUP GND VDD5_CUT1 RESETN1 GND VDD5 YC1 VBUS0 USB_DN0 USB_DP0 GND NC NC GND NC NC GND NC NC NC AUDIO0 WAKEUP0 GND VDD5_CUT0 RESETN0 GND VDD5 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FCPWB VBUS USB_DN USB_DP GND NC NC GND NC NC GND NC NC NC AUDIO WAKEUP GND VDD5_CUT RESETN GND VDD5 IFPWB MPWB YC9 12V 12V SGND SGND SDI SDICLK SGND SDO SDOCLK SGND 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC2 12V 12V SGND SGND SDI SDICLK SGND SDO SDOCLK SGND FIRPWB YC3 HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND TCLKP TCLKN SGND TCP TCN SGND TBP TBN SGND TAP TAN SGND SLEEP HLD_ENG NC SGND EG IRN EG SO EG SBSY EG SDIR EG_SI EG_SCLK SGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC46 HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND TCLKP TCLKN SGND TCP TCN SGND TBP TBN SGND TAP TAN SGND SLEEP HLD_ENG NC SGND EG IRN EG SO EG SBSY EG SDIR EG_SI EG_SCLK SGND YC47 HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND VCLK_P VCLK_N SGND CH3_P CH3_N SGND CH2_P CH2_N SGND CH1_P CH1_N NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 YC4 HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND VCLK_P VCLK_N SGND CH3_P CH3_N SGND CH2_P CH2_N SGND CH1_P CH1_N NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC YC3 HSYNC_AN HSYNC_AP HSYNC_BN HSYNC_BP HSYNC_CN HSYNC_CP HSYNC_DN HSYNC_DP VSYNC_AN VSYNC_AP VSYNC_BN VSYNC_BP VSYNC_CN VSYNC_CP VSYNC_DN VSYNC_DP SGND TCLKP TCLKN SGND TCP TCN SGND TBP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FIERY CONTROLLER EPWB YC5 TRP1+ TRP1TRP2+ TRP2TRP3+ TRP3TRP4+ TRP41 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-4-31 .

1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT PROCESSOR .

............ M3 × 8 screw*1 ..... 힌지커버 우 *1 ............ Carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP*1 ..........1 D............................................................. 나사 M4×14TP .................. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 ...............5 mm) ...... 나사 M3×8BLACK*1 ..... Label “Operation procedure” ........ 1 C*..1 N.............. 1 G............................... Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 ... Stift ........ Caution label “Original face up!”........................................................................................... DP ケーブルカバー ....... Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” .....................8 H.... Tornillo M3 × 8*1 .. Couvercle de charnière gauche*1 .... 1 B....1 D................. Winkeleinstellbefestigung.. DP ................................. 8 H.................................................................... 2 *1: DP-771 only Français Pièces fournies A....... 1 M...... Cubierta del cable del DP............... Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ..........................2 *1: 仅限 DP-771 (K) 和 (L) 并非附属品。 I........ Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...... 2 (DP-770) 1 (DP-771) K.... DP ........... 1 G.......................... 1 F.................1 (DP-771) J..................... M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ................. 8 H............... Couvercle du câble du DP .2(DP-770) 1(DP-771) I...... 1 B.................... 1 E.......... Accessorio di regolazione angolare ....................................1 *: für metrische Angaben **: für Angaben in Zoll L...................... 左部铰链盖板 *1 ....................... Vite M4 × 14TP ............................... 1 E..................固定金具 (45mm 幅 )*1 ......................2 *1: nur DP-771 Italiano Parti di fornitura A....... 힌지커버 좌 *1 ........................................................... 1 C...........................5mm) ..................................................Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1..........................1 *: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico **: per specifiche in pollici L....... 1 D................ Original mat........ 1 D......................................................................... Schild “Funktionsanweisung” ........ 1 M................ 1 C*.... Goupille ........ 1 F....................... Vite M3 × 8 NERA*1 .. 1 J........... 1 C.............Herraje de fijación (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ..................... 1 C........................... 1 C*.......... M4×14TP 螺钉 ..........1 N...............固定附件 ( 宽 45mm) *1 ... 1 B...... 원고매트.............. 1 C........................... 1 B............1 G..*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ............. Coperchio del cavo DP ....... M4 × 14TP screw ..................... 销 .... DP-Kabelabdeckung ........................................................... 1 * : pour des spécifications métriques ** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes L............................................ 原稿マット...................D B F G C C* M K* K** A L H I J E N English Supplied parts A...................... 1 *: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico **: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas L............... 固定金具 (38................................................ ビス M3×8*1 ............. 8 H........................... DP 中継基板 *1 ...... ヒンジカバー左 *1 ......고정쇠 (45mm 폭 ) *1 ..................................1 D........................... ビス M4×14TP .. 1 I............ ヒンジカバー右 *1 .................... 1 C........................................................... 1 F........... 日本語 同梱品 A.....................................................................5 mm) ..................................... Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” . 1 N............... Herraje de fijación (anchura: 38.......................................................... 1 I... Couvercle de charnière droite*1 .......... DP 本体 .1 N................ 1 M............. DP 中继板 *1 ........1 E...................1 M..............2 (DP-770) 1 (DP-771) C*.................................... 2(DP-770) 1(DP-771) 한국어 동봉품 A......................................................... DP 电缆盖板 ...... DP 케이블커버 ....................5 mm).... Fixation d’angle ................ Pasador...... Vite M3 × 8*1 ..5mm 幅 ) ........................... 原稿垫........................... Pin .. 2 *1: DP-771 uniquement Español Partes suministradas A....................................... 8 H............................................. 1 K........ DP .......... Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38..................1 C*....... M3×8 螺 *1 .... DP 본체............................ Fixation (largeur: 38...... 1 G.................... M4 × 14TP Schraube ............ 1 N.... M3 × 8 screw BLACK*1 .... 2 (DP-770) 1 (DP-771) J............. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ............. Angle control fitting...................... 固定附件 ( 宽 38................. 1 C................... 1 C*.. DP cable cover.. 2 *1: DP-771 solamente Deutsch Gelieferte Teile A.................... Alfombrilla para originales............... Originalmatte................. M3 × 8*1 .......................................... Tappetino originale ..............2 (DP-770) ........................ Fixing fitting (width: 38............ 1 C................. Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” ...................... 2 *1:DP-771 のみ (K)(L) は、 同梱されていない。 1 .... 1 F........................ 1 G....................... 1 B...................... Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38... 1 B....... M3×8 螺丝 BLACK*1 ....... 1 I.................. DP.............. 1 D............. 1 F....... 1 E................... 2(DP-770) 1(DP-771) J...................................................... Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ............... 1 E...5 mm).... Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” .................1 C*............................... 角度控制附件 ........... Plaque d’original .. 1 I....... 1 E........ 8 H.... 1 B........................................... Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” ............2 (DP-770) 1 (DP-771) J.... Tornillo TP M4 × 14 ............. 1 D. Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation........ Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .......................1 J..... DP 중계기판 *1 .............................................. 角度規制金具 ..2 *1: Solo DP-771 简体中文 附属品 A........................ Right hinge cover*1 .... 1 D.......................... DP ........................................ 8 H.......... 나사 M3×8*1 .. PWB del relé del DP*1......................................................... 2 *1: DP-771 만 (K) (L) 는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 ............. 1 I... Vis M3 × 8*1 ...................................................... *: for metric specification **: for inch specification L..............5 mm)............................................ 1 C.. 1 G..............................1 J............ 1 N. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 ...........................1 K... 8 H................................................................................ 1 F. DP relay PWB*1 ........ Vis TP M4 × 14.............. Perno.......... Herraje de control de ángulo...... ピン ....... Tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO*1 .................................... Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1.................... Vis M3 × 8 NOIRE*1 ...................... 1 E...1 M...................................................5mm 폭 ) ... 1 B............................ 1 E................. 핀 ...............................1 M................1 N......... ビス M3×8BLACK*1 ............1 I....... Left hinge cover*1 .......................... 1 G.... 1 N............... 1 J....... 1 K...................................................... 각도규제쇠 .......................1 M............................... 1 F....1 M................ 右部铰链盖板 *1 ....... 1 F....... DP ....... 1 C.. DP-Relaisleiterplatte *1..... Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation vers le haut de la face de l’original .......... 1 G....................... 고정쇠 (38. 1 K...............

注意事项 如果附属品上带有固定胶带, 缓冲材料时务必揭 下。 安装手册中关于 DP 的图示以 DP-771 为例。 安装步骤 安装 DP 时, 请务必将 MFP 电源关闭, 关拔下电源 插头再进行安装作业。 주의사항 동봉품에 고정 테이프 . Les schémas du DP dans le Guide d''installation concernent le DP-771. Procedura Spegnere l’interruttore principale e sfilare la spina dell’MFP dalla presa prima di installare il DP. Fixer chacune des pièces de fixation (C) avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G). 완충재가 붙어 있는 경 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 . (DP-770) 1. Las ilustraciones del DP en la Guía de instalación corresponden al DP-771. be sure to turn the MFP power off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. 固定金具の取り付け (DP-770) 1. Vorsichtsmaßnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungsmaterial vollständig von den mitgelieferten Teilen. 注意事項 同梱品に固定テープ、 緩衝材が付いている場合 は必ず取り外すこと。 設置手順書に記載している DP 本体のイラスト は、 DP-771 です。 取付手順 DP 本体を設置するときは、 必ず MFP 本体の主電 源スイッチを OFF にし、 電源プラグを抜いてか ら作業すること。 2 . asegúrese de apagar el interruptor principal del MFP y desenchúfelo del tomacorriente de la pared. Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C) con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G). Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4 x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. Procédure Lors de l’installation du DP. Procedimiento Cuando instale el DP. Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida all’installazione sono per il modello DP-771. 用两颗 M4×14TP 螺钉 (G) 固定各固定附件 (C) 。 고정쇠의 부착 (DP-770) 1. 고정쇠 (C) 의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 본체의 구멍 (2) 을 맞추고 MFP 본체에 고정쇠 (C) 를 꽂 습니다 . (DP-770) 1. 安装固定附件。 (DP-770) 1. 2. ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で 2 つの固定金具 (C) を固定する。 Précautions Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies. 2. The illustrations of the DP in the Installation Guide are for DP-771. 2. Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x 14TP screws (G). Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sull’MFP. Die Abbildungen des DP in der Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP-771. 2. Precauciones Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas. 설치순서에 기재되어 있는 DP 본체 일러스트는 DP-771 입니다 . Procedure When installing the DP. Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des pièces de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur le MFP et insérer ces pièces (C) dans le MFP. 나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 2 개의 고정쇠 (C) 를 고정합니다 . 将各固定附件 (C) 上的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 上的孔 (2) 对齐, 然后将固定附件 (C) 插入 MFP 中。 2.G C G C 2 2 1 1 Precautions Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning material from supplied parts. Mettre en place la fixation. Verfahren Schalten Sie vor Installation des DP unbedingt den MFP-Hauptschalter aus. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G). Monte el herraje de fijación. und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose. veiller à mettre l’interrupteur du MFP hors tension et à débrancher la fiche d’alimentation de la prise murale. Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de fijación (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e inserte los herrajes de fijación (C) en el MFP. Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio. Attach the fixing fitting. (DP-770) 1. Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung (C) mit den Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in den MFP einsetzen. (DP-770) 1. Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung. ed inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C) nell’MFP. 설치순서 DP 본체를 설치할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원 플러그를 뺀 다음 작업을 할 것 . Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C) with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fixing fittings (C) into the MFP. 2. 固定金具 (C) の突起 (1) と MFP 本体の穴 (2) を合わせ、 MFP 本体に固定金具 (C) を差 し込む。 2. Precauzioni Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite. (DP-770) 1. 2.

Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung. Installer le DP. 나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 고정쇠 (C) 와 고정쇠 (C*) 를 고정합니다 . 2. 安装 DP 3. 2. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissaggio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro più largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP. 4. DP 本体の取り付け 3. DP 본체 (A) 의 힌지부 구멍 (3) 과 고정쇠 (C) 핀 (4) 을 맞추고 MFP 본체에 DP 본체 (A) 를 올립니다 . 安装固定附件。 (DP-771) 1. 5. inserte los herrajes de fijación en el MFP. 5. 3. DP 본체 (A) 를 미끄러트려 힌지부를 고정쇠 (C) 의 걸쇠 (5) 에 끼웁니다 . 5. 右側に固定金具 (C)、 左側に幅広の固定金具 (C*) のそれぞれの突起 (1) と MFP 本体の穴 (2) を合わせ、 MFP 本体に差し込む。 2. Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los herrajes de fijación (C). 2. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijación derecho (C) y del herraje de fijación izquierdo más ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2) del MFP y. (DP-771) 1. Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A) con il perno (4) dell’accessorio di fissaggio (C). Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et engager les charnières dans les crochets (5) sur les pièces de fixation (C). (DP-771) 1. Instale el DP. 3. Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à l’aide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP M4 × 14 (G). 5. Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*) with 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G). Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Befestigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen. Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G). 朝前侧滑动 DP (A) , 然后将铰链与固定附件 (C) 上的卡扣 (5) 相啮合。 5. 2. ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で固定金具 (C) と 固定金具 (C*) を固定する。 5. Mettre en place la fixation. Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo con il perno (F) e due viti M4 × 14TP (G). 3. 4. 5. 4. 用销 (F) 和两颗 M4×14TP 螺钉 (G) 将 DP (A) 安装到 MFP 上。 DP 본체 부착 3. quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP. 将 DP (A) 的铰链孔 (3) 对准固定附件 (C) 的 销 (4) , 并将 DP (A) 放在 MFP 上。 4. 4. Aligner le trou de la charnière (3) du DP (A) sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer le DP (A) sur le MFP. 핀 (F) 1 개와 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로 DP 본체 (A) 를 MFP 본체에 고정합니다 . Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin (F) and two M4 × 14TP screws (G). Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C) (C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. Monte el herraje de fijación. (DP-771) 1. 固定金具の取り付け (DP-771) 1. e quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP. (DP-771) 1. (DP-771) 1. DP 本体 (A) のヒンジ部の穴 (3) と固定金具 (C) のピン (4) を合わせ、 MFP 本体に DP 本体 (A) を乗せる。 4. place DP (A) on the MFP. Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalterung (C*) mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterungen in den MFP einsetzen. 우측에 고정쇠 (C). 3. Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fitting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*) with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP. Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C) et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et insérer les fixations dans le MFP. ピン (F)1 本とビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で DP 本 体 (A) を MFP 本体に固定する。 3 . DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen. Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fittings (C). Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of fixing fitting (C). und DP (A) auf den MFP stellen. DP 本体 (A) を手前にスライドさせ、 ヒンジ 部を固定金具 (C) の引っ掛け部 (5) にはめ 込む。 5. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C) (C*) con 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G). después. Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio. Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli accessori di fissaggio (C). 3. 좌측에 광폭 고정쇠 (C*) 각각의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 본체 구멍 (2) 을 맞 추고 MFP 본체에 꽂습니다 . 使用各 2 颗 M4×14 螺丝 TP(G) 来固定固定附 件 (C) 与固定附件 (C*) 고정쇠의 부착 (DP-771) 1.G C* G C C (C*) A 2 C F G G 4 2 1 1 A C (C*) 3 5 Install the DP. 2. Attach the fixing fitting. 将固定附件 (C) 从右侧、 宽幅固定夹具 (C*) 从左侧将各自的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 主机的 孔 (2) 对齐并插入到 MFP 主机中。 2. Installieren des DP. 4. Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A) con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijación (C) y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP. 4. Montaggio del DP. 2.

A

8

6

12

9
G D

11 D

10
Install the angle control fitting. To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees 6. Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws (G).

7
9. Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting (D) that has been installed in step 6 to remove shaft (12).

To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees 7. Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A). 8. Remove the 3 TP screws (7) and the screw (8), and remove the strap (9) from the rear cover (10). Then remove the DP (A) rear cover (10). Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 30 degrés 7. Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A). 8. Déposer les 3 vis TP (7) et la vis (8), puis déposer la courroie (9) du couvercle arrière (10). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (10) du DP (A). Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30 grados 7. Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A). 8. Quite los 3 tornillos TP (7) y el tornillo (8) y quite la correa (9) de la cubierta trasera (10). Después, quite la cubierta trasera (10) del DP (A). Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 30 Grad 7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) öffnen. 8. Die 3 TP-Schrauben (7) und die Schraube (8)
entfernen und dann den Riemen (9) von der hinteren Abdeckung (10) abnehmen. Dann die hintere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A) abnehmen.

Installer la fixation d’angle. Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture du DP de 60 degrés 6. Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4 × 14 (G). Instale el herraje de control de ángulo. Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60 grados 6. Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G). Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung. Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 60 Grad 6. Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen. Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare. Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura del DP a 60 gradi 6. Montare l’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (G). 安装角度控制附件。 若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 60 度 6. 在右部铰链的后部使用两颗 M4×14TP 螺钉 (G) 安装角度控制附件 (D) 。

9. Retirer l’anneau de butée (11) de la fixation d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 6 pour enlever la tige (12).

9. Retire el anillo de retención (11) del herraje de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).

9. Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 montiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.

Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura del DP a 30 gradi 7. Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A). 8. Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (7) e la vite (8), e quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore (10). Quindi rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10) del DP (A). 若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 30 度 7. 打开 DP (A) 的上盖板 (6) 。 8. 拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (7) 和 1 颗螺丝 (8), 将带 子 (9) 从后盖板 (10) 上拆除, 拆下 DP 主机 (A) 的后盖板 (10)。

9. Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (11) dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D) che era stato installato al Punto 6 per rimuovere l’albero (12).

9. 拆下在第 6 步中安装的角度控制配件 (D) 的 止动环 (11) , 以将轴 (12) 拆下。

각도규제쇠의 부착 DP 개폐각도를 60 도로 설정하는 경우 6. 우 힌지 뒷측에 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로 각도규제쇠 (D) 를 부착합니다 .

DP 개폐 각도를 30 도로 설정하는 경우 7. DP 본체 (A) 의 DP 윗커버 (6) 를 엽니다 . 8. TP 나사 (7) 3 개와 나사 (8) 1 개를 빼고 스 트랩 (9) 을 뒷 커버 (10) 에서 제거해 DP 본 체 (A) 의 뒷 커버 (10) 를 제거합니다 .

9. 순서 6 에서 부착한 각도규제쇠 (D) 의 스톱 링 (11) 1 개를 제거하고 시프트 (12) 를 제거 합니다 .

角度規制金具の取り付け DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合 6. 右ヒンジ後側にビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で角度 規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。

DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合 7. DP 本体 (A) の DP 上カバー(6) を開く。 8. TP ビス (7)3 本とビス (8)1 本を外し、 スト ラップ (9) を後カバー(10) から外して、 DP 本体 (A) の後カバー(10) を取り外す。

9. 手順 6 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のス トップリング (11)1 個を外し、 シャフト (12) を取り外す。

4

11 12

14

12
15 14

13

10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right hinge. 11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12) and secure shaft (12). 12. Use the 3 TP screws (7) and the screw (8) to replace the rear cover (10) removed in step 8. 10. Insérer la tige (12) à l’arrière de la charnière droite. 11. Fixer l’anneau de butée (11) sur l’encoche de la tige (12) et mettre en place la tige (12). 12. Reposer le couvercle arrière (10) déposé à l'étape 8 et le fixer à l'aide des 3 vis TP (7) et de la vis (8). 10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha. 11. Fije el anillo de retención (11) a la muesca del eje (12) y asegure el eje (12). 12. Use los 3 tornillos TP (7) y el tornillo (8) para volver a colocar la cubierta trasera (10) quitada en el paso 8. 10. Welle (12) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einsetzen. 11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbringen und Welle befestigen (12). 12. Die in Schritt 8 ausgebaute hintere Abdeckung (10) mittels der 3 TP-Schrauben (7) und der Schraube (8) wieder anbringen. 10. Inserire l’albero (12) nella parte posteriore della
cerniera destra. 11. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (11) nell’incavo dell’albero (12) e assicurare l’albero (12). 12. Utilizzare le 3 viti TP (7) e la vite (8) per ricollocare il coperchio posteriore (10) rimosso nel passo 8.

Connect the DP signal line (DP-770 only) For the DP-771, proceed to step 13 on page 7. 13. Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP cable connection cover (14).

14. Remove the DP cable connection cap (15) from the DP cable connection cover (14).

Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-770 uniquement) Pour le DP-771, passer à l'étape 13 en page 7. 13. Déposer la vis (13) et déposer le couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (14).

14. Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du câble du DP (15) du couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (14).

Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-770 solamente) Para el DP-771, vaya al paso 13 de la página 7. 13. Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14).

14. Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP (15) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14)

Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur DP-770) Beim DP-771 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf Seite 7. 13. Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses abnehmen. Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP770) Per il DP-771, procedere al passo 13 a pagina 7. 13. Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP (14). 连接 DP 信号线 (仅限 DP-770) DP-771 跳至 P7 的步骤 13。 13. 拆除 1 颗螺丝 (13), 拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。

14. Die Kappe (15) des DP-Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses abnehmen.

14. Rimuovere il cappuccio (15) per la connessione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14).

10.将轴 (12) 插入到右部铰链的后部。 11.将止动环 (11) 安装到轴 (12) 的切口并将轴 (12) 固定。 12.使用 3 颗树脂固定螺丝 (7) 和 1 颗螺丝 (8) 按原样安装在步骤 8 中拆下的后盖板 (10)。

14. 从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接 用盖 (15)。

10. 우 힌지 뒷측에 시프트 (12) 를 삽입합니다 . 11. 스톱링 (11) 을 시프트 (12) 의 구에 부착하고 시프트 (12) 를 고정합니다 . 12. 순서 8 에서 떼어낸 뒷 커버 (10) 를 수지고 정 나사 (7) 3 개와 나사 (8) 1 개로 원래 자리 에 부착합니다 . 10. 右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (12) を挿入する。 11. ストップリング (11) をシャフト (12) の溝 に取り付け、 シャフト (12) を固定する。 12. 手順 8 で外した後カバー(10) を TP ビス (7)3 本とビス (8)1 本で元通り取り付ける。

DP 신호선의 접속 (DP-770 만) DP-771 은 P7 의 순서 13 으로 진행 . 13. 나사 (13) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 제거합니다 .

14. DP 케이블 접속용커버 (14) 에서 DP 케이블 접속용 덮개 (15) 를 제거합니다 .

DP 信号線の接続 (DP-770 のみ) DP-771 は P7 の手順 13 へ進む。 13. ビス (13)1 本を外して、 DP ケーブル接続カ バー(14) を外す。

14. DP ケーブル接続用カバー(14) から DP ケー ブル接続用フタ (15) を取り外す。

5

16 18

E

E

17 14 13

14

15. Pass the DP signal line (16) through the right-hand hole in the DP cable cover (E) and then pass the DP signal line (16) through the DP cable connection cover (14).

16. Plug the DP signal line connector (17) into the connector (18) on the ISC PWB.

17. Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP cable connection cover (14) and install the DP cable connection cover (14) using the screw (13) removed in step 13. Proceed to step 22 on page 10

15. Faire passer le câble du circuit de transmission du DP (16) dans le trou se trouvant à droite sur le couvercle du câble du DP (E) puis faire passer le câble du circuit de transmission du DP (16) dans le couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (14). 15. Pase la línea de señales del DP (16) a través del orificio derecho de la cubierta del cable del DP (E) y, después, pase la línea de señales del DP (16) a través de la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14).

16. Enficher le connecteur du câble du circuit de transmission du DP (17) dans le connecteur (18) sur l'ISC PWB.

17. Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (14) et installer le couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (14) à l'aide de la vis (13) déposée à l'étape 13. Passer à l'étape 22 de la page 10. 17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14) e instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14) usando el tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 13. Vaya al paso 22 de la página 10. 17. Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbringen und die Abdeckung (14) des DPKabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 13 entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen. Weitergehen zu Schritt 22 auf Seite 10. 17. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14), e quindi installare il coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14) utilizzando la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 13. Procedere al passo 22 a pagina 10. 17. 将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14) 上, 使用步骤 13 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝 (13) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。 跳至 P10 的步骤 22。

16. Enchufe el conector de la línea de señales del DP (17) al conector (18) PWB del ISC.

15. Die DP-Signalleitung (16) durch die rechte Öffnung in der DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) führen und dann die DP-Signalleitung (16) durch die Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses führen.

16. Den Stecker (17) der DP-Signalleitung an den Stecker (18) der ISC-Leiterplatte anschließen.

15. Passare la linea del segnale DP (16) attraverso il foro al lato destro nel coperchio del cavo DP (E), e quindi passare la linea del segnale DP (16) attraverso il coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14).

16. Inserire il connettore (17) della linea del segnale DP nel connettore (18) sull'ISC PWB.

15. 将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 的右 侧的孔, 接着将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆 连接盖板 (14)。

16. 将 DP 信号线连接器 (17) 与 ISC 电路板的接 插件 (18) 相连接。

15. DP 케이블커버 (E) 의 우측 구멍에 DP 신호 선 (16) 을 통과시키고 또한 , DP 케이블 접 속용 커버 (14) 에 DP 신호선 (16) 을 통과시 킵니다 .

16. DP 신호선 커넥터 (17) 를 ISC 기판의 커넥 터 (18) 에 접속합니다 .

17. DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 에 부착하고 순서 13 에서 제거한 나사 (13) 1 개로 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 부 착합니다 . P10 의 순서 22 로 진행 .

15. DP ケーブルカバー(E) の右側の穴に DP 信号 線 (16) を通し、 さらに DP ケーブル接続用カ バー(14) に DP 信号線 (16) を通す。

16. DP 信号線コネクター(17) を ISC 基板のコネ クター(18) に接続する。

17. DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ バー(14) に取り付け、 手順 13 で外したビス (13)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) を取 り付ける。 P10 の手順 22 へ進む。

6

20 22

19

21

Connect the DP signal line (DP-771 only) 13. Remove the 8 screws (19) and remove the upper rear cover (20) of the MFP.

14. Remove the DP cable connection cap (22) from the DP cable connection cover (21).

Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-771 uniquement) 13. Déposer les 8 vis (19) et déposer le couvercle arrière supérieur (20) du MFP.

14. Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du câble du DP (22) du couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (21).

Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-771 solamente) 13. Quite los 8 tornillos (19) y quite la cubierta trasera superior (20) del MFP.

14. Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP (22) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (21)

Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur DP-771) 13. Die 8 Schrauben (19) entfernen und die obere hintere Abdeckung (20) des MFP abnehmen.

14. Die Kappe (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses von der Abdeckung (21) des DP-Kabelanschlusses abnehmen.

Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP771) 13. Rimuovere le 8 viti (19) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio superiore posteriore (20) dell'MFP.

14. Rimuovere il cappuccio (22) per la connessione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (21).

连接 DP 信号线 (仅限 DP-771) 13. 拆除 8 颗螺丝 (19), 拆下 MFP 主机的后上方 盖板 (20)。

14. 从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (21) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接 用盖 (22)。

DP 신호선의 접속 (DP-771 만) 13. 나사 (19) 8개를 제거하고 MFP 본체의 뒷면 상커버 (20) 를 떼어 냅니다 .

14. DP 케이블 접속용커버 (21) 에서 DP 케이블 접속용 덮개 (22) 를 제거합니다 .

DP 信号線の接続 (DP-771 のみ) 13. ビス (19)8 本を外し、 MFP 本体の後上カバー (20) を取り外す。

14. DP ケーブル接続用カバー(21) から DP ケー ブル接続用フタ (22) を取り外す。

7

E 23

24

21

E

15. Pass the DP signal line (23) through the right-hand hole in the DP cable cover (E). Then pass the red CIS data line (24) through the left-hand hole. NOTICE Pass the DP signal line (23) and CIS data line (24) through the same hole could result in abnormal images. Be sure that they pass through separate holes as shown in the figure.

16. Install the DP cable cover (E) and DP cable connection cover (21).

15. Faire passer le câble du circuit de transmission du DP (23) dans le trou se trouvant à droite sur le couvercle du câble du DP (E). Faire ensuite passer le câble rouge de la ligne des données du CIS (24) par le trou se trouvant côté gauche.
AVIS Faire passer le câble du circuit de transmission du DP (23) et le câble de la ligne des données du CIS (24) dans le même passage de câble risque de résulter en production d'images anormales. S'assurer que ces deux câbles sont tirés dans des passages de câble diff'érents comme illustré ici.

16. Installer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) et le couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (21).

15. Pase la línea de señales del DP (23) a través del orificio derecho de la cubierta del cable del DP (E). Después, pase la línea de datos CIS roja (24) a través del orificio izquierdo. AVISO Si pasa la línea de señales del DP (23) y la línea de datos CIS (24) a través del mismo orificio podría provocar imágenes anormales. Asegúrese de que pasen a través de orificios distintos como aparece en la ilustración. 15. Die DP-Signalleitung (23) durch die rechte Öffnung in der DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) führen. Dann die rote CIS-Signalleitung (24) durch die linke Öffnung führen. HINWEIS Wenn Sie die DP-Signalleitung (23) und die CIS-Datenleitung (24) durch dieselbe Öffnung führen, könnte es zu Bildfehlern kommen. Achten Sie darauf, dass die Leitungen wie abgebildet durch verschiedene Öffnungen geführt werden. 15. Passare la linea del segnale DP (23) attraverso il foro al lato destro nel coperchio del cavo DP (E). Quindi passare la linea dati rossa CIS (24) attraverso il foro al lato sinistro. NOTIFICA Facendo passare la linea del segnale DP (23) e la linea dati CIS (24) attraverso lo stesso foro, potrebbe causare immagini anormali. Assicurarsi che tali linee passino attraverso fori separati, come viene mostrato nella figura. 15. 将 DP 信号线 (23) 穿过 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 的右侧的孔, 接着将红色的 CIS 数据线 (24) 穿过左侧的 孔。 注意 DP 信号线 (23) 与 CIS 数据线 (24) 如果穿过同一个孔, 可能会发生图像异常, 因此必须如图所示 分别穿过左右两侧的孔。

16. Instale la cubierta del cable del DP (E) y la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (21).

16. Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) und die Abdeckung (21) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbringen.

16. Installare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) e il coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (21).

16. 将DP电缆盖板(E)安装到DP电缆连接盖板(21) 上。

15. DP 케이블커버 (E) 의 우측 구멍에 DP 신호선 (23) 을 통과시킵니다 . 거기에 좌측 구멍에 적색 CIS 데이터선 (24) 을 통과시킵니다 . 주의 DP 신호선 (23) 과 CIS 데이터선 (24) 을 같은 구멍에 통과시키면 이상화상이 발생할 가능성이 있기 때문에 그림과 같이 좌우의 구멍에 각각 넣을 것 .

16. DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 접속용커 버 (21) 에 부착합니다 .

15. DP ケーブルカバー(E) の右側の穴に DP 信号線 (23) を通す。 さらに左側の穴に赤色の CIS データ 線 (24) を通す。 注意 DP 信号線 (23) と CIS データ線 (24) を同じ穴に通すと異常画像が発生する可能性があるため、 図 の様に左右の穴に別々に入れること。

16. DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続用 カバー(21) に取り付ける。

8

27 25 23

M M

N

26
17. Plug the DP signal line connector (23) into the connector (25) on the ISC PWB. Installing the DP relay PWB 18. Connect connector (26) on the DP relay PWB (M) to connector (27) on the MFP. 19. Secure the DP relay PWB (M) with two M3 x 8 screws (N).

17. Enficher le connecteur du câble du circuit de transmission du DP (23) dans le connecteur (25) sur l'ISC PWB.

Installation de la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP 18. Raccorder le connecteur (26) sur la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) au connecteur (27) sur le MFP.

19. Fixer la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) avec deux vis M3 x 8 (N).

17. Enchufe el conector de la línea de señales del DP (23) al conector (25) PWB del ISC.

Instalación del PWB del relé del DP 18. Conecte el conector (26) del PWB del relé del DP (M) al conector (27) del MFP.

19. Asegure el PWB del relé del DP (M) con dos tornillos M3 x 8 (N)

17. Den Stecker (23) der DP-Signalleitung an den Stecker (25) der ISC-Leiterplatte anschließen.

nstallieren der DP-Relaisleiterplatte 18. Den Stecker (26) an der DPRelaisleiterplatte (M) mit dem Stecker (27) am MFP verbinden

19. Die DP-Relaisleiterplatte (M) mit zwei M3 x 8 Schrauben (N) befestigen.

17. Inserire il connettore (23) della linea del segnale DP nel connettore (25) sull'ISC PWB.

Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP 18. Collegare il connettore (26) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) al connettore (27) sull’MFP.

19. Fissare la scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) con due viti M3 x 8 (N).

17. 将DP信号线连接器(23)与ISC电路板的接插件 (25) 相连接。

安装 DP 中继板 18. 将 DP 中继板 (M) 上的接插件 (26) 连接至 MFP 上的接插件 (27) 。

19.用两颗 M3×8 螺钉 (N) 固定 DP 中继板 (M) 。

17. DP 신호선 커넥터 (23) 를 ISC 기판의 커넥 터 (25) 에 접속합니다 .

DP 중계기판의 부착 18. DP 중계기판 (M) 의 커넥터 (26) 를 MFP 본 체의 커넥터 (27) 에 접속합니다 .

19. DP 중계기판 (M) 을 나사 M3×8(N) 2 개로 고정합니다 .

17. DP 信号線コネクター(23) を ISC 基板のコネ クター(25) に接続する。

DP 中継基板の取り付け 18. DP 中継基板 (M) のコネクター(26) を、 MFP 本体のコネクター(27) に接続する。

19. DP 中継基板 (M) をビス M3×8(N)2 本で固定 する。

9

A

24

B
29

28

M

B

20. Plug the CIS data line (24) into the connector (28) on the DP relay PWB (M). 21. Replace the upper rear cover (20) of the MFP using the 8 screws (19).

Fasten the original mat. 22. Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (29) upward over the contact glass. Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel. 23. Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.

20. Enficher le câble de la ligne des données du CIS (24) dans le connecteur (28) de la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M). 21. Reposer le couvercle arrière supérieur (20) sur le MFP à l'aide des 8 vis (19).

Fixer la plaque d’original. 22. Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (29) vers le haut. Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrés avec le coin gauche interne du panneau d'instructions d'original. 23. Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro. Fije la alfombrilla para originales. 22. Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (29) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto. Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B) con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de instrucciones para el original. 23. Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro. Befestigen der Originalmatte. 22. Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (29) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen. Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten. 23. Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.

20. Enchufe la línea de datos CIS (24) al conector (28) PWB del relé del DP (M). 21. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior (20) del MFP usando los 8 tornillos (19).

20. Die CIS-Datenleitung (24) an den Stecker (28) auf der DP-Relaisleiterplatte (M) anschließen. 21. Die obere hintere Abdeckung (20) des MFP wieder mit den 8 Schrauben (19) anbringen.

20. Inserire la linea dati CIS (24) nel connettore (28) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M). 21. Ricollocare il coperchio superiore posteriore (20) dell'MFP utilizzando le 8 viti (19).

Fissaggio del tappetino originale. 22. Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (29) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio. Allineare l’angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con l’angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale. 23. Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.

20. 将 CIS 数据线 (24) 连接到 DP 中继电路板 (M) 上的接插件 (28) 上。 21. 使用 8 颗螺丝 (19) 按原样安装 MFP 主机的后 上方盖板 (20)。

粘贴原稿垫。 22. 将原稿垫 (B) 放置在稿台玻璃上, 并使魔术贴 (29) 向上。 将原稿垫 (B) 的 90 度角对准原稿指示板的内部左角。 23. 关闭 DP (A) , 使原稿垫 (B) 粘贴到 DP 上。

20. DP 중계기판 (M) 상의 커넥터 (28) 에 CIS 데 이터선 (24) 을 접속합니다 . 21. 나사 (19) 8 개로 MFP 본체 뒷면 상커버 (20) 를 원래대로 부착합니다 .

원고매트 부착 22. 매직테이프 (29) 를 위로 향하게 하고 원고매트 (B) 를 원고대 유리판에 놓습니다 . 원고매트 (B) 는 90° 가 되어 있는 각을 원고 지시판의 좌측 안에 맞출 것 . 23. DP 본체 (A) 를 내리고 원고매트 (B) 를 DP 본체 (A) 에 부착합니다 .

20. DP 中継基板 (M) 上のコネクター(28) に CIS データ線 (24) を接続する。 21. ビス (19)8 本で、 MFP 本体の後上カバー(20) を元通り取り付ける。

原稿マットの貼り付け 22. マジックテープ (29) を上に向けて、 原稿マット (B) をコンタクトガラス上に置く。 原稿マット (B) は 90° になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。 23. DP 本体 (A) を下ろし、 原稿マット (B) を DP 本体 (A) に貼り付ける。

10

I

H

J

Installing the hinge cover (DP-771 only) For the DP-770, proceed to step 26 on page 12. 24. Install the left hinge cover (H).

25. Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3 × 8 screw BLACK (J).

Installation des couvercles de charnière (DP-771 uniquement) Pour le DP-770, passer à l'étape 26 de la page 12. 24. Installer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (H). Instalación de la cubierta de las bisagras (DP-771 solamente) Para el DP-770, vaya al paso 26 de la página 12. 24. Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (H). Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung (nur DP-771) Beim DP-770 gehen Sie zum Schritt 26 auf Seite 12 weiter. 24. Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbringen. Installazione del coperchio cerniera (solo DP-771) Per DP-770, procedere con il punto 26 a pagina 12. 24. Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).

25. Installer le couvercle de la charnière droite (l) à l'aide de la vis M3 × 8 NOIRE (J).

25. Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I) usando el tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO (J).

25. Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.

25. Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) utilizzando la vite M3 × 8 NERA (J).

安装铰链盖板 (仅限 DP-771) DP-770 跳至 P12 的步骤 26。 24. 安装左部铰链盖板 (H)。

25. 使用 1 颗 M3×8 螺丝 BLACK(J) 来安装右部铰 链盖板 (I)。

힌지커버 부착 (DP-771 만) DP-770 은 P12 의 순서 26 으로 진행 . 24. 좌측 힌지커버 (H) 를 부착합니다 .

25. 나사 M3×8BLACK(J) 1 개로 우측 힌지커버 (I) 를 부착합니다 .

ヒンジカバーの取り付け (DP-771 のみ) DP-770 は、 P12 の手順 26 に進む。 24. 左ヒンジカバー(H) を取り付ける。

25. ビス M3×8BLACK(J)1 本で右ヒンジカバー (I) を取り付ける。

11

(a) (b) L K

Adhere the label 26. Clean the label on the original table with alcohol.

27. Adhere Label “Operation procedure” (K) of which the language corresponding to the destination of the MFP onto the existing label on the original table. Figure (a)

28. Adhere Caution label “Original face up!” (L) of which the language corresponding to the destination of the MFP onto the label on the original table. Figure (b)

Coller l’étiquette relative 26. Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer létiquette se trouvant sur le plateau d'original.

27. Coller l'étiquette “Processus opératoire” (K) dans la langue correspondant au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette existante sur le plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a)

28. Coller l'étiquette de mise en garde “Original en haut!” (L) dans la langue correspondant au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette du plateau d'original. Figure (b)

Pegue la etiqueta 26. Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales.

27. Adhiera la etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” (K) del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales. Figura (a)

28. Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “¡La cara del original hacia arriba!” (L), del idioma que corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la etiqueta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)

Anbringen des Schildes 26. Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit Alkohol reinigen.

27. Das Schild „Funktionsanweisung“ (K) in der Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a)

28. Das Warnschild „Originalschriftseite nach oben!“ (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (b)

Applicazione dell’etichetta 26. Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano originale.

27. Far aderire l’etichetta “Procedure di funzionamento” (K) corrispondente alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta esistente sul piano originale. Figura (a)

28. Far aderire l’etichetta di avvertenza “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” (L) corrispondente alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)

粘贴标签 (220V 规格以外) 26. 使用酒精清洁原稿台上的标签。

27. 将 “ 动作步骤 ” 标签 (K) (其语言与对应 的 MFP 销往目的地语言一致) 粘贴至原稿台 的现有标签上。 图 (a)

28. 将小心标签原稿正面朝上! (L) (其语言与 对应的 MFP 销往目的地语言一致) 粘贴至原 稿台的标签上。 图 (b)

라벨 부착 (220V 사양이외 ) 26. 원고 테이블의 라벨 위를 알코올청소 합니다 .

27. MFP 본체에 사용하는 국가의 언어에 맞는 조작라벨 (K) 을 원고 테이블 라벨위에 붙입 니다 . 그림 (a)

28. MFP 본체에 사용하는 국가의 언어에 맞는 원고표용 라벨 (L) 을 원고 테이블 위에 붙입 니다 . 그림 (b)

ラベルの貼り付け (100V 仕様以外 ) 26. 原稿テーブルのラベル上をアルコール清掃 する。

27. MFP 本体を使用する国の言語に合った操作 ラベル (K) を原稿テーブルのラベル上に貼 り付ける。 図 (a)

28. MFP 本体を使用する国の言語に合った原稿 表向きラベル (L) を原稿テーブルのラベル 上に貼り付ける。 図 (b)

12

20mm 20mm b

20mm c

b

20mm a

[Operation check] 1. To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its center. 2. Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on. 3. Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.

[Vérification du fonctionnement] 1. Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1 ligne (c) en son axe. 2. Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension. 3. Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.

[Verifique el funcionamiento] 1. Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1 línea (c) dibujada en el centro. 2. Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal. 3. Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.

[Funktionsprüfung] 1. Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte gezeichnet sind. 2. Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten. 3. Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.

[Verifica del funzionamento] 1. Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro. 2. Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On. 3. Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.

[ 动作确认 ] 1. 若要检查机器动作, 准备一张 A3 原稿 (a) , 距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线 (b) 并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线 (c) 。 2. 将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。 3. 在 DP 上设定原稿 (a) 并进行测试复印, 确认机器动作和复印样本。

[ 동작확인 ] 1. A3 크기용지의 끝에서 20mm 의 위치에 선 (b) 4 개와 용지 중심에 선 (c) 1 개를 긋고 동작확인용 원고 (a) 를 준비합니다 . 2. MFP 본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 . 3. 원고 (a) 를 DP 본체에 장착하고 시험복사를 합니다 . 동작 및 복사샘플을 확인합니다 .

[ 動作確認 ] 1. A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、 用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、 動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。 2. MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、 主電源スイッチを ON にする。 3. 原稿 (a) を DP 本体にセットし、 テストコピーを行い、 動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。

13

20mm 20mm b

20mm c

b

20mm a

4. Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the gap. Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual. NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP leading edge timing.

4. Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart. Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien. AVIS: Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchronisation du bord d’attaque de U071.

4. Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separación. Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio. AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincronización de borde superior U071 del DP

4. Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem Abstandstyp durchführen. Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung. HINWEIS: Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen, müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.

4. Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento. Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni. NOTIFICA: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.

4. 对比复印样本和原稿 (a) , 如果偏移值在标准值以上时, 对偏移原稿进行调整。 对 MFP 本体的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。 详细内容请参见维修手册。 (注意) 如果图像出现底灰, 用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。 如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置, 则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调

4. 원고 (a) 와 복사샘플을 비교해 기준치 이상의 차이가 있는 경우 차이에 대해 조정을 합니다 . MFP 본체의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 본체의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 . (주의) 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .

4. 原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、 基準値以上のずれがある場合、 ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。 MFP 本体の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP 本体の画像確認を行うこと。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。 (注意) 画像カブリが発生する場合、 U068DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。 U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、 U071DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。

14

Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly. For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 17. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 20. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a time. For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 23. Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct. Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 17. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max. Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 20. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max. Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la synchronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois. Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 23. Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente. Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 17. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 20. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea central al mismo tiempo. Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 23. Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden. Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 17. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 20. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittellinie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden. Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 23. Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente. Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 20. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente. Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 23. 必须按照以下步骤进行调整, 否则不能达到准确调整的要求。 ・ 确认前端倾斜度 第 17 页 < 标准值 > 单面 : ±3.0mm 以内, 双面 : ±4.0mm 以内 ・ 确认后端倾斜度 第 20 页 < 标准值 > 单面 : ±3.0mm 以内, 双面 : ±4.0mm 以内 使用调整用的原稿时, 可以同时自动进行等倍值, 前端定时以及中心线的调整。 ・ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 第 23 页

반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 . ・ 선단경사확인 17 페이지 <기준치>단면 : ±3.0mm 이내 , 양면 : ±4.0mm 이내 ・ 후단경사확인 20 페이지 <기준치>단면 : ±3.0mm 이내 , 양면 : ±4.0mm 이내 조정용 원고를 사용하면 등배도 조정 , 선단타이밍 조정 , 센터 라인조정의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 . ・ 조정용원고에 의한 자동조정 23 페이지

必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。 順序通りに調整を行わない場合、 正しい調整ができない。 ・ 先端斜め確認 17 ページ <基準値>片面 : ±3.0mm 以内、 両面 : ±4.0mm 以内 ・ 後端斜め確認 20 ページ <基準値>片面 : ±3.0mm 以内、 両面 : ±4.0mm 以内 調整用原稿を使用すると、 等倍度調整、 先端タイミング調整、 センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。 ・ 調整用原稿による自動調整 23 ページ

15

For checking the magnification, see page26. For checking the leading edge timing, see page 28. For checking the center line, see page 30.

<Reference value> Within ±1.5% <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm

Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 26. <Valeur de référence> ±1,5% max. Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 28. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max. Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 30. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.

Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 26. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±1,5 % Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 28. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 30. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm

Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 26. Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 28. Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 30.

<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 % <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm

Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 26. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±1,5% Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 28. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 30. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm

・ 确认等倍值 ・ 确认前端定时调整 ・ 确认中心线

第 26 页 第 28 页 第 30 页

< 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内 < 标准值 > ±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 > 单面 : ±2.0mm 以内, 双面 : ±3.0mm 以内

・ 등배도 확인 26 페이지 <기준치> ±1.5% 이내 ・ 선단 타이밍 확인 28 페이지 <기준치> ±2.5mm 이내 ・ 센터 라인확인 30 페이지 <기준치> 단면 : ±2.0mm 이내 , 양면 : ±3.0mm 이내

・ 等倍度確認 26 ページ ・ 先端タイミング確認 28 ページ ・ センターライン確認 30 ページ

<基準値> ±1.5% 以内 <基準値> ±2.5mm 以内 <基準値>片面 : ±2.0mm 以内、 両面 : ±3.0mm 以内

16

[Checking the angle of leading edge] 1. Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the following procedure. <Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm. For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.

[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant] 1. Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante. <Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3.0 mm. Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4.0 mm.

[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior] 1. Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. <Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3.0 mm. Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4.0 mm.

[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante] 1. Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. <Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3.0 mm liegen. Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4.0 mm liegen.

[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale] 1. Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. <Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3.0 mm. Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4.0 mm.

[ 确认前端倾斜度 ] 1. 确认原稿 (a) 上的线 (1) 和复印样本上的线 (2) 的左右偏移值。 如果偏移值超过标准值, 则按照下列步骤进行调整 < 标准值 > 单面复印时, 线 (2) 的左右偏移值 : ±3.0mm 以内。      双面复印时, 线 (2) 的左右偏移值 : ±4.0mm 以内。

[ 선단 경사확인 ] 1. 원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 복사샘플의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 . <기준체>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이 : ±3.0mm 이내 양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이 : ±4.0mm 이내

[ 先端斜め確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。 ずれが基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 <基準値>片面の場合、 線 (2) の左右ずれ : ±3.0mm 以内      両面の場合、 線 (2) の左右ずれ : ±4.0mm 以内

17

C (C*) G G

G

C (C*) C

3

2. DP-770: Remove the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C).
DP-771: Remove the left hinge cover (H) and the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C*) (C)

3. Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position. For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side. For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm 4. Perform a test copy. 2. DP-770: Déposer la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations gauche et droite (C).
DP-771: Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (H) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations gauche et droite (C*) (C). 3. ourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP. Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur. Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant. Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1.0 mm 4. Effectuer une copie de test.

2. DP-770: quite el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho (C).
DP-771: quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (H) y el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho (C*) (C). 3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP. Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno. Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal. Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1.0 mm 4. Haga una copia de prueba.

2. DP-770: Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) lösen.
DP-771: Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterungen (C*) (C) lösen. 3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen. Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben. Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben. Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1.0 mm 4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.

2. DP-770: Rimuovere l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sugli accessori di fissaggio (C) destro e sinistro.
DP-771: Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di fissaggio (C*) (C) destro e sinistro. 3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP. Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno. Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti. Entità modifica per scala: circa 1.0 mm 4. Eseguire una copia di prova.

2. DP-770 时 : 拆下角度限制附件 (D)。 拧松左右固定附件 (C) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。 DP-771 时 : 拆下左部铰链盖板 (H) 以及角度限制附件 (D)。 拧松左右固定附件 (C*)(C) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。 3. 旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉 (3) 以调整 DP 位置。 对于复印样本 (d) : 逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。  对于复印样本 (e) : 顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。 按比例尺的更改量 : 约 1.0mm 4. 进行测试复印。 2. DP-770 의 경우 : 각도규제쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C) 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 . DP-771 의 경우 : 좌 힌지커버 (H) 및 각도규제쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C*)(C) 의 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 . 3. 우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 본체의 위치를 조정합니다 . 복사샘플 (d) 의 경우 : 조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 본체를 안으로 넣습니다 . 복사샘플 (e) 의 경우 : 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 본체를 앞으로 뺍니다 . 1 개 변화량 : 약 1.0mm 4. 시험복사를 합니다 . 2. DP-770 の場合 : 角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。 左右の固定金具 (C) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める DP-771 の場合 : 左ヒンジカバー(H) および角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。 左右の固定金具 (C*)(C) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める。 3. 右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、 DP 本体の位置を調整する。 コピーサンプル (d) の場合 : 調整ビスを左に回し、 DP 本体を奥へ動かす。 コピーサンプル (e) の場合 : 調整ビスを右に回し、 DP 本体を手前へ動かす。 1 目盛り当たりの変化量 : 約 1.0mm 4. テストコピーを行う。

18

5. Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values. <Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm. For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm. 6. After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14TP screws (G) that have been loosened in step 2. 7. Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see steps 22 and 23 on page 10).

5. Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes. <Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3.0 mm. Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4.0 mm. 6. Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis TP M4 × 14 (G) desserrées à l’étape 2. 7. Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 22 et 23 à la page 10.)

5. Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3.0 mm. Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4.0 mm. 6. Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) que ha aflojado en el paso 2. 7. Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 22 y 23 en la página 10).

5. Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist. <Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3.0 mm liegen. Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4.0 mm liegen. 6. Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen. 7. Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 22 und 23 auf Seite 10).

5. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti. <Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3.0 mm. Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4.0 mm. 6. Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14TP (G) che erano state allentate al Punto 2. 7. Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 22 e 23 a pagina 10).

5. 重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线 (2) 的偏移值达到标准值范围内。 < 标准值 > 单面时, 线 (2) 的左右偏移值 : ±3.0mm 以内      双面时, 线 (2) 的左右偏移值 : ±4.0mm 以内 6. 调整完成后, 重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14TP 螺钉 (G) 。 7. 拆下原稿垫 (B) , 参照第 10 页的步骤 22 和 23 再次装上。

5. 복사샘플 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 . <기준치>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이 : ±3.0mm 이내      양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이 : ±4.0mm 이내 6. 조정종료 후 순서 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개를 조입니다 . 7. 원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 10 페이지 순서 22, 23 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .

5. コピーサンプルの線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで、 調整を繰り返す。 <基準値>片面の場合、 線 (2) の左右ずれ : ±3.0mm 以内      両面の場合、 線 (2) の左右ずれ : ±4.0mm 以内 6. 調整終了後、 手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14TP(G)2 本を締め付ける。 7. 原稿マット (B) を取り外し、 10 ページの手順 22、 23 を参考に再度取り付ける。

19

1

2 3mm/4mm f g

3mm/4mm 2

a

[Checking the angle of trailing edge] 1. Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment. <Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm

[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière] 1. Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le réglage suivant. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max. Copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.

[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior] 1. Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el siguiente ajuste. <Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm

[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante] 1. Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuführen. <Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm

[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita] 1. Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare la seguente regolazione. <Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm

[ 确认后端倾斜度 ] 1. 确认原稿 (a) 上的线 (1) 和复印样本上的线 (2) 的偏移值。 如果超过标准值时, 必须进行调整。 < 标准值 > 单面时 : ±3.0mm 以内      双面时 : ±4.0mm 以内

[ 후단 경사확인 ] 1. 원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 복사샘플 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 . <기준치>단면의 경우 : ±3.0m 이내 양면의 경우 : ±4.0mm 이내

[ 後端斜め確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。 ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。 <基準値>片面の場合 : ±3.0mm 以内      両面の場合 : ±4.0mm 以内

20

A

5

3

9 6 8

7

10 4
4. Adjust the height of DP. Loosen the nut (8). For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting screw (9). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting screw (9). 4. Réglez la hauteur du DP. Desserrez l’écrou (8). Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis de réglage (9). Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (9). 4. Ajuste la altura del DP. Afloje la tuerca (8). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo de ajuste (9). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (9). 4. Die Höhe des DP einstellen. Lösen Sie die Mutter (8). Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (9). Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (9) festziehen. 4. egolazione dell’altezza del DP Allentare il dado (8). Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite di regolazione (9). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite di regolazione (9). 4. 调整 DP 的高度。 松驰螺母 (8) 。 测印件 (f) 时 : 松弛调整螺丝 (9) 。 测印件 (g) 时 : 紧固调整螺丝 (9) 。 Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5 mm (10) Retighten the nut (8). 5. Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3. 6. Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see steps 22 and 23 on page 10). Quantité de changement par pas: environ 0,5 mm (10) Resserrez l’écrou (8). 5. Reposer le capot arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3. 6. Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 22 et 23 à la page 10.) Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10) Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8). 5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en el paso 3. 6. Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 22 y 23 en la página 10). Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: ca. 0,5 mm (10) Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest. 5. Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung (7) wieder anbringen. 6. Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 22und 23 auf Seite 10). Variazione graduale: circa 0,5 mm (10) Stringere di nuovo il dado (8). 5. Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7) rimosso nel passo 3. 6. Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 22 e 23 a pagina 10). 每 1 格的移动量 : 约 0.5mm (10) 将螺母 (8) 按原样紧固好。 5. 重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板 (7) 。 6. 拆下原稿垫 (B) , 参照第 10 页的步骤 22 和 23 再次装上。

2. Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 3. Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw (5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear cover (7).

2. Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A) 3. Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière (7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7) du DP (A).

2. Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 3. Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP (A).

2. Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen. 3. Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube (5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) abnehmen. 2. Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 3. Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coperchio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A).

2. 打开 DP (A) 的上盖板 (3) 。 3. 拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5), 将带 子 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除, 拆下 DP 主机 (A) 的后盖板 (7)。

2. DP 본체 (A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 . 3. TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해 DP 본체 (A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 .

4. DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 . 너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 . 복사샘플 (f) 의 경우 : 조정나사 (9) 를 느슨하 게 합니다 . 복사샘플 (g) 의 경우 : 조정나사 (9) 를 조입 니다 . 4. DP の高さを調整する。 ナット (8) をゆるめる。 コピーサンプル (f) の場合 : 調整ビス (9) を ゆるめる。 コピーサンプル (g) の場合 : 調整ビス (9) を 締める。

1 개 변화량 : 약 0.5mm(10) 너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 . 5. 순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 . 6. 원고너트 (B) 를 제거하고 10 페이지 순서 22, 23 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 . 1 目盛り当たりの変化量 : 約 0.5mm(10) ナット (8) を元通り締める。 5. 手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り 取り付ける。 6. 原稿マット (B) を取り外し、 10 ページの手 順 22、 23 を参考に再度取り付ける。

2. DP 本体 (A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。 3. TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、 スト ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、 DP 本 体 (A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。

21

1

2 3mm/4mm f g

3mm/4mm 2

a

7. Make a proof copy again. 8. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values. <Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm

7. Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test. 8. Répétez les étapes 1 à 6 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max. Copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.

7. Haga otra copia de prueba. 8. Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm

7. Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen. 8. Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist. <Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm

7. Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia. 8. Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento. <Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm

7. 再次进行测试复印。 8. 反复操作步骤 1~6, 直至测印件的线 (2) 为标准值内。 < 标准值 > 单面时 : ±3.0mm 以内      双面时 : ±4.0mm 以内

7. 다시 시험복사를 합니다 . 8. 복사샘플 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ~ 6 을 반복합니다 . <기준치>단면의 경우 : ±3.0m 이내 양면의 경우 : ±4.0mm 이내

7. 再度テストコピーをおこなう。 8. コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、 手順 1 ~ 6 を繰り返す。 <基準値>片面の場合 : ±3.0mm 以内      両面の場合 : ±4.0mm 以内

22

[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] If there is no DP auto adjustment origina 1. Set the maintenance mode U411, select DP Auto Adj and press the Start key to print an original. 2. Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. 3. Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out surface adjustment. [Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage]
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 1. Régler le mode maintenance U411, sélectionner DP Auto Adj et appuyer sur la touche Start pour imprimer un original. 2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la touche Start. 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.

4. Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry out rear-side adjustment. 5. If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until OK appears. For details, see the service manual. 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
procéder au réglage du côté arrière.

5. Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message OK apparaisse. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.

[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste]
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP 1. Entre al modo de mantenimiento U441, seleccione DP Auto Adj y pulse la tecla de Start para imprimir un original. 2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. 3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un ajuste de anverso.

4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
ajuste de reverso.

5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4, bis OK angezeigt wird. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.

[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals]
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist 1. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP Auto Adj wählen und die Start-Taste betätigen, um ein Original auszudrucken. 2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betätigen. 3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen

4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.

5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4, bis OK angezeigt wird. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.

[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale]
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP 1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, selezionare DP Auto Adj e premere il tasto di Start per stampare un originale. 2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. 3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.

4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.

5. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
(ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4 fino a quando appare OK. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.

[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 没有 DP 调整用原稿时 1. 设置维护模式 U411, 按 DP Auto Adj、 Start 键以输出原稿。 2. 将输出的原稿放在稿台上, 按 Start 键。 3. 将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上, 按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。

4. 将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上, 按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。 5. 如果屏幕上出现 OK (完成) , 则表示调整完成。 如果出现 ERROR XX (错误 XX) , 则表示调整失败。 检查原稿设定位置并 重复步骤 2 和 4, 直到 OK (完成) 出现。 详细内容请参照维修手册。

[ 조정용 원고에 읳나 자동조정 ] DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 DP Auto Adj, 시작키를 눌러 원고를 출
력합니다 .

2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 . 3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 본체로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니
다.

4. 원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 본체에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정 을 합니다 . 5. 디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ~ 4 를 반복합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 4. 原稿を FaceDown で DP 本体へセットし、 Start キーを押し、 裏面の調整 を行う。 5. ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。 原稿のセット位置を確 認し、 OK が表示されるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を繰り返す。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。

[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] DP 調整用原稿が無い場合 1. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 DP Auto Adj、 Start キーを押し 原稿を出力する。 2. 出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、 Start キーを押す。 3. 原稿を FaceUp で DP 本体へセットし、 Start キーを押し、 表面の調整を 行う。

23

5mm

F A(149 5mm) R 74 1mm

149 1mm

Using a DP auto adjustment original 1. Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the original from the place where F and R are marked 2. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the DP FaceUp (Chart2), Input and the Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.

3. If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until OK appears. For details, see the service manual.

Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 1. Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplacement des repères F et R. 2. Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches DP FaceUp (Chart2), Input et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la surface. Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 1. Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. 2. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas DP FaceUp (Chart2), Input y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de anverso. Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 1. F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle setzen. 2. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP Faceup (Chart2), Input und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen. Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 1. Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e disporre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. 2. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine DP FaceUp (Chart2), Input e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superficie. 使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 1. 将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上, 并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设 定原稿。 2. 设置维护模式 U411, 按顺序按 DP FaceUp(Chart2)、 Input、 Start 键以 进行正面的调整。

3. Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à ce que le message OK apparaisse. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.

3. Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca OK en la pantalla. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.

3. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis OK angezeigt wird. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.

3. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2 fino a quando appare OK. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.

3. 如果屏幕上出现 OK (完成) , 则表示调整完成。 如果出现 ERROR XX (错误 XX) , 则表示调整失败。 检查原稿设定位置并 重复步骤 1 和 2, 直到 OK (完成) 出现。 详细内容请参照维修手册。

DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 1. DP 자동조정원고 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에 서 DP 본체로 세트합니다 . 2. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 DP FaceUp(Chart2), Input, 시작 키의 순서로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .

3. 디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ~ 2 를 반복합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조

DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 1. DP 自動調整原稿の F、 R を上に向け、 F、 R が書かれている方から DP 本体 へセットする。 2. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 DP FaceUp(Chart2)、 Input、 Start キーの順に押し、 表面の調整を行う。

3. ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。 原稿のセット位置を確 認し、 OK が表示されるまで手順 1 ~ 2 を繰り返す 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。

24

5mm

F A(149 5mm) R 74 1mm

149 1mm

4. After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side where the F and R are marked into the DP first. 5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the DP FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input and the Start key in that order to carry out rearside adjustment. 4. Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur lequel F et R sont indiqués. 5. Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches DP FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage du côté arrière. 4. Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R. 5. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas DP FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de reverso. 4. Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den DP eingeführt wird. 5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen. 4. Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. 5. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine DP FaceDown (Chart2), Normal Target, Input e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore. 4. 完成正面调整后, 将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下, 并首先将标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。 5. 设置维护模式 U411, 按顺序按 DP FaceDown(Chart2)、 Normal Taget、 Input、 Start 键以进行反面的调整。

6.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until OK appears. For details, see the service manual.

6. Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé. Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5 jusqu'à ce que le message OK apparaisse. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.

6. Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca OK en la pantalla. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.

6. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen.Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis OK angezeigt wird. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.

6. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5 fino a quando appare OK. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.

6. 如果屏幕上出现 OK (完成) , 则表示调整完成。 如果出现 ERROR XX (错误 XX) , 则表示调整失败。 检查原稿设定位置并 重复步骤 4 和 5, 直到 OK (完成) 出现。 详细内容请参照维修手册。

4. 표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 본체로 세트합니다 . 5. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 DP FaceDown(Chart2), Normal Taget, Input, 시작키 순서로 뒷면조정을 합니다 .

6. 디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확 인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ~ 5 를 반복합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조

4. 表面の調整完了後、 DP 自動調整原稿の F、 R を下に向け、 F、 R が書かれて いる方から DP 本体へセットする。 5. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 DP FaceDown(Chart2)、 Normal Taget、 Input、 Start キーの順に押し、 裏面の調整を行う。

6. ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。 原稿のセット位置を確 認し、 OK が表示されるまで手順 4 ~ 5 を繰り返す。 詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。

25

X X' 3 X 1 X' 2 X' X 2

X' X 3

a

h

i -1.5% X X X' 100

j +1.5%

k

[Checking the magnification] 1. Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the following procedure. <Reference value> For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5% For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5% [Vérification de l’agrandissement] 1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante. <Valeur de référence> Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5%

2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification. Main Scan: Adjusts the scanner main-scan magnification Sub Scan: Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnificationSub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification (DP-771)

Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5% 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070. Main Scan: Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du scanner Sub Scan: Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner (DP-771)

[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 1. Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. <Valor de referencia> Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5% Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5% [Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 1. Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) (3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. <Bezugswert> Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5% Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5% [Controllo dell’ingrandimento] 1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3)
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. <Valore di riferimento> Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%

2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070. Main Scan: ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal del escáner. Sub Scan: ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del escáner. Sub Scan (CIS): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del escáner (DP-771). 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden. Main Scan: Zur Einstellung der Hauptscan-Vergrößerung Sub Scan: Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung (DP-771)
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento. Main Scan: Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione principale dello scanner Sub Scan: Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner (DP-771)

[ 确认等倍值 ] 1. 确认原稿 (a) 上的线 (1) 和复印样本上的线 (2) 、 (3) 之间的偏移值。 如果偏移值超过标准值, 则按照下列步骤进行调整。 < 标准值 > 对于副扫描方向, 线 (2) 的上下偏移值 : ±1.5% 以内 对于主扫描方向, 线 (3) 的左右偏移值 : ±1.5% 以内 [ 등배도확인 ] 1. 원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 복사샘플의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . <기준치> 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이 : ±1.5% 이내 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이 : ±1.5% 이내 [ 等倍度確認 ] 1. 原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 ずれが基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整を行う。 <基準値> 副走査方向の場合、 線 (2) の上下ずれ : ±1.5% 以内 主走査方向の場合、 線 (3) の左右ずれ : ±1.5% 以内

2. 使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。 Main Scan : 读取主扫描等倍度的调整 Sub Scan : 读取副扫描等倍度的调整 Sub Scan(CIS) : CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-771)

2. 메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 . Main Scan : 스캔 주사등배도의 조정 Sub Scan : 스캔 부주사등배도의 조정 Sub Scan(CIS) : CIS 의 스캔 부주사등배도의 조정 (DP-771)

2. メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、 調整を行う。 Main Scan : 読み取り主走査等倍度の調整 Sub Scan : 読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 Sub Scan(CIS) : CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 (DP-771)

26

X X' 3 X 1 X' 2 X' X 2

X' X 3

a

h

i -1.5% X X X' 100

j +1.5%

k

3. Adjust the values. For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. Amount of change per step: 0.10 % 4. Perform a test copy.

5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy example shows the reference value. <Reference value> For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5% For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%

3. Régler les valeurs. Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : augmenter la valeur. Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : diminuer la valeur. Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0.10 % 4. Effectuer une copie de test. 3. Ajuste los valores. Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0.10 % 4. Haga una copia de prueba.

5. Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence. <Valeur de référence> Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5% Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5% 5. Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia. <Valor de referencia> Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5% Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5% 5. Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist. <Bezugswert> Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5% Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5% 5. Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento. <Valore di riferimento> Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% 5. 重复上述步骤 2 到 4, 直至复印样本上的线 (2) 、 (3) 之间的偏移值达 到标准值范围内。 < 标准值 > 对于副扫描方向, 线 (2) 的上下偏移值 : ±1.5% 以内 对于主扫描方向, 线 (3) 的左右偏移值 : ±1.5% 以内

3. Die Werte einstellen. Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. Änderung pro Schritt: 0.10 % 4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.

3. Regolare i valori. Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. Entità modifica per passo: 0,10 % 4. Eseguire una copia di prova

3. 调整设定值。 在长度偏短时 复印样本 (h) (j) : 调高设定值 在长度偏长时 复印样本 (i) (k) : 调低设定值 设定值的一个调整单位变化量 : 0.10% 4. 进行测试复印。

3. 설정치를 조정합니다 . 길이가 짧은 경우 복사샘플 (h)(j) : 설정치를 높입니다 . 길이가 긴 경우 복사샘플 (i)(k) : 설정치를 내립니다 . 1 스텝당 변화량 : 0.10% 4. 시험복사를 합니다 .

5. 복사샘플 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ~ 4 를 반복합니 다. <기준치> 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이 : ±1.5% 이내 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이 : ±1.5% 이내

3. 設定値を調整する。 長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j) : 設定値を上げる 長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k) : 設定値を下げ